User Manual

GFK-2958M
Nov 2022

PACSystemsTM RSTi-EP
Systems User Manual
User Manual Contents
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Contents
Section 1: Introduction .......................................................... 1
1.1 Revisions in this Manual ....................................................................................... 2
1.2 PACSystems Documentation ............................................................................... 4
1.2.1 PACSystems Manuals ................................................................................. 4

1.2.2 RSTi-EP Manuals ......................................................................................... 4

1.2.3 RX3i Manuals ............................................................................................... 4

1.3 System Overview ................................................................................................... 5

1.3.1 Dimensions of the RSTi-EP Components ................................................ 6

1.3.2 Double-click Installation ............................................................................ 6

1.4 General Description of the Fieldbus Network Adapters ................................. 7

1.5 General Technical Data for the Fieldbus Network Adapter ............................ 8
1.6 General Description of I/O Modules ................................................................10
1.6.1 I/O module (Example EP-1214) ...............................................................10

1.6.2 Standard Connector .................................................................................13

1.6.3 HD Connector EP-8360 ............................................................................14

1.6.4 Cable Protection .......................................................................................15

1.7 General Technical Data for I/O Modules .........................................................16

1.8 Mechanical Fixing Elements ..............................................................................18
1.9 Type Plate .............................................................................................................19
1.10 Markers .................................................................................................................19
1.10.1Swivel Marker ............................................................................................19

Section 2: Safety ................................................................... 21

2.1 General Safety Notice .........................................................................................21
2.1.1 Electrostatic Discharge ............................................................................22

2.1.2 Open Equipment ......................................................................................22

2.1.3 Fusing .........................................................................................................22

2.1.4 Earthing (functional earth FE) .................................................................23

2.1.5 Shielding ....................................................................................................23

2.1.6 Overcurrent ...............................................................................................23

2.2 Intended Use .......................................................................................................24

Contents i
User Manual Contents
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

2.3 Use in a Potentially Explosive Atmosphere .....................................................24

2.3.1 ATEX Zone 2 ...............................................................................................26

2.3.2 ATEX & IECEx Marking .............................................................................26

2.4 Legal Notice .........................................................................................................26

2.5 Use of RSTi-EP Stations 2,000m above Sea Level ...........................................26

Section 3: Configuration ...................................................... 28

3.1 Order and Arrangement of Modules ...............................................................28
3.1.1 Arrangement of Safe Power-Feed Modules .........................................29

3.1.2 Power Supply Concept .............................................................................30

3.2 Clearances ............................................................................................................32

3.2.1 Calculation of Space Requirements .......................................................34

3.3 Use in a Potentially Explosive Atmosphere .....................................................35

3.3.1 ATEX & IECEx Marking .............................................................................36

3.4 Spring-Style System Cabling ..............................................................................36

3.5 Current Demand and Power Supply ................................................................36
3.5.1 Power Supply Derating ............................................................................37

3.6 Example Calculation for the Power Supply .....................................................39

Calculation of the Current Demand for the Input Current ...........................39

Calculation of the Current Demand for the Output Current ........................40

3.7 Example Calculation for the Current Demand (all Current Values in Amps)42
3.7.1 Calculation of Power Loss .........................................................................43

3.7.2 Calculation of Power Loss for Use in a Potentially Explosive Atmosphere ..43

3.8 Feedback Energy in DO Modules ......................................................................44

3.8.1 Calculation of Feedback Energy ..............................................................44

3.9 Parameter Overview ...........................................................................................45

3.9.1 Modifiable Parameters for Network Adaptors .....................................45

3.10 Data Width of I/O Module, Dependent on the Network Adapter Used ......62
3.10.1EPXPBS001 .................................................................................................62

3.10.2EPXPNS001/EPXPNS101 ...........................................................................64

3.10.3EPXETC001 .................................................................................................67

3.10.4EPXEIP001 ..................................................................................................69

Contents ii
User Manual Contents
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Section 4: Detailed Descriptions of the Fieldbus Network

Adapters 72
4.1 Profibus DP Network Adapter EPXPBS001 ......................................................72
4.1.1 LEDs ............................................................................................................73

4.1.2 Addressing .................................................................................................74

4.1.3 Connection Diagrams ..............................................................................76

4.1.4 Specifications: EPXPBS001 ......................................................................78

4.1.5 Modifiable Parameters EPXPBS001 .......................................................79

4.1.6 Supported Modules and Power Supplies ..............................................80

4.2 PROFINET IRT/RT Network Adapter EPXPNS001/EPXPNS101 ......................82

4.2.1 LEDs ............................................................................................................83

4.2.2 Connection Diagrams ..............................................................................85

4.2.3 Specification: EPXPNS001/EPXPNS101 ..................................................86

4.2.4 Modifiable Parameters: EPXPNS001/EPXPNS101 ................................89

4.2.5 Network Adaptor Input Status Data ......................................................90

4.2.6 Hot Standby CPU Redundancy I/O Parameters (EPXPNS101) ...........91

4.2.7 RSTi-EP PROFINET Channel Diagnostic Alarm Reporting ...................92

4.2.8 Supported Modules and Power Supplies ........................................... 103

4.3 EtherCAT® Network Adapter EPXETC001 ...................................................... 105

4.3.1 LEDs ......................................................................................................... 106

4.3.2 Connection Diagrams ........................................................................... 108

4.3.3 Specifications: EPXETC001 .................................................................... 110

4.3.4 Modifiable Parameters for EPXETC001 .............................................. 111

4.3.5 RSTi-EP Status Messages ...................................................................... 112

4.3.6 Module Status Messages...................................................................... 113

4.3.7 Module Diagnosis .................................................................................. 113

4.3.8 Supported Modules and Power Supplies ........................................... 114

4.4 Modbus®TCP Network Adapter EPXMBE001/EPXMBE101 ......................... 116

4.4.1 LEDs ......................................................................................................... 117

4.4.2 Connection Diagrams ........................................................................... 119

4.4.3 Specifications: EPXMBE001/EPXMBE101 ............................................ 120

4.4.4 Configuration of the IP Address .......................................................... 121

Contents iii
User Manual Contents
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

4.4.5 Modifiable Parameters for EPXMBE001/EPXMBE101 ...................... 121

4.4.6 Supported Modules and Power Supplies ........................................... 127

4.4.7 Packed Process Data ............................................................................. 129

4.4.8 0x1000 – 0x1006 Network Adapter Identifier ................................... 131

4.4.9 0x1000 – 0x1006 Network Adapter Status ......................................... 131

4.4.100x1010 Process Image Length in Bits for the Output Modules ..... 132

4.4.110x1010 Process Image Length in Bits for the Input Modules ........ 132

4.4.120x1017 Register – Mapping Revision .................................................. 132

4.4.130x1018 – 0x101B Collective Diagnostics Message for I/O Modules132

4.4.140x101C – 0x101F Collective Process Message for I/O Modules ...... 132

4.4.150x1028 – 0x102F Module Status .......................................................... 133

4.4.160x1030 MODBUS DATA EXCHANGE Watchdog, Current Time ....... 133

4.4.170x1120 MODBUS DATA EXCHANGE watchdog, predefined time ... 133

4.4.180x1121 MODBUS DATA EXCHANGE Watchdog Reset Register ...... 133

4.4.190x1122 Lock Force Mode on Web Server ........................................... 134

4.4.200x1031 MODBUS CONNECTION Mode Register ............................... 134

4.4.210x1131 MODBUS CONNECTION Timeout in Sec............................... 134

4.4.220x1132 Check Reference List prior to Data Exchange ..................... 135

4.4.230x1133 Process Alarm........................................................................... 135

4.4.240x1134 Diagnostic Alarm ..................................................................... 135

4.4.250x1135 Field Bus or Reference List Error Behavior .......................... 135

4.4.260x1136 Module Removal Behavior ..................................................... 136

4.4.270x1137 Data Format .............................................................................. 136

4.4.280x113C – 0x113F Save Module Parameters ....................................... 136

4.4.290x27FE Number of Entries in the Current Module List .................... 137

4.4.300x27FF Number of Entries in the Reference Module List ................ 137

4.4.310x2800 – 0x287F Reference Module List ............................................ 137

4.4.320x2A00 – 0x2A7F Current Module List................................................ 137

4.4.330x2B00 – 0x2B7F Module Offsets of Process Data ........................... 137

4.4.340x8000 – 0x87FF Process Data Inputs ................................................ 138

4.4.350x9000 – 0x97FF Process Data Outputs ............................................. 138

4.4.360xA000 – 0xA7FF Diagnostics .............................................................. 138

Contents iv
User Manual Contents
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

4.4.370xB000 – 0xB7FF Process Alarms ........................................................ 138

4.4.380xC000 –0xFFFF Parameters ................................................................ 138

4.5 EtherNet/IP™ Network Adapter EPXEIP001 .................................................. 140

4.5.1 LEDs ......................................................................................................... 141

4.5.2 Connection Diagrams ........................................................................... 143

4.5.3 Specifications: EPXEIP001 ..................................................................... 144

4.5.4 Modifiable Parameters for EPXEIP001 ............................................... 145

4.5.5 Data types EPXEIP001 ........................................................................... 148

4.5.6 Process data ........................................................................................... 150

4.5.7 Status word EPXEIP001(Packed process data input) ........................ 153

4.5.8 Object descriptions EPXEIP001: CIP Common Classes .................... 154

=................................................................ Error! Bookmark not defined.

4.5.9 Object descriptions EPXEIP001: Vendor Specific Classes ................ 160

4.5.10Supported Modules and Power Supplies ........................................... 165

Section 5: Detailed Description of I/O Modules ............. 167

5.1 Digital Input Module EP-1214 ........................................................................ 167
5.1.1 LED Indicators EP-1214 ......................................................................... 168

5.1.2 Specifications EP-1214 .......................................................................... 169

5.1.3 Modifiable Parameters for EP-1214 .................................................... 169

5.1.4 Diagnostic Data EP-1214 ...................................................................... 170

5.1.5 Process Data Inputs EP-1214 ............................................................... 171

5.2 Digital Input Module EP-1218 ........................................................................ 171

5.2.1 LED Indicators EP-1218 ......................................................................... 172

5.2.2 Specifications EP-1218 .......................................................................... 173

5.2.3 Modifiable Parameters for EP-1218 .................................................... 173

5.2.4 Diagnostic Data EP-1218 ...................................................................... 174

5.2.5 Process Data Inputs EP-1218 ............................................................... 175

5.3 Digital Input Module EP-1318 ........................................................................ 175

5.3.1 LED Indicators EP-1318 ......................................................................... 176

5.3.2 Specifications EP-1318 .......................................................................... 177

5.3.3 Modifiable Parameters for EP-1318 .................................................... 177

5.3.4 Diagnostic Data EP-1318 ...................................................................... 178

Contents v
User Manual Contents
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.3.5 Process Data Inputs EP-1318 ............................................................... 179

5.4 Digital Input Module EP-1804 ........................................................................ 179

5.4.1 LED Indicators EP-1804 ......................................................................... 181

5.4.2 Specifications EP-1804 .......................................................................... 181

5.4.3 Diagnostic Data EP-1804 ...................................................................... 183

5.4.4 Process Data Inputs EP-1804 ............................................................... 184

5.5 Digital Input Module EP-125F ......................................................................... 184

5.5.1 LED Indicators EP-125F ......................................................................... 185

5.5.2 Specifications EP-125F .......................................................................... 186

5.5.3 Diagnostic Data EP-125F ...................................................................... 186

5.5.4 Process Data Inputs EP-125F ............................................................... 187

5.6 Digital Input Module EP-12F4 ......................................................................... 188

5.6.1 LED Indicators EP-12F4 ......................................................................... 189

5.6.2 Specifications EP-12F4 .......................................................................... 190

5.6.3 Modifiable Parameters for EP-12F4 .................................................... 191

5.6.4 Diagnostic Data EP-12F4 ...................................................................... 191

5.6.5 Process† Data Inputs EP-12F4 ............................................................. 192

5.6.6 Time Stamp Function ............................................................................ 192

5.6.7 Structure of an ETS Entry...................................................................... 193

5.7 Digital Input Module EP-153F ......................................................................... 196

5.7.1 LED Indicators EP-153F ......................................................................... 197

5.7.2 Specifications EP-153F .......................................................................... 198

5.7.3 Diagnostic Data EP-153F ...................................................................... 198

5.7.4 Process Data Inputs EP-153F ............................................................... 199

5.8 Digital Output Module EP-2214 ..................................................................... 200

5.8.1 LED Indicators EP-2214 ......................................................................... 201

5.8.2 Specifications EP-2214 .......................................................................... 202

5.8.3 Modifiable Parameters for EP-2214 .................................................... 203

5.8.4 Diagnostic Data EP-2214 ...................................................................... 203

5.8.5 Process Data Outputs EP-2214 ............................................................ 204

5.9 Digital Output Module EP-2614 ..................................................................... 204

5.9.1 LED Indicators EP-2614 ......................................................................... 205

5.9.2 Specifications EP-2614 .......................................................................... 206

Contents vi
User Manual Contents
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.9.3 Modifiable Parameters for EP-2614 .................................................... 207

5.9.4 Diagnostic Data EP-2614 ...................................................................... 207

5.9.5 Process Data Outputs EP-2614 ............................................................ 208

5.10 Digital Output Module EP-2634 ..................................................................... 208

5.10.1LED Indicators EP-2634 ......................................................................... 209

5.10.2Specifications EP-2634 .......................................................................... 210

5.10.3Modifiable Parameters for EP-2634 .................................................... 211

5.10.4Diagnostic Data EP-2634 ...................................................................... 211

5.10.5Process Data Outputs EP-2634 ............................................................ 212

5.11 Digital Output Module EP-2218 ..................................................................... 213

5.11.1LED Indicators EP-2218 ......................................................................... 214

5.11.2Specifications EP-2218 .......................................................................... 215

5.11.3Modifiable Parameters for EP-2218 .................................................... 216

5.11.4Diagnostic Data EP-2218 ...................................................................... 216

5.11.5Process Data Outputs EP-2218 ............................................................ 217

5.12 Digital Output Module EP-225F...................................................................... 217

5.12.1LED Indicators EP-225F ......................................................................... 218

5.12.2Specifications: EP-225F ......................................................................... 219

5.12.3Diagnostic Data EP-225F ...................................................................... 220

5.12.4Process† Data Outputs EP-225F .......................................................... 221

5.13 Digital Output Module EP-2814 ..................................................................... 222

5.13.1LED Indicators EP-2814 ......................................................................... 223

5.13.2Specifications EP-2814 .......................................................................... 224

5.13.3Modifiable Parameters for EP-2814 .................................................... 224

5.13.4Diagnostic Data EP-2814 ...................................................................... 225

5.13.5Process Data Outputs EP-2814 ............................................................ 225

5.14 Digital Output Module EP-2714 ..................................................................... 226

5.14.1LED Indicators EP-2714 ......................................................................... 227

5.14.2Specifications EP-2714 .......................................................................... 228

5.14.3Modifiable Parameters for EP-2714 .................................................... 229

5.14.4Diagnostic Data EP-2714 ...................................................................... 229

5.14.5Process Data Outputs EP-2714 ............................................................ 230

5.15 Digital Output Module EP-291F...................................................................... 230

Contents vii
User Manual Contents
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.15.1LED Indicators EP-291F ......................................................................... 231

5.15.2Specifications: EP-291F ......................................................................... 232

5.15.3Diagnostic Data EP-291F ...................................................................... 233

5.15.4Process† Data Outputs EP-291F ........................................................... 234

5.16 Digital Output Module EP-5111 ..................................................................... 235

5.16.1LED Indicators EP-5111 ......................................................................... 236

5.16.2Specifications EP-5111 .......................................................................... 237

5.16.3Modifiable Parameters for EP-5111 .................................................... 238

5.16.4Diagnostic Data EP-5111 ...................................................................... 240

5.16.5Process Data† Inputs EP-5111 ............................................................. 241

5.16.6Process Data† Outputs EP-5111 .......................................................... 243

5.16.7Process Alarm Data EP-5111 ................................................................ 244

5.16.8Setting Up the Counter ......................................................................... 244

5.16.9Counter Functions ................................................................................. 245

5.16.10 Additional Counter Features ......................................................... 252

5.17 Digital Counter Module EP-5112 .................................................................... 258

5.17.1LED indicators EP-5112 ......................................................................... 259

5.17.2Specifications EP-5112 .......................................................................... 260

5.17.3Modifiable Parameters for EP-5112 .................................................... 261

5.17.4Diagnostic Data EP-5112 ...................................................................... 262

5.17.5Process Data† Inputs EP-5112 ............................................................. 263

5.17.6Process Data† Outputs EP-5112 .......................................................... 265

5.17.7Process Alarms for EP 5112 ................................................................. 266

5.17.8Setting Up the Counter ......................................................................... 266

5.17.9Counter Functions ................................................................................. 267

5.17.10 Additional Counter Features ......................................................... 274

5.18 Digital Frequency Counter Module EP-5212 ................................................ 279

5.18.1LED Indicators EP-5212 ......................................................................... 280

5.18.2Specifications EP-5212 .......................................................................... 281

5.18.3Modifiable Parameters for EP-5212 .................................................... 282

5.18.4Diagnostic Data EP-5212 ...................................................................... 283

5.18.5Process Data† Inputs EP-5212 ............................................................. 284

5.18.6Process Data† Outputs EP-5212 .......................................................... 285

Contents viii
User Manual Contents
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.18.7Function Frequency Counting ............................................................. 285

5.19 Serial Communication Module EP-5261 ....................................................... 288

5.19.1LED Indicators EP-5261 ......................................................................... 291

5.19.2Specifications EP-5261 .......................................................................... 292

5.19.3Modifiable Parameters for EP-5261 .................................................... 293

5.19.4Diagnostic Data EP-5261 ...................................................................... 293

5.19.5Data Transfer ......................................................................................... 294

5.20 SSI Encoder Interface Module EP-5311......................................................... 300

5.20.1LED Indicators EP-5311 ......................................................................... 301

5.20.2Specifications EP-5311 .......................................................................... 302

5.20.3Modifiable Parameters for EP-5311 .................................................... 303

5.20.4Diagnostic Data EP-5311 ...................................................................... 304

5.20.5Process Data Inputs EP-5311 ............................................................... 305

5.21 Digital Pulse Width Modulation Output Module EP-5422 .......................... 305
5.21.1LED Indicators EP-5422 ......................................................................... 306

5.21.2Specifications EP-5422 .......................................................................... 307

5.21.3Modifiable Parameters for EP-5422 .................................................... 308

5.21.4Diagnostic Data EP-5422 ...................................................................... 308

5.21.5Process† Data Inputs EP-5422 ............................................................. 309

5.21.6Process Data† Outputs EP-5422 .......................................................... 309

5.22 Digital Pulse Width Modulation Output Module EP-5442 .......................... 310
5.22.1LED Indicators EP-5442 ......................................................................... 312

5.22.2Specifications EP-5442 .......................................................................... 313

5.22.3Modifiable Parameters for EP-5442 .................................................... 314

5.22.4Diagnostic Data EP-5442 ...................................................................... 314

5.22.5Process† Data Inputs EP-5442 ............................................................. 315

5.22.6Process Data† Outputs EP-5442 .......................................................... 315

5.23 IO-Link Communication module EP-5324 .................................................... 316

5.23.1IO-Link overview .................................................................................... 317

5.23.2LED Indicators EP-5324 ......................................................................... 322

5.23.3Specifications EP-5324 .......................................................................... 323

5.23.4Modifiable Parameters for EP-5324 .................................................... 324

5.23.5Diagnostic Data EP-5324 ...................................................................... 328

Contents ix
User Manual Contents
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.23.6Process Data Inputs EP-5324 ............................................................... 330

5.23.7Process Data Outputs EP-5324 ............................................................ 331

5.23.8Network Adapters-Dependent Process data widths ........................ 332

5.23.9IO-Link Communication module EP-5324 event codes ................... 334

5.24 Analog Input Module EP-3164........................................................................ 335

5.24.1LED Indicators EP-3164 ......................................................................... 336

5.24.2Specifications EP-3164 .......................................................................... 337

5.24.3Modifiable Parameters for EP-3164 .................................................... 338

5.24.4Diagnostic Data EP-3164 ...................................................................... 338

5.24.5Process Data† Inputs EP-3164 ............................................................. 339

5.24.6Measurement Range EP-3164 ............................................................. 339

5.25 Analog Input Module EP-3264........................................................................ 341

5.25.1LED Indicators EP-3264 ......................................................................... 342

5.25.2Specifications EP-3264 .......................................................................... 343

5.25.3Modifiable Parameters for EP-3164 .................................................... 344

5.25.4Diagnostic Data EP-3264 ...................................................................... 344

5.25.5Diagnostic Data EP-3264 ...................................................................... 345

5.25.6Process Data† Inputs EP-3264 ............................................................. 346

5.25.7Measurement Range EP-3264 ............................................................. 346

5.26 Analog Input Module EP-3664........................................................................ 348

5.26.1LED Indicators EP-3664 ......................................................................... 349

5.26.2Specifications: EP-3664 ......................................................................... 350

5.26.3Modifiable Parameters EP-3664 .......................................................... 351

5.26.4Diagnostic Data EP-3664 ...................................................................... 351

5.26.5Process Data† Inputs EP-3664 ............................................................. 353

5.26.6Measurement Range EP-3664 ............................................................. 353

5.27 Analog Input Module EP-3124........................................................................ 355

5.27.1LED Indicators EP-3124 ......................................................................... 356

5.27.2Specifications EP-3124 .......................................................................... 357

5.27.3Modifiable Parameters for EP-3124 .................................................... 358

5.27.4Diagnostic Data EP-3124 ...................................................................... 358

5.27.5Process Data† Inputs EP-3124 ............................................................. 359

5.27.6Measurement Range EP-3124 ............................................................. 359

Contents x
User Manual Contents
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.27.7Measurement Range EP-3124 ............................................................. 360

5.28 Analog Input Module EP-3368........................................................................ 361

5.28.1LED Indicators EP-3368 ......................................................................... 362

5.28.2Specifications EP-3368 .......................................................................... 363

5.28.3Modifiable Parameters for EP-3368 .................................................... 364

5.28.4Diagnostic Data EP-3368 ...................................................................... 364

5.28.5Process Data† Inputs EP-3368 ............................................................. 365

5.28.6Measurement Range EP-3368 ............................................................. 366

5.29 Analog Input Module EP-3468........................................................................ 366

5.29.1LED Indicators EP-3468 .......................................................................... 367

5.29.2Specifications EP-3468 ............................................................................. 368

5.29.3Modifiable Parameters for EP-3468 .................................................... 369

5.29.4Process Data† Inputs EP-3468 .............................................................. 369

5.29.5Diagnostic Data EP-3468 ...................................................................... 370

5.29.6Measurement Range EP-3468 ............................................................. 371

5.30 Analog Output Module EP-4164 .................................................................... 372

5.30.1LED Indicators EP-4164 ......................................................................... 373

5.30.2Specifications EP-4164 .......................................................................... 374

5.30.3Modifiable Parameters for EP-4164 .................................................... 375

5.30.4Diagnostic Data EP-4164 ...................................................................... 375

5.30.5Process Data† Outputs EP-4164 ........................................................... 376

5.30.6Value Range† EP-4164 ........................................................................... 376

5.31 Analog Output Module EP-4264 .................................................................... 378

5.31.1LED Indicators EP-4264 ......................................................................... 379

5.31.2Specifications EP-4264 .......................................................................... 380

5.31.3Modifiable Parameters for EP-4264 .................................................... 381

5.31.4Diagnostic Data EP-4264 ...................................................................... 381

5.31.5Process Data† Outputs EP-4264 ........................................................... 383

5.31.6Value Range† EP-4264 .......................................................................... 383

5.32 Analog Input Module EP-3704........................................................................ 385

5.32.1LED Indicators EP-3704 ......................................................................... 386

5.32.2Specifications EP-3704 .......................................................................... 387

5.32.3Modifiable Parameters for EP-3704 .................................................... 388

Contents xi
User Manual Contents
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.32.4Diagnostic Data EP-3704 ...................................................................... 389

5.32.5Process Data† Inputs EP-3704 .............................................................. 390

5.32.6Resistance Measurement Range EP-3704 ......................................... 391

5.32.7Temperature Measurement Ranges EP-3704 ................................... 392

5.32.8Process Alarm EP-3704 ......................................................................... 393

5.33 Analog Input Module EP-3804........................................................................ 394

5.33.1LED Indicators EP-3804 ......................................................................... 395

5.33.2Specifications EP-3804 .......................................................................... 396

5.33.3Modifiable Parameters for EP-3804 .................................................... 397

5.33.4Diagnostic Data EP-3804 ...................................................................... 398

5.33.5Process Data† Inputs EP-3804 .............................................................. 400

5.33.6Voltage Measurement Ranges EP-3804 ............................................. 400

5.33.7Temperature Measurement Ranges EP-3804 ................................... 401

5.33.8Process Alarm EP-3804 ......................................................................... 402

5.34 Power Measurement Module EP-1813 ......................................................... 403

5.34.1LED Indicators EP-1813 ......................................................................... 409

5.34.2Specifications EP-1813 .......................................................................... 410

5.34.3Modifiable Parameters for EP-1813 .................................................... 411

5.34.4Diagnostic Data EP-1813 ...................................................................... 415

5.34.5Process Data† Inputs EP-1813 .............................................................. 417

5.34.6Process Data† Outputs EP-1813 ........................................................... 417

5.34.7Process alarm† EP-1813 ........................................................................ 418

5.34.8Conversion of the adjustable measuring values EP-1813 ............... 418

5.34.9Raw parameter data for acyclic services (not relevant with MODBUS
application) ............................................................................................. 422

5.35 Power-feed Module for Input Current Path EP-7631 .................................. 424
5.35.1LED Indicators EP-7631 ......................................................................... 425

5.35.2Specifications EP-7631 .......................................................................... 426

5.36 Power-feed Module for Output Current Path EP-7641 ............................... 426
5.36.1LED Indicators EP-7641 ......................................................................... 427

5.36.2Specifications EP-7641 .......................................................................... 428

5.37 Safe Feed-in Modules EP-1901, EP-1902, and EP-1922 ............................... 429
5.38 Potential Distribution Module for Input Current Path EP-711F ................ 431

Contents xii
User Manual Contents
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.38.1Specifications EP-711F .......................................................................... 432

5.39 Potential Distribution Module for Output Current Path EP-751F ............. 432
5.39.1Specifications EP-751F .......................................................................... 433

5.40 Potential Distribution Module for Functional Earth EP-700F ..................... 434
5.40.1Specifications EP-700F .......................................................................... 435

5.41 0-V Potential Distribution Module for Input Current Path EP-710F .......... 436
5.41.1Specifications EP-710F .......................................................................... 437

5.42 0-V Potential Distribution Module for Output Current Path EP-750F ....... 438
5.42.1Specifications EP-750F .......................................................................... 439

5.43 Empty Slot Module EP-8310 ............................................................................ 440

5.43.1Specifications EP-8310 .......................................................................... 440

5.44 Termination Kit EP-8301 .................................................................................. 441

5.44.1Specifications EP-8301 .......................................................................... 441

Section 6: RSTi-EP Backplane Controllers ........................ 442

6.1 CPE200 Series Process Alarm and Diagnostic Data Configuration and Operation
............................................................................................................................ 442
6.1.1 Configuring Automatic Update Operation ........................................ 442

6.1.2 Controlled Process Alarm and Diagnostic Data Acknowledgment 443

6.2 CPE200 Series Expansion Bus Status bits ..................................................... 445

6.3 CPE200 Series Local Backplane Operations ................................................. 446
6.3.1 CPE200 Series Backplane Module Hot-Swap Not Supported ......... 446

6.3.2 CPE200 Series "System Bus Error" Fault Log ..................................... 446

6.3.3 CPE200 Series Local RSTi-EP I/O Module Addressing ...................... 447

6.4 CPE200 Series Backplane Power Calculation using PME’s Hardware Configuration
............................................................................................................................ 449
6.4.1 Examples of EP modules with configurable power loads: .............. 450

6.4.2 Example of Adding Power Feed Module to Resolve Power Warning452

Section 7: RSTi-EP Station Installation ............................. 453

7.1 Preparations for Assembly ............................................................................. 453
7.1.1 Environmental Conditions .................................................................... 453

7.1.2 DIN Rail ................................................................................................... 453

7.1.3 Stripping Lengths .................................................................................. 455

7.1.4 Unpacking and Delivery ....................................................................... 455

Contents xiii
User Manual Contents
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

7.1.5 Use in a Potentially Explosive Atmosphere ....................................... 455

7.1.6 Installation Orientation ........................................................................ 456

7.1.7 Clearances .............................................................................................. 457

7.1.8 Calculation of Space Requirements .................................................... 458

7.1.9 Installation Sequence ........................................................................... 459

7.1.10Arrangement of SIL Modules ............................................................... 459

7.1.11Preparation and the Required Tool .................................................... 460

7.2 Assembling the RSTi-EP Station ..................................................................... 460

7.3 Attaching the Marker ....................................................................................... 466
7.3.1 Attaching the Swivel Marker ................................................................ 466

7.4 Wiring ................................................................................................................. 466

7.4.1 Wiring of Modules with Standard Connectors .................................. 467

7.4.2 Wiring of Modules with HD Connectors EP-8360 ............................. 467

7.5 Insulation Test .................................................................................................. 470

Section 8: RSTi-EP CPE200 Series Controllers Installation471

8.1 DIN Rail Installation ......................................................................................... 471
8.2 Thermal Requirements ................................................................................... 476
8.3 Controller Start-up ........................................................................................... 477
8.3.1 Required Components .......................................................................... 477

8.3.2 Basic Installation Steps ......................................................................... 478

8.3.3 LED Behavior During Startup ............................................................... 478

8.3.4 Installation in Hazardous Areas .......................................................... 478

Section 9: Earthing and Shielding .................................... 479

9.1 Earthing of Shielded Cables ............................................................................ 480
9.1.1 Shielded Cables Increase Interference Resistance .......................... 481

9.1.2 Proper Use of Shielded Cables ............................................................ 481

9.1.3 Effective Shielding ................................................................................. 482

9.2 Potential Ratios ................................................................................................. 485

9.2.1 Basic Aspects .......................................................................................... 485

9.2.2 Potential-Free Design ........................................................................... 485

9.2.3 Non-Isolated Design ............................................................................. 486

9.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) ............................................................ 486

Contents xiv
User Manual Contents
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

9.3.1 Ensuring EMC ......................................................................................... 486

9.3.2 Earthing of Inactive Metal Parts .......................................................... 487

9.3.3 PE Connection ........................................................................................ 487

9.3.4 Unearthed Operation............................................................................ 487

9.3.5 DIN Rails.................................................................................................. 488

9.3.6 Cabinet Design According to EMC Guidelines .................................. 489

9.4 Shielding of Cables ........................................................................................... 490

9.4.1 Equipotential Bonding .......................................................................... 491

9.4.2 Inductance Wiring ................................................................................. 492

Section 10: Commissioning ................................................. 493

10.1 Requirements ................................................................................................... 493
10.2 Configuring EPXPNS001/EPXPNS101 ............................................................ 494
10.2.1Configuring EPXPNS001/EPXPNS101 Parameters ............................ 495

10.2.2Adding EPXPNS001/ EPXPNS101 Modules to a Remote Node ....... 501

10.2.3Configuring EPXPNS001/EPXPNS101 Module Parameters ............. 502

10.3 Configuring EPXPBS001 .................................................................................. 503

10.3.1Adding Slaves and Modules ................................................................. 503

10.3.2Configuring Module Data Areas .......................................................... 506

10.3.3507

10.3.4Configuring DP-V1 Settings for a Slave .............................................. 508

10.4 Configuring EPXETC001................................................................................... 511

10.5 Configuring EPXMBE001/EPXMBE101 ........................................................... 514
10.6 Configuring EPXEIP001 ................................................................................... 515
10.7 Configuring EP-5324 ........................................................................................ 516
10.8 Configuring CPE200 Series ............................................................................ 521
10.8.1Add the CPE200 Series ......................................................................... 521

10.8.2Replace the EPXCPE200 ........................................................................ 522

10.8.3Delete the EPXCPE200 .......................................................................... 522

10.8.4Configure the Parameters for EPXCPE200 ........................................ 523

Section 11: Web Server ........................................................ 525

11.1 Requirements ................................................................................................... 526
11.1.1Operating System .................................................................................. 526

Contents xv
User Manual Contents
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

11.1.2Browser ................................................................................................... 526

11.1.3Device Drivers ........................................................................................ 526

11.2 Starting the Web Server .................................................................................. 528

11.2.1Activating the Ethernet Socket ............................................................ 528

11.3 Setting up Registration Data and Password Protection ............................. 530

11.4 Navigation and Operating Instructions ........................................................ 533
11.4.1Setting the Language ............................................................................ 533

11.4.2Zooming the View In/Out ..................................................................... 533

11.4.3Quick View (Tooltip) of Detailed Values .............................................. 534

11.5 Displaying and Editing the Network Adapter Status .................................. 535
11.5.1Resetting the Web Server ..................................................................... 536

11.5.2Resetting the Network Adapter to Factory Settings ........................ 536

11.5.3Accessing Network Adapter Parameters ........................................... 537

11.6 Displaying Module Data and Editing Parameters ....................................... 538

11.7 Displaying Node Information ......................................................................... 539
11.7.1Displaying Process Data ....................................................................... 539

11.7.2Displaying Diagnostic Data .................................................................. 540

11.7.3Web Server in Force Mode ................................................................... 540

11.7.4Open the Detail View of the Station in Force Mode ......................... 542

11.7.5Filtering the Module View .................................................................... 543

11.7.6Resetting Filters ..................................................................................... 543

11.7.7Manually Switching Outputs (Forcing) ............................................... 544

11.7.8Modules with Registers ........................................................................ 545

11.7.9Ending/Deactivating Forced Operations ............................................ 545

11.8 Updating Firmware .......................................................................................... 546

11.8.1Recovery Mechanism for RSTi-EP Network adapter: ....................... 548

11.9 Web Server About Help ................................................................................... 549

11.9.1Exporting Log Data, Saving a Service File .......................................... 549

Section 12: Replacing Components .................................... 550

12.1 Removing/Replacing the Plug-in Unit ........................................................... 550
12.2 Replacing the Electronic Unit ......................................................................... 551
12.3 Replacing an I/O Module ................................................................................ 556
12.4 Removing/Replacing Connectors .................................................................. 559
Contents xvi
User Manual Contents
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

12.5 Removing/Replacing Cables ........................................................................... 561

Section 13: Disassembly and Disposal ............................... 563

13.1 Disassembling the RSTi-EP Station ................................................................ 563
13.2 Disposing of the RSTi-EP Station .................................................................... 564

Section 14: LED Indicators and Troubleshooting ............. 565

14.1 Fieldbus Network Adapters ............................................................................ 565
14.1.1EPXPBS001 .............................................................................................. 565

14.1.2EPXPNS001/EPXPNS101 ........................................................................ 566

14.1.3EPXETC001 .............................................................................................. 567

14.1.4EPXMBE001/EPXMBE101 ...................................................................... 569

14.1.5EPXEIP001 ............................................................................................... 570

14.2 I/O Modules ...................................................................................................... 573

Section 15: IO-Link Device Configuration ......................... 582

15.1 RSTi-EP IO-Link configurator .......................................................................... 582
15.2 Installing RSTi-EP IO-Link configurator ......................................................... 583
15.3 Operating the RSTi-EP IO-Link configurator ................................................ 583
15.3.1Displaying the starting page................................................................ 583

15.3.2IO-Link port overview ........................................................................... 585

15.3.3IO-Link device detailed view ................................................................ 586

15.3.4Displaying the context menu ............................................................... 587

15.3.5Creating a new project ......................................................................... 587

15.3.6Saving a project ..................................................................................... 587

15.3.7Opening a project .................................................................................. 587

15.3.8Changing the language ........................................................................ 588

15.3.9Opening the IODDfinder in the standard browser .......................... 588

15.4 Editing IO-Link device configurations ........................................................... 589

15.4.1Assigning the IO-Link device to an IO-Link port ............................... 589

15.4.2Changing the device type ..................................................................... 589

15.4.3Removing the IO-Link device assignment ......................................... 590

15.4.4Editing the IO-Link device parameters ............................................... 590

15.4.5Determining the process data length ................................................ 591

Contents xvii
User Manual Contents
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

15.4.6Finding & rectifying parameter errors ............................................... 591

15.5 Editing IO-Link device configurations online ............................................... 592

15.5.1Connecting to the Network adapter ................................................... 592

15.5.2Activating an IO-Link port .................................................................... 593

15.5.3Deactivating an IO-Link Port ................................................................ 593

15.5.4Identifying a connected IO-Link device .............................................. 594

15.5.5Downloading IODDs for a connected IO-Link device ...................... 594

15.5.6Reading out IO-Link device parameters ............................................ 595

15.5.7Writing IO-Link device parameters ..................................................... 596

15.5.8Displaying process data ....................................................................... 597

15.5.9Displaying diagnosis ............................................................................. 597

Section 16: Accessories and Replacement Parts .............. 598

16.1 Accessories ........................................................................................................ 598
16.2 Replacement Parts ........................................................................................... 598
16.2.1Replacement Parts for Network Adapters ......................................... 599

16.2.2Replacement Parts for Modules .......................................................... 599

Appendix A: Decimal & Hexadecimal Conversion Table.... 600

Appendix B: Marine Certification Table .............................. 601

B.1 CPE200 Series CPUs ......................................................................................... 601
B.2 Network Adaptors ............................................................................................ 601
B.3 Digital Input Modules ...................................................................................... 602
B.4 Digital Output Modules ................................................................................... 602
B.5 Analog Input Modules ..................................................................................... 602
B.6 Analog Output Modules .................................................................................. 602
B.7 Digital Counter & Interface Modules ............................................................ 603
B.8 Potential Distribution Modules for I/O & Functional Earth ........................ 603

Appendix C: Serial Number Tracking Table ........................ 604

Appendix D: Product Certifications and Installation Guidelines

for Conformance .................................................................... 605
D.1 UL Class 1 Division 2 Hazardous Areas Requirements ............................... 606

Contents xviii
User Manual Contents
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

D.2 ATEX Zone 2 Hazardous Areas Requirements ............................................. 606

D.3 DNVGL Type Approval Requirements ........................................................... 606

General Contact Information............................................... 607

Technical Support .................................................................. 607

Contents xix
User Manual Warnings and Cautions
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Warnings and Caution Notes as Used in this Publication

WARNING
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents, temperatures, or other
conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or may be associated with its use.

In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, a Warning notice is used.

CAUTION
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.

Note: Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and
operating the equipment.

These instructions do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, nor to provide for
every possible contingency to be met during installation, operation, and maintenance. The
information is supplied for informational purposes only, and Emerson makes no warranty as to the
accuracy of the information included herein. Changes, modifications, and/or improvements to
equipment and specifications are made periodically and these changes may or may not be reflected
herein. It is understood that Emerson may make changes, modifications, or improvements to the
equipment referenced herein or to the document itself at any time. This document is intended for
trained personnel familiar with the Emerson products referenced herein.

Emerson may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter in this document.
The furnishing of this document does not provide any license whatsoever to any of these patents.

Emerson provides the following document and the information included therein as-is and without
warranty of any kind, expressed or implied, including but not limited to any implied statutory warranty
of merchantability or fitness for particular purpose.
User Manual Section 1
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Section 1: Introduction
This manual describes the RSTi-EP remote I/O system and RSTi-EP
Standalone and Backplane PLCs. The products of the RSTi-EP series are
intended for use in industrial automation.

An RSTi-EP station with network adapter and connected modules is

intended for the decentralized control of systems or sub-systems. Via the
network adapter every module of a station is integrated into a fieldbus
structure and connected to the primary control unit. The RSTi-EP
products conform to protection class IP 20 (in accordance with DIN EN
60529), they can be used in potentially explosive atmospheres rated as
Zone 2 (as per Directive 2014/34/EU) and in safe zones.

An RSTi-EP Standalone or Backplane PLC is secure by design: it offers

Achilles Level 2 certification (CPE100/115 Standlone CPU only offer
Achilles Level 1), the industry-leading standard for security in today’s
complex environment. Connectivity is at its core, reading beyond
traditional deterministic controls to provide a differentiated user
experience through a higher level of controls integration. The controllers
are IIoT-ready with standard OP-UA with secure access, open data
modelling like User-Defined Data Types (UDT) and User-Defined Function
Blocks (UDFB), making these PLCs a versatile part of the Emerson
portfolio. Common programming tools, runtime, and protocol support
makes developing applications for PACSystems RSTi-EP or RX3i
controllers a seamless user experience.

The observance of the supplied documentation is part of the intended

use. The products described in this manual may only be used for the
intended applications and only in connection with certified third-party
devices or components.

CAUTION
Prior to hot-swapping I/O modules, refer to Section, Replacing the Electronic Unit

Introduction 1
User Manual Section 1
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

1.1 Revisions in this Manual

Rev Date Description

Updates to support the release of RSTi-EP CPE200 Series

M Nov 2022
Controllers

Added Appendix D: Product Certifications and Installation

Guidelines for Conformance

Added Section 4.2.7 RSTi-EP PROFINET Channel Diagnostic Alarm

L May 2021 Reporting

Updated Section 4.4 to correct address ranges for the

EPXMBE001

Included various errata notes from SFDC

Added support for-

• EtherNet/IP Network Adapter EPXEIP001
K Nov 2019 • Power Measurement Module EP-1813
• IO-Link Communication Module EP-5324
IO-Link Configurator Tool
Following Emerson’s acquisition of this product, changes have
been made to apply appropriate branding and registration of the
product with required certification agencies. No changes to
J Oct 2019 material, process, form, fit or functionality.
Added two new modules:
• Digital Input, 16 Points, Negative Logic, 24Vdc
• Digital Output, 16 Points, Negative Logic, 24Vdc
H Oct 2018 Updates for MRP specification for EPXPNS101
Reformat to improve readability, especially tables and page
breaks.
G Sep-2018
Added new products: EPXPNS101 and, EP-3664
Updated the Marine Certification Appendix B, added Appendix C
F Apr 2018 Added Appendix B, a Marine Certification Table.
Added EPXMBE101 module, EP-8400 Plug Kit and updates to ATEX
E Nov 2017
information
Added support for CE100, including the following procedures:
D July 2017 • Replacement of Internal Super Capacitor (EPSACC001)
• Replacement of RTC Battery
Added three new modules:
Sept- • Digital Input Module EP-1804
C
2016 • Serial Communication Module EP-5261
• SSI Encoder Interface Module EP-5311
B Apr-2016 Changes required as part of ATEX certificate update
A Feb-2016 Added EtherCAT logo after certification

Introduction 2
User Manual Section 1
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

- Dec-2015 Initial release

Introduction 3
User Manual Section 1
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

1.2 PACSystems Documentation

1.2.1 PACSystems Manuals

PACSystems RX3i and RSTi-EP CPU Reference Manual GFK-2222

PACSystems RX3i and RSTi-EP CPU Programmer’s Reference Manual GFK-2950

PACSystems RX3i and RSTi-EP TCP/IP Ethernet Comm User Manual GFK-2224

PACSystems TCP/IP Ethernet Communications Station GFK-2225

Manager User Manual

C Programmer’s Toolkit for PACSystems GFK-2259

PACSystems Battery and Energy Pack Manual GFK-2741

PAC Machine Edition Logic Developer Getting Started GFK-1918

PACSystems Process Systems Getting Started Guide GFK-2487

PACSystems RX3i & RSTi-EP PROFINET I/O Controller Manual GFK-2571

1.2.2 RSTi-EP Manuals

PACSystems RSTi-EP Functional Safety Manual GFK-2956

PACSystems RSTi-EP EPSCPE100 Standalone CPU Quick Start Guide GFK-3012

PACSystems RSTi-EP EPSCPE115 Standalone CPU Quick Start Guide GFK-3039

PACSystems RSTi-EP Backplane Controllers (EPXCPE) Quick Start Guide GFK-3109

PACSystems RSTi-EP Controllers Performance Evaluation Manual GFK-3086

1.2.3 RX3i Manuals

PACSystems RX3i System Manual GFK-2314

PACSystems RX3i PROFINET Scanner Manual GFK-2737

PACSystems RX3i CEP PROFINET Scanner User Manual GFK-2883

In addition to these manuals, datasheets and product update documents

describe individual modules and product revisions. The most recent
PACSystems documentation is available on the Emerson product support
website https://www.emerson.com/Industrial-Automation-
Controls/support

Introduction 4
User Manual Section 1
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

1.3 System Overview

The modular RSTi-EP system supports common fieldbus systems and
conforms to IEC 61131-2. Each station is assigned a bus address in the
fieldbus structure. Only the network adapter is fieldbus-specific; the I/O
modules are independent of the fieldbus.

Up to 64 active I/O modules can be combined in a RSTi-EP station. The

largest expansion possible depends on the maximum amount of data
transmitted by the selected fieldbus, the configuration, parameter, or
process data for the module types provided. The following components
belong to the RSTi-EP product series:

• Fieldbus network adapter (gateway): Head station for converting the

respective fieldbus protocol on the RSTi-EP system bus

• Active I/O modules:

— Modules with digital input (DI) or digital output (DO) with 2, 4,

8 or 16 channels

— Modules with analogue input (AI) or analogue output (AO)

with 4 or 8 channels

— Pulse width modulation modules (PWM)

— Digital counter modules (CNT)

• Passive I/O modules (no fieldbus communication)

— 24 V power-feed modules (PF) for input or output current

— Potential distribution modules (AUX)

— Empty modules acting as placeholders (ES)

• Functional safety modules

— Safe power-feed modules (EP-19xx) 24 V for output current,

providing one or two inputs (with two channels each) for
safety circuits

• Mechanical fixing elements

— End bracket

— End plate

Introduction 5
User Manual Section 1
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

1.3.1 Dimensions of the RSTi-EP Components

Height (H) Width (W) Depth (D)

Network adapter 120.0 mm (4.72 in) 52.0 mm (2.05 in) 76.0 mm (2.99 in)
I/O module 120.0 mm (4.72 in) 11.5 mm (0.45 in) 76.0 mm (2.99 in)
End plate 120.0 mm (4.72 in) 3.5 mm (0.14 in) 76.0 mm (2.99 in)
End bracket 120.0 mm (4.72 in) 8.0 mm (0.32 in) mm (1.42 in)

1.3.2 Double-click Installation

The RSTi-EP station modules can be installed quickly and simply. When
attaching the module to the DIN rail, a clear clicking noise can be heard,
which means that the module has clicked into place. In the second step,
which involves pushing the module being installed together with the
neighboring module, a further clicking noise indicates that the modules
have been correctly connected to each other.

Introduction 6
User Manual Section 1
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

1.4 General Description of the Fieldbus

Network Adapters
A fieldbus network adapter is used to connect the station I/O modules to
the fieldbus. All the data traffic with the programmable logic controller
including the diagnostic messages is exchanged via the network adapter.
The integrated power supply provides the network adapter and all
connected modules with power.

A detailed description of the individual network adapter types is available

under Detailed Descriptions of the Fieldbus Network Adapters

Figure 1: Features of the Fieldbus Network Adapters

Fieldbus Network Adapter (Example: EPXPNS001)

1. Catch lever for securing the DIN rail 10. Power supply connector for the
2. Rotary switch (only PROFIBUS®) system and input modules
3. Data line connection (e.g. SUB-D 11. Power supply connector for
socket) output modules
4. Seats for module markers 12. Service flap
5. Type designation 13. Latching hook for latching onto
6. Optional: swivel marker for labelling module sides
modules and channels 14. System bus
7. Connector frame unlocking device 15. System current path
8. LED power supply network adapter 16. Input current path
9. Network adapter status LEDs 17. Type plate with block diagram
18. Output current path

Introduction 7
User Manual Section 1
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

1.5 General Technical Data for the Fieldbus

Network Adapter
Item Description
Type of connection Spring-style Single-wired, Fine-wired
Conductor cross-Atd207.14 – 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16
– 26)
Configuration interface USB 2.0
Dimensions Height 120.0 mm (4.72 in)
(with release lever: 128.0 mm / 5.04 in)
Width 52.0 mm (2.05 in)
Depth 76.0 mm (2.99 in)
Protection class (DIN EN 60529) IP 20
Flammability rating UL 94 V-0
Temperature data (Network Operation -20°C to +60°C (- 4 to +140 °F)
Adapter Power Supply) (horizontal installation) (8-A power supply)
-20°C to +55°C (- 4 to +131 °F)
(10-A power supply)
Operation -20°C to +55°C (- 4 to +131 °F)
(vertical installation) (6-A power supply)
-20°C to +50°C (- 4 to +122 °F)
(8-A power supply)
Storage, transport -40°C to +85°C (- 40 to +185 °F)
Humidity Operation 95 %, non-condensing as per IEC 61131-2
Storage, transport 95 %, non-condensing as per IEC 61131-2
Air pressure Operation ≥ 795 hPa (altitude ≤ 2,000 m)
per IEC 61131-2
Storage, transport ≥ 700 hPa (altitude ≤ 3,000 m)
per IEC 61131‑2
Vibration resistance 5 Hz ≤ f ≤ 8.4 Hz: 3.5 mm amplitude, per IEC 60068-2-6
8.4 Hz ≤ f ≤ 150 Hz: 1 g acceleration, per IEC 60068-2-6
Shock resistance 15 g over 11ms, half sinewave, per IEC 60068-2-27
Potential isolation Test voltage max. 28.8 V within one channel
500Vdc field/system
Pollution severity level 2
Overvoltage category II
Approvals and Standards CULUS Ordinary Locations UL 508, CSA C22.2 No. 0-M91
CULUS Hazardous Locations ISA 12.12.01: 2007
Class 1 Division 2, Gr. A, B, C, D CSA C22.2 No. 213-M1987
(Reaffirmed 2008)
Potentially explosive ATEX Directive 2014/34/EU
atmosphere Zone 2†
Explosion protection EN 60079-0:2012+A11:2013 and EN 60079-
15:2010
IEC 60079-0:2011 and IEC 60079-15:2010
EMC EN61000-6-2: 2005, EN61000-6-4: 2007 +
A1:2011, (partial standards, per the
requirements of EN 61131‑2: 2007)
FCC Compliance 47 CFR 15: 2011 (Class A)
Introduction 8
User Manual Section 1
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Item Description
†
Unless otherwise noted within the product-specific technical data.
All product-specific technical data is available in the corresponding product description in Section 4, Detailed
Descriptions of the Fieldbus Network Adapters

Introduction 9
User Manual Section 1
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

1.6 General Description of I/O Modules

Figure 2: Features of the RSTi-EP I/O Modules

1.6.1 I/O module (Example EP-1214)

1. Catch lever for securing the DIN rail

2. System bus
3. System current path
4. Input current path
5. Output current path
6. Seats for module markers
7. Type designation
8. Optional: swivel marker for labelling modules and channels
9. Connector frame unlocking device
10. Module status LED (collective message)
11. Connector
12. Channel status LEDs
13. Latching hook for latching onto sides of modules
14. DIN rail foot
15. Type plate

Introduction 10
User Manual Section 1
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Figure 3: I/O Module

Components

1. Basic module

2. Electronic unit

3. Removal lever for electronic unit

4. Connector frame

5. Connector

6. Plug-in unit

Introduction 11
User Manual Section 2
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Color Coding

The removal levers for the electronic unit and the connectors are color-
coded as follows:

• Blue standard

• White power supply

• Red 230 V

• Yellow SIL products

A detailed description of the individual module types is available under

Section 5, Detailed Description of I/O Modules.

Introduction 12
User Manual Section 2
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

1.6.2 Standard Connector

The connection frame can take up to four connectors, and four

conductors can be connected to each connector. Spring-style technology
allows for fine-wired conductors with crimped wire-end ferrules or
ultrasonically welded conductors, each with a maximum cross-section of
1.5 mm², to be inserted easily through the opening in the clamping
terminal without having to use tools. To insert fine-wired conductors
without wire-end ferrules, the pusher must be pressed in with a
screwdriver (refer to Section 7.4, Wiring).

Figure 4: Connector with four Conductor Connection

Features and Specifications:

• conductor cross-section 0.14 to 1.5 mm² (AWG 16 – 26)

• maximum ampacity: 10 A

• 4-pole

The pushers are color-coded for the following connections:

— White Signal

— Blue GND

— Green Functional Earth (FE)

— Red 24V

Introduction 13
User Manual Section 2
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

1.6.3 HD Connector EP-8360

The connection frame can take up to four times two HD connectors EP-
8360, and qualified SAI cables† with a cross-section from 0.14 to 0.35 mm2
can be connected to each connector via insulation displacement contact
(IDC). Refer to Section 7.4, Wiring.

Figure 5: Connector EP-8360 for HD Modules

Features and Specifications:

• conductor cross-section: 0.14 to 0.35 mm² (AWG 22-26)

• insulation diameter 1.0 to 1.6 mm (0.04 to 0.06")

• maximum current capacity: 1 A

• 4-pole

Introduction 14
User Manual Section 2
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

1.6.4 Cable Protection

The modules listed in the following table do not have a fused

sensor/actuator power supply. Here, all cables to the connected
sensors/actuators must be fused corresponding to their conductor cross-
sections (per Standard DIN EN 60204-1, section).

Description Part Number

Digital input modules
Digital Input, 4 Points, Positive Logic 24Vdc, 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire EP-1214
Digital Input, 8 Points, Positive Logic, 24Vdc 2-Wire EP-1218
Digital Input, 8 Points, Positive Logic, 24Vdc 3-Wire EP-1318
Digital Input, 4 Points, Positive Logic 24Vdc, 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire, Time
EP-12F4
stamp
Digital Input, 4 Points 110/230Vac (65 – 277Vac), 2-Wire, Isolated EP-1804
Digital output modules
Digital Output, 4 Points, Positive Logic 24Vdc, 0.5A, 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire EP-2214
Digital Output, 4 Points, Positive Logic 24Vdc, 2.0A, 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire EP-2614
Digital Output, 4 Points, Positive/Negative Logic 24Vdc, 2.0A, 2-, 3-,
EP-2634
or 4-Wire
Analog input modules
Analog Input, 4 Channels Voltage/Current 16 Bits 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire EP-3164
Analog Input, 4 Channels Voltage/Current 12 Bits 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire EP-3124
Functional modules
2 Channels PWM Output, Positive Logic, 24Vdc, 0.5 A EP-5422
2 Channels PWM Output, Positive Logic, 24Vdc, 2 A EP-5442
1 Channel High Speed Counter, AB 100 kHz 1 DO 24Vdc, 0.5A EP-5111
2 Channel High Speed Counter, AB 100 kHz EP-5112
2 Channel Frequency Measurement, 100 kHz EP-5212
1 Channel Serial Communications, 232, 422, 485 EP-5261
1 Channel SSI Encoder, BCD or Gray-Code Format, 5/24 Vdc EP-5311
Potential distribution modules
Power Module, 16 Channels 24Vdc Potential Distribution +24 Vdc
EP-711F
from Input Current Path
Power Module, 16 Channels 24Vdc Potential Distribution +24 Vdc
EP-751F
from Output Current Path
Power Module, 16 Channels 24Vdc Potential Distribution +0Vdc
EP-710F
from Input Current Path
Power Module, 16 Channels 24Vdc Potential Distribution +0Vdc
EP-750F
from Output Current Path

Introduction 15
User Manual Section 2
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

1.7 General Technical Data for I/O Modules

Item Description
Type of connection Spring-style Single-wired, fine-wired
Conductor cross-section
0.14 – 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16 – 26)
IDC (EP-3368, EP-3468) Single-wired, fine-wired
Conductor cross-section
0.14 – 0.35 mm2 (AWG 22 – 26)
Dimensions 4.72 in (120.0 mm)
Height
w/ release lever: 128.0 mm (5.04 in)
Width 11.5 mm (0.45in)
Depth 76.0 mm (2.99 in)
Protection class
IP 20
(DIN EN 60529)
Flammability rating
V-0
UL 94
Temperature data Operation -20°C to +60°C (- 4 to +140 °F)
Storage, transport -40°C to +85°C (- 40 to +185 °F)
Humidity 5 % to 95 %, non-condensing
Operation, storage, transport
per IEC 61131-2
Air pressure ≥ 795 hPa (altitude ≤ 2,000 m)
Operation
per IEC 61131-2
≥ 700 hPa (altitude ≤ 3,000 m)
Storage, transport
per IEC 61131-2
5 Hz ≤ f ≤ 8.4 Hz: 3.5-mm amplitude as per IEC 60068-2-6
Vibration resistance
8.4 Hz ≤ f ≤ 150 Hz: 1-g acceleration as per IEC 60068-2-6
Shock resistance 15 g over 11ms, half sinewave, as per IEC 60068-2-27
Potential isolation max. 28.8 V within one channel
Test voltage
500Vdc field/system
Pollution severity level 2
Overvoltage category II
Approvals and ULUS Ordinary Locations
C UL 508, CSA C22.2 No. 0-M91
Standards ULUS Hazardous Locations
C ISA 12.12.01: 2007
Class 1 Division 2, Gr. A, B, C, CSA C22.2 No. 213-M1987
D (Reaffirmed 2008)
Potentially explosive ATEX Directive 2014/34/EU
atmosphere Zone 2†

Introduction 16
User Manual Section 2
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Item Description
Type of connection Spring-style Single-wired, fine-wired
Conductor cross-section
0.14 – 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16 – 26)
IDC (EP-3368, EP-3468) Single-wired, fine-wired
Conductor cross-section
0.14 – 0.35 mm2 (AWG 22 – 26)
EN 60079-0:2012+A11:2013 and EN
60079-15:2010
Explosion protection
IEC 60079-0:2011 and
IEC 60079-15:2010
EN61000-6-2: 2005, EN61000-6-4:
2007 + A1:2011, (partial standards
EMC
as per the requirements of
EN61131‑2: 2007)
FCC Compliance 47 CFR 15: 2011 (Class A)
PLC IEC 61131-2
Type of connection Spring-style Single-wired, fine wired

†
Unless otherwise noted within the product-specific technical data.
All product-specific technical data is available in the corresponding product description
under Section 5, Detailed Description of I/O Modules.

Introduction 17
User Manual Section 2
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

1.8 Mechanical Fixing Elements

The station is fixed in the installation position by an end bracket at either
side. The last I/O module is protected against dust by a cover plate, into
which the second end bracket is inserted and screwed to the mounting
rail. Every RTSi-EP network adapter is supplied with a termination kit.

1) End bracket (left end, on the

Figure 6: RSTi-EP Station network adapter side)
Fixing Elements
2) Termination kit with end plate
and end bracket (right end)

For vertical installation, a special end

bracket must also be installed below
the station.

Introduction 18
User Manual Section 2
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

1.9 Type Plate

Each network adapter and each module feature a type plate, which
includes identification information, the key technical specifications and a
block diagram. In addition, a QR code allows for direct online access to
the associated documentation. The software for reading the QR code
must support inverted QR codes. A breakdown of the serial numbers can
be found in the table provided in the annex.

1. Product number
Figure 7: Type Plate
2. Serial number
(Example of EP-1214)
3. Manufacturing code

4. ATEX marking

1.10 Markers
A wide range of markers are available as accessories for labelling
equipment.

1.10.1 Swivel Marker

RSTi-EP I/O Label Markers (EP-8100) allow for modules and all respective
channels and lines to be labelled in detail. They are attached to the
connector frame.

The following labels are available for the labelling:

Introduction 19
User Manual Section 2
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

• Paper labels for printing with laser printers (Part No. EP-8101)

— White

— Yellow

Figure 8: Module with Swivel Marker

Introduction 20
User Manual Section 2
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Section 2: Safety
This Section includes general safety instructions for handling the RSTi-EP
system. Specific safety instructions for specific tasks and situations are
given at the appropriate places in the documentation.

When using remote I/O RSTi-EP modules, refer to the Module for
Functional Safety Manual (GFK-2956).

2.1 General Safety Notice

Work on the RSTi-EP products may only be performed by qualified
personnel with the support of trained persons. As a result of their
professional training and experience, such personnel are qualified to
perform the necessary work and identify any potential risks.

Before any work is carried out on the products (installation, maintenance,

retrofitting), the power supply must be switched off and secured against
being switched on again. Work may be carried out with safety extra-low
voltage.

The manual provided with the equipment shall be followed in detail to

assure proper and safe operation.

A stabilized 24Vdc power supply shall be used.

All field wiring intended for connection to the power terminal shall
consist of copper conductors with the insulation locally removed.
Additional intermediate connecting parts, other than ferrules, shall not
be used.

When working during continued operations, the emergency stop

mechanisms must not be made ineffective. If you need technical help,
contact Technical Support. For phone numbers and email addresses,
refer to the General Contact Information page in the front of this manual.

If a malfunction on a RSTi-EP product cannot be fixed after following the

recommended measures (refer to Section 12, LED Indicators and
Troubleshooting), the product in question must be sent back to Emerson.

Emerson does not assume any liability if the base or electronic module
has been tampered with.

Safety 21
User Manual Section 2
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

2.1.1 Electrostatic Discharge

RSTi-EP products can be damaged or destroyed by electrostatic

discharge. When handling the products, the necessary safety measures
against electrostatic discharge (ESD) according to IEC 61340-5-1 and IEC
61340-5-2 must be observed.

All devices are supplied in ESD-protected packaging. The packing and

unpacking as well as the installation and disassembly of a device may
only be carried out by qualified personnel and in accordance with the ESD
information

2.1.2 Open Equipment

RSTi-EP products are open equipment (having live electrical parts that
may be accessible to users) that may only be installed and operated in
lockable housings, cabinets or electrical operations rooms. Only trained
and authorized personnel may access the equipment.

For applications requiring functional safety or in order to maintain

compliance with the ATEX Directive [Class 1, Zone 2 area (Category 3)],
the surrounding housing must meet at least IP 54.

The standards and guidelines applicable for the assembly of switch

cabinets and the arrangement of data and supply lines must be complied
with.

2.1.3 Fusing

The operator must set up the equipment so that it is protected against

overloading. The upstream fuse must be designed such that it does not
exceed the maximum load current. The maximum permissible load
current of the RSTi-EP components can be found in the technical data.

In the case of modules without fused sensor/actuator power supplies, all

lines to the connected sensors/actuators must be fused corresponding to
their conductor cross-section (as per DIN VDE 0298 Part 4).

To meet UL-specifications in accordance with UL 248-14, a UL-certified

automatic fuse or a 10 A fuse with a medium time-lag must be used.

All connections of the RSTi-EP components are protected against voltage

pulses and overcurrent in accordance with IEC 61131-2, Zone B. The
operator must decide whether additional overvoltage protection
Safety 22
User Manual Section 2
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

according to IEC 62305 is required. Voltages that exceed +/-30 V may

cause the destruction of network adapters and modules.

A feed-in power supply with secure isolation must be used.

2.1.4 Earthing (functional earth FE)

Each RSTi-EP I/O module is fitted with an FE spring on the underside

which creates an electrical connection to the DIN rail. In order to
establish a secure connection, the assembly must be carried out carefully
in accordance with the instructions (refer to Section 6, Installation). The
module is earthed by connecting the DIN rail to the protective earth via
the earth terminal.

Modules EP-700F, EP-1214, EP-2214, EP-3124 and EP-3164 have

connections with green pushers. An FE potential is also provided at these
connections. They must not be used as a PE.

2.1.5 Shielding

Shielded lines are to be connected with shielded plugs and fixed on a

shield bus in compliance with the relevant standard (refer to Section 7,
Earthing and Shielding).

2.1.6 Overcurrent

Potentials of network adapters and power-feed modules must be

disconnected either simultaneously or in the order 24 V supply first, then
the GND potential.

Safety 23
User Manual Section 2
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

2.2 Intended Use

The products of the RSTi-EP series are intended for use in industrial
automation. A RSTi-EP station with network adapter and connected
modules is intended for the decentralized control of systems or sub-
systems. Via the network adapter every module of a station is integrated
into a fieldbus structure and connected to the primary control unit. The
RSTi-EP products conform to protection class IP 20 (in accordance with
DIN EN 60529), they can be used in potentially explosive atmospheres
rated as Zone 2 (as per Directive 2014/34/EU) and in safe zones.

The observance of the supplied documentation is part of the intended

use. The products described in this manual may only be used for the
intended applications and only in connection with certified third-party
devices or components.

2.3 Use in a Potentially Explosive Atmosphere

If RSTi-EP products are used in potentially explosive atmospheres, the
following notes are also applicable:

• Staff involved in assembly, installation and operation must be

qualified to perform safe work on electrical systems protected against
potentially explosive atmospheres.
• The remote I/O-System RSTi-EP shall only be used in an area of not
more than pollution degree 2, as defined in IEC 60664-1.
• For applications in potentially explosive atmospheres, the
requirements according to IEC 60079-15 must be observed, the
housing enclosing the system must meet the requirements of
explosion protection type Ex n or Ex e and protection class IP54. The
IP54 enclosure must be accessible only by use of a tool.
• Sensors and actuators that are located in Zone 2 or in a safe zone can
be connected to the RSTi-EP station.
• The ambient temperature range -20°C to +60°C shall not be
exceeded.
• When the temperature under rated conditions exceeds 70 °C at the
conductor or conduit entry point, or 80 °C at the contact, the
temperature specification of the selected cable shall follow the actual
measured temperature values.
• A stabilized 24Vdc power supply with double or reinforced insulation
shall be used.
Safety 24
User Manual Section 2
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

• When using modules EP-2714, EP-2814, and EP-1804 in explosive

atmosphere:
— Device shall be installed in an environment free of
condensation, corrosives and conducting dusts.
— If the switching or input voltage exceeds 63V, a transient
protection device shall be provided that, limits the transients
to a peak voltage of 500V or less.
• For EP-2714 (Relay Module) only:
— Since relays are subject to wear, it must be ensured, by
appropriate maintenance intervals, that the temperatures do
not exceed the limits of temperature class T4.

Note: A contact resistance of more than 110 mΩ will be considered as a fault.

— Resistive Loads Only
• For EP-2714 and EP-2814 Relay Modules:
— Transient protection shall be provided that is set at a level not
exceeding 140% of the peak rated voltage value at the supply
terminals to the equipment.
• A visual inspection of the RSTi-EP station is to be performed once per
year.
• If mounted in other directions than horizontal (reference mounting
rail), restrictions to the max. operating temperature, max. output
currents may apply.
• While explosive atmosphere is present:
— No electrical connection shall be separated in energized
condition.
— The USB interface shall not be used.
— Dip-switches, binary-switches and potentiometers shall not be
actuated.
• Only power supplies with secure isolation shall be used.
• Refer manufacturers manual.

• WARNING
• EXPLOSION HAZARD - SUBSTITUTION OF COMPONENTS MAY IMPAIR SUITABILITY FOR CLASS I,
DIVISION 2.

• WHEN IN HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS, TURN OFF POWER BEFORE REPLACING OR WIRING MODULES; AND

• DO NOT CONNECT OR DISCONNECT EQUIPMENT UNLESS POWER HAS BEEN SWITCHED OFF OR THE
AREA IS KNOWN TO BE NONHAZARDOUS.

Safety 25
User Manual Section 2
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

2.3.1 ATEX Zone 2

The modules must be mounted in an enclosure certified in accordance

with EN60079-15 for use in Zone 2, Group IIC and rated IP54. The
enclosure shall only be able to be opened with the use of a tool.

2.3.2 ATEX & IECEx Marking

• II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 Gc, DEMKO 16 ATEX 1591X

Ex nA IIC T4 Gc, IECEx ULD 16.0022X Ta: -20 °C to +60 °C

For Relay Modules:

• II 3 G Ex nA nC IIC T4 Gc, DEMKO 16 ATEX 1591X

Ex nA nC IIC T4 Gc, IECEx ULD 16.0022X

Ta: -20 °C to +60 °C

Note: There is no ATEX conformity for the EP-1813 Power Measurement module.

2.4 Legal Notice

The modules must be mounted in an enclosure certified in accordance
with EN60079-15 for use in Zone 2, Group IIC and rated IP54. The
enclosure shall only be able to be opened with the use of a tool.

2.5 Use of RSTi-EP Stations 2,000m above Sea

Level
The RSTi-EP remote I/O system can operate in height >2,000 m (6,561.68
ft) above sea level, with the following limitations:

There is a derating for ambient temperatures while the RSTi-EP Station is

in operating mode. Refer to the following derating table.

Altitude (m, ft) Factor for Temperature Derating

< 2,000 m (6,561.68 ft) 1
2,001 to 3,000 m (6,564.96 to 9,842.52 ft) 0.88
3,001 to 4,000 m (9,845.80 to 13,123.36 ft) 0.78
4,001 to 5,000 m (13,126.64 to 16,404.20 ft) 0.68

Example:

Safety 26
User Manual Section 2
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Height 3,000 m (9,842.52 ft): maximum operational temperature is 60° C

(140 °F) x 0.88 = 52.8°C (136.76 °F) at maximum 8A.

Safety 27
User Manual Section 3
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Section 3: Configuration
3.1 Order and Arrangement of Modules
The RSTi-EP system elements are designed to be installed on a profile rail
according to EN 60715 [1.4 x 0.26 in (35 × 7.5 mm)], a steel strip in
accordance with Annex A of EN 60715, or a tin-plated steel strip.

Note: A RSTi-EP station may be built up to a maximum length of 3.28 ft (1 m). Therefore, at
most 82 modules (including max. 64 active modules) can be aligned on a network
adapter.
The RSTi-EP station is usually installed on a horizontally positioned DIN
rail.

Figure 9: Installation Position of the RSTi-EP Station on the DIN Rail

(Horizontal Installation)

Installation on vertically positioned DIN rails is also possible. In this case

however, the heat dissipation is reduced such that the derating values
change (refer to Section 3.5, Current Demand and Power Supply). In the
case of vertical mounting, the network adapter must always be arranged
as the first module at the bottom and secured with an end bracket for
vertical mounting.

Configuration 28
User Manual Section 3
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Figure 10: Installation Position of the RSTI-EP Station on the DIN

Rail (Vertical Installation)

A RSTi-EP station may only be installed in this sequence (starting from the
left/bottom):

• End bracket

• Network adapter

• Up to 82 modules (including max. 64 active modules)

• End plate and end bracket

NOTE: A maximum of three passive modules (potential distribution module, power-feed

module or blank module) may be placed in successive positions. Then at least one
active module must follow.

3.1.1 Arrangement of Safe Power-Feed Modules

A safe power-feed module EP-19xx module can be positioned anywhere

in the RSTi-EP station. All the following output modules (except for the EP-
2814 and EP-2714 relay modules) up to the next EP-19xx module are
safely disconnected (safety segment). Multiple EP-19xx modules/safety
segments can be arranged within a station.

Note: When using RSTi-EP EP-19xx modules, also refer to the Modules for Functional Safety
Manual (GFK-2956).

Configuration 29
User Manual Section 3
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

3.1.2 Power Supply Concept

The RSTi-EP system uses three internal current paths as described in the
following chapter, Detailed Descriptions of the Fieldbus Network
Adapters. Input and output paths are supplied separately, therefore a
custom-fit refreshing by power-feed modules is easily feasible.

Figure 11 shows the general supply concept. For detailed description and
calculation of the current demand refer to Section 3.6,

Configuration 30
User Manual Section 3
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Example Calculation for the Power Supply and Section 3.7.1,

Configuration 31
User Manual Section 3
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Calculation of Power Loss.

Figure 11: RSTi-EP Power Supply Overview

3.2 Clearances
In order to be able to carry out the installation and subsequent
maintenance work and to ensure enough ventilation, the RSTi-EP station
must be installed while observing the following Clearances (refer to the
following figures).

Note: Depending on how the station shielding is implemented, the specified distances may
have to be made larger, where necessary.
The minimum permissible conductor bending radii must also be
observed. Earth terminals already installed can be ignored when
calculating the distance.

Configuration 32
User Manual Section 3
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Figure 12: Clearances for Horizontal Installation

Figure 13: Clearances for Vertical Installation

Configuration 33
User Manual Section 3
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Figure 14: Clearances for Electrical Cabinet Door (Without/With

Swivel Marker)

3.2.1 Calculation of Space Requirements

The space requirements for a RSTi-EP station with n modules (horizontal

installation) is calculated as follows:

Height: 120 mm (4.72 in) clearance at top and bottom

+ 40 mm (2 x 1.57 in)
= 200 mm (7.87 in)
Width: 8 mm (1.57 in) end bracket
+ 52 mm (2.05 in) network adapter
+ n x 11.5 mm (0.45 in) n modules
+ 11.5 mm (0.45 in) end plate and end bracket
+ 2 x 20 mm (0.79 in) distances to the sides
= 111.5 mm (4.39 in) + n x 11.5 mm
(0.45 in)
For vertical installation interchange height and width. When calculating
the width, 4.5 mm (0.18 in) for the must be added for the end bracket.

Configuration 34
User Manual Section 3
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

3.3 Use in a Potentially Explosive Atmosphere

If the RSTi-EP is used in a potentially explosive atmosphere rated as Zone
2, the housing must meet the requirements of explosion protection type
Ex n or Ex e and protection class IP54. Sensors and actuators that are in
Zone 2 or in a safe zone can be connected. All cable glands on the
housing must be approved for Ex e.

Figure 15: Use in a Potentially Explosive Atmosphere

Configuration 35
User Manual Section 3
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

3.3.1 ATEX & IECEx Marking

• II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 Gc, DEMKO 16 ATEX 1591X

Ex nA IIC T4 Gc, IECEx ULD 16.0022X

Ta: -20 °C to +60 °C

For Relay Modules:

• II 3 G Ex nA nC IIC T4 Gc, DEMKO 16 ATEX 1591X

Ex nA nC IIC T4 Gc, IECEx ULD 16.0022X

Ta: -20 °C to +60 °C

Note: There is no ATEX conformity for the EP-1813 Power Measurement module.

3.4 Spring-Style System Cabling

RSTi-EP modules (except HD modules) and network adapters are
equipped with the spring-style connector system. Single-strand and fine-
strand lines with wire-end ferrules can be inserted without the need for a
tool. Lines with a cross-section measuring between 0.14 mm2 and 1.5
mm2 (AWG 26 – 16) can be connected.

The external dimensions of the crimped wire-end ferrules must conform

to IEC‑60947-1.

3.5 Current Demand and Power Supply

The RSTi-EP system uses three internal current paths:

The ISYS system current path supplies the communication part of the
I/O modules; it is fed from the network adapter input supply and cannot
be interrupted by any module. The maximum current-carrying capacity of
ISYS allows a RSTi-EP station to be expanded with a maximum of 64 active
modules without having to refresh the power.

The IIN input current path supplies the input circuit of the input
modules as well as the connected IS sensors. The current must be
refreshed with EO-7631 (power feed in) modules as required. These EP-
7631 modules isolate the input current path towards the left (towards the
network adapter), and as a result start a new electricity segment towards
the right.

Configuration 36
User Manual Section 3
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

The IOUT output current path supplies the output circuit of the output
modules with power, as well as the connected IL actuators. The current
must be refreshed with the EP-7641 (power feed-out), as required. These
EP-7641 modules isolate the output current path to the left (towards the
network adapter), and as a result start a new electricity segment to the
right.

Note: The design of the power supply being used must take start-up peaks into account.

3.5.1 Power Supply Derating

The power supply is restricted according to the temperature. The

following values apply for the horizontal and vertical positioning of the
RSTi-EP station:

Temperature-dependent Values for the Power Supply

Power Source Horizontal Vertical

Network Adapter power supply 60 °C / 140 °F: 2 x 8 A 55 °C / 131 °F: 2 x 6 A
55 °C / 131 °F: 2 x 10 A 50 °C / 122 °F: 2 x 8 A
Power-feed module power 60 °C / 140 °F: 1 x 10 A 55 °C / 131 °F: 1 x 8 A
supply

Current Demand

Product group Product ISYS IIN IOUT IS IL

EPXPBS001 100 mA
EPXPNS001 116 mA
EPXPNS101 116 mA
Network adapters EPXETC001 110 mA
EPXMBE001 112 mA
EPXMBE101 112 mA
EPXEIP001 112 mA
EP-1214 8 mA 18 mA x
EP-1218 8 mA 30 mA x
EP-1318 8 mA 30 mA x
Digital input modules EP-125F 8 mA 52 mA
EP-12F4 8 mA 18 mA x
EP-1804 8 mA
EP-153F 8 mA 52 mA x
20
EP-2214, EP-2714, EP-2634 8 mA x
mA
35
EP-2218 8 mA x
Digital output modules mA
25
EP-225F, EP-2614 8 mA x
mA
EP-2814 11 mA

Configuration 37
User Manual Section 3
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Product group Product ISYS IIN IOUT IS IL

EP-291F 8mA 30mA x
EP-3164, EP-3124, EP-3264 8 mA 25 mA x
31 mA
EP-3664 8 mA
+Load
Analog input modules EP-3804, EP-3704, EP-3368,
8 mA 20 mA
EP-3468
≤ 40
EP-1813 8 mA
mA
85
Analog output modules EP-4164, EP-4264 8 mA
mA
EP-5111, EP-5112 8 mA 35 mA x
EP-5212 8 mA 35 mA x x
40
EP-5422, EP-5442 8 mA
Functional modules mA
EP-5261 8 mA 16 mA
EP-5311 8 mA 25 mA
EP-5324 8 mA 25 mA x
10
EP-7641
mA
Power-feed modules
EP-7631 10 mA
EP-1901, EP-1902, EP-1922 8 mA 45 mA x
Potential distribution EP-751F - - - - -
modules EP-711F - - - - -
ISYS Current consumption from the system current path
IIN Power consumption from input current path
IOUT Power consumption from output current path
IS Current demand of the connected sensors
IL Current demand of the connected actuators
x Must be included when calculating the power supply

Configuration 38
User Manual Section 3
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

3.6 Example Calculation for the Power Supply

The power supply must be calculated individually for each station
installation. Therefore, the simultaneity factor g and the current demand
of each module, as well as the devices to be connected must be
established (refer to the example calculation table).

In the example station, an EPXPNS001 network adapter is configured

with four EP-1214 modules and eight EP-2218 modules. The cumulative
current demand for each module is now calculated to determine whether
and at which point a EP-7631 power-feed module must be positioned to
refresh the current path. A power-feed module must always be used
where the current demand exceeds 10 A.

Note: The power refresh must be separately calculated for the input and output current paths.
The system voltage need not be considered during this step.
Use the RSTi-EP Power Supply Configuration Guide to perform this calculation
automatically.
Modules like EPXPNS101 must use a utility tool called ”RSTi-EP Power Supply Tool” to
calculate power.
Controllers like the EPXCPE200 have PME support that will provide automated power
calculations and warnings about the local backplane I/O in the Controller Hardware
Configuration.

Calculation of the Current Demand for the Input

Current

The current consumption of the network adapter must be considered for

the main power supply, and the sum of consumption values is
multiplied by the simultaneity factor g for each following module:

ISYS network adapter ISYS Current consumption from the system

+ (ISYS + IIN ) + (IS x g) module 1 current path
+ (ISYS + IIN ) + (IS x g) module 2 IIN Current consumption from the input current
+ Σ ((ISYS + IIN ) + (IS x g)) modules 3 to 4 path
= Cumulative current demand IS Power supplies for the connected sensors

Configuration 39
User Manual Section 3
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

In the case of an additional power supply (power refresh) with a EP-7631

power-feed module, only the sensor power supplies and the module
current consumption have to be considered:

((IIN + IS module x) x g) ISYS Current consumption from the system current path
+ ((IIN + IS module y) x g) IS Power supplies for the connected sensors
+ Σ ((IIN + IS) x g) n modules
= Cumulative current
demand

Calculation of the Current Demand for the Output

Current

The current consumption of each module and the current demand of the
connected actuators must be considered for the output current. There is
no difference in the calculation of the main power supply and power
refresh:

(IOUT + (IL x g) module 1 IOUT module current consumption from the output
+ (IOUT + (IL x g) module 2 current path
+ Σ (IOUT + (IL x g)) n modules IL Current demand of the connected actuators
= Cumulative current demand

Example:
The values in the following table are used to calculate the current demand
of the example station (cumulative for each module). The input current is:

Module 1:

I = 0.116 A + (0.008 A + 0.012 A) + (0.06 A x 1) = 0.196 A

Module 2:

I = 0.196 A + (0.008 A + 0.012 A) + (0.06 A x 1) = 0.276 A

The values for the other modules are calculated accordingly. The result
shows that the accumulated value for up to 12 modules remains under 10
A, and therefore a power supply module need not be used for the input
current path. Results for the output current path:

Module 5:

I = 0.015 A + (0.5 A x 2) = 1.015 A

Module 6:

I = 1.015 A + (0.015 A + (0.5 A x 4) = 3.03 A

Configuration 40
User Manual Section 3
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Module 10:

I = 6.175 A + (0.015 A + (0.5 A x 4) = 8.19 A

Module 11 (without power refresh):

I = 8.19 A + (0.015 A + (0.5 A x 4) = 10.205 A

Therefore, the available 10 A would be exceeded. As a result, an EP-7641

power supply module must be positioned as the 11th module, which will
supply the required power to the subsequent modules after the power
feed module. Unused current values may not be included.

Module 11 (as per PF-O):

I = (0.015 A + (0.5 A x 4) = 2.015 A

Module 12 (as per PF-O):

I = 2.015 A (0.015 A + (0.5 A x 4) = 4.030 A

Configuration 41
 User Manual Section 3
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

3.7 Example Calculation for the Current

Demand (all Current Values in Amps)
Cumulative Cumulative Cumulative
Simultaneity current current demand current demand
Module Part
ISYS IIN IOUT IS IL factor demands of the of the output of the EP-7641
no. number
g input current power path output power
path network adapter path

EPXPNS0
0.116 0.116 0
01

1 EP-1214 0.008 0.018 0.06 1.0 0.202 0

2 EP-1214 0.008 0.018 0.06 1.0 0.288 0

3 EP-1214 0.008 0.018 0.12 1.0 0.434 0

4 EP-1214 0.008 0.018 0.18 1.0 0.640 0

5 EP-2218 0.008 0.035 2.0 0.5 0.648 1.035

6 EP-2218 0.008 0.035 4.0 0.5 0.656 3.070

7 EP-2218 0.008 0.035 3.0 0.5 0.664 4.605

8 EP-2218 0.008 0.035 2.0 0.5 0.672 5.640

9 EP-2218 0.008 0.035 1.2 0.5 0.680 6.275

10 EP-2218 0.008 0.035 4.0 0.5 0.688 8.290

EP-7641

11 EP-2218 0.008 0.035 4.0 0.5 0.696 2.035

12 EP-2218 0.008 0.035 4.0 0.5 0.700 4.070

ISYS Current consumption from the system power supply

IIN Power consumption from input current path
IOUT Power consumption from output current path
IS Current demand of the connected sensors
IL Current demand of the connected actuators
The current demand is just under 10 A. The output current path must therefore be refreshed before the 11th
module.
10 A is supplied by the EP-7641 module. The 1.81 A calculated as remaining after the 10th module must not be
added to the 10 A after the EP-7641 module!

Configuration 42
User Manual Section 3
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

3.7.1 Calculation of Power Loss

The power loss of the network adapter is calculated as follows:

Pnetwork adapter = P0 + N * Pmod + Iin * Δuin + Iout * Δuout

P0 Static power loss in the network adapter 2.3 W

N Number of modules
Pmod Power loss due to module supply from the system 0.02 W
current path
Pmodule Maximum power loss module
Iin Current fed in through the input current path
ΔVin Voltage drop across the contacts in the input current 0.18 V
path
Iout Current fed in through the output current path
ΔVout Voltage drop across the contacts in the output current 0.18 V
path

The power loss of a RSTi-EP station is calculated using the power loss of
the network adapter and the power loss of the individual modules. It
depends on the current in both current paths. It is assumed that there is
a maximum power loss of 2 watts for the module

Maximum values were assumed for these calculations. If you need

detailed calculations, please contact Emerson technical support or Global
Care https://www.emerson.com/Industrial-Automation-Controls/support.

Pstation = Pnetwork adapter + N * Pmodule

3.7.2 Calculation of Power Loss for Use in a Potentially

Explosive Atmosphere

The module specific data, needed to calculate the output power loss, is
provided in the ATEX certificate which you can download from
https://www.emerson.com/Industrial-Automation-Controls/support.

Configuration 43
User Manual Section 3
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

3.8 Feedback Energy in DO Modules

With digital output modules, power is fed back through the channels
when inductive loads are switched off. The respective permissible
breaking energy is noted in the technical data of the DO modules.
Depending on the switching frequency, the breaking energy leads to
additional energy loss in the output module.

If the maximum permissible feedback energy for a module is exceeded,

the module shuts down temporarily.

Note: Feedback energy can be prevented by installing external freewheeling protection. With it,
the same switching rate can be achieved with an inductive load as with a resistive load.

3.8.1 Calculation of Feedback Energy

The feedback energy for a digital output module can be calculated as

follows:

P = Σall channels ½ ni * Li * Ii²

where

P = Feedback energy of the module

ni = Switching cycles of Channel i in 1/seconds
Ei = Feedback energy when shutting off Channel i during a shutdown procedure
Ii = Current through the load connected to Channel i
Li = Inductance of the load connected to Channel i
Once the maximum permissible feedback energy E max is reached, the
module shuts down.

Figure 16: Maximum Feedback Energy Varies with Ambient

Temperature

Configuration 44
User Manual Section 3
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

3.9 Parameter Overview

3.9.1 Modifiable Parameters for Network Adaptors

Product Part No. Parameter Optional values Default value

DP-Alarm mode V0 / V1 V1
For mode V0, the alarm triggers are set in the
DP alarm mode V0
parameter data.
Diagnostic alarm† enabled / disabled disabled
Process alarm †
enabled / disabled disabled
Hot-plug alarm †
enabled / disabled enabled
†
These switches are always selectable, but they only have a function in mode
V0. Diagnostic messages are generated which are not acknowledged by the
PLC.
In mode V1, the alarm triggers are set in the
DP alarm mode V1
engineering environment.
Diagnostic alarm†† enabled / disabled disabled
Process alarm ††
enabled / disabled disabled
Hot-plug alarm ††
enabled / disabled enabled
PROFIBUS DP-V1
EPXPBS001 These switches can be selected only in mode V1, in V0 they are inactive.
††
Network Adapter
Diagnostic messages are generated which are acknowledged by the PLC.
Identifier-related
enabled / disabled enabled
diagnosis†††
Channel-related
enabled / disabled enabled
diagnosis†††
Module status††† enabled / disabled enabled
†††
A diagnostic block is attached to the diagnostic message.
Data format Motorola / Intel Motorola
All outputs off /
Fieldbus error output activate replacement
All outputs off
behavior values/
retain last value
Continue data exchange /
Module behavior during Continue data
behavior as with fieldbus
hot swap exchange
error

Configuration 45
User Manual Section 3
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Product Part No. Parameter Optional values Default value

Redundancy Mode None / HSB CPU
None
(Only EPXPNS101) Redundancy
Process alarm enabled / disabled disabled
Diagnostic alarm enabled / disabled disabled
diagnostic (short
diagnostic) Extended channel
Type of diagnostic Manufacturer-specific diagnostic
diagnostic (complete (short diagnostic)
diagnostic)
PROFINET IRT
Network All outputs off /
Behavior of outputs on
Adapter, 2 Cu EPXPNS001 Enable substitute value / All outputs off
fieldbus errors
RJ45 Ports, 1024 /EPXPNS101 Hold last value
bytes (Input + Continue data exchange /
Module behavior on hot Continue data
Output) Behavior like fieldbus
swap exchange
error
Data format Motorola / Intel Motorola
Webserver via Ethernet enabled / disabled disabled
Option Handling 1
enabled / disabled disabled
Group Module Diagnostic
enabled / disabled disabled
Alarm1
Reduce Return of
enabled / disabled disabled
Submodule Alarm1
Process alarm enabled / disabled disabled
Diagnostic alarm enabled / disabled disabled
All outputs off /
EtherCAT Behavior of outputs on
Enable substitute value / All outputs off
Network fieldbus errors
Hold last value
Adapter, 2 Cu
EPXETC001 Continue data exchange /
RJ45 Ports, Module behavior on hot Continue data
Behavior like fieldbus
1024 bytes swap exchange
error
(Input + Output)
Data format Motorola / Intel Intel
Webserver via Ethernet enabled / disabled enabled
Network adapter control Reserved Off

1
These new features were added in revisions EPXPNS001-ABAE & EPXPNS101-AAAA.
Configuration 46
User Manual Section 3
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Product Part No. Parameter Optional values Default value

IP-Address#
# In Dual LAN Mode
(EPXMBE101 only) 4 numbers between 0-255 192.168.0.222
parameterizable for each
Ethernet Port
Subnet mask#
# In Dual LAN Mode
(EPXMBE101 only) 4 numbers between 0-255 255.255.255.0
parameterizable for each
Ethernet Port
Gateway#
# In Dual LAN Mode
(EPXMBE101 only) 4 numbers between 0-255 192.168.0.1
parameterizable for each
Ethernet Port
Static,
IP Configuration# Static (firmware
DHCP,
# In Dual LAN Mode 01.xx.xx)
BootP
(EPXMBE101 only) DHCP and static
Firmware 02.00.00 and
parameterizable for each (firmware 02.00.00
higher: additionally DHCP
Ethernet Port or higher)
Modbus TCP and static
Network Modbus Dual LAN Mode
Adapter, 2 Cu EPXMBE001 disabled / enabled disabled
(EPXMBE101 only)
RJ45 Ports,2048 /EPXMBE101
Waiting time,
bytes (Input + Modbus DHCP Timeout 30 s
1 to 1,000 s
Output)
192.168.1.202;
192.168.2.202,
IP-Address USB-Port 192.168.3.202, 192.168.1.202
192.168.4.202,
192.168.5.202
Webserver via Ethernet disabled / enabled enabled
no, see register
Save module parameters no / yes / Standard
0x113C-0x113F
0 *10ms,
Watchdog time in steps of
Status Modbus watchdog see register
10ms
0x1120
1 s,
Modbus Connection Connection watchdog
see register
Timeout time in sec
0x1131
write for all, write for all,
Writing access with
1stWr1stServe, see register
multiclient
1stConn1stServe 0x1130
disabled,
Check reference list
disabled / enabled see register
before exchanging data
0x1132

Configuration 47
User Manual Section 3
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Product Part No. Parameter Optional values Default value

disabled,
Process alarm disabled / enabled see register
0x1133
disabled,
Diagnostic alarm disabled / enabled see register
0x1134
All outputs off / All outputs off,
Behavior of outputs on
Enable substitute values / see register
fieldbus error
Hold last value 0x1135
Continue data
Continue data exchange /
Module behavior on hot exchange,
Behavior like fieldbus
swap see register
error
0x1136
Motorola,
Data format Motorola / Intel see fieldbus
register 0x1137
IP-Address 4 numbers between 0-255 0.0.0.0
Subnet mask 4 numbers between 0-255 255.255.255.0
Gateway 4 numbers between 0-255 0.0.0.0
IP Configuration Static, DHCP, BootP DHCP
IP-Address USB Port 192.168.1.202; 192.168.5.202
192.168.2.202,
192.168.3.202,
192.168.4.202,
192.168.5.202
Webserver via Ethernet disabled / enabled enabled
Save module parameters no / yes / Standard no
Output Behavior on idle All outputs off (0) / Enable All outputs off
EtherNet/IP state substitute values (1) /
Network Hold last value (2)
EPXEIP001
Adapter, 2 Cu Process alarm disabled (0) / enabled (1) disabled
RJ45 Ports
Diagnostic alarm Disabled (0) / enabled (1) disabled
Behavior of outputs on All outputs off (0) / Enable All outputs off
fieldbus error substitute values (1) /
Hold last value (2)
Module behavior on hot Continue data exchange Continue data
swap (0) / Behavior like fieldbus exchange
error (1)
Data format Motorola (0) / Intel (1) Intel
Lock force mode Force mode unlocked / Force mode
Force mode locked unlocked
HTTPS setting HTTP & HTTPS concurrent Only HTTPS; no
operation/ Only HTTPS; no HTTP
HTTP

Configuration 48
User Manual Section 3
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Product Part No. Parameter Optional values Default value

no (0)/
0.3ms (1) (not at
Digital Input, PROFIBUS-DP)/
4 Points, Positive Ch 0 … Ch 3: 3ms (2)/
EP-1214 3ms
Logic 24Vdc, Input delay 10ms (3)/
2-, 3-, or 4-Wire 20ms (4)/
40ms (5) (not at
PROFIBUS-DP)
Digital Input, no (0) /
8 Points, Positive 0.3ms (1) (not at
EP-1218
Logic, 24Vdc PROFIBUS-DP) /
2-Wire Ch 0 … Ch 7: 3ms (2) /
3ms
Digital Input, Input delay 10ms (3) /
8 Points, Positive 20ms (4) /
EP-1318 40ms (5) (not at
Logic, 24Vdc
3-Wire PROFIBUS-DP)
no (0) /
0.3ms (1) (not at PROFIBUS-
DP) /
Ch 0 … Ch 3: 3ms (2) /
Digital Input, 3ms
Input delay 10ms (3) /
4 Points, Positive 20ms (4) /
Logic 24Vdc, EP-12F4 40ms (5) (not at PROFIBUS-
2-, 3-, or 4-Wire, DP)
Time stamp
Ch 0 … Ch 3: disabled (0) /
disabled
Timestamp at edge 0-1 enabled (1)
Ch 0 … Ch 3: disabled (0) /
disabled
Timestamp at edge 1-0 enabled (1)
Digital Output,
4 Points, Positive
Logic 24Vdc, EP-2214
0.5A,
2-, 3-, or 4-Wire Ch 0 … Ch 3:
Off (0) / On (1) Off
Digital Output, Substitute value
4 Points, Positive
Logic 24Vdc, EP-2614
2.0A,
2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
Digital Output, Ch 0 … Ch 3: Substitute Sinking (0) /
Sourcing
4 Points, value OP-Mode Sourcing (1)
Positive/
EP-2634
Negative Logic Ch 0 … Ch 3:
24Vdc, 2.0A, Off (0) / On (1) Off
Substitute value
2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
Digital Output,
8 Points, Positive
Ch 0 … Ch 7:
Logic, 24Vdc, EP-2218 Off (0) / On (1) Off
Substitute value
0.5A,
2-Wire

Configuration 49
User Manual Section 3
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Product Part No. Parameter Optional values Default value

Digital Output,
4 Points, Positive EP-2814
Logic, 230Vac, 1A

Digital Relay Ch 0 … Ch 3:
Output, Off (0) / On (1) Off
Substitute value
4 Points,
Positive Logic, EP-2714
24 – 220 Vdc/Vac,
6A,
2-Wire

Configuration 50
User Manual Section 3
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Product Part No. Parameter Optional values Default value

disabled (0) /
Diagnostic alarm disabled
enabled (1)
0.01ms [100 kHz] (0) /
0.017ms [50 kHz] (1) /
0.033ms [30 kHz] (2) /
Ch 0:
0.1ms [10 kHz] (3) / 0.01ms
Filter time signal A
0.2ms [5 kHz] (4) /
0.5ms [2 kHz] (5) /
1ms [1 kHz] (6)
0.01ms [100 kHz] (0) /
0.017ms [50 kHz] (1) /
0.033ms [30 kHz] (2)/
Ch 0:
0.1ms [10 kHz] (3) / 0.01ms
Filter time signal B
0.2ms [5 kHz] (4)/
0.5ms [2 kHz] (5) /
1ms [1 kHz] (6)
0.01ms (0) /
0.017ms (1) /
0.033ms (2) /
Ch 0: Filter time latch 0.1ms (3) / 0.01ms
0.2ms (4) /
0.5ms (5) /
1ms (6)
1 Channel High 0.01ms (0) /
Speed Counter, 0.017ms (1) /
EP-5111
AB 100 kHz 1 DO 0.033ms (2) /
24Vdc, 0.5A Ch 0: Filter time gate 0.1ms (3) / 0.01ms
0.2ms (4) /
0.5ms (5)/
1ms (6)
0.01ms (0) /
0.017ms (1) /
0.033ms (2) /
Ch 0: Filter time reset 0.1ms (3) / 0.01ms
0.2ms (4) /
0.5ms (5) /
1ms (6)
Ch 0: Process alarm HW disabled (0) /
disabled
gate open enabled (1)
Ch 0: Process alarm HW disabled (0) /
disabled
gate closed enabled (1)
Ch 0: Process alarm disabled (0) /
disabled
overflow enabled (1)
Ch 0: Process alarm disabled (0) /
disabled
underflow enabled (1)
Ch 0: Process alarm disabled (0) /
disabled
comp. value enabled (1)
Ch 0: Process alarm end disabled (0) /
disabled
value enabled (1)
Configuration 51
User Manual Section 3
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Product Part No. Parameter Optional values Default value

Ch 0: Process alarm latch disabled (0) /
disabled
value enabled (1)
count endless (0) /
once forward (1) /
once backwards (2)
once – no main direction
Ch 0: Counting mode (3) / count endless
periodic forward (4)/
periodic backwards (5)/
periodic – no main
direction (6)
disabled (0) /
higher equal comparison
value (1) /
Ch 0: Condition for DO disabled
lower equal comparison
value (2)/
equal comp value (3)
Ch 0: Counter dir. Signal B Disabled (0) /
disabled
inv. enabled (1)
disabled (0) /
high level (1) /
Ch 0: Reset disabled
rising edge 0-1 (2)/
rising edge once 0-1 (3)
Rotary transducer – single
(0) /
Rotary transducer –
double (1) /
Ch 0: Signal mode disabled
Rotary transducer –
quadruple (2) /
Pulse and Direction (3)/
disabled (4)
disabled (0) /
Ch 0: HW gate disabled
enabled (1)
Ch 0: Counter behavior Interrupt counting (0) /
interrupt counting
internal gate Cancel counting (1)
-2147483648
Ch 0: End value 2147483647
2147483647
-2147483648
Ch 0: Load value 0
2147483647
Ch 0: Hysteresis 0 … 255 0
0 … 255 [Input value x 2 =
Ch 0: Pulse duration output time; corresponds to 0
0 510ms]

Configuration 52
User Manual Section 3
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Product Part No. Parameter Optional values Default value

disabled (0) /
Diagnostic alarm disabled
enabled (1)
0.01ms [100 kHz] (0) /
0.017ms [50 kHz] (1) /
0.033ms [30 kHz] (2) /
Ch 0 ... Ch 1: Filter time
0.1ms [10 kHz] (3) / 0.01ms
signal A
0.2ms [5 kHz] (4) /
0.5ms [2 kHz] (5) /
1ms [1 kHz] (6)
0.01ms [100 kHz] (0) /
0.017ms [50 kHz] (1) /
0.033ms [30 kHz] (2) /
Ch 0 ... Ch 1: Filter time
0.1ms [10 kHz] (3) / 0.01ms
signal B
0.2ms [5 kHz] (4) /
0.5ms [2 kHz] (5) /
1ms [1 kHz] (6)
Ch 0 ... Ch 1: Process disabled (0) /
disabled
alarm overflow enabled (1)
Ch 0 ... Ch 1: Process disabled (0) /
disabled
alarm underflow enabled (1)
Ch 0 ... Ch 1: Process disabled (0) /
disabled
alarm comp. value enabled (1)
Ch 0 ... Ch 1: Process disabled (0) /
2 Channel High disabled
alarm end value enabled (1)
Speed Counter, EP-5112
count endless (0) /
AB 100 kHz
on–e - –orward (1) /
on–e - –ackwards (2) /
on–e - –o main direction (3)
Ch 0 ... Ch 1: Counting
/ count endless
mode
periodic forward (4) /
periodic backwards (5)/
periodic – no main direction
(6)
disabled (0) /
higher equal comparison
Ch 0 ... Ch 1: Comparison value (1) /
disabled
function lower equal comparison
value (2)/
equal comp value (3)
Ch 0 ... Ch 1: Counter dir. disabled (0) /
disabled
signal B inv. enabled (1)
Rotary transduc–r - –ingle
(0) /
Rotary transduc–r - –ouble
(1) /
Ch 0 ... Ch 1: Signal mode disabled
Rotary transduc–r - –
uadruple (2) /
Pulse and Direction (3)/
disabled (4)

Configuration 53
User Manual Section 3
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Product Part No. Parameter Optional values Default value

Ch 0 ... Ch 1: Counter Interrupt counting (0) /
interrupt counting
behavior internal gate Cancel counting (1)
-2147483648
Ch 0 ... Ch 1: Set value 0
2147483647
-2147483648
Ch 0 ... Ch 1: End value 2147483647
2147483647
Ch 0 ... Ch 1: -2147483648
0
Load value 2147483647
Ch 0 ... Ch 1: Hysteresis 0 ... 255 0
5μs [187 kHz] (0) /
11μs [94 kHz] (1) /
21μs [47 kHz] (2) /
43μs [23 kHz] (3) /
83μs [12 kHz] (4) /
167μs [6 kHz] (5) /
333μs [3 kHz] (6) /
Channel
667μs [1.5 kHz] (7) /
Frequency
EP-5212 Ch 0 ... Ch 1: Input filter 1ms [732 Hz] (8) / 5μs [187 kHz]
Measurement,
3ms [366 Hz] (9) /
100 kHz
5ms [183 Hz] (10) /
11ms [92 Hz] (11) /
22ms [46 Hz] (12) /
43ms [23 Hz] (13) /
91ms [11 Hz] (14) /
167ms [6 Hz] (15) /
333ms [3 Hz] (16)
2 Channels PWM
Output, Positive
EP-5422
Logic, 24Vdc,
0.5A Ch 0 … Ch 1: Period
1,202 ... 8,388,607 1,202
duration = n*20,83ns
2 Channels PWM
Output, Positive EP-5442
Logic, 24Vdc, 2A
Operating mode disabled / DO / DI / IO- disabled
Link
Port Cycle Free running / Fixed cycle Free running
/ Message sync
Port Cycle time [n x 0.1 4 … 1326 4
ms]
IO-Link
Communication IO-Link device check disabled / type compare / disabled
EP-5324 identical
module, 4
Channels DS activation state disabled / enabled / Clear disabled
Channel diagnostics disabled/ enabled disabled
Process data length input 0 Byte / 1 Byte / 2 Byte / … auto
/ 32 Byte / auto
Process data length 0 Byte / 1 Byte / 2 Byte / … auto
output / 32 Byte / auto

Configuration 54
User Manual Section 3
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Product Part No. Parameter Optional values Default value

disabled (0) /
50 Hz (1) /
Frequency suppression disabled
60 Hz (2) /
Average over 16 values (3)
Analog Input, 0 to 20 mA (0) /
4 Channels 4 to 20 mA (1) /
Voltage/ Current EP-3164 0 V to 10 V (2) /
16 Bits 10 to 10 V (3) /
2-, 3-, or 4-Wire Ch 0 … Ch 3:
0 to 5 V (4) / disabled
Measurement range
-5 to 5 V (5) /
1 to 5 V (6) /
2 to 10 V (7) /
disabled (8)
Analog Input,
4 Channels
Voltage/ Current EP-3124 Same as EP-3164 Same as EP-3164 Same as EP-3164
12 Bits
2-, 3-, or 4-Wire

Configuration 55
User Manual Section 3
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Product Part No. Parameter Optional values Default value

disabled (0) /
50 Hz (1) /
Frequency suppression disabled
60 Hz (2) /
Average over 16 values (3)
Ch 0 … Ch 3: disabled (0) /
disabled
Channel diagnosis enabled (1)
Ch 0 … Ch 3: disabled (0) /
Analog Input, 4 disabled
Diag short circuit 24V enabled (1)
Channels
Voltage/ Current Ch 0 … Ch 3: disabled (0) /
EP-3264 disabled
16 Bits with Diag line break 24V enabled (1)
Diagnostics 2-, 3- 0 to 20 mA (0) /
, or 4-Wire 4 to 20 mA (1) /
0 V to 10 V (2) /
-10 to 10 V (3) /
Ch 0 … Ch 3:
0 to 5 V (4) / disabled
Measurement range
-5 to 5 V (5) /
1 to 5 V (6) /
2 to 10 V (7) /
disabled (8)
disabled (0) /
50 Hz (1) /
Frequency suppression disabled
60 Hz (2) /
Average over 16 values (3)

Ch 0 … Ch 3: disabled (0) /
disabled
Channel diagnosis enabled (1)

Ch 0 … Ch 3: disabled (0) /
disabled
Diag short circuit 24V enabled (1)
Analog Input,
4 Channels
Ch 0 … Ch 3: disabled (0) /
Voltage/ Current disabled
16 Bits with Diag line break 24V enabled (1)
EP-3664
Diagnostics
2-, 3-, or 4-Wire,
Differential 0 to 20 mA (0) /
4 to 20 mA (1) /
0 V to 10 V (2) /
-10 to 10 V (3) /
Ch 0 … Ch 3:
0 to 5 V (4) / disabled
Measurement range
-5 to 5 V (5) /
1 to 5 V (6) /
2 to 10 V (7) /
disabled (8)

Configuration 56
User Manual Section 3
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Product Part No. Parameter Optional values Default value

disabled (0) /
50 Hz (1) /
Analog Input, 8 Frequency suppression disabled
60 Hz (2) /
Channels Current Average over 16 values (3)
EP-3368
16 Bits 2-, 3-, or
4-Wire 0 to 20 mA (0) /
Ch 0 … Ch 3:
4 to 20 mA (1) / disabled
Measurement range
disabled (2)
disabled (0) /
50 Hz (1) /
Frequency suppression disabled
60 Hz (2) /
Analog Input, Average over 16 values (3)
8 Channels K 0 ... K 7: disabled (0) /
Current 16 Bits disabled
EP-3468 Channel diagnosis enabled (1)
2-, 3-, or 4-Wire,
Channel K 0 ... K 7: Diag short disabled (0) /
disabled
Diagnostic circuit 24V enabled (1)
0 to 20 mA (0) /
Ch 0 … Ch 3:
4 to 20 mA (1) / disabled
Measurement range
disabled (2)
Ch 0 … Ch 3 S5 Data format (0) /
S7 Data format
Data format S7 Data format (1)
0 to 20 mA (0) /
4 to 20 mA (1) /
0 to 10 V (2) /
-10 to 10 V (3) /
Analog Input, Ch 0 … Ch 3
0 to 5 V (4) / disabled
4 Channels Output range
-5 to 5 V (5) /
Voltage/ Current EP-3164
1 to 5 V (6) /
16 Bits
2 to 10 V (7) /
2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
disabled (8)
depending on the channel
data format (S5/S7), refer
Ch 0 … Ch 3 Substitute
to the Tables “Value 0
value
range” within the module
descriptions

Configuration 57
User Manual Section 3
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Product Part No. Parameter Optional values Default value

Degree Celsius (0) /
Temperature unit Degree Fahrenheit (1) / Degree Celsius
Degree Kelvin (2)
PT100 -200 ... 850 °C (0)
PT200 -200 ... 850 °C (1)
PT500 -200 ... 850 °C (2)
PT1000 -200.. 850 °C (3)
NI100 -60 ... 250 °C (4) /
NI120 -80 ... 260 °C (5) /
NI200 -60 ... 250 °C (6) /
NI500 -60 ... 250 °C (7) /
NI1000 -60 ... 250 Degree (8)
Ch 0 … Ch 3 /
disabled
Measurement range Cu10 -100 ... 260 °C (9) /
Resistance 40 Ω (10) /
Resistance 80 Ω (11) /
Resistance 150 Ω (12) /
Resistance 300 Ω (13) /
Analog Input, 4 Resistance 500 Ω (14) /
Channels RTD 16 Resistance 1 kΩ (15)/
Bits with EP-3704 Resistance 2 kΩ (16)/
Diagnostics 2-, 3- Resistance 4 kΩ (17)/
, or 4-Wire disabled (18)
2-wire (0) /
Ch 0 … Ch 3 Connection
3-wire (1) / 2-wire
type
4-wire (2)
240ms (0) /
130ms (1) /
Ch 0 … Ch 3 Conversion 80ms (2) /
80ms
time 55ms (3) /
43ms (4) /
36ms (5)
Ch 0 … Ch 3 Channel disabled (0) /
disabled
diagnostics enabled (1)
Ch 0 … Ch 3 Limit value disabled (0) /
disabled
monitoring enabled (1)
Ch 0 … Ch 3
-32,768 ... 32,767 0
High limit value
Ch 0 … Ch 3
-32,768 ... 32,767 0
Low limit value

Configuration 58
User Manual Section 3
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Product Part No. Parameter Optional values Default value

Degree Celsius (0) /
Temperature unit Degree Fahrenheit (1) / Degree Celsius
Degree Kelvin (2)
TC Type J (0) /
TC Type K (1) /
TC Type N (2) /
TC Type R (3) /
TC Type S (4) /
TC Type T (5) /
TC Type B (6) /
TC Type C (7) /
TC Type E (8) /
Ch 0 … Ch 3 TC Type L (9) /
disabled
Measurement range TC Type U (10) /
± 15.625 mV (11) /
± 31.25 mV (12) /
± 62.5 mV (13) /
± 125 mV (14) /
± 250 mV (15) /
Analog Input, 4 ± 500 mV (16) /
Channels TC 16 ± 1,000 mV (17) /
Bits with EP-3804 ± 2,000 mV (18) /
Diagnostics 2-, 3- disabled (19)
, or 4-Wire internal (0) /
Ch 0 … Ch 3 external Channel 0 (1)/
Cold junction external Channel 1 (2) / internal
compensation external Channel 2 (3) /
external Channel 3 (4)
240ms (0) /
130ms (1) /
Ch 0 … Ch 3 Conversion 80ms (2) /
80ms
time 55ms (3) /
43ms (4) /
36ms (5)
Ch 0 … Ch 3 Channel disabled (0) /
disabled
diagnostics enabled (1)
Ch 0 … Ch 3 Limit value disabled (0) /
disabled
monitoring enabled (1)
Ch 0 … Ch 3
-32,768 ... 32,767 0
High limit value
Ch 0 … Ch 3
-32,768 ... 32,767 0
Low limit value
Current range 1 A (0) / 5 A (1) 1A
Power Harmonic select 1 ... 31 (1 ... 31) 1 = fundamental
Measurement
EP-1813 Voltage alarm lower limit disabled (0) / enabled (1) disabled
Module, 8
Channels enable
Voltage alarm lower limit 0 ... 300 V (0 ... 27648) 0 = 0x0

Configuration 59
User Manual Section 3
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Product Part No. Parameter Optional values Default value

Voltage alarm upper limit disabled (0) / enabled (1) disabled
enable
Voltage alarm upper limit 0 ... 300 V (0 ... 27648) 300 V = 0x6C00
Current alarm lower limit disabled (0) / enabled (1) disabled
enable
Current alarm lower limit 0 ... 5 A (0 ... 27648) 0 = 0x0
Current alarm upper limit disabled (0) / enabled (1) disabled
enable
Current alarm upper limit 0 ... 5 A (0 ... 27648) 100% = 0x6C00
Current imbalance alarm disabled (0) / enabled (1) disabled
enable
Current imbalance alarm 0 ... 100% (0 ... 16383) 100%
limit
Frequency alarm lower disabled (0) / enabled (1) disabled
limit enable
Frequency alarm lower 45 ... 65 Hz (5760 ... 8320) 45 Hz
limit
Frequency alarm upper disabled (0) / enabled (1) disabled
limit enable
Frequency alarm upper 45 ... 65 Hz (5760 ... 8320) 65 Hz
limit
Power factor alarm disabled (0) / enabled (1) disabled
enable
Power factor alarm lower 0 ... 1 (0 ... 16383) 0
limit
Diagnostic alarm disabled (0) / enabled (1) disabled
RMS voltage L1 (0) / L2 (1)
/ L3 (2)
RMS voltage average (3)
RMS current L1 (4) / L2 (5)
/ L3 (6)
RMS current average (7)
Peak current L1 (8) / L2 (9)
/ L3 (10)
Channel 0 ... 7: Measuring Line frequency (11)
value Harmonic power L1 (12) /
L2 (13) / L3 (14)
Harmonic reactive power
L1 (15) / L2 (16) / L3 (17)
Harmonic apparent power
L1 (18) / L2 (19) / L3 (20)
Power factor L1 (21) / L2
(22) / L3 (23)
Total power factor (24)

Configuration 60
User Manual Section 3
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Product Part No. Parameter Optional values Default value

Harmonic voltage L1 (25) /
L2 (26) / L3 (27)
Harmonic current L1 (28) /
L2 (29) / L3 (30)
Active power L1 (31) / L2
(32) / L3 (33)
Active power total (34)
Reactive power L1 (35) /
L2 (36) / L3 (37)
Reactive power total (38)
Apparent power L1 (39) /
L2 (40) / L3 (41)
Apparent power total (42)
Received act. energy
counter L1 (43) / L2 (44) /
L3 (45)
Delivered act. energy
counter L1 (46) /L2 (47) /
L3 (48)
React. energy leading
counter L1 (49) / L2 (50) /
L3 (51)
React. energy lagging
counter L1 (52) / L2 (53) /
L3 (54)
Status (55)
disabled (56) disabled

Configuration 61
 User Manual Section 3
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

3.10 Data Width of I/O Module, Dependent on

the Network Adapter Used

3.10.1 EPXPBS001

Configuration Parameter Diagnostics Process data

Part No. Module Input Output
Bytes Bytes Bytes
Bytes Bytes

EPXPBS001 PROFIBUS DP-V1 Network Adapter -- 8 47 -- --

Digital Input, 4 Points, Positive Logic

EP-1214 3 7 47 1 --
24Vdc, 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire

Digital Input, 8 Points, Positive Logic,

EP-1218 3 11 47 1 --
24Vdc 2-Wire

Digital Input, 8 Points, Positive Logic,

EP-1318 3 11 47 1 --
24Vdc 3-Wire

Digital Input, 16 Points, Positive Logic,

EP-125F 3 -- 47 2 --
24Vdc, 1-Wire

Digital Input, 4 Points, Positive Logic

EP-12F4 3 11 47 60 --
24Vdc, 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire, Time stamp

Digital Input, 16 Points, Negative Logic,

EP-153F 3 -- 47 2 --
24Vdc 1-Wire

Digital Input, 4 Points 110/230Vac

EP-1804 3 -- 47 1 --
(65 – 277Vac), 2-Wire, Isolated

Digital Output, 4 Points, Positive Logic

EP-2214 3 4 47 -- 1
24Vdc, 0.5A, 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire

Digital Output, 4 Points, Positive Logic

EP-2614 3 4 47 -- 1
24Vdc, 2.0A, 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire

Digital Output, 4 Points, Positive/

EP-2634 Negative Logic 24Vdc, 2.0A, 2-,3-, or 4- 3 4 47 -- 1
Wire

Digital Output, 8 Points, Positive Logic,

EP-2218 3 4 47 -- 1
24Vdc, 0.5A, 2-Wire

Digital Output, 16 Points, Positive Logic,

EP-225F 3 -- 47 -- 2
24Vdc, 0.5A, 1-Wire

Digital Output, 4 Points, Positive Logic,

EP-2814 3 4 47 -- 1
230Vac, 1A

Digital Output, 16 Points, Negative

EP-291F 3 -- 47 -- 2
Logic, 24Vdc 1-Wire

Digital Relay Output, 4 Points, Positive

EP-2714 3 4 47 -- 1
Logic, 24 - 220 Vdc/Vac, 6A, 2-Wire

Configuration 62
 User Manual Section 3
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Configuration Parameter Diagnostics Process data

Part No. Module Input Output
Bytes Bytes Bytes
Bytes Bytes

1 Channel High Speed Counter,

EP-5111 3 24 47 12 10
AB 100 kHz 1 DO 24Vdc, 0.5A

2 Channel High Speed Counter,

EP-5112 3 43 47 12 12
AB 100 kHz

2 Channel Frequency Measurement,

EP-5212 3 5 47 20 12
100 kHz

1 Channel Serial Communications, 232,

EP-5261 3 9 47 16 16
422, 485

1 Channel SSI Encoder, BCD or

EP-5311 3 11 47 6 0
Gray-Code Format, 5/24 Vdc

2 Channels PWM Output, Positive Logic,

EP-5422 3 11 47 4 12
24Vdc, 0.5 A

2 Channels PWM Output, Positive Logic,

EP-5442 3 11 47 4 12
24Vdc, 2 A

IO-Link Communication module, 4

EP-5324 3 29 47 1) 1)
Channels

Analog Input, 4 Channels

EP-3164 Voltage/Current 16 Bits 3 9 47 8 --
2-, 3-, or 4-Wire

Analog Input, 4 Channels Voltage/

EP-3264 Current 16 Bits with Diagnostics 3 11 47 8 --
2-, 3-, or 4-Wire

Analog Input, 4 Channels Voltage/

EP-3664 Current 16 Bits with Diagnostics 3 11 47 8 --
2-, 3-, or 4-Wire, Differential

Analog Input, 4 Channels Voltage/

EP-3124 3 9 47 8 --
Current 12 Bits 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire

Analog Input, 4 Channels TC 16 Bits

EP-3804 3 31 47 8 --
with Diagnostics 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire

Analog Input, 8 Channels Current

EP-3368 3 13 47 16 --
16 Bits 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire

Analog Input, 8 Channels Current

EP-3468 16 Bits 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire, Channel 3 13 47 16 --
Diagnostic

Analog Output, 4 Channels

EP-4164 Voltage/Current 16 Bits 3 15 47 -- 8
2-, 3-, or 4-Wire

Analog Output, 4 Channels Voltage/

EP-4264 Current 16 Bits with Diagnostics 3 16 47 -- 8
2-, 3-, or 4-Wire

Configuration 63
 User Manual Section 3
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Configuration Parameter Diagnostics Process data

Part No. Module Input Output
Bytes Bytes Bytes
Bytes Bytes

Analog Input, 4 Channels RTD 16 Bits

EP-3704 3 31 47 8 --
with Diagnostics 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire

Power Measurement Module, 8

EP-1813 3 30 47 16 16
Channels

EP-1901 1 Safe Feed-Input, 24 Vdc 3 -- 47 4 --

EP-1922 1 Safe Feed-Input, 24 Vdc 3 -- 47 4 --

EP-1902 2 Safe Feed-Inputs, 24 Vdc 3 -- 47 4 --

Max. data
244 244 244 244 244
(in bytes)

The available data lengths are 4 bytes, 8 bytes, 16 bytes & 32 bytes along with the 2 bytes process data for IO-
1)

Link module.

3.10.2 EPXPNS001/EPXPNS101

Part No. Module Configuration Parameter Diagnostics Process data

Bytes Bytes Bytes Input Output
Bytes Bytes
PROFINET IRT Network Adapter, 2 Cu
EPXPNS001
RJ45 Ports, 1024 bytes (Input + 4 10 47 4 4
EPXPNS101
Output)
Digital Input, 4 Points, Positive Logic
EP-1214 4 8 47 2 1
24Vdc, 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
Digital Input, 8 Points, Positive Logic,
EP-1218 4 12 47 2 1
24Vdc 2-Wire
Digital Input, 8 Points, Positive Logic,
EP-1318 4 12 47 2 1
24Vdc 3-Wire
Digital Input, 16 Points, Positive
EP-125F 4 -- 47 3 1
Logic, 24Vdc, 1-Wire
Digital Input, 4 Points, Positive Logic
EP-12F4 4 12 47 61 1
24Vdc, 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire, Time stamp
Digital Input, 16 Points, Negative
EP-153F 4 -- 47 3 1
Logic, 24Vdc 1-Wire
Digital Input, 4 Points 110/230Vac
EP-1804 4 -- 47 2 1
(65 – 277Vac), 2-Wire, Isolated
Digital Output, 4 Points, Positive
EP-2214 4 5 47 1 2
Logic 24Vdc, 0.5A, 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
Digital Output, 4 Points, Positive
EP-2614 4 5 47 1 2
Logic 24Vdc, 2.0A, 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire

Configuration 64
User Manual Section 3
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Part No. Module Configuration Parameter Diagnostics Process data

Bytes Bytes Bytes Input Output
Bytes Bytes
Digital Output, 4 Points,
EP-2634 Positive/Negative Logic 24Vdc, 2.0A, 4 5 47 1 2
2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
Digital Output, 8 Points, Positive
EP-2218 4 5 47 1 2
Logic, 24Vdc, 0.5A, 2-Wire
Digital Output, 16 Points, Positive
EP-225F 4 -- 47 1 3
Logic, 24Vdc, 0.5A, 1-Wire
Digital Output, 4 Points, Positive
EP-2814 4 5 47 1 2
Logic, 230Vac, 1A
Digital Output, 16 Points, Negative
EP-291F 4 -- 47 1 3
Logic, 24Vdc 1-Wire
Digital Relay Output, 4 Points,
EP-2714 Positive Logic, 24 - 220 Vdc/Vac, 6A, 2- 4 5 47 1 2
Wire
1 Channel High Speed Counter,
EP-5111 4 25 47 13 11
AB 100 kHz 1 DO 24Vdc, 0.5A
2 Channel High Speed Counter,
EP-5112 4 44 47 13 13
AB 100 kHz
2 Channel Frequency Measurement,
EP-5212 4 6 47 21 13
100 kHz
1 Channel Serial Communications,
EP-5261 4 10 47 17 17
232, 422, 485
1 Channel SSI Encoder, BCD or Gray-
EP-5311 4 12 47 7 1
Code Format, 5/24 Vdc
2 Channels PWM Output, Positive
EP-5422 4 12 47 5 13
Logic, 24Vdc, 0.5 A
2 Channels PWM Output, Positive
EP-5442 4 12 47 5 13
Logic, 24Vdc, 2 A
IO-Link Communication module, 4
EP-5324 4 30 47 1) 1)
Channels
Analog Input, 4 Channels
EP-3164 Voltage/Current 16 Bits 2-, 3-, or 4- 4 10 47 9 1
Wire
Analog Input, 4 Channels
EP-3264 Voltage/Current 16 Bits with 4 12 47 9 1
Diagnostics 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
Analog Input, 4 Channels Voltage/
EP-3664 Current 16 Bits with Diagnostics 4 12 47 9 1
2-, 3-, or 4-Wire, Differential
Analog Input, 4 Channels
EP-3124 Voltage/Current 12 Bits 2-, 3-, or 4- 4 10 47 9 1
Wire
Analog Input, 4 Channels TC 16 Bits
EP-3804 4 32 47 9 1
with Diagnostics 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire

Configuration 65
User Manual Section 3
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Part No. Module Configuration Parameter Diagnostics Process data

Bytes Bytes Bytes Input Output
Bytes Bytes
Analog Input, 8 Channels Current
EP-3368 4 14 47 17 1
16 Bits 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
Analog Input, 8 Channels Current
EP-3468 16 Bits 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire, Channel 4 16 47 17 1
Diagnostic
Analog Output, 4 Channels Voltage/
EP-4164 4 16 47 1 9
Current 16 Bits 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
Analog Output, 4 Channels Voltage/
EP-4264 Current 16 Bits with Diagnostics 4 17 47 1 9
2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
Analog Input, 4 Channels RTD 16 Bits
EP-3704 4 32 47 9 1
with Diagnostics 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
Power Measurement Module, 8
EP-1813 4 31 47 17 17
Channels
EP-1901 1 Safe Feed-Input, 24 Vdc 4 -- 47 5 1
2 Safe Feed-Inputs, 24 Vdc,
EP-1922 4 -- 47 5 1
Programmable Delay
EP-1902 2 Safe Feed-Inputs, 24 Vdc 4 -- 47 5 1
Max. data (in bytes) 260 4362 1408 512 512
The available data lengths are 4 bytes, 8 bytes, 16 bytes, 32 bytes, 64 bytes & 128 bytes along with the 2
1)

bytes process data for IO-Link module.

Configuration 66
User Manual Section 3
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

3.10.3 EPXETC001

Part No. Module Configuration Parameter Diagnostics Process data

Bytes Bytes Bytes Input Output
Bytes Bytes
EtherCAT Network Adapter, 2 Cu
EPXETC001 RJ45 Ports, 1024 bytes (Input + 256 4096 3328 1024 1024
Output)
Digital Input, 4 Points, Positive Logic
EP-1214 4 4 47 1 --
24Vdc, 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
Digital Input, 8 Points, Positive
EP-1218 4 8 47 1 --
Logic, 24Vdc 2-Wire
Digital Input, 8 Points, Positive
EP-1318 4 8 47 1 --
Logic, 24Vdc 3-Wire
Digital Input, 16 Points, Positive
EP-125F 4 -- 47 2 --
Logic, 24Vdc, 1-Wire
Digital Input, 4 Points, Positive Logic
EP-12F4 4 1 47 61 1
24Vdc, 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire, Time stamp
Digital Input, 16 Points, Negative
EP-153F 4 -- 47 3 --
Logic, 24Vdc 1-Wire
Digital Input, 4 Points 110/230Vac
EP-1804 4 4 47 2 --
(65 – 277Vac), 2-Wire, Isolated
Digital Output, 4 Points, Positive
EP-2214 4 1 47 1 1
Logic 24Vdc, 0.5A, 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
Digital Output, 4 Points, Positive
EP-2614 4 1 47 1 1
Logic 24Vdc, 2.0A, 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
Digital Output, 4 Points,
EP-2634 Positive/Negative Logic 24Vdc, 2.0A, 4 62 47 1 1
2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
Digital Output, 8 Points, Positive
EP-2218 4 1 47 1 1
Logic, 24Vdc, 0.5A, 2-Wire
Digital Output, 16 Points, Positive
EP-225F 4 -- 47 1 2
Logic, 24Vdc, 0.5A, 1-Wire
Digital Output, 4 Points, Positive
EP-2814 4 1 47 1 1
Logic, 230Vac, 1A
Digital Output, 16 Points, Negative
EP-291F 4 -- 47 1 2
Logic, 24Vdc 1-Wire
Digital Relay Output, 4 Points,
EP-2714 Positive Logic, 24 - 220 Vdc/Vac, 6A, 4 1 47 1 1
2-Wire
1 Channel High Speed Counter,
EP-5111 4 82 47 13 10
AB 100 kHz 1 DO 24Vdc, 0.5A
2 Channel High Speed Counter,
EP-5112 4 97 47 13 12
AB 100 kHz
2 Channel Frequency Measurement,
EP-5212 4 6 47 21 12
100kHz

Configuration 67
User Manual Section 3
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Part No. Module Configuration Parameter Diagnostics Process data

Bytes Bytes Bytes Input Output
Bytes Bytes
1 Channel Serial Communications,
EP-5261 4 10 47 17 16
232, 422, 485
1 Channel SSI Encoder, BCD or Gray-
EP-5311 4 11 47 7 --
Code Format, 5/24 Vdc
2 Channels PWM Output, Positive
EP-5422 4 8 47 4 12
Logic, 24Vdc, 0.5 A
2 Channels PWM Output, Positive
EP-5442 4 8 47 4 12
Logic, 24Vdc, 2 A
IO-Link Communication module, 4
EP-5324 -- -- 47 19 18
Channels
Analog Input, 4 Channels
EP-3164 Voltage/Current 16 Bits 2-, 3-, or 4- 4 6 47 8 --
Wire
Analog Input, 4 Channels
EP-3264 Voltage/Current 16 Bits with 4 8 47 8 --
Diagnostics 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
Analog Input, 4 Channels Voltage/
EP-3664 Current 16 Bits with Diagnostics 4 21 47 9 -
2-, 3-, or 4-Wire, Differential
Analog Input, 4 Channels
EP-3124 Voltage/Current 12 Bits 2-, 3-, or 4- 4 6 47 8 --
Wire
Analog Input, 4 Channels TC 16 Bits
EP-3804 4 28 47 8 --
with Diagnostics 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
Analog Input, 8 Channels Current 16
EP-3368 4 17 20 17 --
Bits 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
Analog Input, 8 Channels Current 16
EP-3468 Bits 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire, Channel 4 33 20 17 --
Diagnostic
Analog Output, 4 Channels Voltage/
EP-4164 4 12 47 1 8
Current 16 Bits 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
Analog Output, 4 Channels Voltage/
EP-4264 Current 16 Bits with Diagnostics 4 13 47 1 8
2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
Analog Input, 4 Channels RTD 16
EP-3704 4 28 47 8 --
Bits with Diagnostics 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
Power Measurement Module, 8
EP-1813 4 -- 47 17 16
Channels
EP-1901 1 Safe Feed-Input, 24 Vdc 4 -- 47 4 --
2 Safe Feed-Inputs, 24 Vdc,
EP-1922 4 -- 47 4 --
Programmable Delay
EP-1902 2 Safe Feed-Inputs, 24 Vdc 4 -- 47 4 --

Configuration 68
User Manual Section 3
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Part No. Module Configuration Parameter Diagnostics Process data

Bytes Bytes Bytes Input Output
Bytes Bytes
1514 per 1514 per 1514 per 1024 1024
Max. data (in bytes) message + message + message +
CoE CoE CoE

3.10.4 EPXEIP001

Part No. Module Configuration Parameter Diagnostics Process data

Bytes Bytes Bytes Input Output
Bytes Bytes
EPXEIP001 EtherNet/IP Network Adapter 8 -- -- 2/101) 2/101)
Digital Input, 4 Points, Positive Logic
EP-1214 4 4 47 1 --
24Vdc, 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
Digital Input, 8 Points, Positive
EP-1218 4 8 47 1 --
Logic, 24Vdc 2-Wire
Digital Input, 8 Points, Positive
EP-1318 4 8 47 1 --
Logic, 24Vdc 3-Wire
Digital Input, 16 Points, Positive
EP-125F 4 -- 47 2 --
Logic, 24Vdc, 1-Wire
Digital Input, 4 Points, Positive Logic
EP-12F4 4 8 47 60 --
24Vdc, 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire, Time stamp
Digital Input, 16 Points, Negative
EP-153F 4 -- 47 2 --
Logic, 24Vdc 1-Wire
Digital Input, 4 Points 110/230Vac
EP-1804 4 -- 47 1 --
(65 – 277Vac), 2-Wire, Isolated
Digital Output, 4 Points, Positive
EP-2214 4 1 47 -- 1
Logic 24Vdc, 0.5A, 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
Digital Output, 4 Points, Positive
EP-2614 4 1 47 -- 1
Logic 24Vdc, 2.0A, 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
Digital Output, 4 Points,
EP-2634 Positive/Negative Logic 24Vdc, 2.0A, 4 1 47 -- 1
2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
Digital Output, 8 Points, Positive
EP-2218 4 1 47 -- 1
Logic, 24Vdc, 0.5A, 2-Wire
Digital Output, 16 Points, Positive
EP-225F 4 -- 47 -- 2
Logic, 24Vdc, 0.5A, 1-Wire
Digital Output, 4 Points, Positive
EP-2814 4 1 47 -- 1
Logic, 230Vac, 1A
Digital Output, 16 Points, Negative
EP-291F 4 -- 47 -- 2
Logic, 24Vdc 1-Wire
Digital Relay Output, 4 Points,
EP-2714 Positive Logic, 24 - 220 Vdc/Vac, 6A, 4 1 47 -- 1
2-Wire

Configuration 69
User Manual Section 3
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Part No. Module Configuration Parameter Diagnostics Process data

Bytes Bytes Bytes Input Output
Bytes Bytes
1 Channel High Speed Counter,
EP-5111 4 21 47 12 10
AB 100 kHz 1 DO 24Vdc, 0.5A
2 Channel High Speed Counter,
EP-5112 4 40 47 12 12
AB 100 kHz
2 Channel Frequency Measurement,
EP-5212 4 2 47 20 12
100kHz
1 Channel Serial Communications,
EP-5261 4 6 47 16 16
232, 422, 485
1 Channel SSI Encoder, BCD or Gray-
EP-5311 4 8 47 6 0
Code Format, 5/24 Vdc
2 Channels PWM Output, Positive
EP-5422 4 8 47 4 12
Logic, 24Vdc, 0.5 A
2 Channels PWM Output, Positive
EP-5442 4 8 47 4 12
Logic, 24Vdc, 2 A
IO-Link Communication module, 4
EP-5324 2)
Channels
Analog Input, 4 Channels
EP-3164 Voltage/Current 16 Bits 2-, 3-, or 4- 4 6 47 8 --
Wire
Analog Input, 4 Channels
EP-3264 Voltage/Current 16 Bits with 4 8 47 8 --
Diagnostics 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
Analog Input, 4 Channels Voltage/
EP-3664 Current 16 Bits with Diagnostics 4 8 47 8 -
2-, 3-, or 4-Wire, Differential
Analog Input, 4 Channels
EP-3124 Voltage/Current 12 Bits 2-, 3-, or 4- 4 6 47 8 --
Wire
Analog Input, 4 Channels TC 16 Bits
EP-3804 4 28 47 8 --
with Diagnostics 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
Analog Input, 8 Channels Current 16
EP-3368 4 10 47 16 --
Bits 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
Analog Input, 8 Channels Current 16
EP-3468 Bits 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire, Channel 4 12 47 16 --
Diagnostic
Analog Output, 4 Channels Voltage/
EP-4164 4 12 47 -- 8
Current 16 Bits 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
Analog Output, 4 Channels Voltage/
EP-4264 Current 16 Bits with Diagnostics 4 13 47 -- 8
2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
Analog Input, 4 Channels RTD 16
EP-3704 4 28 47 8 --
Bits with Diagnostics 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
Power Measurement Module, 8
EP-1813 4 27 47 16 16
Channels

Configuration 70
User Manual Section 3
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Part No. Module Configuration Parameter Diagnostics Process data

Bytes Bytes Bytes Input Output
Bytes Bytes
EP-1901 1 Safe Feed-Input, 24 Vdc 4 -- 47 4 --
2 Safe Feed-Inputs, 24 Vdc,
EP-1922 4 -- 47 4 --
Programmable Delay
EP-1902 2 Safe Feed-Inputs, 24 Vdc 4 -- 47 4 --
264 4096 3008 496/504 496/5041)
Max. data (in bytes) 1)

1)
Depending upon on the assembly used.
You can select the length of the process input data and process output data from 2 bytes to 128 bytes
2)

including the 2 Byte process data for IO-Link module using Class 67 (module parameter), instance (slot of the
EP-5324) Attribute 65 (length of input data) or Attribute 66 (length of output data).

Configuration 71
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Section 4: Detailed Descriptions of the

Fieldbus Network Adapters
4.1 Profibus DP Network Adapter EPXPBS001
The EPXPBS001 network adapter is a PROFIBUS-DP device certified by the
PROFIBUS user organization. The network adapter is the head module for
the RSTi-EP communication bus, to which up to 64 active RSTi-EP modules
can be connected. The PROFIBUS-DP network adapter has a Sub-D socket
and supports all services in accordance with the DP-V1 specification.

The network adapter can be accessed with a system-independent web

server application via the USB service interface. Thus, all information,
such as diagnostics, status values and parameters, can be read and all
connected modules can be simulated or forced.

The station’s main power supply is integrated in the network adapter.

Power is supplied via two 4-pole connectors, separated into the input and
output current paths.

Figure 17: Fieldbus Network Adapter EPXPBS001

Installation 72
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

4.1.1 LEDs

Figure 18: LED Status Indicators EPXPBS001

LED Status Indicators

LED Indication LED State/Description

PWR Power LED Green: Supply voltage connected
SF System fault Red: Configuration error, or error in the network adapter,
or error in a module, or there is a new diagnostic report
Red flashing: Station in Force mode
BF Bus fault Red: No connection to the fieldbus
Red flashing: Configuration error, no connection to the
control unit, or error in the parameter set or slave address
error or firmware update is running
MT Maintenance Yellow: Error on the system bus or fieldbus
Required

Installation 73
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

LED Indicators EPXPBS001

Figure 19: EXPXPBS001 LEDs

LED EPXPBS001
Green: Supply voltage > 18Vdc
Power Supply
Red: At least one current path < 18 V

3.1 Green: Input current path supply voltage > 18Vdc

3.2 Red: Input current path supply voltage < 18Vdc
3.3
3.4 Red: Internal fuse defective
4.1 Green: Output current path supply voltage > 18Vdc
4.2 Red: Output current path supply voltage < 18Vdc
4.3
4.4 Red: Internal fuse defective

For error messages, refer to Section 12, LED Indicators and

Troubleshooting.

4.1.2 Addressing

The network adapter on the PROFIBUS-DP is addressed via the two rotary
switches.

Note: A maximum of 125 addresses (1 to 125) can be assigned. Each address may be assigned only once
in the overall bus structure. Addresses 1 and 2 are generally used by the control systems. Bus
addresses 000 plus 126 and higher may not be used.
The most significant digit is set with rotary switch H, the least significant digit with rotary switch L.
The switches are labelled in the hexadecimal numbering system (0 to 9, A=10, B=11, C=12, … F =
15). A hexadecimal to decimal conversion table is provided in the annex.

Coding: Address = (H*16) + L

Installation 74
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Figure 20: Rotary Switch Default Setting EPXPBS001: Address = 3

Addressing examples:

Figure 21: Examples for Addressing the EPXPBS001

PROFIBUS address 15: H = 0, L = F

PROFIBUS address 112: H = 7, L = 0

PROFIBUS address 44: H = 2, L = C

Installation 75
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

4.1.3 Connection Diagrams

Figure 22: Connection Diagram EPXPBS001

Installation 76
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Figure 23: Block Diagram EPXPBS001

CAUTION
In case of a maximum power supply of >8 A and a maximum temperature of > +55°C (131 °F), all four
contacts must be connected with 1.5 mm² wiring.

Installation 77
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

4.1.4 Specifications: EPXPBS001

Specification Description
System data
Connection 9-pole SUB-D socket
Fieldbus protocol PROFIBUS-DP V1
Input data width max. 244 bytes
Output data width max. 244 bytes
Process image
Parameter data max. 244 bytes
Diagnostic data max. 244 bytes
Number of modules Max. 64 active
Configuration interface Micro USB 2.0
Fieldbus Max. 12 Mbps
Transfer rate
RTSi-EP system bus Max. 48 Mbps
Supply
Supply voltage for system and inputs 20.4V – 28.8V
Supply voltage for outputs 20.4V – 28.8V
Max. feed-in current for input modules 10 A
Max. feed-in current for output modules 10 A
Current consumption from system 100 mA
current path ISYS
Connection data
Type of connection Spring style
Conductor cross-section Single-wired, fine-wired 0.14 – 1.5 mm2 (AWG 16
– 26)

Weight
Operating temperature -20°C to +60°C (-4 °F to +140 °F)
Storage temperature -40°C to +85°C (-40 °F to +185 °F)
Air humidity (operation/transport) 5% to 95%, noncondensing as per DIN EN 61131-2
Width 52 mm (2.05 in)
Depth 76 mm (2.99 in)
Height 120 mm (4.72 in)
Weight 223 g (7.87 oz)
The GSD file is available on the Support website
https://www.emerson.com/Industrial-
Automation-Controls/support for download and
Configuration import into PAC Machine Edition. The GSD
supporting a firmware release is part of the
firmware upgrade kit, also available on the
Support website.
General data: refer to Section 1.3, General Technical Data for the Fieldbus Network Adapter.

Installation 78
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

4.1.5 Modifiable Parameters EPXPBS001

Parameter Additional explanations Optional values Default

IP address USB port †
192.168.1.202; 192.168.2.202, 192.168.1.202
192.168.3.202, 192.168.4.202,
192.168.5.202
DP-Alarm mode V0 / V1 V1
DP alarm mode V0 For mode V0, the alarm triggers are set in the parameter data.
Diagnostic alarm These switches are always enabled / disabled disabled
Process alarm selectable, but they only have enabled / disabled disabled
Hot-plug alarm a function in mode V0. enabled / disabled enabled
Diagnostic messages are
generated which are not
acknowledged by the PLC.
DP alarm mode V1 In mode V1, the alarm triggers are set in the engineering environment.
Diagnostic alarm These switches can be enabled / disabled disabled
Process alarm selected only in mode V1, in V0 enabled / disabled disabled
Hot-plug alarm they are inactive. Diagnostic enabled / disabled enabled
messages are generated
which are acknowledged by
the PLC.
Identifier-related A diagnostic block is attached enabled / disabled enabled
diagnosis to the diagnostic message.
Channel-related A diagnostic block is attached enabled / disabled enabled
diagnosis to the diagnostic message.
Module status A diagnostic block is attached enabled / disabled enabled
to the diagnostic message.
Data format Motorola / Intel Motorola
Output behavior All outputs off / activate All outputs off
fieldbus error replacement values / retain
last value
Module behavior on hot Continue data exchange / Continue data
swap behavior as with fieldbus exchange
error
†
Change requires restart of the network adapter.

Installation 79
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

4.1.6 Supported Modules and Power Supplies

The following modules can be used with the current release of the RSTi-EP
Profibus Network Adaptor.

Catalog Module Description

Number
Digital Input Modules
EP-1214 Digital Input, 4 Points, Positive Logic 24Vdc, 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
EP-1218 Digital Input, 8 Points, Positive Logic, 24Vdc 2-Wire
EP-1318 Digital Input, 8 Points, Positive Logic, 24Vdc 3-Wire
EP-125F Digital Input, 16 Points, Positive Logic, 24Vdc, 1-Wire
EP-12F4 Digital Input, 4 Points, Positive Logic, 24Vdc, 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire, Time stamp
EP-153F Digital Input, 16 Points, Negative Logic, 24Vdc 1-Wire
EP-1804 Digital Input, 4 Points 110/230Vac (65 – 277Vac), 2-Wire, Isolated
Digital Output Modules
EP-2214 Digital Output, 4 Points, Positive Logic 24Vdc, 0.5A, 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
EP-2614 Digital Output, 4 Points, Positive Logic 24Vdc, 2.0A, 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
EP-2634 Digital Output, 4 Points, Positive/Negative Logic 24Vdc, 2.0A, 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
EP-2218 Digital Output, 8 Points, Positive Logic, 24Vdc, 0.5A, 2-Wire
EP-225F Digital Output, 16 Points, Positive Logic, 24Vdc, 0.5A, 1-Wire
EP-291F Digital Output, 16 Points, Negative Logic, 24Vdc 1-Wire
Digital Relay Output Modules
EP-2714 Digital Relay Output, 4 Points, Positive Logic, 24 -–220 Vdc/Vac, 6A, 2-Wire
EP-2814 Solid-state Relay Output Module
Analog Input Modules
EP-3164 Analog Input, 4 Channels Voltage/Current 16 Bits 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
EP-3264 Analog Input, 4 Channels Voltage/Current 16 Bits with Diagnostics 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
EP-3664 Analog Input, 4 Channels Voltage/ Current 16 Bits with Diagnostics 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire,
Differential
EP-3124 Analog Input, 4 Channels Voltage/Current 12 Bits 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
EP-3368 Analog Input, 8 Channels Current 16 Bits 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
EP-3468 Analog Input, 8 Channels Current 16 Bits 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire, Channel Diagnostic
EP-3704 Analog Input, 4 Channels RTD 16 Bits with Diagnostics 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
EP-3804 Analog Input, 4 Channels TC 16 Bits with Diagnostics 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
EP-1813 Power Measurement Module, 8 Channels
Analog Output Modules
EP-4164 Analog Output, 4 Channels Voltage/Current 16 Bits 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
EP-4264 Analog Output, 4 Channels Voltage/Current 16 Bits with Diagnostics 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
Specialty Modules
EP-5111 1 Channel High Speed Counter, AB 100 kHz 1 DO 24Vdc, 0.5A
EP-5112 2 Channel High Speed Counter, AB 100 kHz
Installation 80
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Catalog Module Description

Number
EP-5212 2 Channel Frequency Measurement, 100 kHz
EP-5261 1 Channel Serial Communications, 232, 422, 485
EP-5311 1 Channel SSI Encoder, BCD or Gray-Code Format, 5/24 Vdc
EP-5422 2 Channels PWM Output, Positive Logic, 24Vdc, 0.5 A
EP-5442 2 Channels PWM Output, Positive Logic, 24Vdc, 2 A
EP-5324 IO-Link Communication module, 4 Channels
Power Feed Modules for Input Current Path
EP-7631 Power Module, 1 Channel 24Vdc Input Flow 10A
Power Feed Modules for Output Current Path
EP-7641 Power Module, 1 Channel 24Vdc Output Flow 10A
Safe Feed-input Modules
EP-1901 1 Safe Feed-Input, 24 Vdc
EP-1902 2 Safe Feed-Inputs, 24 Vdc, Programmable Delay
EP-1922 2 Safe Feed-Inputs, 24 Vdc
Potential Distribution Modules
EP-711F Power Module, 16 Channels 24Vdc Potential Distribution +24 Vdc from Input Current
Path
EP-751F Power Module, 16 Channels 24Vdc Potential Distribution +24 Vdc from Output Current
Path
EP-700F Power Module, 16 Channels 24Vdc Potential Distribution Functional Earth
EP-710F Power Module, 16 Channels 24Vdc Potential Distribution +0Vdc from Input Current Path
EP-750F Power Module, 16 Channels 24Vdc Potential Distribution +0Vdc from Output Current
Path

Installation 81
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

4.2 PROFINET IRT/RT Network Adapter

EPXPNS001/EPXPNS101
The EPXPNS001 PROFINET Scanner is a PROFINET I/O device certified by
the PROFINET user organization.

The EPXPNS101 PROFINET Scanner is a PROFINET I/O device supporting

Type S1 PROFINET Simplex and Type S2 PROFINET System redundancy.

The network adapter is the head-end module for the RSTi-EP system bus,
to which up to 64 active RSTi-EP modules can be connected. The
PROFINET network adapter has two Ethernet ports, and an integrated
switch.

The PROFINET Scanner can be accessed with a system-independent web

server application via the USB service interface or the Ethernet. Thus, all
information, such as diagnostics, status values and parameters, can be
read and all connected modules can be simulated or forced.

The station’s main power supply is integrated in the PROFINET Scanner.

Power is supplied via two 4-pole connectors, separated into the input and
output current paths.

Figure 24: Network Adapter EPXPNS001/EPXPNS101

Installation 82
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

4.2.1 LEDs

Figure 25:LED Status Indicators EPXPNS001/EPXPNS101

LED Status Indicators EPXPNS001/ EPXPNS101

LED Indication LED State/Description

PWR Power LED Green: Supply voltage connected
Red: Configuration error, or error in the PROFINET
Scanner, or error in a module, or there is a new
SF System fault
diagnostic report
Red flashing: Station in Force mode
Red: No connection to the fieldbus
BF Bus fault Red flashing: Configuration error, no connection to
the control unit, or error in the parameter set
Maintenance Yellow: Error on the system bus or the fieldbus
MT
Required
Green: Connection established between port 1 of the
LINK 1 Connection
PROFINET Scanner and another field device
ACT 1 Active Yellow flashing: Data being exchanged on port 1
Green: Connection established between port 2 of the
LINK 2 Connection
PROFINET Scanner and another field device
ACT 2 Active Yellow flashing: Data being exchanged on port 2

Installation 83
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

LED Indicators

Figure 26: EPXPNS001 LEDs

LED EPXPNS001/ EPXPNS101

Power Green: Supply voltage > 18Vdc
Supply Red: At least one current path < 18 V

3.1 Green: Input current path supply voltage > 18Vdc

3.2 Red: Input current path supply voltage < 18Vdc
3.3
3.4 Red: Internal fuse defective
4.1 Green: Output current path supply voltage > 18Vdc
4.2 Red: Output current path supply voltage < 18Vdc
4.3
4.4 Red: Internal fuse defective

For error messages, refer to Section 12, LED Indicators and Troubleshooting.

Installation 84
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

4.2.2 Connection Diagrams

Figure 27: Connection Diagram EXPNS001/EXPNS101

CAUTION
In case of a maximum power supply of >8 A and a maximum temperature of > +55°C (131 °F), all four
contacts must be connected with 1.5 mm² wiring.

Figure 28: Block Diagram EPXPN Specifications: EPXPNS001/ EPXPNS101

Installation 85
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

4.2.3 Specification: EPXPNS001/EPXPNS101

Specification Description
System data
Connection 2 x RJ-45
Fieldbus protocol PROFINET Version 2.3 Class C I/O Device (IRT, RT)
PROFINET System
Not supported
Redundancy Support
Application Relations
1 Simplex AR
Supported
Input data width max. 512 bytes
Output data width max. 512 bytes
Process image
Parameter data max. 4362 bytes
Diagnostic data max. 1408 bytes
Number of modules max. 64 active
Configuration interface Micro USB 2.0
Fieldbus Max. 100 Mbps
Transfer rate
RTSi-EP system bus Max. 48 Mbps
Fast start-up < 500ms With a maximum of 10 modules
Data format Default: Motorola Configurable: Intel
16 Input Status Bits
Status Bits
Refer -–Network Adaptor Input Status Data
PROFINET I/O Update Rate Configurable selections: 1ms, 2ms, 4ms, 8ms, 16ms, 32ms, 64ms, 128ms, 256ms and 512ms
Yes * [Minimum I/O Update Rate for bumpless operation in an MRP ring topology is 32ms and
Supports MRP
slower for EPXPNS001]
Supply
Supply voltage for system
20.4V – 28.8V
and inputs
Supply voltage for outputs 20.4V – 28.8V
Max. feed-in current for
10 A
input modules
Max. feed-in current for
10 A
output modules
Current consumption from
116 mA
system current path ISYS
Connection data
Type of connection Spring style
Conductor cross-section Single-wired, fine-wired 0.14 – 1.5 mm2 (AWG 26 – 16)
General data
Operating temperature -20°C to +60°C (-4 °F to +140 °F)
Storage temperature -40°C to +85°C (-40 °F to +185 °F)
Air humidity
5% to 95%, noncondensing as per DIN EN 61131-2
(operation/transport)
Width 52 mm (2.05 in)
Depth 76 mm (2.99 in)
Height 120 mm (4.72 in)
Weight 220 g (7.76 oz)

Installation 86
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Specification Description
Configuration The V2.3 GSDML file is available on the Support https://www.emerson.com/Industrial-
Automation-Controls/support for download and import into PAC Machine Edition. The GSDML
supporting a firmware release is part of the firmware upgrade kit, also available on the Support
website.

Installation 87
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Specification: EPXPNS101
Specification Description
System data
Connection 2 x RJ-45
Fieldbus protocol PROFINET Version 2.3 Class C I/O Device (RT Only)
PROFINET System Redundantly controlled operation conforms to PROFINET V2.3 Type S-2 System
Redundancy Support Redundancy
Application Relations 1 Simplex AR or 1 SR-AR set made of 2 SR-ARs [Software Configurable Simplex or HSB
Supported CPU Redundancy]
Input data width max. 512 bytes
Output data width max. 512 bytes
Process image
Parameter data max. 4362 bytes
Diagnostic data max. 1408 bytes
Number of modules max. 64 active
Configuration interface Micro USB 2.0
Fieldbus Max. 100 Mbps
Transfer rate
RTSi-EP system bus Max. 48 Mbps
Data format Default: Motorola Configurable: Intel
16 Input Status Bits
Status Bits
Refer -Network Adaptor Input Status Data
Configurable selections: 1ms, 2ms, 4ms, 8ms, 16ms, 32ms, 64ms, 128ms, 256ms and
PROFINET I/O Update Rate
512ms
Yes * [Minimum I/O Update Rate for bumpless operation in an MRP ring topology is
Supports MRP
16ms and slower for EPXPNS101]
Supply
Supply voltage for system and
20.4V – 28.8V
inputs
Supply voltage for outputs 20.4V – 28.8V
Max. feed-in current for input
10 A
modules
Max. feed-in current for
10 A
output modules
Current consumption from
116 mA
system current path ISYS
Connection data
Type of connection Spring style
Conductor cross-section Single-wired, fine-wired 0.14 – 1.5 mm2 (AWG 26 – 16)
General data
Operating temperature -20°C to +60°C (-4 °F to +140 °F)
Storage temperature -40°C to +85°C (-40 °F to +185 °F)
Air humidity
5% to 95%, noncondensing as per DIN EN 61131-2
(operation/transport)
General data
Width 52 mm (2.05 in)
Depth 76 mm (2.99 in)
Height 120 mm (4.72 in)
Weight 220 g (7.76 oz)

Installation 88
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Specification Description
Configuration V2.3 GSDML file is available on the Support website
https://www.emerson.com/Industrial-Automation-Controls/support for download and
import into PAC Machine Edition. The GSDML supporting a firmware release is part of
the firmware upgrade kit available on the Support website.

4.2.4 Modifiable Parameters: EPXPNS001/EPXPNS101

Parameter Optional values Default

IP address† 4 numbers between 0 and 255
Subnet mask 4 numbers between 0 and 255
Gateway 4 numbers between 0 and 255
Webserver via Ethernet disabled / enabled disabled
IP address USB port 192.168.1.202; 192.168.2.202, 192.168.1.202
192.168.3.202, 192.168.4.202,
192.168.5.202
Process alarm disabled / enabled disabled
Diagnostic alarm disabled / enabled disabled
Type of diagnostic Extended channel diagnostic (short Extended channel diagnostic
diagnostic) (short diagnostic)
Manufacturer-specific diagnostic
(complete diagnostic)
Behavior of outputs on All outputs off / All outputs off
fieldbus errors Enable substitute value /
Hold last value
Module behavior on hot swap Continue data exchange / Continue data exchange
Behavior like fieldbus error
Data format Motorola / Intel Motorola
Lock force mode Force mode unlocked / Force mode unlocked
Force mode locked
Option Handling@ disabled / enabled disabled
Group Module Diagnostic disabled / enabled disabled
Alarm@
Reduce Return of Submodule disabled / enabled disabled
Alarm@
†
Change requires restart of the network adapter.
@
These parameters added from revisions: EPXPNS001-ABAE and EPXPNS101-AAAA.

Installation 89
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

4.2.5 Network Adaptor Input Status Data

The PROFINET Network Adaptor provides 16 bits of input status data.

The application program in the IO Controller system can monitor the
input status bits. The PROFINET Network Adaptor provides 16 bits of
input status provide information about the scanner alongside the I/O
module data. All status bits are active high.

The GSDML provides two options for IO-Device addition in configuration:

1. EPXPNS001/EPXPNS101 [ PROFINET SCANNER]

2. EPXPNS001/EPXPNS101 [PROFNET SCANNER] with Status Word

For getting the input status data, the user need to select
“EPXPNS001/EPXPNS101 [PROFNET SCANNER] with Status Word” option
while adding the IO-Device in the configurator.

Status Name Description

Bit #
0 Summarized module A value of 1 indicates that module diagnostic is present. A diagnosis is available
diagnosis for at least one module with diagnostics functionality.
1 Error bit 1 Not Used
2 Error bit 2 Not Used
3 System bus error A value of 1 indicates error on the system bus. Communication with the
connected modules is disrupted.
4 Port1 Link Up 1 = port is connected to another device and is operating correctly.
0 = port is not connected to another device, or the port has some sort of error
preventing communications.
5 Port2 Link Up
6 I/O Configuration error A value of 1 indicates that there is deviation in the configuration OR the module
list has changed OR the list of configured modules differs from the module list
detected by the Network Adaptor
7 Master Configuration error A value of 1 indicates Master configuration error. The list of configured
modules differs significantly from the module list detected by the adapter. No
process data can be exchanged with the modules.
8 MRP Enable Media redundancy is enabled.
9 MRP Role MRP role 0=client, 1= manager. The PROFINET adapter supports only the client
role
10 Force mode active A value of 1 indicates that Web server force mode is active -–Force mode was
activated through the web server, Process data cannot be exchanged between
the PLC and forced channels.
11 Error bit 11 Not Used
12 Error bit 12 Not Used
13 Voltage Vout Error A value of 1 indicates error in the supply voltage of outputs
14 Voltage Vin Error A value of 1 indicates error in the supply voltage of system and inputs
15 Error bit 15 Not Used

Installation 90
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

4.2.6 Hot Standby CPU Redundancy I/O Parameters

(EPXPNS101)

The “Redundancy” tab selects if the PNS is redundantly controlled. The

RSTi-EP PNS (EPXPNS101) supports PROFINET System Redundancy when
it is configured in an HSB CPU Redundancy system. The Programmer
automatically selects redundant control if user sets the “Redundancy”
parameter to “HSB CPU Redundancy”.

Figure 29 Redundancy Parameters

When the PNS is not configured in an HSB CPU Redundancy system, the
Programmer automatically selects simplex operation (non- redundant
control) by setting the “Redundancy Mode” parameter to “None”.

If desired, the user may configure a redundancy-capable PNS within an

HSB CPU Redundancy system for simplex operation (non-redundant
control) by changing the “Redundancy Mode” parameter on the
Redundancy tab form “HSB CPU Redundancy” to “None”.

Refer to the PACSystems Hot Standby CPU Redundancy User’’ Manual,

GFK-2308G or later, for detailed information on setting up a Hot Standby
Redundancy system.

Transfer List
All redundantly controlled I/O must be included in the CPU’’ I/O transfer
list. Note that once the HSB CPU Redundancy Mode is set, PAC Machine
Edition automatically expands the Primary CPU’’ input transfer list to
include all redundantly controlled PROFINET inputs as reference
addresses are being assigned. PAC Machine Edition also automatically
expands the Primary CPU’’ output transfer list to include all redundantly
controlled PROFINET outputs.

The configuration should be stored to both the Primary and Secondary

racks before attempting to control any I/O in the RSTi-EP PNS.

Installation 91
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Changing a Redundant PNS Configuration

Changes to the device’’ configuration on either the Primary while the
Secondary is running or the Secondary while the Primary is running will
cause a Loss of Device I/O fault on the controller that is being updated.
The controller with the changed configuration will be prevented from re-
connecting as long as a non-matching connection exists with the device
from any controller.

4.2.7 RSTi-EP PROFINET Channel Diagnostic Alarm

Reporting

RSTi-EP PROFINET channel specific diagnostic alarms, generally described

as, “Diagnostic Alarms” are fault messages associated with a channel or
I/O point. Diagnostic alarms are always transferred acyclically over the
PROFINET Network using record data communications over the Non Real
Time (NRT) channel to the PROFINET Controller, which then formats the
diagnostic alarms for entry into the appropriate PACSystems fault table in
the CPU. The diagnostic alarms can be configured to be reported in
different data formats depending upon what information is most
important to the user’s application. This section elaborates about,

a) Extended Channel Specific Diagnostic Alarm Format:-When

configured specific channel fault information is updated under “Fault
type” as a user readable text in IO fault table.

b) Vendor Specific Diagnostic Alarm Format:- When configured, generic

text “Manufacturer Specific Diagnosis” is shown in “Fault Type”.
Additional, data is provided as part of “Fault Extra Data” which needs
to be decoded as shown below.

Extended Channel Specific Diagnostics represents the fault in readable

text format. Vendor specific Diagnostics faults provides only first 21 bytes
of module diagnostic information as part of extra fault Data in IO fault
table for PAC controllers & this information should be decoded so that
user can program the logic accordingly. Vendor specific diagnostics may
provide 47 bytes of Diagnostic information with other Controllers.

Note: Settings for Individual channels needs to be enabled under “General Parameters”
Tab for enabling the diagnostics reporting to the controller. All the Channel specific
diagnostic alarm fault entries in IO fault table can be read using SVC_REQ20 & can
be reported to HMI as well.

Installation 92
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

The list of RSTi-EP modules that support Channel Level Diagonstics are:

• EP-1813
• EP-3264
• EP-3468
• EP-3664
• EP-3704
• EP-3804
• EP-4264
• EP-5111
• EP-5112
• EP-5324

Extended Channel Specific Diagnostic Alarm Format

In order to enable Extended Channel Diagnostics, Diagnostic Alarms
must be enabled on the Network Adapter as well as for each channel
from which the user wishes to receive Diagnostic Alarms. To enable
Extended Channel Diagnostics in the Network Adapter settings, under
the General Parameters tab, the user must set “Diagnostic Alarm” as
“enabled,” and “Type of Diagnostic” as “Extended Channel Diagnostic”.
Once enabled, Extended Channel Specific Diagnostic Alarm messages will
appear in the IO fault Table

Figure 30: Network Adapter Diagnostic option-Extended Channel Specific

Diagnostic

Installation 93
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

To enable Extended Channel Diagnostics on an EPXCPE200, the user will

need to look under the Settings tab in PME:

1. Right-click on the EPXCPE200 controller and click Configure.

2. Under the Settings tab, locate the Expansion Bus settings located at the
bottom of the list.
3. Change the parameter value of Diagnostic Alarm Logging to Extended
Channel Diagnostic.

Figure 31: Expansion Bus

The list below indicates the channel specific diagnostic alarms that may
be reported when Extended Channel Specifc Diagnostics are enabled:

• Overload: error will be reported when overload is detected in the IO channel.

• Line break sensor supply: error will be reported when Sensor cable is
disconnected from the channel.
• External short-circuit: error will be reported when there is a short on the
Power supply of the channel.
• Line-break signal: error will be reported when Sensor cable is disconnected
from the channel.
• Lower limit exceeded: error will be reported when the Sensosor
Input\Output value is lower than the threshold.
• Upper limit exceeded: error will be reported when the Sensosor
Input\Output value is Higher than the threshold.
• Process alarm lost-This
• Short Circuit: error wil be reported when there is a short on the Power
supply of the channel.
• Undervoltage:- error will be reported when there is a under voltage on the
supply of the channel.
• Overvoltage: error will be reported when there is a Over voltage on the
supply of the channel.
• Overtemperature:- error will be reported when there is a over tempaerature
caused on the internal component of the channel
• Power supply fault:-error will be reported when external power supply is not
connected to node.
• Parameter Error: will be reported when any error occurs in the configuration
of the module.

Installation 94
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Note: Few of the alarms can be enabled or disabled in the configuration under “General
Parameters” tab of the module & some of the alarms are by default enabled in the
module itself and are not available for configuration
For example, suppose there is an RSTi-EP node connected & configured
by a PACSystems PROFINET Controller and the RSTi-EP node consists of
one EP-3264 (4 channel Analog Input) and one EP-4264 (4 channel Analog
Output Module). The EP-3264 module is connected to an analog sensor
as shown in the figure below. On the PROFINET Network Adapter,
“Extended Channel Specific Diagnostics” are “enabled”. On the channel of
EP-3264 module, “Diagnostic Alarms” are “enabled”.

Figure 32: EP-3264 3-wire Connection Diagram

Now if sensor supply “AI 0” signal is disconnected from the connector of

the EP-3264, an “Extended Channel Specific Diagnostics, Diagnosis
Appears” will be recorded in IO Fault Table as “Fault Category” & “Line
Break" will be recorded as “Fault Type”.

Figure 33: IO Fault table Description- Extended Channel Specific Diagnostics

Installation 95
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

As shown in Figure 33, 21 bytes of Fault Extra Data is provided in IO Fault

table as a part of Extended Channel Diagnostic Data.

The data displayed for Alarm Specifier, Channel Properties, Channel Error
type, Extended Channel error type, Extended Channel Address vaule,
Extra Data & Maintenance Status are based on Standard PROFINET
protocol specifications.2

In this example, the decoding of the Fault Extra Data is as follows:

a8 05 28 05 00 06 01 f4 08 15 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

Fault Extra Data Bytes Value in HEX Field Name

0 a8 Alarm Specifier
1 05
2 28 Channel Properties
3 05
4 00 Channel Error Type
5 06
6 01 Extended Channel Error Type
7 f4
8 08 Extended Channel Address Value
9 15
10 00
11 00
12 00 Extra Data
13 00
14 00
15 00
16 00
17 00 Maintenance Status
18 00
19 00
20 00

Now if sensor supply “AI 0” is repaired or re-connected back to EP-3264, a

Extended Channel Specific Diagnostics, Diagnosis Disappears: Line break
Fault message will be recorded in the IO Fault Table.

2
For CPE200 Series controllers, local backplane module fault logs will not include PROFINET specific codes. Instead, the
Fault Extra Data will display mostly zeros. The field "Channel Error Type" may be non-zero, but all other bytes will be 0. Fault
location will only include rack and slot and not the device, slot, sublsot fields used by PROFINET. For example, a module
logging a fault in slot 5 will have a "Loc" of "0.5". The fields for "Lan Name:" and "Device Name:" are blank for EPXCPE. "I/O
Bus" and "Bus Address" field will report "N/A”.

Installation 96
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Figure 34: IO Fault table-Line Break PROFINET Fault Disappears

Vendor Specific Diagnostics Alarms

In order to enable Vendor Specific Diagnostic Alarms, “Diagnostic Alarms”
must be enabled on the Network Adapter as well as for each channel
from which the user wishes to receive “Diagnostic Alarms”. To enable
“Vendor Specific Diagnostic Alarms” in the Network Adapater settings,
under the General Parameters tab, the user must set “Diagnostic Alarm”
as “enabled,” and “Type of Diagnostic” as “Vendor Specific Diagnostic
Alarms”. Once enabled, Extended Channel Specific Diagnostic Alarm
messages will appear in the IO fault Table

Figure 35: Network Adapter Diagnostic option-Vendor Specific

Diagnostic

The list of RSTi-EP modules that support Channel Level Diagonstics are:

• EP-3264
• EP-3468
• EP-3664
• EP-3704
• EP-3804
• EP-4264
• EP-5111
• EP-5112
• EP-5261

Installation 97
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

The diagnostic alarms appear in PAC Machine Edition-> IO fault Tables. If

Network Adapter is configured as Vendor Specific Diagnostic, the fault
table shows Fault category as Manufacturer Specific Diagnosis & 17 bytes
of Extra Fault Data is provided in IO fault table.

Note: Settings for Individual channels needs to be enabled under “General Parameters”
Tab for enabling the diagnostics reporting to the controller. All the Channel specific
diagnostic alarm fault entries in IO fault table can be read using SVC_REQ20 & can
be reported to HMI as well.
For Example, RSTi-EP node is connected & configured with PLC controller
& RSTi-EP node consists of EP-3264 (4 channel Analog Input) & EP-4264 ( 4
channel Analog Output Module). EP-3264 module is connected with AI
Sensor Channel specific diagnostics are enabled. On the PROFINET
Network adapter, Vendor Specific Diagnostics is enabled.

Figure 36: IO Fault Table-Vendor Specific Diagnostics

As shown in Figure 36, 17 bytes of Fault Extra Data is provided in IO Fault

table as a part of Vendor Specific Diagnostic Data. 3

For Example, as per the above shown picture the Extra Fault Data is

b0 0b 01 fa 08 015 00 00 74 08 04 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

3
The CPE200 Series will set these first 4 bytes of extra data to 0. Per the table, the fields "Alarm Specifier" and "User
Structure identifier" will be 0 for CPE200 Series .

Installation 98
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Fault Value Field Name Description

Extra in
Data Byte HEX
0 B0
Alarm Specifier
1 0B
PROFNET Header bytes, as per standard PROFINET specifications
2 01
User structure
identifier
3 FA

4 08 Error indicator: Manufacturer Diagnostic data: byte 0, For example, IO Module

EP-3264 byte1 represents error indicator

bit 3 = 1 → Channel error

5 15 Module type: Manufacturer Diagnostic data: byte 1, For example, EP-3264 byte2
refers to Module Type

low nibble = 0x05 , high nibble = 0x01

6 00 Error byte 2 Manufacturer Diagnostic data: byte 2, For example, EP-3264 byte2
refers to error byte 2 which is reserved to 0.

7 00 Error byte 3 Manufacturer Diagnostic data: byte 3, For example, EP-3264 byte3
refers to error byte 3 which is reserved to 0.

Installation 99
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Fault Value Field Name Description

Extra in
Data Byte HEX
8 74 Channel type Manufacturer Diagnostic data: byte 4, For example, EP-3264 byte5
refers to Channel Type wherein EP-3264 channel Type is 0x74

9 08 Diagnostic bits Manufacturer Diagnostic data: byte 5, For example, EP-3264 byte6
per channel refers to number of Diagnostic bits per Channel which is 8.

10 04 Number of Manufacturer Diagnostic data: byte 6, For example, EP-3264 byte7

channels: refers to number of channels, as per the above example the value
is 04, therefore number of channels are 4.

11 01 Channel error: Manufacturer Diagnostic data: byte 7, For example, EP-3264 byte7
refers to channel error & as per the above said example, the
value 01 represents bit0 =1.Therefore, Channel 0 has error.

12 00 Channel error Manufacturer Diagnostic data: byte 8, For example, EP-3264 byte 8
refers to channel error & as per the above said example, the
value is reserved to 00.

13 00 Channel error Manufacturer Diagnostic data: byte 9, For example, EP-3264 byte 9
refers to channel error & as per the above said example, the
value is reserved to 00.

14 00 Channel error Manufacturer Diagnostic data: byte 10, For example, EP-3264 byte
10 refers to channel error & as per the above said example, the
value is reserved to 00.

Installation 100
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Fault Value Field Name Description

Extra in
Data Byte HEX
15 10 Channel 0 error: Manufacturer Diagnostic data: byte 11,for example EP-3264
byte11 refers to channel 0 error & as per the above said example,
the value is 10.i.e, Bit4 =1, which indicates Line Break signal

16 00 Channel 1 error: Manufacturer Diagnostic data: byte 12,for example EP-3264

byte12 refers to channel 1 error & as per the above said example,
the value is 10.i.e, Bit4 =1, which indicates Line Break signal

17 00 Channel 2 error: Maintenance Diagnostic data: byte 13, refer Module specific
Diagnostic data

18 00 Channel 3 error: Maintenance Diagnostic data: byte 14, refer Module specific
Diagnostic data

Installation 101
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Fault Value Field Name Description

Extra in
Data Byte HEX

19 00 Channel 4 error Maintenance Diagnostic data: byte 15, refer Module specific
Diagnostic data

20 00 Channel 5 error Maintenance Diagnostic data: byte 16,

For EP-3264, BYTE17 refers to the Channel5 error.

Similar to this, refer to respective Module specific diagonstics for other IO

modules.

Now, Now if Sensor supply “AI 0” is re-connected back to EP-3264, Line

break Fault disappears message is shown in IO fault table.

Figure 37: IO Fault table-Line Break PROFINET Fault Disappears

Similarly other faults such as Parameter Error, Overload, Line break

sensor supply, External short-circuit, Line, break signal, Lower limit
exceeded, Upper limit exceeded,etc.can be obtained from fault extra
data.

Installation 102
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

4.2.8 Supported Modules and Power Supplies

The following modules can be used with the current release of the RSTi-
EP PROFINET Network Adaptor:

Catalog Number Module Description

Digital Input Modules
EP-1214 Digital Input, 4 Points, Positive Logic 24Vdc, 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
EP-1218 Digital Input, 8 Points, Positive Logic, 24Vdc 2-Wire
EP-1318 Digital Input, 8 Points, Positive Logic, 24Vdc 3-Wire
EP-125F Digital Input, 16 Points, Positive Logic, 24Vdc, 1-Wire
EP-12F4 Digital Input, 4 Points, Positive Logic 24Vdc, 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire, Time stamp
EP-153F Digital Input, 16 Points, Negative Logic, 24Vdc, 1-Wire
EP-1804 Digital Input, 4 Points 110/230Vac (65 – 277Vac), 2-Wire, Isolated
Digital Output Modules
EP-2214 Digital Output, 4 Points, Positive Logic 24Vdc, 0.5A, 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
EP-2614 Digital Output, 4 Points, Positive Logic 24Vdc, 2.0A, 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
EP-2634 Digital Output, 4 Points, Positive/Negative Logic 24Vdc, 2.0A, 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
EP-2218 Digital Output, 8 Points, Positive Logic, 24Vdc, 0.5A, 2-Wire
EP-225F Digital Output, 16 Points, Positive Logic, 24Vdc, 0.5A, 1-Wire
EP-291F Digital Output, 16 Points, Negative Logic, 24Vdc, 1-Wire
Digital Relay Output Modules
EP-2714 Digital Relay Output, 4 Points, Positive Logic, 24 -–220 Vdc/Vac, 6A, 2-Wire
EP-2814 Solid-state Relay Output Module
Analog Input Modules
EP-3164 Analog Input, 4 Channels Voltage/Current 16 Bits 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
EP-3264 Analog Input, 4 Channels Voltage/Current 16 Bits with Diagnostics 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
Analog Input, 4 Channels Voltage/ Current 16 Bits with Diagnostics 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire,
EP-3664
Differential
EP-3124 Analog Input, 4 Channels Voltage/Current 12 Bits 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
EP-3368 Analog Input, 8 Channels Current 16 Bits 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
EP-3468 Analog Input, 8 Channels Current 16 Bits 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire, Channel Diagnostic
EP-3704 Analog Input, 4 Channels RTD 16 Bits with Diagnostics 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
EP-3804 Analog Input, 4 Channels TC 16 Bits with Diagnostics 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
EP-1813 Power Measurement Module, 8 Channels
Analog Output Modules
EP-4164 Analog Output, 4 Channels Voltage/Current 16 Bits 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
EP-4264 Analog Output, 4 Channels Voltage/Current 16 Bits with Diagnostics 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
Specialty Modules
EP-5111 1 Channel High Speed Counter, AB 100 kHz 1 DO 24Vdc, 0.5A
EP-5112 2 Channel High Speed Counter, AB 100 kHz
EP-5212 2 Channel Frequency Measurement, 100 kHz
Installation 103
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Catalog Number Module Description

EP-5261 1 Channel Serial Communications, 232, 422, 485
EP-5311 1 Channel SSI Encoder, BCD or Gray-Code Format, 5/24 Vdc
EP-5422 2 Channels PWM Output, Positive Logic, 24Vdc, 0.5 A
EP-5442 2 Channels PWM Output, Positive Logic, 24Vdc, 2 A
EP-5324 IO-Link Communication module, 4 Channels
Power Feed Modules for Input Current Path
EP-7631 Power Module, 1 Channel 24Vdc Input Flow 10A
Power Feed Modules for Output Current Path
EP-7641 Power Module, 1 Channel 24Vdc Output Flow 10A
Safe Feed-input Modules
EP-1901 1 Safe Feed-Input, 24 Vdc
EP-1902 2 Safe Feed-Inputs, 24 Vdc, Programmable Delay
EP-1922 2 Safe Feed-Inputs, 24 Vdc
Potential Distribution Modules
Power Module, 16 Channels 24Vdc Potential Distribution +24 Vdc from Input Current
EP-711F
Path
Power Module, 16 Channels 24Vdc Potential Distribution +24 Vdc from Output
EP-751F
Current Path
EP-700F Power Module, 16 Channels 24Vdc Potential Distribution Functional Earth
Power Module, 16 Channels 24Vdc Potential Distribution +0Vdc from Input Current
EP-710F
Path
Power Module, 16 Channels 24Vdc Potential Distribution +0Vdc from Output Current
EP-750F
Path

Installation 104
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

4.3 EtherCAT® Network Adapter EPXETC001

Figure 38: EPXETC001

The EPXETC001 network adapter is an EtherCAT 4 device certified by the

EtherCAT Technology Group. The network adapter is the head module for
the RSTi-EP system bus, to which up to 64 active RSTi-EP modules can be
connected. The EtherCAT network adapter has two Ethernet ports and an
integrated switch.

The network adapter can be accessed with a system-independent web

server application via the USB service interface or the EtherCAT. Thus, all
information, such as diagnostics, status values and parameters, can be
read and all connected modules can be simulated or forced.

The station's main power supply is integrated in the network adapter.

Power is supplied via two 4-pole connectors, separated into the input and
output current paths.

4
EtherCAT® is registered trademark and patented technology, licensed by Beckhoff Automation GmbH, Germany
Installation 105
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Figure 39: Network Adapter EPXETC001

4.3.1 LEDs

Figure 40: LED Status Indicators

Installation 106
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

LED Indication LED State/Description

PWR Power LED Green: Supply voltage connected
Red: Configuration error, or error in the network adapter, or error in a
SF System Fault module, or there is a new diagnostic report
Red flashing: Station in Force mode
Red: No connection to the fieldbus
BF Bus fault Red flashing: Configuration error, no connection to the control unit, or
error in the parameter set
Maintenance
MT Yellow: Error on the system bus or fieldbus
Required
Connection/Activity Green: Connection established between port 1 of the network adapter and
L/A IN another field device
Green flashing: Data being exchanged on port 1
Connection/Activity Green: Connection established between port 2 of the network adapter and
LA
another field device
OUT
Green flashing: Data being exchanged on port 2
Off: INIT
Network adapter Green flashing: PRE-OPERATIONAL
RUN
state Green lights up briefly: SAFE-OPERATIONAL
Green: OPERATIONAL
Red: Critical error in the network adapter
Red lights up briefly: Error in network adapter application
ERROR Internal error
Red briefly lights up twice: Output Syncmanager Watchdog expired
Red flashing: Configuration error

Installation 107
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

LED Indicators

Figure 41: EPXETC001 LEDs

LED EPXETC001
Power Green: Supply voltage > 18Vdc
Supply Red: At least one current path < 18 V

3.1 Green: Input current path supply voltage > 18Vdc

3.2 Red: Input current path supply voltage < 18Vdc
3.3

3.4 Red: Internal fuse defective

4.1 Green: Output current path supply voltage > 18Vdc
4.2 Red: Output current path supply voltage < 18Vdc
4.3
4.4 Red: Internal fuse defective

For error messages, refer to Section 12, LED Indicators and

Troubleshooting.

4.3.2 Connection Diagrams

Figure 42: Connection Diagram EPXETC001

Installation 108
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

CAUTION
In case of a maximum power supply of >8 A and a maximum temperature of > +55°C (131
°F), all four contacts must be connected with 1.5 mm² wiring.

Figure 43: Block Diagram EPXETC001

Installation 109
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

4.3.3 Specifications: EPXETC001

Specifications Description
System data
Connection 2 x RJ-45
Fieldbus protocol EtherCAT
Process data max. 1024 bytes
Process image Parameter data max. 64*64 = 4 KB
Diagnostic data max. 64*50 = 3200 bytes
Number of modules max. 64 active
Configuration interface Micro USB 2.0
Fieldbus Max. 100 Mbps
Transfer rate
RTSi-EP system bus Max. 48 Mbps
Supply
Supply voltage for system and inputs 20.4V – 28.8V
Supply voltage for outputs 20.4V – 28.8V
Max. feed-in current for input modules 10 A
Max. feed-in current for output modules 10 A
Current consumption from system current
110 mA
path ISYS
Connection data
Type of connection Spring style
Conductor cross-section Single-wired, fine-wired 0.14 – 1.5 mm2 (AWG 26 – 16)
General data
Operating temperature -20°C to +60°C (-4 °F to +140 °F)
Storage temperature -40°C to +85°C (-40 °F to +185 °F)
Air humidity (operation/transport) 5% to 95%, noncondensing as per IEC 61131-2
Width 52 mm (2.05 in)
Depth 76 mm (2.99 in)
Height 120 mm (4.72 in)
Weight 227 g (8 oz)
Configuration ESI file is available on the Support website
https://www.emerson.com/Industrial-Automation-
Controls/support for download and import into Programmer
Tool which supports EtherCAT. The ESI supporting a firmware
release is part of the firmware upgrade kit, also available on
the Support website.

Installation 110
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

4.3.4 Modifiable Parameters for EPXETC001

Parameter Optional values Default

192.168.1.202; 192.168.2.202, 192.168.3.202,
IP address USB port † 192.168.4.202, 192.168.1.202
192.168.5.202
Process alarm disabled / enabled disabled
Diagnostic disabled / enabled disabled
All outputs off /
Behavior of outputs on fieldbus
Enable substitute value/ All outputs off
error
Hold last value
Continue data exchange /
Module behavior on hot swap Continue data exchange
Behavior like fieldbus error
Data format Motorola / Intel Motorola
Webserver via Ethernet disabled / enabled / enabled disabled / enabled
Adapter control Reserved Off
†
Change requires restart of the network adapter.

Installation 111
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

4.3.5 RSTi-EP Status Messages

In addition to the process input data a network adapter status word as

well as module status bytes are transferred to the SPS. Thus, diagnostics
and status messages can be read directly.

The network adapter status word describes the status of the RSTi-EP
station including the following information:

Network Adapter Status Bits EPXETC001

Bit Name Description

Summarized Module diagnostic is present. A diagnosis is available for at least one module
0
module diagnosis with diagnostics functionality.
1 Errorbit 1 Reserve bit 1, currently not used
2 Errorbit 2 Reserve bit 2, currently not used
Error on the system bus. Communication with the connected modules is
3 System bus error
disrupted.
4 Errorbit 4 Reserve bit 4, currently not used
5 Errorbit 5 Reserve bit 5, currently not used
Deviation in the configuration. The module list has changed. The list of
I/O-Configuration configured modules (Configured Module Ident List 0xF030) differs from the
6
error module list detected by the network adapter (Detected Module Ident List
0xF050).
Master configuration error. The list of configured modules (Configured
Module Ident List 0xF030) differs significantly from the module list detected
Master
7 by the network adapter (Detected Module Ident List 0xF050). No process data
configuration error
can be exchanged with the modules. The station switches into PRE-
OPERATIONAL state.
8 Errorbit 8 Reserve bit 8, currently not used
9 Errorbit 9 Reserve bit 9, currently not used
Web server Force mode is active. Force mode was activated through the web
10 Force mode active server. Process data cannot be exchanged between the EtherCAT master and
forced channels.
11 Errorbit 11 Reserve bit 11, currently not used
12 Errorbit 12 Reserve bit 12, currently not used
13 Voltage UOUT error Error in the supply voltage of outputs
14 Voltage UIN error Error in the supply voltage of system and inputs
15 Errorbit 15 Reserve bit 15, currently not used

Installation 112
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

4.3.6 Module Status Messages

A module status byte is added to each module’s process data (with the
exception of safe I/O modules). It describes the status of the module
including the following information:

Module Status Messages in an EPXETC001 Station

Status value Meaning

0x0 Plug-in station is undefined
0x1 Plug-in station = module OK
0x80 Plug-in station empty, module has been removed
0x81 Incorrect module plugged in

4.3.7 Module Diagnosis

The network adapter`s status word reveals whether there is a module

diagnosis. The history of the module diagnosis can be interrogated via
object 0x10F3. A ring buffer stores 20 diagnosis so that the current
diagnosis overwrites the oldest one (sub-index 06 to 19).

Figure 44: History of Module Diagnosis as Shown in TwinCat

Installation 113
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

4.3.8 Supported Modules and Power Supplies

The following modules can be used with the current release of the RSTi-
EP EtherCAT Network Adaptor:

Catalog
Module Description
Number
Digital Input Modules
EP-1214 Digital Input, 4 Points, Positive Logic 24Vdc, 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
EP-1218 Digital Input, 8 Points, Positive Logic, 24Vdc 2-Wire
EP-1318 Digital Input, 8 Points, Positive Logic, 24Vdc 3-Wire
EP-125F Digital Input, 16 Points, Positive Logic, 24Vdc, 1-Wire
EP-12F4 Digital Input, 4 Points, Positive Logic 24Vdc, 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire, Time stamp
EP-153F Digital Input, 16 Points, Negative Logic, 24Vdc, 1-Wire
EP-1804 Digital Input, 4 Points 110/230Vac (65 – 277Vac), 2-Wire, Isolated
Digital Output Modules
EP-2214 Digital Output, 4 Points, Positive Logic 24Vdc, 0.5A, 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
EP-2614 Digital Output, 4 Points, Positive Logic 24Vdc, 2.0A, 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
EP-2634 Digital Output, 4 Points, Positive/Negative Logic 24Vdc, 2.0A, 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
EP-2218 Digital Output, 8 Points, Positive Logic, 24Vdc, 0.5A, 2-Wire
EP-225F Digital Output, 16 Points, Positive Logic, 24Vdc, 0.5A, 1-Wire
EP-291F Digital Output, 16 Points, Negative Logic, 24Vdc, 1-Wire
Digital Relay Output Modules
EP-2714 Digital Relay Output, 4 Points, Positive Logic, 24 - 220 Vdc/Vac, 6A, 2-Wire
EP-2814 Solid-state Relay Output Module
Analog Input Modules
EP-3164 Analog Input, 4 Channels Voltage/Current 16 Bits 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
EP-3264 Analog Input, 4 Channels Voltage/Current 16 Bits with Diagnostics 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
Analog Input, 4 Channels Voltage/ Current 16 Bits with Diagnostics 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire,
EP-3664
Differential
EP-3124 Analog Input, 4 Channels Voltage/Current 12 Bits 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
EP-3368 Analog Input, 8 Channels Current 16 Bits 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
EP-3468 Analog Input, 8 Channels Current 16 Bits 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire, Channel Diagnostic
EP-3704 Analog Input, 4 Channels RTD 16 Bits with Diagnostics 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
EP-3804 Analog Input, 4 Channels TC 16 Bits with Diagnostics 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
EP-1813 Power Measurement Module, 8 Channels
Analog Output Modules
EP-4164 Analog Output, 4 Channels Voltage/Current 16 Bits 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
EP-4264 Analog Output, 4 Channels Voltage/Current 16 Bits with Diagnostics 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
Specialty Modules
EP-5111 1 Channel High Speed Counter, AB 100 kHz 1 DO 24Vdc, 0.5A
EP-5112 2 Channel High Speed Counter, AB 100 kHz
Installation 114
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Catalog
Module Description
Number
EP-5212 2 Channel Frequency Measurement, 100 kHz
EP-5261 1 Channel Serial Communications, 232, 422, 485
EP-5311 1 Channel SSI Encoder, BCD or Gray-Code Format, 5/24 Vdc
EP-5422 2 Channels PWM Output, Positive Logic, 24Vdc, 0.5 A
EP-5442 2 Channels PWM Output, Positive Logic, 24Vdc, 2 A
EP-5324 IO-Link Communication module, 4 Channels
Power Feed Modules for Input Current Path
EP-7631 Power Module, 1 Channel 24Vdc Input Flow 10A
Power Feed Modules for Output Current Path
EP-7641 Power Module, 1 Channel 24Vdc Output Flow 10A
Safe Feed-input Modules
EP-1901 1 Safe Feed-Input, 24 Vdc
EP-1902 2 Safe Feed-Inputs, 24 Vdc, Programmable Delay
EP-1922 2 Safe Feed-Inputs, 24 Vdc
Potential Distribution Modules
Power Module, 16 Channels 24Vdc Potential Distribution +24Vdc from Input Current
EP-711F
Path
Power Module, 16 Channels 24Vdc Potential Distribution +24Vdc from Output Current
EP-751F
Path
EP-700F Power Module, 16 Channels 24Vdc Potential Distribution Functional Earth
EP-710F Power Module, 16 Channels 24Vdc Potential Distribution +0Vdc from Input Current Path
Power Module, 16 Channels 24Vdc Potential Distribution +0Vdc from Output Current
EP-750F
Path

Installation 115
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

4.4 Modbus®TCP Network Adapter

EPXMBE001/EPXMBE101
The EPXMBE001 network adapter is a Modbus TCP participant developed
according to IEC 61158. The network adapter is the head module for the
RSTi-EP communication bus, to which up to 64 active RSTi-EP modules
can be connected. The Modbus TCP network adapter has two Ethernet
ports and an integrated switch supporting a line network structure.

The EPXMBE101 network adapter is a variant of EPXMBE001 network

adaptor, which supports “Modbus Dual LAN mode” of operation. In this
mode of operation, both the Ethernet ports communicate with two
separate networks. For this purpose, the EPXMBE101 has two MAC
addresses and two IP addresses that can be defined separately over two
different LAN networks. The “Modbus Dual LAN mode” is suitable to
communicate with two synchronized control units simultaneously.
Thereby both the control units have the complete read and write access.
If the “Modbus Dual LAN mode” is disabled in EPXMBE101, the network
adaptor functions as EPXMBE001 with a single LAN network.

The network adapter can be accessed with a system-independent web

server application via the USB service interface or the Ethernet. Thus, all
information, such as diagnostics, status values and parameters, can be
read and all connectedmodules can be simulated or forced.

The station's main power supply is integrated in the network adapter.

Power is supplied via two 4-pole connectors, separated into the input and
output current paths.

Figure 45: Network Adapter EPXMBE001/EPXMBE101

Installation 116
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

4.4.1 LEDs

Figure 46: LED Status Indicators EPXMBE001/EPXMBE101

LED Status Indicators

LED Indication LED State/Description

PWR Power LED Green: Supply voltage connected
Red: Configuration error, or error in the network adapter, or error in a
SF System Fault module, or there is a new diagnostic report
Red flashing: Station in Force mode
Red: No connection to the fieldbus
BF Bus fault Red flashing: Configuration error, no connection to the control unit, or
error in the parameter set
Maintenance
MT Yellow: Error on the system bus or fieldbus
Required
Green / Yellow†: Connection established between port 1 of the network
L/A X1 Connection/Active adapter and another field device
Green flashing / Yellow flashing†: Data being exchanged on port 1
Green: Connection established between port 2 of the network adapter
L/A X2 Connection/Active and another field device
Green flashing: Data being exchanged on port 2
†
Green: Transfer rate 100 Mbps
Yellow: Transfer rate 10 Mbps

Installation 117
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

LED Indicators

Figure 47: EPXMBE001 LEDs

LED EPXMBE001/EPXMBE101
Green: Supply voltage > 18Vdc
Power Supply
Red: At least one current path < 18 V

3.1 Green: Input current path supply voltage > 18Vdc

3.2 Red: Input current path supply voltage < 18Vdc
3.3
3.4 Red: Internal fuse defective
4.1 Green: Output current path supply voltage > 18Vdc
4.2 Red: Output current path supply voltage < 18Vdc
4.3
4.4 Red: Internal fuse defective

For error messages, refer to Section 12, LED Indicators and

Troubleshooting.

Installation 118
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

4.4.2 Connection Diagrams

Figure 48: Connection Diagram EPXMBE001/EPXMBE101

Installation 119
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

CAUTION
In case of a maximum power supply of >8 A and a maximum temperature of > +55°C (131
°F), all four contacts must be connected with 1.5 mm² wiring.

Figure 49: Block Diagram EPXMBE001/EPXMBE101

4.4.3 Specifications: EPXMBE001/EPXMBE101

Specification Description
System data
Connection 2 x RJ-45
Fieldbus protocol Modbus TCP
Process Data max. 1024 Bytes
Process image Parameter data max. 1024 Bytes
Diagnostic data max. 1024 Bytes
Number of modules max. 64 active
Configuration interface Micro USB 2.0
Fieldbus 10 Mbps/100 Mbps
Transfer rate
RTSi-EP system bus Max. 48 Mbps
Supply
Supply voltage for system and inputs 20.4V – 28.8V
Supply voltage for outputs 20.4V – 28.8V
Max. feed-in current for input modules 10 A
Max. feed-in current for output modules 10 A
Current consumption from system current
112 mA
path ISYS
Connection data
Type of connection Spring style

Installation 120
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Specification Description
Conductor cross-section Single-wired, fine-wired 0.14 – 1.5 mm2 (AWG 26 – 16)
General data
Operating temperature -20°C to +60°C (-4 °F to +140 °F)
Storage temperature -40°C to +85°C (-40 °F to +185 °F)
Air humidity (operation/transport) 5% to 95%, noncondensing as per IEC 61131-2
Width 52 mm (2.05 in)
Depth 76 mm (2.99 in)
Height 120 mm (4.72 in)
Weight 223 g (7.87 oz)

4.4.4 Configuration of the IP Address

The web server can be used to define whether a static IP address shall be
used, or the address shall be assigned automatically (DHCP/BootP).

Network adapters using firmware version 01.xx.xx are preset to the static
IP address 192.168.0.222.

Network adapters using firmware version 02.00.00 or higher will by

default send a DHCP discover first. If no assignment by a DHCP server
follows during the next 30 seconds, the static IP address 192.168.0.222
will be set.

4.4.5 Modifiable Parameters for EPXMBE001/EPXMBE101

Parameter Optional values Default

IP-Address# 4 numbers between 0-255 192.168.0.222
Subnet mask# 4 numbers between 0-255 255.255.255.0
Gateway #
4 numbers between 0-255 192.168.0.1
IP Configuration #
Static, DHCP, BootP DHCP and static
MODBUS DHCP Timeout Waiting time, 1 to 1,000 s 30 s
Additional TCP port1 0 (disabled) / Value from 1 to 0
65,535 (except for 80 and 161)
†

Modbus Dual LAN Mode disabled / enabled disabled

(EPXMBE101 only) †

IP-Address USB Port† 192.168.1.202; 192.168.2.202, 192.168.1.202

192.168.3.202, 192.168.4.202,
192.168.5.202
Webserver via Ethernet †
disabled / enabled disabled
Save module parameters2 no / yes / Standard no, refer to register 0x113C – 0x113F Save
Module Parameters

Installation 121
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Parameter Optional values Default

Status Modbus watchdog Watchdog time in steps of 10ms 0 *10ms, refer to register 0x1120
MODBUS DATA EXCHANGE watchdog,
predefined time
Modbus Connection Connection watchdog time in 1 s, refer to register 0x1131 MODBUS
Timeout sec CONNECTION Timeout in Sec
Write access in multi- write for all, 1stWr1stServe, write for all, refer to register 0x1031
client operation 1stConn1stServe MODBUS CONNECTION Mode Register
Check reference list disabled / enabled disabled, refer to register 0x1132 Check
before exchanging data Reference List prior to Data Exchange
Process alarm disabled / enabled refer to register 0x1133 Process Alarm
Diagnostic alarm disabled / enabled refer to register 0x1134 Diagnostic Alarm
Behavior of outputs on All outputs off / Enable All outputs off, refer to register 0x1135
fieldbus error substitute values / Hold last Field Bus or Reference List Error Behavior
value
Module behavior on hot Continue data exchange / Continue data exchange, refer to register
swap Behavior like fieldbus error 0x1136 Module Removal Behavior
Data format Motorola / Intel Motorola, refer to register 0x1137 Data
Format
Lock force mode Force mode unlocked / Force Force mode unlocked, refer to register
mode locked General Contact Information
†
Change requires restart of the network adapter.
#
In Dual LAN Mode (EPXMBE101 only) parameterizable for each Ethernet Port on the Module
1
Parameter “Additional TCP port”

Another TCP port additionally to the standard port (502) can be enabled
using this parameter. Apart from the values 80 (reserved for http) and
161 (reserved for SNMP) every number from 1 to 65,535 can be used.
Value 0 deactivates the port. The standard port 502 will remain open in
any case.
2
Parameter “Save module parameters” in the web server

The choice Yes or Standard cannot be displayed in the web server, caused
by the data structure of this parameter. The display will be reset to No
anytime.

Option Yes: The current image of all module parameters is saved in the
network adapter and will be sent to the modules again during the
Network adapter’s next restart. Subsequent changes of the module
parameters are considered and saved only if the option Yes will be
chosen again.

Installation 122
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Option Standard: The default parameters will be loaded to the modules

immediately. Subsequent changes of the module parameters are
possible, but they will get loss during the network adapter’s next restart.

Parameter “Restore module parameters”

This parameter is non-modifiable. It will be automatically set to Yes as

soon as the network adapter will have sent saved parameter data to the
modules

Register Structure
(ro: read only = input register, rw: read write = holding register, wo:
write only = holding register)

Register address
Access Data width Description Remarks
(in hex)
Module-
0x0000 – 0x01FF ro Packed process data for inputs byte granularly
dependent
Module-
0x0800 – 0x09FF rw Packed process data for outputs byte granularly
dependent
0x1000 – x1006 ro Byte Network adapter identifier
Bit assignment as
0x100C ro Word Network adapter status
with EPXETC001
Process image length in bits for the
0x1010 ro Word
output modules
Process image length in bits for the
0x1011 ro Word
input modules
0x1017 ro Word Register mapping revision
Collective diagnostics message for
0x1018 – 0x101B ro Byte I/O modules
(1 bit per I/O module)
Collective process alarm message
0x101C – 0x101F ro Byte for I/O modules
(1 bit per I/O module)
Module status (2 bits per I/O
Structure as in
module) 00 = module OK, 01 =
0x1028 – 0x102F ro Byte PROFIBUS module
module error 10 = incorrect module
status
11 = module not plugged in
Time still
MODBUS DATA EXCHANGE
remaining for
watchdog, current time (x*10ms) 0
0x1030 ro Word monitoring the
= watchdog has expired 0xFFFF =
exchange of
watchdog deactivated
process data

Installation 123
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Register address
Access Data width Description Remarks
(in hex)
MODBUS DATA EXCHANGE Time for
watchdog, predefined time monitoring the
0x1120 rw Word
(x*10ms), default = 0ms (no exchange of
watchdog active) process data
MODBUS DATA EXCHANGE Bit 0: reset
watchdog reset register watchdog while it
Bit0 = 1: watchdog reset at is running
0x1121 rw Word
predefined time (retrigger)
Bit8 = 1: restart after expired Bit 8: restart of
watchdog expired watchdog
Lock of the “Force Mode” via LOCK to lock,
0x1122 rw DWord
Webserver FREE to unlock
0x1124 – 0x1125 rw Long Changing IP Address 1 via Fieldbus
Changing Subnet Mask 1 via
0x1126 – 0x1127 rw Long
Fieldbus
0x1128 – 0x1129 rw Long Changing Gateway 1 via Fieldbus
MODBUS CONNECTION mode
0x1130 rw Word
register
MODBUS CONNECTION timeout in
0x1131 rw Word sec.
Default = 1 (0 not allowed)
Check the reference list before data
0x1132 rw Word exchange
0x0000 = disable, 0x0001 = enable
Process alarm 0x0000 = disable,
0x1133 rw Word
0x0001 = enable
Diagnostics alarm 0x0000 = disable,
0x1134 rw Word
0x0001 = enable
Behavior in case of field bus error
and reference list error
0x1135 rw Word 0x0000 = all outputs to 0, 0x0001 =
set error values
0x0002 = retain process data
Behavior when module removed
0x0000 = process data continues to
0x1136 rw Word run
0x0001 = behavior as with field bus
error
Data format 0x0000 = Motorola,
0x1137 rw Word
0x0001 = Intel

Installation 124
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Register address
Access Data width Description Remarks
(in hex)
Corresponds to
Restore module parameters
0x113C – 0x113D wo Long the “DEFAULT” in
Motorola =“LOAD”, Intel =“DAOL”
the web server
Corresponds to
Save module parameters
0x113E – 0x113F wo Long “SAVE” in the web
Motorola =“SAVE”, Intel =“EVAS”
server
These registers
0x1140 – 0x1141 rw Long Changing IP Address 2 via Fieldbus only available with
EPXMBE101
Changing Subnet Mask 2 via
0x1142 – 0x1143 rw Long
Fieldbus
0x1144 – 0x1145 rw Long Changing Gateway 2 via Fieldbus
Number of entries in the current
0x27FE ro Word
module list
Number of entries in the reference
0x27FF ro Word
module list
There must
Reference module list
always be 2, 4, 6
0x2800 – 0x287F rw Long (max. 64 modules per station * 2
etc. registers
registers per module)
transferred
There must
Current module list
always be 2, 4, 6
0x2A00 – 0x2A7F ro Long (max. 64 modules per station * 2
etc. registers
registers per module)
transferred
Process data inputs
0x8000 – 0x87FF ro Module (max. 64 modules per station * 32
registers per module)
Process data outputs
0x9000 – 0x97FF rw Module (max. 64 modules per station * 32
registers per module)
Diagnostics
Confirmation by
0xA000 – 0xA7FF ro Byte (max. 64 modules per station * 32
readout
registers per module)
Process alarms
Confirmation by
0xB000 – 0xB7FF ro Byte (max. 64 modules per station * 32
readout
registers per module)

Installation 125
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Register address
Access Data width Description Remarks
(in hex)
Module parameters
0xC000 - 0xC7FF (Firmware 01.xx.xx:
(Firmware 01.xx.xx) max. 64 modules per station * 32
0xC000 - 0xFFFF rw Byte registers per module;
(Firmware 02.00.00 Firmware 02.00.00 or higher:
or higher max. 64 modules per station * 256
registers per module)

Note: If the user wants to access the DWORD for EP-5111, EP-5112, EP-5212, EP-5442 and EP-5422 modules use
SWAP_DWORD function block.

Implemented Modbus Functions

Function
Function Description
code no.
Reading of output bits in the range of 0x0800 –
1 Read Coils
0x09FF†
Reading of input bits in the range of 0x0000 –
2 Read Discrete Inputs
0x01FF†
3 Read Holding Registers Reading of multiple holding registers
4 Read Input Registers Reading of multiple input registers
Writing of an individual output bit in the range of
5 Write Single Coil
0x0800 – 0x09FF†
6 Write Single Registers Writing of individual holding registers
Writing of output bits in the range of 0x0800 –
15 Write Multiple Coils
0x09FF†
16 Write Multiple Registers Writing of multiple holding registers
22 Mask Write Register Bitwise changing of one holding register
Read/Write Multiple Reading of multiple input registers and writing of
23
Registers multiple holding registers simultaneously
†
Function codes 1, 2, 5 and 15 for bit-wise access to registers. For the usage of these codes
please note:

In MODBUS protocol bit addressing separated from register addressing has not been
specified. Bit and register address need to be implemented within the access address as
follows: dismiss the most significant digit of the register address, shift the three less significant
digits to the left and use the vacant least significant digit for bit addressing.

Example: register access with function code 1 to address 0x80AB would be a read access to
register 0x080A bit 11. Therefore, the usage of function codes 1, 2, 5, 15 is limited to the
address range of 0x0000 – 0x01FF and 0x0800 – 0x09FF.

Installation 126
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

4.4.6 Supported Modules and Power Supplies

The following modules can be used with the current release of the RSTi-
EP Modbus Network Adaptor:

Part Number Module Description

Digital Input Modules
EP-1214 Digital Input, 4 Points, Positive Logic 24Vdc, 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
EP-1218 Digital Input, 8 Points, Positive Logic, 24Vdc 2-Wire
EP-1318 Digital Input, 8 Points, Positive Logic, 24Vdc 3-Wire
EP-125F Digital Input, 16 Points, Positive Logic, 24Vdc, 1-Wire
EP-12F4 Digital Input, 4 Points, Positive Logic 24Vdc, 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire, Time stamp
EP-153F Digital Input, 16 Points, Negative Logic, 24Vdc, 1-Wire
EP-1804 Digital Input, 4 Points 110/230Vac (65 – 277Vac), 2-Wire, Isolated
Digital Output Modules
EP-2214 Digital Output, 4 Points, Positive Logic 24Vdc, 0.5A, 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
EP-2614 Digital Output, 4 Points, Positive Logic 24Vdc, 2.0A, 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
Digital Output, 4 Points, Positive/Negative Logic 24Vdc, 2.0A, 2-, 3-, or 4-
EP-2634
Wire
EP-2218 Digital Output, 8 Points, Positive Logic, 24Vdc, 0.5A, 2-Wire
EP-225F Digital Output, 16 Points, Positive Logic, 24Vdc, 0.5A, 1-Wire
EP-291F Digital Output, 16 Points, Negative Logic, 24Vdc, 1-Wire
Digital Relay Output Modules
EP-2714 Digital Relay Output, 4 Points, Positive Logic, 24 - 220 Vdc/Vac, 6A, 2-Wire
EP-2814 Solid-state Relay Output Module
Analog Input Modules
EP-3164 Analog Input, 4 Channels Voltage/Current 16 Bits 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
Analog Input, 4 Channels Voltage/Current 16 Bits with Diagnostics 2-, 3-, or
EP-3264
4-Wire
Analog Input, 4 Channels Voltage/ Current 16 Bits with Diagnostics 2-, 3-, or
EP-3664
4-Wire, Differential
EP-3124 Analog Input, 4 Channels Voltage/Current 12 Bits 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
EP-3368 Analog Input, 8 Channels Current 16 Bits 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
Analog Input, 8 Channels Current 16 Bits 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire, Channel
EP-3468
Diagnostic
EP-3704 Analog Input, 4 Channels RTD 16 Bits with Diagnostics 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
EP-3804 Analog Input, 4 Channels TC 16 Bits with Diagnostics 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
EP-1813 Power Measurement Module, 8 Channels
Analog Output Modules
EP-4164 Analog Output, 4 Channels Voltage/Current 16 Bits 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire

Analog Output, 4 Channels Voltage/Current 16 Bits with Diagnostics 2-, 3-,

EP-4264
or 4-Wire

Installation 127
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Part Number Module Description

Specialty Modules
EP-5111 1 Channel High Speed Counter, AB 100 kHz 1 DO 24Vdc, 0.5A
EP-5112 2 Channel High Speed Counter, AB 100 kHz
EP-5212 2 Channel Frequency Measurement, 100 kHz
EP-5261 1 Channel Serial Communications, 232, 422, 485
EP-5311 1 Channel SSI Encoder, BCD or Gray-Code Format, 5/24 Vdc
EP-5422 2 Channels PWM Output, Positive Logic, 24Vdc, 0.5 A
EP-5442 2 Channels PWM Output, Positive Logic, 24Vdc, 2 A
EP-5324 IO-Link Communication module, 4 Channels
Power Feed Modules for Input Current Path
EP-7631 Power Module, 1 Channel 24Vdc Input Flow 10A
Power Feed Modules for Output Current Path
EP-7641 Power Module, 1 Channel 24Vdc Output Flow 10A
Safe Feed-input Modules
EP-1901 1 Safe Feed-Input, 24 Vdc
EP-1902 2 Safe Feed-Inputs, 24 Vdc, Programmable Delay
EP-1922 2 Safe Feed-Inputs, 24 Vdc
Potential Distribution Modules
Power Module, 16 Channels 24Vdc Potential Distribution +24Vdc from Input
EP-711F
Current Path
Power Module, 16 Channels 24Vdc Potential Distribution +24Vdc from
EP-751F
Output Current Path
EP-700F Power Module, 16 Channels 24Vdc Potential Distribution Functional Earth
Power Module, 16 Channels 24Vdc Potential Distribution +0Vdc from Input
EP-710F
Current Path
Power Module, 16 Channels 24Vdc Potential Distribution +0Vdc from
EP-750F
Output Current Path

Installation 128
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

4.4.7 Packed Process Data

Packed input process data

Input register range: 0x0000 to 0x01FF

Note: Access to all 512 registers is always possible regardless of the I/O structure. Unused
registers respond with “0”.

Packed output process data

Output register range: 0x0800 to 0x09FF

Note: Access to all 512 registers is always possible regardless of the I/O structure. Unused
registers send “0” during a read access, write accesses are ignored.

Structure of packed process data

The byte granularly packed process data contains all input data (register
range 0x0000 to 0x01FF) and output data (register range 0x0800 to
0x09FF) of the RSTi-EP station.

Note: The start address(es) of each module’s process data are listed in register 0x2B00 –
0x2B7F (refer to Section 0x2B00 – 0x2B7F Module Offsets of Process Data).
Process data is mapped according to how the modules are arranged. To avoid
larger gaps in the process data, the different modules should be arranged in an
optimal manner.

Example of an Optimal Module Arrangement

Input Output Number of Number of

Product Remarks
data data input registers output registers
EPXMBE001/
0 0
EPXMBE101
EP-4164 -- 4 words 0 4 allocated 4 registers
EP-3164 4 words -- 4 0 allocated 4 registers
allocated 1/2 register
EP-1214 1 Byte -- 1 0
low byte (1 byte)
allocated 1/2 register
EP-1214 1 Byte -- 0 0
high byte (1 byte)
EP-125F 2 Byte 1 allocated 1 register
EP-153F 2 Byte 1 allocated 1 register
Total 7 4

Installation 129
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Example of an Suboptimal Module Arrangement

Output Number of input Number of
Product Input data Remarks
data registers output registers
EPXMBE001/
0 0
EPXMBE101
EP-1214 1 Byte -- 1 0 allocated 1 register
EP-4164 -- 4 words 0 4 allocated 4 registers
EP-3164 4 words -- 4 0 allocated 4 registers
EP-1214 1 Byte -- 1 0 allocated 1 register
EP-125F 2 Byte 1 allocated 1 register
EP-153F 2 Byte 1 allocated 1 register
Total 8 4

Data Widths of I/O Modules in the Modbus Register

Range
Process data
Module
Input Output
EP-1214 1 Byte --
EP-1218 1 Byte --
EP-1318 1 Byte --
EP-125F 2 Byte --
EP-12F4 15*(2 Byte, 1 Word) --
EP-153F 2 Byte --
EP-2214 -- 1 Byte
EP-2614 -- 1 Byte
EP-2634 -- 1 Byte
EP-2218 -- 1 Byte
EP-225F -- 2 Byte
EP-2814 -- 1 Byte
EP-2714 -- 1 Byte
EP-291F -- 2 Byte
EP-5111 2 DWord, 2 Word 2 DWord, 1 Word
EP-5112 2 DWord, 2 Word 2 DWord, 2 Word
EP-5212 4 DWord, 2 Word 2 DWord, 2 Word
EP-5422 2 Word 2 DWord, 2 Word
EP-5442 2 Word 2 DWord, 2 Word
EP-5324 2 … 64 Bytes 2 … 64 Bytes
EP-3164 4 Word --
EP-3264 4 Word --
EP-3664 4 Word --
EP-3124 4 Word --

Installation 130
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Process data
Module
Input Output
EP-3804 4 Word --
EP-3368 8 Word --
EP-3468 8 Word --
EP-4164 -- 4 Word
EP-4264 -- 4 Word
EP-3704 4 Word --
EP-1813 8 Word 8 Word
EP-1901 4 Byte --
EP-1922 4 Byte --
EP-1902 Byte --

4.4.8 0x1000 – 0x1006 Network Adapter Identifier

The identifier is the product designation: EPXMBE001 and EPXMBE101 as

per Network adaptor Catalog number.

4.4.9 0x1000 – 0x1006 Network Adapter Status

Bit Name Meaning

Summarized module A diagnosis is available on at least one module with diagnostics
0
diagnosis functionality.
1 Errorbit 1 Reserve bit 1, currently not used
2 Errorbit 2 Reserve bit 2, currently not used
Error on system bus. Communication with the connected modules is
3 System bus error
disrupted.
4 Errorbit 4 Reserve bit 4, currently not used
5 Errorbit 5 Reserve bit 5, currently not used
Differing configuration. The module list has changed. The list of
configured modules (reference module list 0x2800 – 0x287F) differs from
6 I/O-Configuration error
the module list detected by the network adapter (current module list
0x2A00 – 0x2A7F).
Master configuration error. The list of configured modules (reference
module list 0x2800 – 0x287F) differs significantly from the module list
7 Master configuration error
detected by the network adapter (current module list 0x2A00 – 0x2A7F).
Process data cannot be exchanged with the modules.
8 Errorbit 8 Reserve bit 8, currently not used
9 Errorbit 9 Reserve bit 9, currently not used
Force mode was activated via the web server.
10 Force mode active
Forced channels do not exchange data with the master.
11 Errorbit 11 Reserve bit 11, currently not used
12 Errorbit 12 Reserve bit 12, currently not used

Installation 131
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Bit Name Meaning

13 Voltage UOUT error Error in the supply voltage of outputs
14 Voltage UIN error Error in the supply voltage of system and inputs
15 Errorbit 15 Reserve bit 15, currently not used

4.4.10 0x1010 Process Image Length in Bits for the

Output Modules

4.4.11 0x1010 Process Image Length in Bits for the Input

Modules

4.4.12 0x1017 Register – Mapping Revision

Version of the register structure

4.4.13 0x1018 – 0x101B Collective Diagnostics Message

for I/O Modules

If a diagnostic alarm is activated (register 0x1134) and there is a

diagnostic message for a module, it is indicated here with a set bit. A
module’s slot position corresponds to its position in the 64-bit data field
(minus passive modules without slot recognition). Example: 0x0000 0000
0000 0002 = There is a diagnostic alarm for module 2.

Reading the module’s diagnostic memory (0xAXXX) confirms the

diagnosis and resets the corresponding bit. In case of multiple diagnoses
for one module, only the most up-to-date diagnosis is displayed. The next
diagnostic is then placed in a wait loop and only becomes active once the
current one has been confirmed.

4.4.14 0x101C – 0x101F Collective Process Message for

I/O Modules

If a process alarm is activated (register 0x1133) and there is an alarm for

a module, this is indicated here with a set bit. A module’s slot position
corresponds to its position in the 64-bit data field (minus passive modules
without slot recognition). Example: 0x0000 0000 0000 0002 = There is a
process alarm for module 2.

Installation 132
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Reading the module’s process alarm memory (0xBXXX) confirms the

alarm and resets the corresponding bit. In case of multiple process
alarms for one module, only the latest alarm is displayed. The next alarm
is then placed in a wait loop and only becomes active once the current
one has been confirmed.

4.4.15 0x1028 – 0x102F Module Status

The module status (2 bits per module) is displayed in the corresponding

bit positions of the 128 bits.

0 0 Valid data from this module

0 1 Invalid data, faulty module

1 0 Invalid data, incorrect module

1 1 Invalid data, missing module

4.4.16 0x1030 MODBUS DATA EXCHANGE Watchdog,

Current Time

Amount of time (input value * 10ms) remaining on the active watchdog to

monitor the exchange of process data. If a 0 is read, the watchdog has
expired and must be restarted.

If 0xFFFF is read, the watchdog is deactivated.

4.4.17 0x1120 MODBUS DATA EXCHANGE watchdog,

predefined time

In this register, the watchdog is activated/deactivated, and the watchdog

time is set. Process date can be exchanged as long as the watchdog is
deactivated, or it is activated and still running. But it is accepted only after
a watchdog reset to the current time. The length is calculated with the
input value * 10ms. Entering 0 deactivates the watchdog.

4.4.18 0x1121 MODBUS DATA EXCHANGE Watchdog Reset

Register

If Bit 0 in this register is set, the predefined time is loaded into the
watchdog time (watchdog reset).

Installation 133
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

If Bit 8 in this register is set, an expired watchdog (value 0 in register

1030) is reactivated.

4.4.19 0x1122 Lock Force Mode on Web Server

In default setting the force mode can be enabled via the web server (after
Login). The force mode can be locked by writing the double word ”LOCK“
(0x4C4F, 0x434B). Writing of ”FREE“ (0x4652, 0x4545) will unlock the force
mode again.

4.4.20 0x1031 MODBUS CONNECTION Mode Register

Bit Name/Description
2 to 15 reserved
1 MB_ImmediateWritePermission
– 0: during the first write access, write authorization is requested for the corresponding Modbus
connection. If this is not successful, an exception response with the exception code 0x01 is
generated. If it is successful, the write access is executed and write authorization remains in effect
until the end of the connection.
– 1: write authorization for the corresponding Modbus connection is already requested when the
connection is being established. As a result, the first Modbus connection receives the write
authorization, and nothing happens for all those that follow (as long as Bit 0 = 1).
0 MB_OnlyOneWritePermission
– 0: all Modbus connections have written authorization
– 1: in all cases only one Modbus connection can be assigned write authorization. Once assigned,
write authorization is retained until there is a disconnect. After the connection that has write
authorization is disconnected, the next connection which attempts write access receives write
authorization.

4.4.21 0x1131 MODBUS CONNECTION Timeout in Sec

This register determines how long a Modbus connection must be inactive

before it is ended with a disconnect.

Installation 134
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

4.4.22 0x1132 Check Reference List prior to Data

Exchange

If the value in register 0x1132 is set to 0, the data exchange begins

without checking the reference module list (0x2800 and the following)
against the current module list (0x2A00 and the following). The reference
module list must also not be described.

If the value in in register 0x1132 is set to 1, the data exchange only starts
if the reference module list (0x2800 and the following) matches the
current module list (0x2A00 and the following).

4.4.23 0x1133 Process Alarm

If the value in this register is set to 0, process alarms are reported, but it
is not necessary to confirm or read them. If the value in this register is set
to 1, process alarms are reported, and they must be confirmed by
reading the corresponding register.

4.4.24 0x1134 Diagnostic Alarm

If the value 0 is set in this register, the diagnostic alarm is deactivated.

Pending diagnostics do not have any effect on the exchange of process
data and must not be confirmed. They are, however, displayed locally on
the RSTi-EP hardware with red LEDs (SF and module) and may also be
read in the module-specific diagnostic registers 0xAXXX.

If the value in this register is set to 1, diagnostics alarms are reported,

and they must be confirmed by reading the corresponding register.

4.4.25 0x1135 Field Bus or Reference List Error Behavior

If the value in this register is set to 0, in case of a field bus or reference

list error all outputs are set to 0.

If the value in this register is set to 1, in case of a field bus error all
outputs are set to the substitute values.

If the value in this register is set to 2, in case of a field bus error all
outputs are held at the last process value.

Installation 135
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

4.4.26 0x1136 Module Removal Behavior

If the value in this register is set to 0, the exchange of process data

continues.

If the value in this register is set to 1, the behavior during a field bus
error is used.

4.4.27 0x1137 Data Format

If the value in this register is set to 0, data is transferred in Motorola

format.

If the value in this register is set to 1, data is transferred in Intel format.

4.4.28 0x113C – 0x113F Save Module Parameters

Load default module parameters (0x113C – 0x113D) loads the default

parameter set of all modules (LOAD). This conforms to the Standard
option in the web server.

Save module parameters (0x113E – 0x113F) stores the current image of

all module parameters in the network adapter (SAVE). Subsequent
changes will not be considered unless they are saved again. There is no
need to enter parameters again after restarting the network adapter.
This conforms to the Yes option in the web server.

Inputs in both register in the Motorola format follow this scheme:

“LOAD“ “SAVE“
Letter of the alphabet L O A D S A V E
ASCII code decimal 076 079 065 068 083 065 086 069
ASCII hexadecimal 4C 4F 41 44 53 41 56 45
Input in register no. 0x113C 0x113D 0x113E 0x113F
Hexadecimal 4C4F 4144 5341 5645
Decimal 19535 16708 21313 22085

Using the Intel format, the inputs follow “DAOL“ and “EVAS“:

Installation 136
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

“DAOL“ “EVAS“
Letter of the alphabet D A O L E V A S
ASCII code decimal 068 065 079 076 069 086 065 083
ASCII hexadecimal 44 41 4F 4C 45 56 41 53
Input in register no. 0x113C 0x113D 0x113E 0x113F
Hexadecimal 4441 4F4C 4556 4153
Decimal 17473 20300 17750 16723

The non-modifiable parameter Restore module parameters in the web

server will be set to Yes as soon as the network adapter has sent saved
parameters to the modules.

4.4.29 0x27FE Number of Entries in the Current Module

List

This displays the number of modules that were connected when the
network adapter was started.

4.4.30 0x27FF Number of Entries in the Reference Module

List

This displays the number of modules that were entered the reference list.

4.4.31 0x2800 – 0x287F Reference Module List

Each module identifier is made up of 4 bytes (2 registers). If a 1 is set in

register 1132, the reference module list must be identical to the current
module list before the data exchange can begin.

4.4.32 0x2A00 – 0x2A7F Current Module List

Each module identifier is made up of 4 bytes (2 registers) (refer to the

Overview of module IDs). The modules that were connected when the
network adapter was started are entered here. To simplify configuration,
the current module list can be copied into the reference module list.

4.4.33 0x2B00 – 0x2B7F Module Offsets of Process Data

For each module there are two registers reserved to indicate the offset
between the start address within the packed process data and the
address 0x0000: The first register indicates the bit-offset of the outputs,
Installation 137
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

the second one indicates the bit-offset of the inputs. Thus, it is possible to
use this information directly for the access to coils or Discrete Inputs.
Converting the address syntax is necessary for a register- wise access
(refer to the table “Implemented Modbus functions”).

In case there are no outputs or inputs, the register entry is 0xFFFF.

4.4.34 0x8000 – 0x87FF Process Data Inputs

For each module a data length of 64 bytes (32 registers) is reserved.

Example: Module 3 starts at address 0xC200..

4.4.35 0x9000 – 0x97FF Process Data Outputs

For each module a data length of 64 bytes (32 registers) is reserved.

Example: Module 3 starts at address 0x9040.

4.4.36 0xA000 – 0xA7FF Diagnostics

For each module a diagnostics data length of 64 bytes (32 registers) is

reserved.

Example: Module 3 starts at address 0xA040.

In case of a diagnostics message, the 47 bytes of the module diagnosis

are entered here from the corresponding tables (see the table of
diagnostic data in the corresponding module description in the module
chapter).

If a 1 is set in register 0x1134, reading out the corresponding diagnosis

results in a confirmation of the alarm.

4.4.37 0xB000 – 0xB7FF Process Alarms

For each module a process alarm data length of 64 bytes (32 registers) is
reserved.

Example: Module 3 starts at address 0xB040.

In case of a process alarm, the 4 bytes of the module are entered here
from the corresponding table (see the table of process alarms in the
corresponding module description in the module chapter).

4.4.38 0xC000 –0xFFFF Parameters

Installation 138
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

For each module a parameter data length of 256 registers is reserved.

Example: Module 3 starts with address 0xC200. The modules can be
parametrized via the web server (refer to Section 11:, Web Server) or via
the Modbus master.

One register is assigned to each module parameter with a size of max. 16

bits. 32-bit parameters use two consecutive registers (consider Motorola
format!). The sequence of parameters as well as the optional values are
listed in the parameter tables of the individual module descriptions (refer
to Section 6: Diagnostic Details for RSTi-EP .

Example: Parameter 8 of module 3 has the address 0xC207 (provided

that, there is no 32-bit parameter prior to it in the same module).
Examples for 32-bit parameters are “Period duration“ of the pulse width
modulation modules and „End value“ of the counter modules.

This Section contains detailed descriptions and technical specification of

the various RSTi-EP modules.

Installation 139
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

4.5 EtherNet/IP™ Network Adapter EPXEIP001

The EPXEIP001 Network Adapter is an EtherNet/IP™ participant developed
according to IEC 61158. The adapter is the head module for the RSTi-EP
system bus, to which up to 64 active RSTi-EP modules can be connected.
The EtherNet/IP adapter has two Ethernet ports, and the integrated switch
supports a line network structure.

The adapter can be accessed with a system-independent web server

application via the USB service interface or the Ethernet. Thus, all
information, such as diagnostics, status values and parameters, can be
read and all connected modules can be simulated or forced.

The station’s main power supply is integrated in the adapter. Power is

supplied via two 4-pole connectors, separated into the input and output
current paths.

Figure 50: Network Adapter EPXEIP001

Installation 140
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

4.5.1 LEDs

Figure 51: LED Status Indicators EPXEIP001

LED Status Indicators

LED Indication LED State/Description

PWR Power LED Green: Supply voltage connected
Red: Configuration error, or error in the network adapter, or error
SF System Fault in a module, or there is a new diagnostic report
Red flashing: Station in Force mode
Red: No connection to the fieldbus
BF Bus fault Red flashing: Configuration error, no connection to the control
unit, or error in the parameter set
MT Maintenance Required Yellow: Error on the system bus or fieldbus
Red: More than one module does not fit the start-up configuration
(or no fieldbus connection)
Red flashing: One module does not fit the start-up configuration
MS Module Status or there is a diagnostic report on at least one module
Green: Ready for operation
Green flashing: Network Adapter not configured
Red/Green flashing: LED Self-test during Start
Red: IP-Address conflict
Red flashing: Timeout of the exclusive owner connection
Green: At least one EtherNet/IP connection is established
NS Network Status
Green flashing: No EtherNet/IP connection is established
Red/Green flashing: LED Self-test during Start
Off: At least one EtherNet/IP connection is established

Installation 141
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

LED Indication LED State/Description

Yellow: Address conflict or no IP address configured
Yellow flashing (1 Hz): valid IP address but no Ether-Net/IP
connection established
Yellow flashing (4 Hz): Connection timeout on and exclusive
owner
Green / Yellow†: Connection established between port 1 of the
network adapter and another field device
L/A X1 Connection/Active
Green flashing / Yellow flashing†: Data being exchanged on port
1
Green / Yellow†: Connection established between port 2 of the
network adapter and another field device
L/A X2 Connection/Active
Green flashing / Yellow flashing†: Data being exchanged on port
2
†
Green: Transfer rate 100 Mbps, Yellow: Transfer rate 10 Mbps

LED Indicators

Figure 52: EPXPBS001

LED EPXEIP001
Power Green: Supply voltage > 18Vdc
Supply Red: At least one current path < 18 V

3.1 Green: Input current path supply voltage > 18Vdc

3.2 Red: Input current path supply voltage < 18Vdc
3.3
3.4 Red: Internal fuse defective
4.1 Green: Output current path supply voltage > 18Vdc
4.2 Red: Output current path supply voltage < 18Vdc
4.3
4.4 Red: Internal fuse defective

For error messages, refer to Section 12, LED Indicators and

Troubleshooting.

Installation 142
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

4.5.2 Connection Diagrams

Figure 53: Connection Diagram EPXEIP001

CAUTION
In case of a maximum power supply of >8 A and a maximum temperature of > +55°C (131
°F), all four contacts must be connected with 1.5 mm² wiring.

Figure 54: Block Diagram EPXEIP001

Installation 143
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

4.5.3 Specifications: EPXEIP001

Specification Description

System data
Connection 2 x RJ-45
Fieldbus protocol EtherNet/IP
Process Data max. 2 x 494 Bytes
Process image Parameter data max. 64 x 64 Bytes
Diagnostic data max. 64 x 47 Bytes
Number of modules max. 64 active
Configuration interface Micro USB 2.0
Fieldbus 10 Mbps/100 Mbps
Transfer rate
RSTi-EP system bus Max. 48 Mbps
Supply
Supply voltage for system and inputs 20.4V – 28.8V
Supply voltage for outputs 20.4V – 28.8V
Max. feed-in current1) for input modules 10 A
Max. feed-in current1) for output modules 10 A
Current consumption from system current path ISYS 112 mA
Temperature Data 1)

Operation -20 °C to +60 °C / - 4 °F ... +140 °F (2 x 8 A power supply)

< HW 02.00.00 (Horizontal installation) -20 °C to +55 °C / - 4 °F ... +131 °F (2 x 10 A power supply
Operation -20 °C to +55 °C / - 4 °F ... +131 °F (2 x 6 A power supply)
(Vertical installation) -20 °C to +50 °C / - 4 °F ... +122 °F (2 x 8 A power supply)
Connection data
Type of connection PUSH IN
Conductor cross-section Single-wired, fine-wired 0.14 – 1.5 mm2 (AWG 26 – 16)
General data
Operating temperature -20°C to +60°C (-4 °F to +140 °F)
Storage temperature -40°C to +85°C (-40 °F to +185 °F)
Air humidity (operation/transport) 5% to 95%, noncondensing as per IEC 61131-2
Width 52 mm (2.05 in)
Depth 76 mm (2.99 in)
Height 120 mm (4.72 in)
Weight 223 (7.87 oz)
1)
Restrictions for the use in potentially explosive atmosphere: Only horizontal installation and max. 8 A power supply!

Installation 144
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

4.5.4 Modifiable Parameters for EPXEIP001

Parameter Optional values Default

IP-Address 4 numbers between 0-255 0.0.0.0
Subnet mask 4 numbers between 0-255 255.255.255.0
Gateway 4 numbers between 0-255 0.0.0.0
IP Configuration Static, DHCP, BootP DHCP
IP-Address USB Port† 192.168.1.202; 192.168.2.202, 192.168.5.202
192.168.3.202, 192.168.4.202,
192.168.5.202
Webserver via disabled / enabled enabled
Ethernet †

Save module no / yes / Standard no

parameters 1)

Output Behavior on All outputs off (0) / Enable substitute All outputs off
idle state values (1) / Hold last value (2)
Process alarm disabled (0) / enabled (1) disabled
Diagnostic alarm Disabled (0) / enabled (1) disabled
Behavior of outputs All outputs off (0) / Enable substitute All outputs off
on fieldbus error values (1) / Hold last value (2)
Module behavior on Continue data exchange (0) / Continue data exchange
hot swap Behavior like fieldbus error (1)
Data format Motorola (0) / Intel (1) Intel
Lock force mode Force mode unlocked / Force mode Force mode unlocked
locked
HTTPS setting 2)
HTTP & HTTPS concurrent HTTP & HTTPS concurrent operation
operation/ Only HTTPS; no HTTP
†
Change requires restart of the network adapter.
1)
Parameter “Save module parameters” in the web server

The choice ‘’Yes’’ or ‘’Standard’’ cannot be displayed in the web server,

caused by the data structure of this parameter. The display will be reset to
No anytime.

Option ‘’Yes’’: The current image of all module parameters is saved in the
network adapter and will be sent to the modules again during the Network
adapter’s next restart. Subsequent changes of the module parameters are
considered and saved only if the option Yes will be chosen again.

Option ‘’Standard’’: The default parameters will be loaded to the modules

immediately. Subsequent changes of the module parameters are possible,
but they will get loss during the network adapter’s next restart.

Installation 145
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Parameter “Boot module parameters”

This parameter is non-modifiable. It will be automatically set to ‘Restored

values’ as soon as the network adapter will have sent saved parameter
data to the modules.

Assignment of IP addresses
The automatic assignment via DHCP is the default setting of the
EPXEIP001. Further options are BootP or Static. For automatic assigning a
respective server must be available in the network. The mode of IP
assignment can be changed either via the web server or via the fieldbus.

Changing the mode of IP mapping via the network adapter

Providing that the adapter has already received an address, the mode of
IP assignment ca be changed via the following data object: TCP/IP object
0xF5 (245), instance 0x01 (1), attribute 0x03 (3). The options are Static [0],
BootP [1] or DHCP [2].

When switching to mode Static, the adapter will keep the address that has
been assigned automatically before; this address will be saved
permanently. When switching to an automatic mode the adapter will start
a request on the respective server immediately.

Allocating a new IP address

A new IP address can be allocated via the following data object: TCP/IP
object 0xF5 (245), instance 0x01 (1), attribute 0x05 (5). The new address will
be saved permanently, if the mode Static is set. Using the automatic
assignment, the address will be used temporarily only.

Address Conflict Detection

After an address has been allocated to the adapter, it will be checked
whether this address is already used within the network (ACD, Address
Conflict Detection). In case an address conflict is detected, and the address
is rejected, the adapter requests another address from the DHCP server,
as long as DHCP mode is active. When using mode BootP or Static, the
adapter must be disconnected from the Ethernet and connected again.

The address check is executed every two minutes during operating. It can
be turned off via the following data object: TCP/IP object 0xF5 (245),
instance 0x01 (1), attribute 0x0A (10).
2)
HTTPS setting

Note: It is strongly recommended to use HTTPS protocol for connecting to the

Network adapter webserver by setting the ‘’only HTTPS; no HTTP’’ in
‘’HTTPS setting’’ parameter.

Installation 146
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

To change the HTTPS setting in EPXEIP001, follow the below steps-

1. Power up the Network adapter and connect the adapter to PC via
micro USB connection.

2. Open internet browser and enter the IP address of the network

adapter (default: 192.168.5.202). Web page of Network adapter
opens.

3. Click Login and enter User Name and Password and login to the
Network Adapter

4. Click on Component List and select Network Adapter

Figure 55: EPXEIP001 Web server page

5. Expand ‘’Parameter’’ and click on HTTPS setting & from drop-down

select ‘’only HTTPS; no HTTP’’ option.

Figure 56: EPXEIP001 ‘’HTTPS setting’’

Installation 147
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

6. Click on ‘’Apply changes’’.

4.5.5 Data types EPXEIP001

Data type Size Value range

USINT 1 byte 0 … 255
UINT 2 bytes 0 … 65535
UDINT 4 bytes 0 … (232 – 1)
BOOL 1 bit
BYTE 8 bits
WORD 16 bits
DWORD 32 bits
STRING 2-byte length indicator, 1 byte per
character
SHORT_STRING 1 byte length indicator, 1 byte per
character
STRING Structure of Strings
Padded EPATH
Padded EPATH

Configuration assembly
The CLP can be configured in such a way that the configuration assembly
0x7A (122) or 0x7B (123) will be transmitted during connection buildup.
The length of assembly 0x7A is variable depending on the module
configuration, assembly 0x7B has a fixed length of 400 Bytes. Two
connections using the configuration assembly 0x7B are defined in the EDS
file (from release 1.1 on).

Writing access to the data attribute of the configuration assembly is not

possible during an established connection. To change the station’s
parameters during an established connection you can use attribute 0x73
of the gateway object or of the slot objects. Alternatively, the RSTi-EP
station can be configured via the web server, as long as no fieldbus
connection is active. The configuration assembly includes an 8 byte bit
mask (equivalent 64 bit) followed by the parameters of all modules. For
each module containing parameters a ‘’1’’ is set at the corresponding
position of the bit mask. The sequence corresponds with the modules
‘sequence within the station, starting with byte 0, bit 0 for slot 1 (first
module). After that the parameters of modules with a 3-byte header will
follow:1 byte length and 2 byte for the upper 16 bits of the module ID.

Installation 148
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0

0 M8 M7 M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1
1 M 16 M 15 M 14 M 13 M 12 M 11 M 10 M9
2 M 24 M 23 M 22 M 21 M 20 M 19 M 18 M 17
3 M 32 M 31 M 30 M 29 M 28 M 27 M 26 M 25
4 M 40 M 39 M 38 M 37 M 36 M 35 M 34 M 33
5 M 48 M 47 M 46 M 45 M 44 M 43 M 42 M 41
6 M 56 M 55 M 54 M 53 M 52 M 51 M 50 M 49
7 M 64 M 63 M 62 M 61 M 60 M 59 M 58 M 57
8 Parameter length of the first module that includes parameters
9 Module ID
10 Module ID
11 Parameter
… …
Parameter length of the next module that includes parameters
Module ID
Module ID
Parameter
… …

Parameterizing via module parameter class 0x67

Each module parameter corresponds to one attribute starting from
attribute 0x65. The number of attributes depends on the type of module.
The ID of the last parameter attribute of a module can be read via
attribute 0x64. The attribute data type (USINT, UINT or UDINT) depends
on the parameter to be set. The parameter order as well as the possible
values can be found in the parameter tables within each module
description.

Class 0x67 supports the services “Get_Attributes_All’’ and

“Set_Attributes_All’’, so that all parameters of a module can be written
and read in one telegram. All attributes of a module are included in these
telegrams beginning with attribute 0x65. Therefore, the total length
depends on the number of attributes and the particular data types.

Installation 149
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

4.5.6 Process data

The EPXEIP001 process data are being packed into these assemblies:
Input Data
Assembly 0x65 (101) Assembly 0x67 (103)
2 byte status word 2 byte status word
X byte process data of the X byte process data of the
modules modules
8 byte diagnostic data
Output Data
Assembly 0x66 (101) Assembly 0x68 (104)
2 byte control word 2 byte control word
X byte process data of the X byte process data of the
modules modules
8 byte diagnostic data
control word
Assemblies 0x66 (102) and 0x68 (104) have a run/idle header.

Note: Only the associated assemblies 101 with 102 or 103 with 104 can be used. If the EDS
file has been installed this will be checked and an invalid will be rejected.
The first connection established consist either of two assemblies with one
for input and one for output data each, or it is an ‘’input only’’ connection
used as output assembly 0xC6(198). In addition to an existing output data
connection a “listen only’’ connection can be established, which uses
assembly 0xC7 (199) as output. Neither of these assemblies is accessible
via the class assembly. Only one PLC can write into the output data at a
time, further connection attempts will be rejected. Although further
“Input only’’ or “Listen only’’ connections can be established.

First Connection Second Connection Result

Input+Output (Exclusive Input+Output (Exclusive Not possible, as only one connection can
owner) owner) write output data.
Input+Output (Exclusive Input only permitted
owner)
Input+Output (Exclusive Listen only permitted
owner)
Input only Input+Output (Exclusive permitted
owner)
Input only Input only permitted
Input only Listen only permitted
Listen only Not possible, as Listen only cannot be
established as first connection.

Installation 150
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Packed process data of the modules

The process data of a digital module are packed directly on the process
data of the previous module. The process data of all other modules
always starts with the beginning of the next word.

Figure 57: Packed Process data in an exemplified module

arrangement 4DI, 8DI, 4AI

The module’s process data include a maximum of 494 byte. Therefore,

the process data of assembly 0x65 (101) and 0x66 (102) will include a
maximum of 496 byte, whereas the process data of assembly 0x67 (103)
and 0x68 (104) include a maximum of 504 byte. The actual length is
defined by the arrangement of the modules, the assembly’s size is always
an even number of bytes (2 byte, 4 byte etc.). So, in the example assembly
0x65 (101) is 12 byte long whereas assembly 0x67 (103) is 20 byte long.

Note: The size which is expected during the connection is being established can be read
from class 0x04(4), instances 0x65 to ox68 (101 to 104), attribute 0x04 (4) or via the
web server.
Control Word

8 Bytes of diagnostic data (assembly 0x67) or diagnostic data control

word (assembly 0x68) are attached to the process data of both
assemblies. Via the control word (2 byte at the beginning) and the
diagnostic data control word (8 Byte at the end) of the process output
data of assembly 0x68 you can choose which diagnostic data (8 byte at
the end) shall be transferred within the process input data: 0 in the
control word chooses diagnostic data, the 1 chooses process alarm data.

Via the diagnostic control word, you choose the module the data of which
shall be displayed: If there is a 0 in the diagnostic control word, the bits in

Installation 151
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

the process input data indicate which modules have a diagnostic or a

process alarm.

Each bit set indicates an active alarm. If a number from 1 to 64 is written

in the diagnostic control word, the process alarm data (4 byte) or the first
8 byte of the diagnostic alarm dataset will be transferred within the
process input data.

Control Diagnostics control Diagnostic data

Word word
0 0 One bit of each module indicates whether it has a diagnosis
0 1 … 64 Diagnostic data of the set module (the first 8 byte)
1 0 One bit of each module indicates whether it has a process
alarm
1 1 … 64 Process alarm data of the set module (4 bytes are being used)

Installation 152
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

4.5.7 Status word EPXEIP001(Packed process data input)

Bit Name Remarks

0 Summarized module diagnosis A diagnosis is available for at least one module with
diagnostics functionality.
1 Error bit 1 Reserve bit 1, currently not used
2 Error bit 2 Reserve bit 2, currently not used
3 System bus error Error on the system bus. Communication with the connected
modules is disrupted.
4 Unacknowledged diagnosis Unacknowledged diagnosis alarm
alarm
5 Unacknowledged process alarm Unacknowledged process alarm
6 I/O-Configuration error Deviation in the configuration. The module list has changed. The list
of configured modules (Configured Module
Ident List class 0x65 (101), instance 0x01 (1), attribute 0x70 (112))
differs from the module list detected
by the adapter (Detected Module Ident List class 0x65 (101),
instance 0x01 (1), attribute 0x6F (111)).
7 Master configuration error Master configuration error. The list of configured modules
(Configured Module Ident List class 0x65 (101),
instance 0x01, attribute 0x70 (112)) differs significantly from the
module list detected by the adapter
(Detected Module Ident List class 0x65 (101), instance 0x01 (1),
attribute 0x6F (111)) ab. No process data
can be exchanged with the modules.
8 Error bit 8 Reserve bit 8, currently not used
9 Error bit 9 Reserve bit 9, currently not used
10 Force mode active Force mode was activated through the web server. Process data
cannot be exchanged between the master
and forced channels.
11 Error bit 11 Reserve bit 11, currently not used
12 Error bit 12 Reserve bit 12, currently not used
13 Voltage UOUT error Error in the voltage supply of output current path
14 Voltage UIN error Error in the voltage supply of system and input current path
15 Error bit 15 Reserve bit 15, currently not used

Installation 153
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

4.5.8 Object descriptions EPXEIP001: CIP Common

Classes

Class Attribute Get Set NV1) Data Type2) Name Description

hex dez
Identity 0x01 (1)
Instance 0x00 (0)
0x01 1 x UINT Revision Revision of this object
0x02 2 x UINT Max Instance Highest possible instance of
this object
0x03 3 x UINT Number of Instances Current number of instances
0x06 6 x UINT Max Class Attribute ID of the last attribute of this
class in instance 0
0x07 7 x UINT Max Instance ID of the last attribute of this
Attribute class in the other instances
Instance 0x01 (1)
0x01 1 x x UINT Vendor ID Vendor ID: 326
0x02 2 x x UINT Device Type General type of device: 0x0C
0x03 3 x x UINT Product Code Vendor assigned product
code: 33492
0x04 4 x x Struct {USINT, Revision {Major, Revision of the Network
USINT} Minor} adapter
0x05 5 x x WORD Device Status Bit0: Owned;
Bit2= Configured;
Bit4-7: Extended device
status;
Bit8: Minor recoverable fault;
Bit9: Minor unrecoverable
fault;
Bit10: Major recoverable
fault;
Bit 11: Major unrecoverable
fault;
Bit12-15: Extended device
status 2
0x06 6 x x UDINT Serial Number Serial number of the device;
32 Bit value
0x07 7 x x SHORT_STRING Product Name Product name: EPXEIP001

Installation 154
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Class Attribute Get Set NV1) Data Type2) Name Description

hex dez
Message Router 0x02 (2)
Instance 0x00 (0)
0x01 1 x UINT Revision Revision of this object
0x02 2 x UINT Max Instance Highest possible instance of
this object
0x03 3 x UINT Number of Instances Current number of instances
0x04 4 x Struct {UINT, Optional Attributes List of optional attributes
Array of UINT}
0x05 5 x Struct {UINT, Optional Services List of optional services
Array of UINT}
0x06 6 x UINT Max Class Attribute ID of the last attribute of this
class in instance 0
0x07 7 x UINT Max Instance ID of the last attribute of this
Attribute class in the other instances
Instance 0x01 (1)
0x01 1 x Struct {UINT, List of supported Number of objects; Class
Array of UINT} objects codes
0x02 2 x UINT Number of Number of supported
supported connections
connections
Assembly 0x04 (4)
Instance 0x00 (0)
0x01 1 x UINT Revision Revision of this object
0x02 2 x UINT Max Instance Highest possible instance of
this object
0x03 3 x UINT Number of Instances Current number of instances
0x04 4 x Struct {UINT, Optional Attributes List of optional attributes
Array of UINT}
0x06 6 x UINT Max Class Attribute ID of the last attribute of this
class in instance 0
0x07 7 x UINT Max Instance ID of the last attribute of this
Attribute class in the other instances
Instances 0x65 ... 0x68 (101 ... 104)
0x03 3 x x Array of Byte Data Process data
0x04 4 x UINT Size Size of process data
Instances 0x7A (122)
0x03 3 x x Array of Byte Data Configuration data
0x04 4 x UINT Size Size of configuration data

Installation 155
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Class Attribute Get Set NV1) Data Type2) Name Description

hex dez
Instances 0x7B (123)
0x03 3 x x Array of Byte Data Configuration data
0x04 4 x UINT Size Size of configuration data
(static 400 BYTE)
Connection Manager 0x06 (6)
Instance 0x00 (0)
0x01 1 x UINT Revision Revision of this object
0x02 2 x UINT Max Instance Highest possible instance of
this object
0x03 3 x UINT Number of Instances Current number of instances
0x04 4 x Struct {UINT, Optional Attributes List of optional attributes
Array of UINT}
0x06 6 x UINT Max Class Attribute ID of the last attribute of this
class in instance 0
0x07 7 x UINT Max Instance ID of the last attribute of this
Attribute class in the other instances
Instance 0x01 (1)
0x01 1 x x UINT Open Requests Number of forward open
requests
0x02 2 x x UINT Open Format Rejects Number of forward open
requests, rejected
because of bad format
0x03 3 x x UINT Open Resource Number of forward open
Rejects requests, rejected because
of too few resources
0x04 4 x x UINT Open Other Rejects Number of forward open
requests, rejected because
of other reasons than format
or
resource
0x05 5 x x UINT Close Requests Number of forward close
requests
0x06 6 x x UINT Close Format Rejects Number of forward close
requests, rejected because
of bad format
0x07 7 x x UINT Close Other Rejects Number of forward close
requests, rejected because
of other reasons than format

0x08 8 x x UINT Connection Timeouts Number of connection

timeouts

Installation 156
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Class Attribute Get Set NV1) Data Type2) Name Description

hex dez
SNMP 0x52 (82)
Instance 0x00 (0)
0x01 1 x UINT Revision Revision of this object
0x02 2 x UINT Max Instance Highest possible instance of
this object
0x03 3 x UINT Number of Instances Current number of instances
0x04 4 x Struct {UINT, Optional Attributes List of optional attributes
Array of UINT}
0x06 6 x UINT Max Class Attribute ID of the last attribute of this
class in instance 0
0x07 7 x UINT Max Instance ID of the last attribute of this
Attribute class in the other instances
Instance 0x01 (1)
0x01 1 x x x USINT SNMP enable 1 = enable, 0 = disable
0x02 2 x x USINT SNMP Version 1 = SNMPv1, 3 = SNMPv3, 31
= SNMPv1+v3
0x03 3 x x x Struct Trap 1 Destination of SNMP-traps,
{USINT, Byte1: 0 = unconfigured,
STRING} 1 = IP address; String: IP
address in form
123.123.123.123
0x04 4 x x x Struct {USINT, Trap 2 Destination of SNMP-traps,
STRING} Byte1: 0 = unconfigured,
1 = IP address; String: IP
address in form
123.123.123.123
0x05 5 x x x BOOL Trap enable 1 = enable, 0 = disable
0x06 6 x x USINT Trap Type 1 = TrapV1PDU, 2 =
TrapV2PDU (only with
SNMPv3)
TCP IP Interface 0xF5 (245)
Instance 0x00 (0)
0x01 1 x UINT Revision Revision of this object
0x02 2 x UINT Max Instance Highest possible instance of
this object
0x03 3 x UINT Number of Instances Current number of instances
0x04 4 x Struct {UINT, Optional Attributes List of optional attributes
Array of UINT}
0x06 6 x UINT Max Class Attribute ID of the last attribute of this
class in instance 0

Installation 157
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Class Attribute Get Set NV1) Data Type2) Name Description

hex dez
0x07 7 x UINT Max Instance ID of the last attribute of this
Attribute class in the other instances
Instance 0x01 (1)
0x01 1 x DWORD Interface Status Status of the interface
Bit 0 ... 3: 0 = not configured,
1 = configured by software, 2
= configured by hardware;
Bit 4: Multicast pending;
Bit 5: Interface configuration
pending;
Bit 6: ACD conflicted;
Bit 7: ACD fault
0x02 2 x x DWORD Capability Flags Bit 0: BootP;
Bit 1: DNS;
Bit 2: DHCP;
Bit 4: Configuration settable;
Bit 5: Configurable by
hardware;
Bit 6: Change requires reset;
Bit 7: ACD capable
0x03 3 x x x DWORD Control Flags Bit 0 ... 3: 0 = static IP, 1 =
BootP, 2 = DHCP;
0x04 4 x x Struct {UINT, Physical Link Object Path to internal Ethernet
Padded interface
EPATH}
0x05 5 x x x Struct Interface IP, network mask, gateway;
{5*UDINT, Configuration name server 1, name server
STRING} 2; domain name
0x06 6 x x x STRING Host Name Host name, for
informational purpose
0x08 8 x x x USINT TTL Value TTL value for multicast
0x09 9 x x x Struct {USINT, Mcast Config Multicast configuration
USINT, UINT, Byte 1: 0 = autogenerated, 1
UDINT} = according to this
parameter, 2 = reserved;
Byte 2: reserved;
Byte 3 - 4: number of
multicast addresses;
Byte 5 - 7: start address
0x0A 10 x x x BOOL ACD active 0 = ACD disabled, 1 = ACD
enabled

Installation 158
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Class Attribute Get Set NV1) Data Type2) Name Description

hex dez
0x0B 11 x x x Struct {USINT, Last ACD Conflict Byte 1: Last conflict state,
6*USINT, 0 = No conflict, 1 = during
28*USINT} probe,
2 = during ongoing, 3 =
during Semi Active;
following 6 Bytes: MAC of
the conflicting packet;
following 28 Bytes:
conflicting ARP packet
Ethernet Link 0xF6 (246)
Instance 0x00 (0)
0x01 1 x UINT Revision Revision of this object
0x02 2 x UINT Max Instance Highest possible instance of
this object
0x03 3 x UINT Number of Instances Current number of instances
0x04 4 x Struct {UINT, Optional Attributes List of optional attributes
Array of UINT}
0x06 6 x UINT Max Class Attribute ID of the last attribute of this
class in instance 0
0x07 7 x UINT Max Instance ID of the last attribute of this
Attribute class in the other instances

Instances 0x01 ... 0x03 (1 ... 3)

0x01 1 x UDINT Interface Speed Transfer rate
0 = undefined; 10 = 10 MBps;
100 = 100 MBps
0x02 2 x DWORD Interface Flags Information on the status
and configuration
of the interface
Bit 0: Link active;
Bit 1: 0 = Half duplex, 1 = Full
duplex;
Bit 2 ... 4: 0 =
Autonegotiation in progress,
1 = Autonegotiation and
speed detection failed, 2 =
Autonegotiation failed but
speed detected, 3 =
Autonegotiation successful,
4 = Autonegotiation
deactivated;

Installation 159
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Class Attribute Get Set NV1) Data Type2) Name Description

hex dez
Bit 5: Requires reset before
change settings;
Bit 6: Hardware fault
0x03 3 x x 6*USINT MAC address MAC Address
0x06 6 x x x Struct {WORD, Interface Control Bit 0: 1 = Autonegotiation, 0
UINT} = no Autonegotiation;
Bit 1: 0 = Half Duplex, 1 = Full
Duplex; Byte 3 ... 4: Speed:
10 = 10 MBps, 100 = 100
MBps
0x07 7 x x USINT Interface Type 0 = unknown, 1 = internal, 2
= Twisted Pair, 3 = optical
0x08 8 x USINT Interface State 0 = unknown, 1 = enabled, 2
= disabled, 3 = testing
0x09 9 x x x USINT Admin State 0 = reserved, 1 = enable, 2 =
disable
0x0A 10 x x SHORT_STRING Interface Label Text string
(Port1/Port2/internal)
1) Nonvolatile (data are saved permanently)
2) For the description of data types refer to table Data types

4.5.9 Object descriptions EPXEIP001: Vendor Specific

Classes

Class Attribute Get Set NV1) Data Type2) Name Description

hex dez
Gateway 0x64 (100)
Instance 0x00 (0)
0x64 100 x UINT Revision Revision of this object
0x65 101 x UINT Max Instance Highest possible instance of
this object
0x66 102 x UINT Number of Current number of instances
Instances
0x67 103 x UINT Max Class Attribute ID of the last attribute of this
class in instance 0
Instance 0x01 (1)
0x64 100 x x UINT Max Attribute ID of the last instance
attribute
0x65 101 x x STRING Hardware Version Hardware version of the
adapter

Installation 160
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Class Attribute Get Set NV1) Data Type2) Name Description

hex dez
0x66 102 x x STRING Software Version Software version of the
adapter
0x67 103 x x STRING Serial Number Full serial number of the
adapter
0x68 104 x WORD Status Word Status word as in assembly
0x69 105 x x WORD Control Word Control word as in assembly
0x6A 106 x x x BYTE Parameter Fieldbus Parameter “Output behavior
error on fieldbus
error”; All outputs off (0) /
Enable substitute
values (1) / Hold last value (2)
0x6B 107 x x x BOOL Parameter Hot swap Parameter “Module behavior
on hot swap”;
Continue data exchange (0) /
Behavior like
fieldbus error (1)
0x6C 108 x Array of Struct Diag Summary Diag bytes of all modules
{USINT, BYTE, with diag:
Array of 2 Byte 1: Slot number; Byte 2:
BYTE} Slot state;
Byte 3-4: First two bytes of
diag
0x6D 109 x x x BOOL Parameter Data Parameter “Data format”;
format Motorola (0) /
Intel (1)
0x6E 110 x x Array of 4 BYTE Save/Restore Write SAVE to save the
Module Parameter module parameter;
Write LOAD to load the
defaults of the
module parameter
0x6F 111 x Array of 64 Current Module List List of currently plugged
DWORD modules
0x70 112 x x x Array of 64 Module Ref List List of expected modules
DWORD
0x71 113 x x x BOOL Diagnostic Alarm Parameter “Diagnosis
alarm”; disabled (0) /
enabled (1)
0x72 114 x x x BOOL Process Alarm Parameter “Process alarm”;
disabled (0) /
enabled (1)
0x73 115 x x Array of BYTE Module Parameter Array containing all
parameter of all modules
Installation 161
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Class Attribute Get Set NV1) Data Type2) Name Description

hex dez
0x74 116 x x x BOOL Force Lock Force mode: unlocked (0) /
locked (1)
0x75 117 x x x BYTE Behavior on Idle Parameter “Behavior on idle
state “;
All outputs off (0) / Enable
substitute values
(1)/ Hold last value (2)
0x76 118 x x Array of 8 BYTE Unacknowledged In the event of an
Diagnosis unacknowledged diagnosis
the Bit in for the respective
module is set
to 1 (Bit 0 for the first
module of the station,
Bit 63 for the 64th module).
Slot 0x65 (101)
Instance 0x00 (0)
0x64 100 x UINT Revision Revision of this object
0x65 101 x UINT Max Instance Highest possible instance of
this object
0x66 102 x UINT Number of Current number of instances
Instances
0x67 103 x UINT Max Class Attribute ID of the last attribute of this
class in instance 0
Instances 0x01 ... 0x40 (1 ... 64)
0x64 100 x x USINT Max Attributes ID of the last instance
attribute
0x65 101 x STRING Name Name of the module
0x66 102 x STRING Product Code Order number of the module
0x67 103 x STRING Serial Number Serial number of the module
0x68 104 x STRING Module ID ID of the module
0x69 105 x STRING Hardware Version Hardware version of the
module
0x6A 106 x STRING Software Version Software version of the
module
0x6B 107 x STRING MX Version MX version of the module
0x6C 108 x BYTE Slot State State of the module: 0x01:
ok;
0x80: slot empty; 0x81:
wrong module;
0x82: diagnosis active
0x6D 109 x UINT Input Bit Length Length of input data in Bit

Installation 162
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Class Attribute Get Set NV1) Data Type2) Name Description

hex dez
0x6E 110 x UINT Output Bit Length Length of output data in Bit
0x6F 111 x UINT Parameter Byte Length of parameter data in
Length Byte
0x70 112 x UINT Diag Byte Length Length of diagnosis data in
Byte
0x71 113 x Array of BYTE Process Data In Input data of the module
0x72 114 x x Array of BYTE Process Data Out Output data of the module
0x73 115 x x Array of BYTE Parameter Data Parameter data of the
module
0x74 116 x Array of BYTE Diagnosis Data Diagnosis data of the
module
0x75 117 x Array of BYTE Process Alarm Data Process alarm data of the
module
Process Data 0x66 (102)
Instance 0x00 (0)
0x64 100 x UINT Revision Revision of this object
0x65 101 x UINT Max Instance Highest possible instance of
this object
0x66 102 x UINT Number of Current number of instances
Instances
0x67 103 x UINT Max Class Attribute ID of the last attribute of this
class in instance 0
Instance 0x01 (1)
0x64 100 x x USINT Max Attributes ID of the last instance
attribute
0x65 101 x Array of BYTE Process Data In All input data
0x66 102 x UINT Length Process Data Total length of input data
In
0x67 103 x x Array of BYTE Process Data Out All output data
0x68 104 x UINT Length Process Data Total length of output data
Out
0x69 105 x Array of 8 BYTE Diag Status Diagnosis messages as in
assembly
0x6A 106 x Array of 8 BYTE Diag Control Diagnosis control as in
assembly
Module Parameter 0x67 (103)
Instance 0x00 (0)
0x64 100 x UINT Revision Revision of this object
0x65 101 x UINT Max Instance Highest possible instance of
this object

Installation 163
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Class Attribute Get Set NV1) Data Type2) Name Description

hex dez
0x66 102 x UINT Number of Current number of instances
Instances
0x67 103 x UINT Max Class Attribute ID of the last attribute of this
class in instance 0
Instance 0x01 ... 0x40 (1 ... 64)
0x64 100 x x UINT Max Attributes ID of the last instance
attribute
0x65 101 x x UINT Parameter Parameters of the module
1) Nonvolatile (data are saved permanently)
2) For the description of data types refer to table Data types

Installation 164
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

4.5.10 Supported Modules and Power Supplies

The following modules can be used with the current release of the RSTi-
EP EtherNet/IP Network Adaptor:

Catalog Number Module Description

Digital Input Modules
EP-1214 Digital Input, 4 Points, Positive Logic 24Vdc, 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
EP-1218 Digital Input, 8 Points, Positive Logic, 24Vdc 2-Wire
EP-1318 Digital Input, 8 Points, Positive Logic, 24Vdc 3-Wire
EP-125F Digital Input, 16 Points, Positive Logic, 24Vdc, 1-Wire
EP-12F4 Digital Input, 4 Points, Positive Logic 24Vdc, 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire, Time stamp
EP-153F Digital Input, 16 Points, Negative Logic, 24Vdc, 1-Wire
EP-1804 Digital Input, 4 Points 110/230Vac (65 – 277Vac), 2-Wire, Isolated
Digital Output Modules
EP-2214 Digital Output, 4 Points, Positive Logic 24Vdc, 0.5A, 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
EP-2614 Digital Output, 4 Points, Positive Logic 24Vdc, 2.0A, 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
EP-2634 Digital Output, 4 Points, Positive/Negative Logic 24Vdc, 2.0A, 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
EP-2218 Digital Output, 8 Points, Positive Logic, 24Vdc, 0.5A, 2-Wire
EP-225F Digital Output, 16 Points, Positive Logic, 24Vdc, 0.5A, 1-Wire
EP-291F Digital Output, 16 Points, Negative Logic, 24Vdc, 1-Wire
Digital Relay Output Modules
EP-2714 Digital Relay Output, 4 Points, Positive Logic, 24 -–220 Vdc/Vac, 6A, 2-Wire
EP-2814 Solid-state Relay Output Module
Analog Input Modules
EP-3164 Analog Input, 4 Channels Voltage/Current 16 Bits 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
EP-3264 Analog Input, 4 Channels Voltage/Current 16 Bits with Diagnostics 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
Analog Input, 4 Channels Voltage/ Current 16 Bits with Diagnostics 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire,
EP-3664
Differential
EP-3124 Analog Input, 4 Channels Voltage/Current 12 Bits 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
EP-3368 Analog Input, 8 Channels Current 16 Bits 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
EP-3468 Analog Input, 8 Channels Current 16 Bits 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire, Channel Diagnostic
EP-3704 Analog Input, 4 Channels RTD 16 Bits with Diagnostics 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
EP-3804 Analog Input, 4 Channels TC 16 Bits with Diagnostics 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
EP-1813 Power Measurement Module, 8 Channels
Analog Output Modules
EP-4164 Analog Output, 4 Channels Voltage/Current 16 Bits 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
EP-4264 Analog Output, 4 Channels Voltage/Current 16 Bits with Diagnostics 2-, 3-, or 4-Wire
Specialty Modules
EP-5111 1 Channel High Speed Counter, AB 100 kHz 1 DO 24Vdc, 0.5A
EP-5112 2 Channel High Speed Counter, AB 100 kHz
EP-5212 2 Channel Frequency Measurement, 100 kHz
Installation 165
User Manual Section 4
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Catalog Number Module Description

EP-5261 1 Channel Serial Communications, 232, 422, 485
EP-5311 1 Channel SSI Encoder, BCD or Gray-Code Format, 5/24 Vdc
EP-5422 2 Channels PWM Output, Positive Logic, 24Vdc, 0.5 A
EP-5442 2 Channels PWM Output, Positive Logic, 24Vdc, 2 A
EP-5324 IO-Link Communication module, 4 Channels
Power Feed Modules for Input Current Path
EP-7631 Power Module, 1 Channel 24Vdc Input Flow 10A
Power Feed Modules for Output Current Path
EP-7641 Power Module, 1 Channel 24Vdc Output Flow 10A
Safe Feed-input Modules
EP-1901 1 Safe Feed-Input, 24 Vdc
EP-1902 2 Safe Feed-Inputs, 24 Vdc, Programmable Delay
EP-1922 2 Safe Feed-Inputs, 24 Vdc
Potential Distribution Modules
Power Module, 16 Channels 24Vdc Potential Distribution +24 Vdc from Input Current
EP-711F
Path
Power Module, 16 Channels 24Vdc Potential Distribution +24 Vdc from Output
EP-751F
Current Path
EP-700F Power Module, 16 Channels 24Vdc Potential Distribution Functional Earth
Power Module, 16 Channels 24Vdc Potential Distribution +0Vdc from Input Current
EP-710F
Path
Power Module, 16 Channels 24Vdc Potential Distribution +0Vdc from Output Current
EP-750F
Path

Installation 166
User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Section 5: Detailed Description of I/O

Modules
5.1 Digital Input Module EP-1214

Figure 58: Digital Figure 59: Connection Diagram EP-1214

Input Module EP
1214

The digital input module EP-1214 can detect up to 4 input signals. One
sensor can be connected to each connector using a 2-wire, 3-wire or 3-
wire + FE connection. A status LED is assigned to each channel. The
module electronics supply the connected sensors with power from the
input current path (IIN).

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 167

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.1.1 LED Indicators EP-1214

Figure 60: EP-1214 LEDs

LED EP-1214
Green: Communication over the system bus
Module Status
Red: Module System Fault or Diagnostic Fault
1.1 Yellow: Input 0 active
1.2 --
1.3 --
1.4 --
2.1 Yellow: Input 1 active
2.2 --
2.3 --
2.4 --
3.1 Yellow: Input 2 active
3.2 --
3.3 --
3.4 --
4.1 Yellow: Input 3 active
4.2 --
4.3 --
4.4 --

For error messages refer to Section 14: LED Indicators and Troubleshooting.

Figure 61: Block Diagram EP-1214

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 168

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.1.2 Specifications EP-1214

Specification Description
System data
Data Process, parameter and diagnostic data depend on the
network adapter used (refer to Section 3.1, Order and
Arrangement of Modules).
Interface RSTi-EP I/O communication bus
System bus transfer rate 48 Mbps
Inputs
Channels 4
Sensor types Type 1 and Type 3 sensors as per IEC 61131-2
Input filter Input delay adjustable from 0 to 40ms
(PROFIBUS-DP to 20ms)
Off voltage <5V
On voltage > 11 V
Sensor supply max. 2 A per plug, total max. 8 A
Sensor connection 2-wire, 3-wire, 3-wire + FE
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Module diagnosis Yes
Individual channel diagnosis No
Supply
Supply voltage 20.4V – 28.8V
Current consumption from system current 8 mA
path ISYS
Current consumption from input current 18 mA + sensor supply current
path IIN
General data
Weight 87 g (3.07 oz)
For additional general data, refer to Section 1.71.7 General Technical Data for I/O Modules.

5.1.3 Modifiable Parameters for EP-1214

Channel Description Options Default

0 to 3 Input delay no (0) / 3ms
0.3ms (1) (not at PROFIBUS-DP) /
3ms (2) /
10ms (3) /
20ms (4) /
40ms (5) (not at PROFIBUS-DP)

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 169

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.1.4 Diagnostic Data EP-1214

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

0 Module error
1 Internal error
2 External error
3 Channel error 0
Error indicator 0
4 Error
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Parameter error
0
1
Module Type 0x0F
2
3
Module type 1
4 Reserved 0
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
Error byte 2 2 0-7 Reserved 0
0-2 Reserved 0
Error byte 3 3 3 Internal diagnostic FIFO full 0
4-7 Reserved 0
0-6 Channel type 0x70
Channel type 4
7 Reserved 0
Diagnostic bits per
5 Number of diagnostic bit per channel 0
channel
Number of channels 6 Number of similar channels per module 4
Channel error 7-10 0-31 Reserved 0
Channel 0 error 11
to to 0–7 Reserved 0
Channel 31 error 42
Time stamp 43-46 Time stamp [μs] (32-bit)

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 170

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.1.5 Process Data Inputs EP-1214

Byte Bit Description

IX0.0 DI0
IX0.1 DI1
IX0.2 DI2
IX0.3 DI3
IB0
IX0.4 reserved
IX0.5 reserved
IX0.6 reserved
IX0.7 reserved

5.2 Digital Input Module EP-1218

Figure 62: Digital Figure 63: Connection Diagram

Input Module EP- EP-1218
1218

The digital input module EP-1218 can detect up to 8 input signals. Two
sensors can be connected to each connector using a 2-wire connection.
A status LED is assigned to each channel. The module electronics supply
the connected sensors with power from the input current path (IIN).

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 171

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.2.1 LED Indicators EP-1218

Figure 64: EP-1218 LEDs

LED EP-1218

Green: Communication over the system bus

Module Status
Red: Module System Fault or Diagnostic Fault
1.1 Yellow: Input 0 active
1.2 --
1.3 Yellow: Input 1 active
1.4 --
2.1 Yellow: Input 2 active
2.2 --
2.3 Yellow: Input 3 active
2.4 --
3.1 Yellow: Input 4 active
3.2 --
3.3 Yellow: Input 5 active
3.4 --
4.1 Yellow: Input 6 active
4.2 --
4.3 Yellow: Input 7 active
4.4 --

For error messages refer to Section 14: LED Indicators and Troubleshooting.

Figure 65: Block Diagram EP-1218

System
bus

GND IN

24VDC IN

EP-1218

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 172

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.2.2 Specifications EP-1218

Specification Description
System data
Data Process, parameter and diagnostic data depend on the
network adapter used (refer to Section, Order and
Arrangement of Modules).
Interface RSTi-EP I/O communication bus
System bus transfer rate 48 Mbps
Inputs
Number 8
Sensor types Type 1 and Type 3 sensors as per IEC 61131-2
Input filter Input delay adjustable from 0 to 40ms
(PROFIBUS-DP to 20ms)
Low input voltage <5V
High input voltage > 11 V
Sensor supply max. 15 mA per channel
Sensor connection 2-wire
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Module diagnosis Yes
Individual channel diagnosis No
Supply
Supply voltage 20.4V – 28.8V
Current consumption from system current 8 mA
path ISYS
Current consumption from input current 30 mA + sensor supply current
path IIN
General data
Weight 85 g (2.99 oz)
For additional general data, refer to Section 1.71.7 General Technical Data for I/O Modules.

5.2.3 Modifiable Parameters for EP-1218

Channel Description Options Default

0 to 7 Input delay no (0) / 3ms
0.3ms (1) (not at PROFIBUS-DP) /
3ms (2) /
10ms (3) /
20ms (4) /
40ms (5) (not at PROFIBUS-DP)

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 173

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.2.4 Diagnostic Data EP-1218

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

0 Module error
1 Internal error
2 External error
3 Channel error 0
Error indicator 0
4 Error
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Parameter error
0
1
Module Type 0x0F
2
3
Module type 1
4 Reserved 0
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
Error byte 2 2 0-7 Reserved 0
0-2 Reserved 0
Error byte 3 3 3 Internal diagnostic FIFO full 0
4-7 Reserved 0
0-6 Channel type 0x70
Channel type 4
7 Reserved 0
Diagnostic bits Number of diagnostic bit per
5 0
per channel channel
Number of Number of similar channels per
6 8
channels module
Channel error 7-10 0-31 Reserved 0
Channel 0 error 11
to to 0–7 Reserved 0
Channel 31 error 42
Time stamp 43-46 Time stamp [μs] (32-bit)

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 174

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.2.5 Process Data Inputs EP-1218

Byte Bit Description

IX0.0 DI0
IX0.1 DI1
IX0.2 DI2
IX0.3 DI3
IB0
IX0.4 DI4
IX0.5 DI5
IX0.6 DI6
IX0.7 DI7

5.3 Digital Input Module EP-1318

Figure 66: Digital Input Figure 67: Connection

Module EP-1318 Diagram EP-1318

The digital input module EP-1318 can detect up to 8 input signals. Two
sensors can be connected to each connector using a 2-wire or 3-wire
connection. A status LED is assigned to each channel. The module
electronics supply the connected sensors with power from the input
current path (IIN).
Detailed Description of I/O Modules 175
User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.3.1 LED Indicators EP-1318

Figure 68: EP-1318 LEDs

LED EP-1318

Green: Communication over the system bus

Module Status
Red: Module System Fault or Diagnostic Fault
1.1 Yellow: Input 0 active
1.2 --
1.3 --
1.4 Yellow: Input 1 active
2.1 Yellow: Input 2 active
2.2 --
2.3 --
2.4 Yellow: Input 3 active
3.1 Yellow: Input 4 active
3.2 --
3.3 --
3.4 Yellow: Input 5 active
4.1 Yellow: Input 6 active
4.2 --
4.3 --
4.4 Yellow: Input 7 active

For error messages refer to Section 14: LED Indicators and Troubleshooting.

Figure 69: Block Diagram EP-1318

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 176

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.3.2 Specifications EP-1318

Specification Description
System data
Data Process, parameter and diagnostic data depend on the
network adapter used (refer to Section 3.1, Order and
Arrangement of Modules
Interface RSTi-EP I/O communication bus
System bus transfer rate 48 Mbps
Inputs
Number 8
Sensor types Type 1 and Type 3 sensors as per IEC 61131-2
Input filter Input delay adjustable from 0 to 40ms
(PROFIBUS-DP to 20ms)
Low input voltage <5V
High input voltage > 11 V
Sensor supply max. 2 A per plug, total max. 8 A
Sensor connection 2-wire, 3-wire
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Module diagnosis Yes
Individual channel diagnosis No
Supply
Supply voltage 20.4V – 28.8V
Current consumption from system current 8 mA
path ISYS
Current consumption from input current 30 mA + sensor supply current
path IIN
General data
Weight 83 g (2.93 oz)
For additional general data, refer to Section 1.71.7 General Technical Data for I/O Modules.

5.3.3 Modifiable Parameters for EP-1318

Channel Description Options Default

0 to 7 Input delay no (0) / 3ms
0.3ms (1) (not at PROFIBUS-DP) /
3ms (2) /
10ms (3) /
20ms (4) /
40ms (5) (not at PROFIBUS-DP)

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 177

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.3.4 Diagnostic Data EP-1318

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

0 Module error
1 Internal error
2 External error
3 Channel error 0
Error indicator 0
4 Error
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Parameter error
0
1
Module Type 0x0F
2
3
Module type 1
4 Reserved 0
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
Error byte 2 2 0-7 Reserved 0
0-2 Reserved 0
Error byte 3 3 3 Internal diagnostic FIFO full 0
4-7 Reserved 0
0-6 Channel type 0x70
Channel type 4
7 Reserved 0
Diagnostic bits per Number of diagnostic bit per
5 0
channel channel
Number of channels Number of similar channels per
6 8
module
Channel error 7-10 0-31 Reserved 0
Channel 0 error 11
to to 0–7 Reserved 0
Channel 31 error 42
Time stamp 43-46 Time stamp [μs] (32-bit)

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 178

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.3.5 Process Data Inputs EP-1318

Byte Bit Description

IX0.0 DI0
IX0.1 DI1
IX0.2 DI2
IX0.3 DI3
IB0
IX0.4 DI4
IX0.5 DI5
IX0.6 DI6
IX0.7 DI7

5.4 Digital Input Module EP-1804

Figure 70: Digital Figure 71: Connection

Input Module EP- Diagram EP-1804
1804

The digital input module EP-1804 can detect up to 4 binary control

signals. One sensor can be connected to each connector using a 2-wire
connection. Both L and N connections of each input are bridged
internally. The four inputs are galvanic isolated, they can be supplied
with input voltages between 110Vac and 230Vac. Solely AC
measurements can be run.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 179

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

WARNING
A status LED is assigned to each channel. All signal lines must be supplied from the same
power system.

CAUTION
The module can be destroyed by too high frequencies.

The input frequency may be 65 Hz at maximum, the switching frequency 15 Hz at

maximum.

CAUTION
The module can be destroyed by too high input currents of the signal lines.

The inputs must be ensured using a slow fuse max 4 A.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 180

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.4.1 LED Indicators EP-1804

Figure 72: EP-1804 LEDs

LED EP-1804
Green: Communication over the system bus
Module Status
Red: Module System Fault or Diagnostic Fault
1.1 Yellow: Input 0 active
1.2 --
1.3 --
1.4 --
2.1 Yellow: Input 1 active
2.2 --
2.3 --
2.4 --
3.1 Yellow: Input 2 active
3.2 --
3.3 --
3.4 --
4.1 Yellow: Input 3 active
4.2 --
4.3 --
4.4 --

For error messages refer to Section 14: LED Indicators and Troubleshooting.

Figure 73: Block Diagram EP-1804

5.4.2 Specifications EP-1804

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 181
User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Specification Description
System data
Data Process, parameter and diagnostic data depend on the network
adapter used (refer to Section 3.1, Order and Arrangement of
Modules).
Interface RSTi-EP I/O communication bus
System bus transfer rate 48 Mbps
4kV between the channels as well as between channels and power
Galvanic isolation
supply
Line-to-line voltage 400V between the channels possible
Inputs
Number 4
Input type P-switching, for Type 3 sensors as per IEC 61131-2
Input filter Input delay 10ms
Low input voltage < 65V
High input voltage > 80V
Input voltage maximum 277Vac (UL); 264,5Vac (VDE)
Input frequency, typical 50 Hz, 60 Hz
Sensor supply No
Sensor connection 2-wire
Module diagnosis Yes
Individual channel diagnosis No
Supply
Supply voltage 20.4V – 28.8V
Current consumption from system 8 mA
current path ISYS
Current consumption from input Nil
current path IIN
General data
Weight 89 g (3.07 oz)

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 182

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.4.3 Diagnostic Data EP-1804

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

0 Module error
1 Internal error
2 External error
3 Channel error 0
Error indicator 0
4 Error
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Parameter error
0
1
Module Type 0x05
2
3
Module type 1
4 Reserved 0
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
Error byte 2 2 0-7 Reserved 0
0-2 Reserved 0
3 Internal diagnostic FIFO full 0
Error byte 3 3
4 Power supply fault 0
5-7 Reserved 0
0-6 Channel type 0x70
Channel type 4
7 Reserved 0
Diagnostic bits per
5 Number of diagnostic bit per channel 8
channel
Number of channels 6 Number of similar channels per module 4
Channel error 7-10 0-31 Reserved 0
Channel 0 error 11
to to 0–7 Reserved 0
Channel 31 error 42
Time stamp 43-46 Time stamp [μs] (32-bit)

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 183

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.4.4 Process Data Inputs EP-1804

Byte Bit Description

IX0.0 DI0
IX0.1 DI1
IX0.2 DI2
IX0.3 DI3
IB0
IX0.4 Reserved
IX0.5 Reserved
IX0.6 Reserved
IX0.7 Reserved

5.5 Digital Input Module EP-125F

Figure 74: Digital Input Figure 75: Connection

Module EP-125F Diagram EP-125F

The EP-125F digital input module can detect up to 16 input signals. Four
sensors can be connected to each connector in a 1-wire connection. A
status LED is assigned to each channel. The connected sensors must be
supplied with power from the input current path IIN (e.g. with potential
distribution modules).
Detailed Description of I/O Modules 184
User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.5.1 LED Indicators EP-125F

Figure 76: EP-125F LEDs

LED EP-125F
Green: Communication over the system bus
Module Status
Red: Module System Fault or Diagnostic Fault
1.1 Yellow: Input 0 active
1.2 Yellow: Input 1 active
1.3 Yellow: Input 2 active
1.4 Yellow: Input 3 active
2.1 Yellow: Input 4 active
2.2 Yellow: Input 5 active
2.3 Yellow: Input 6 active
2.4 Yellow: Input 7 active
3.1 Yellow: Input 8 active
3.2 Yellow: Input 9 active
3.3 Yellow: Input 10 active
3.4 Yellow: Input 11 active
4.1 Yellow: Input 12 active
4.2 Yellow: Input 13 active
4.3 Yellow: Input 14 active
4.4 Yellow: Input 15 active

For error messages refer to Section 14: LED Indicators and Troubleshooting.

Figure 77: Block Diagram EP-125F

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 185

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.5.2 Specifications EP-125F

Specification Description
System data
Data Process, parameter and diagnostic data depend on the
network adapter used (refer to Section 3.1Order and
Arrangement of Modules
Interface RSTi-EP I/O communication bus
System bus transfer rate 48 Mbps
Inputs
Number 16
Sensor types Type 1 and Type 3 sensors as per IEC 61131-2
Input filter Input delay 3ms
Low input voltage <5V
High input voltage > 11 V
Sensor supply No
Sensor connection 1-conductor
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Module diagnosis Yes
Individual channel diagnosis No
Supply
Supply voltage 20.4V – 28.8V
Current consumption from system current 8 mA
path ISYS
Current consumption from input current 52 mA
path IIN
General data
Weight 87 g (3.07 oz)

5.5.3 Diagnostic Data EP-125F

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

0 Module error
1 Internal error
2 External error
3 Channel error 0
Error indicator 0
4 Error
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Parameter error
0
Module type 1 Module Type 0x0F
1
Detailed Description of I/O Modules 186
User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

2
3
4 Reserved 0
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
Error byte 2 2 0-7 Reserved 0
0-2 Reserved 0
Error byte 3 3 3 Internal diagnostic FIFO full 0
4-7 Reserved 0
0-6 Channel type 0x70
Channel type 4
7 Reserved 0
Diagnostic bits per
5 Number of diagnostic bit per channel 0
channel
Number of channels 6 Number of similar channels per module 8
Channel error 7-10 0-31 Reserved 0
Channel 0 error 11
to to 0–7 Reserved 0
Channel 31 error 42
Time stamp 43-46 Time stamp [μs] (32-bit)

5.5.4 Process5 Data Inputs EP-125F

Byte Bit Description

IX0.0 DI0
IX0.1 DI1
IX0.2 DI2
IX0.3 DI3
IB0
IX0.4 DI4
IX0.5 DI5
IX0.6 DI6
IX0.7 DI7
IX1.0 DI8
IX1.1 DI9
IX1.2 DI10
IX1.3 DI11
IB1
IX1.4 DI12
IX1.5 DI13
IX1.6 DI14
IX1.7 DI15

5
Internal process data mapping with data format Standard. Depending on the fieldbus specification and the data format of
the communicating fieldbus components the bytes and/or words can be reversed during data transfer.
Detailed Description of I/O Modules 187
User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.6 Digital Input Module EP-12F4

Figure 78: Digital Figure 79: Connection Diagram

Input Module EP- EP-12F4
12F4

The digital input module with time stamp functionality EP-12F4 can
detect up to 4 binary control signals and provide them with a time stamp
(resolution 1μs). Depending on the configuration of the module, up to 5
or 15 time-stamp entries can be evaluated.

One sensor can be connected to each connector using a 2-wire, 3-wire,

or 3-wire connection + FE. A status LED is assigned to each channel. The
module electronics supply the connected sensors with power from the
input current path (IIN).

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 188

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.6.1 LED Indicators EP-12F4

Figure 80: EP-12F4 LEDs

LED EP-12F4
Green: Communication over the system bus
Module Status Red: No communication on system bus or
there is a diagnostic message displayed
1.1 Yellow: Input 0 active
1.2 --
1.3 --
1.4 --
2.1 Yellow: Input 1 active
2.2 --
2.3 --
2.4 --
3.1 Yellow: Input 2 active
3.2 --
3.3 --
3.4 --
4.1 Yellow: Input 3 active
4.2 --
4.3 --
4.4 --

For error messages refer to Section 14: LED Indicators and Troubleshooting.

Figure 81: Block Diagram EP-12F4

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 189

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.6.2 Specifications EP-12F4

Specification Description
System data
Data Process, parameter and diagnostic data depend on the
network adapter used (refer to Section 3.1, Order and
Arrangement of Modules).
Interface RSTi-EP I/O communication bus
System bus transfer rate 48 Mbps
Inputs
Number 4
Sensor types Type 1 and Type 3 sensors as per IEC 61131-2
Input filter Input delay adjustable from 0 to 40ms
(PROFIBUS-DP to 20ms)
Low input voltage <5V
High input voltage > 11 V
Max. input current per channel 3 mA
Sensor supply Yes
Sensor connection 2-wire, 3-wire, 3-wire + FE
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Module diagnosis Yes
Individual channel diagnosis No
Time stamp data width 16 bits
Time stamp resolution 1μs
Supply
Supply voltage 20.4V – 28.8V
Current consumption from system current 8 mA
path ISYS
Current consumption from input current path 18 mA + sensor supply current
IIN
General data
Weight 87 g (3.07 oz)
For additional general data, refer to Section 1.71.7 General Technical Data for I/O Modules.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 190

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.6.3 Modifiable Parameters for EP-12F4

Channel Description Options Default

no (0) /
0.3ms (1) (not at PROFIBUS-DP) /
3ms (2) /
0-3 Input delay 3ms
10ms (3) /
20ms (4) /
40ms (5) (not at PROFIBUS-DP)
disabled (0) /
0-3 Timestamp at edge 0-1 disabled
enabled (1)
disabled (0) /
0–3 Timestamp at edge 1-0 disabled
enabled (1)

5.6.4 Diagnostic Data EP-12F4

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

0 Module error
1 Internal error
2 External error
3 Channel error 0
Error indicator 0
4 Error
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Parameter error
0
1
Module Type 0x0F
2
3
Module type 1
4 Reserved 0
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
Error byte 2 2 0-7 Reserved 0
0-2 Reserved 0
Error byte 3 3 3 Internal diagnostic FIFO full 0
4-7 Reserved 0
0-6 Channel type 0x70
Channel type 4
7 Reserved 0
Diagnostic bits per
5 Number of diagnostic bit per channel 0
channel
Number of channels 6 Number of similar channels per module 4

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 191

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

Channel error 7-10 0-31 Reserved 0
Channel 0 error 11
to to 0–7 Reserved 0
Channel 31 error 42
Time stamp 43-46 Time stamp [μs] (32-bit)

5.6.5 Process† Data Inputs EP-12F4

Byte Format Name Remark

IB0 Byte Input image 1 Bit0 = DI0 ... Bit3 = DI3, Bit4 ... 7 reserved
IB1 Byte Running number 1 0 ... 127 rotating
IB2
Word Time stamp 1 0 ... 65,535μs rotating
IB3
IB4 Byte Input image 2
IB5 Byte Running number 2
IB6
Word Time stamp 2
IB7
IB8 Byte Input image 3
IB9 Byte Running number 3
IB10
Word Time stamp 3
IB11
-- -- --
IB56 Byte Input image 15
IB57 Byte Running number 15
IB58
Word Time stamp 15
IB59
† Internal process data mapping with data format “Standard”. Depending on the fieldbus specification and
the data format of the communicating fieldbus components the bytes and/or words can be reversed during
data transfer.

5.6.6 Time Stamp Function

With time stamp function (ETS = edge time stamp) enabled, at every
corresponding edge the time value of the timer is stored in the process
image as an ETS entry together with the status of the inputs and a
running number.

The module does not use any bytes in the output range. It uses 60 Bytes
in the input range for 15 ETS entries each with 4 bytes.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 192

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.6.7 Structure of an ETS Entry

Input image PII After the edge transition, the status of the inputs is stored here.
The input byte has the following bit assignments:
Bit 0: DI 0
Bit 1: DI 1
Bit 2: DI 2
Bit 3: DI 3
Bit 4 … 7: reserved (0)
Running Number The RN (running number) is a consecutive number from 0 to 127.
RN It describes the chronological sequence of the edges
Time stamp The 16-bit timer (0 ... 65,535μs) in the RSTi-EP module is started as
ETS_US soon as the power supply is switched on and after (216 -1) μs
restarts at 0.

Figure 82: Structure of ETS Entries in Input Range in Chronological

Order

Example for the Mode of Operation

The following example shows the sequence in which ETS entries are
stored. The input channels are predefined as follows:

DI 0 and DI 1: time stamp at edge 0-1 enabled

DI 2 and DI 3: time stamp at edge 0-1 disabled

DI 0 and DI 1: time stamp at edge 1-0 enabled

DI 2 and DI 3: time stamp at edge 1-0 disabled

The ETS entries available at time “t” are designated by the green area in
the diagram. ETS entries that are not (or no longer) available have a grey
background.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 193

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Figure 83: Process Image is Empty at t0

A rising 0-1 edge on DI 0 causes the 1st ETS entry at address + 0.

Figure 84: 1st ETS Entry at t1

A rising 0-1 edge on DI 1 causes the 2nd ETS entry at address + 0. The
1st ETS entry is shifted by 4 bytes.

Figure 85: 2nd ETS Entry at t2

A falling 1-0 edge on DI 0 causes the 3rd ETS entry.

Figure 86 3rd ETS Entry at t3

... 4th to14th ETS Entry .

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 194

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

A rising 0-1 edge on DI 0 causes the15th ETS entry.

Figure 87: 15th ETS Entry at t15

A rising 0-1 edge on DI 1 causes the16th ETS entry. The 1st ETS entry is
deleted and not available anymore.

Figure 88: 16th ETS Entry at t16

A falling 1-0 edge on DI 1 causes the17th ETS entry. The 2nd ETS entry is
deleted and not available anymore.

Figure 89: 17th ETS Entry at t17

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 195

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.7 Digital Input Module EP-153F

Figure 90: Digital Figure 91: Connection Diagram

Input Module EP-
153F

EP-153F

The EP-153F digital input module can detect up to 16 input signals. Four
sensors can be connected to each connector in a 1-wire connection. A
status LED is assigned to each channel. The connected sensors must be
supplied with power from the input current path IIN (e.g. with potential
distribution modules).

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 196

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.7.1 LED Indicators EP-153F

Figure 92: EP-153F LEDs

LED EP-153F
Green: Communication over the system bus
Module Status
Red: Module System Fault or Diagnostic Fault
1.1 Yellow: Input 0 active
1.2 Yellow: Input 1 active
1.3 Yellow: Input 2 active
1.4 Yellow: Input 3 active
2.1 Yellow: Input 4 active
2.2 Yellow: Input 5 active
2.3 Yellow: Input 6 active
2.4 Yellow: Input 7 active
3.1 Yellow: Input 8 active
3.2 Yellow: Input 9 active
3.3 Yellow: Input 10 active
3.4 Yellow: Input 11 active
4.1 Yellow: Input 12 active
4.2 Yellow: Input 13 active
4.3 Yellow: Input 14 active
4.4 Yellow: Input 15 active

For error messages refer to Section 12, LED Indicators and Troubleshooting.

Figure 93: Block Diagram EP-153F

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 197

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.7.2 Specifications EP-153F

Specification Description
System data
Data Process, parameter and diagnostic data depend on the
network adapter used (refer to Section, Order and
Arrangement of Modules
Interface RSTi-EP I/O communication bus
System bus transfer rate 48 Mbps
Inputs
Number 16
Sensor types N-Switching, comparable to Type 1 and Type 3 sensors as
per IEC 61131-2
Input filter Input delay 3ms
Low input voltage <5V
High input voltage > 11 V
Sensor supply No
Sensor connection 1-conductor
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Module diagnosis Yes
Individual channel diagnosis No
Supply
Supply voltage 20.4V – 28.8V
Current consumption from system current 8 mA
path ISYS
Current consumption from input current 52mA
path IIN
General data
Weight 88 g (3.10 oz)

5.7.3 Diagnostic Data EP-153F

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

0 Module error
1 Internal error
2 External error
3 Channel error 0
Error indicator 0
4 Error
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Parameter error
0
Module type 1 Module Type 0x0F
1

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 198

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

2
3
4 Reserved 0
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
Error byte 2 2 0-7 Reserved 0
0-2 Reserved 0
Error byte 3 3 3 Internal diagnostic FIFO full 0
4-7 Reserved 0
0-6 Channel type 0x70
Channel type 4
7 Reserved 0
Diagnostic bits per
5 Number of diagnostic bit per channel 0
channel
Number of channels 6 Number of similar channels per module 0
Channel error 7-10 0-31 Reserved 0
Channel 0 error
to 11-42 0–7 Reserved 0
Channel 31 error
Time stamp 43-46 Time stamp [μs] (32-bit)

5.7.4 Process6 Data Inputs EP-153F

Byte Bit Description

IX0.0 DI0
IX0.1 DI1
IX0.2 DI2
IX0.3 DI3
IB0
IX0.4 DI4
IX0.5 DI5
IX0.6 DI6
IX0.7 DI7
IX1.0 DI8
IX1.1 DI9
IX1.2 DI10
IX1.3 DI11
IB1
IX1.4 DI12
IX1.5 DI13
IX1.6 DI14
IX1.7 DI15

6
Internal process data mapping with data format Standard. Depending on the fieldbus specification and the data format of
the communicating fieldbus components the bytes and/or words can be reversed during data transfer.
Detailed Description of I/O Modules 199
User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.8 Digital Output Module EP-2214

Figure 94: Digital Figure 95: Connection Diagram

Output Module EP-2214
EP-2214

The EP-2214 digital output module can control up to 4 discrete outputs,

each with a maximum of 0.5 A. One discrete output can be connected to
each connector using a 2-wire, 3-wire or 3-wire connection + FE. A status
LED is assigned to each channel. The outputs are supplied with power
from the output current path (IOUT).

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 200

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.8.1 LED Indicators EP-2214

Figure 96: EP-2214 LEDs

LED EP-2214
Green: Communication over the system bus
Module Status
Red: Module System Fault or Diagnostic Fault
1.1 Yellow: Output 0 active
1.2 --
1.3 --
1.4 --
2.1 Yellow: Output 1 active
2.2 --
2.3 --
2.4 --
3.1 Yellow: Output 2 active
3.2 --
3.3 --
3.4 --
4.1 Yellow: Output 3 active
4.2 --
4.3 --
4.4 --

For error messages refer to Section 14: LED Indicators and Troubleshooting.

Figure 97: Block Diagram EP-2214

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 201

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.8.2 Specifications EP-2214

Specification Description
System data
Process, parameter and diagnostic data depend on the
Data network adapter used (refer to Section, Order and
Arrangement of Modules).
Interface RSTi-EP I/O communication bus
System bus transfer rate 48 Mbps
Outputs
Number 4
Type of load Resistive, inductive, lamp load
Response time low » high max. 100μs; high » low max. 250μs
per channel 0.5 A
Max. output current
per module 2A
Breaking energy (inductive) 150 mJ per channel
Resistive load (min. 47Ω) 1 kHz
0.2 Hz without free-wheeling
diode
Switching frequency Inductive load (DC 13)
1 kHz with suitable free-wheeling
diode
Lamp load (12 W) 1 kHz
Actuator connection 2-wire, 3-wire, 3-wire + FE
Actuator supply max. 2 A per plug, total max. 8 A
Short-circuit-proof Yes
Constant current with thermal switch-off and automatic
Protective circuit
restart
Response time of the current limiting
< 100μs
circuit
Module diagnosis Yes
Individual channel diagnosis No
Reactionless Yes
Can be used with EP-19xx Yes
Supply
Supply voltage 20.4V – 28.8V
Current consumption from system
8 mA
current path ISYS
Current consumption from output
20 mA + load
current path IOUT
General data
Weight 86 g (3.03 oz)
For additional general data, refer to Section 1.71.7 General Technical Data for I/O Modules.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 202

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.8.3 Modifiable Parameters for EP-2214

Channel Description Options Default

0-3 Substitute Value Off (0) / On (1) Off

5.8.4 Diagnostic Data EP-2214

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

0 Module error
1 Internal error
2 External error
3 Channel error 0
Error indicator 0
4 Error
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Parameter error
0
1
Module Type 0x0F
2
3
Module type 1
4 Reserved 0
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
Error byte 2 2 0-7 Reserved 0
0-2 Reserved 0
Error byte 3 3 3 Internal diagnostic FIFO full 0
4-7 Reserved 0
0-6 Channel type 0x72
Channel type 4
7 Reserved 0
Diagnostic bits per
5 Number of diagnostic bit per channel 0
channel
Number of channels Number of similar channels per
6 4
module
Channel error 7-10 0-31 Reserved 0
Channel 0 error
to 11 to 42 0–7 Reserved 0
Channel 31 error
Time stamp 43-46 Time stamp [μs] (32-bit)

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 203

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.8.5 Process Data Outputs EP-2214

Byte Bit Description

OX0.0 DO0
OX0.1 DO1
OX0.2 DO2
OX0.3 DO3
OB0
OX0.4 reserved
OX0.5 reserved
OX0.6 reserved
OX0.7 reserved

5.9 Digital Output Module EP-2614

Figure 98: Digital Figure 99: Connection Diagram

Output Module EP-2614
EP-2614

The digital output module EP-2614 can control up to 4 discrete outputs,

each with a maximum of 2 A. One discrete output can be connected to
each connector using a 2-wire, 3-wire or 3-wire connection + FE. A status
LED is assigned to each channel. The outputs are supplied with power
from the output current path (IOUT).

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 204

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.9.1 LED Indicators EP-2614

Figure 100: EP-2614 LEDs

LED EP-2614
Green: Communication over the system bus
Module Status
Red: Module System Fault or Diagnostic Fault
1.1 Yellow: Output 0 active
1.2 --
1.3 --
1.4 --
2.1 Yellow: Output 1 active
2.2 --
2.3 --
2.4 --
3.1 Yellow: Output 2 active
3.2 --
3.3 --
3.4 --
4.1 Yellow: Output 3 active
4.2 --
4.3 --
4.4 --

For error messages refer to Section 14: LED Indicators and Troubleshooting.

Figure 101: Block Diagram EP-2614

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 205

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.9.2 Specifications EP-2614

Specification Description
System data
Process, parameter and diagnostic data depend
Data on the network adapter used (refer to Section,
Order and Arrangement of Modules).
Interface RSTi-EP I/O communication bus
System bus transfer rate 48 Mbps
Outputs
Number 4
Type of load ohmic, inductive, lamp load
Response time low » high max. 100μs; high » low max. 250μs
per channel 2A
Max. output current
per module 8A
Breaking energy (inductive) 150 mJ per channel
Resistive load (min.
1 kHz
47Ω)
0.2 Hz without free-
Switching frequency Inductive load (DC wheeling diode
13) 1 kHz with suitable free-
wheeling diode
Lamp load (12 W) 1 kHz
Actuator connection 2-wire, 3-wire, 3-wire + FE
Actuator supply max. 2 A per plug, total max. 8 A
Short-circuit-proof Yes
Constant current with thermal switch-off and
Protective circuit
automatic restart
Response time of the current limiting circuit < 100μs
Module diagnosis Yes
Individual channel diagnosis No
Can be used with EP-19xx Yes
Supply
Supply voltage 20.4V – 28.8V
Current consumption from system current path ISYS 8 mA
Current consumption from output current path IOUT 25 mA + load
General data
Weight 86 g (3.03 oz)
For additional general data, refer to Section 1.71.7 General Technical Data for I/O Modules.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 206

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.9.3 Modifiable Parameters for EP-2614

Channel Description Options Default

0-3 Substitute value Off (0) / On (1) Off

5.9.4 Diagnostic Data EP-2614

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

0 Module error
1 Internal error
2 External error
3 Channel error 0
Error indicator 0
4 Error
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Parameter error
0
1
Module Type 0x0F
2
3
Module type 1
4 Reserved 0
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
Error byte 2 2 0-7 Reserved 0
0-2 Reserved 0
Internal diagnostic
Error byte 3 3 3 0
FIFO full
4-7 Reserved 0
0-6 Channel type 0x72
Channel type 4
7 Reserved 0
Diagnostic bits Number of diagnostic
5 0
per channel bit per channel
Number of Number of similar
6 4
channels channels per module
Channel error 7-10 0-31 Reserved 0
Channel 0 error
11
to
to 0–7 Reserved 0
Channel 31
42
error
Time stamp Time stamp [μs] (32-
43-46
bit)

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 207

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.9.5 Process Data Outputs EP-2614

Byte Bit Description

OX0.0 DO0
OX0.1 DO1
OX0.2 DO2
OX0.3 DO3
OB0
OX0.4 reserved
OX0.5 reserved
OX0.6 reserved
OX0.7 reserved

5.10 Digital Output Module EP-2634

Figure 102: Figure 103: Connection Diagram

Digital Output
Module EP-
2634

EP-2634

The digital output module EP-2634 can control up to 4 discrete outputs

each with a maximum of 2 A. One discrete output can be connected to
each connector in a 2-wire or 3-wire + FE connection. A status LED is
assigned to each channel. The outputs are supplied with power from the
output current path (IOUT).

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 208

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Each channel can be switched between positive and negative switching.

This allows, among other things, a switch in rotational direction if an DC
motor is connected between two outputs. For this purpose, an output
byte is reserved for the physical outputs, and each channel is assigned
two bits in this byte. The switching characteristics of each output are set
in the low nibble of the byte. If a bit is set, the corresponding channel has
positive switching, if it is 0 then it has negative switching. The outputs are
switched in the high nibble. Example: If you write the value 185 decimal
(1011 1001 binary) in the output byte, channel 1 is set to 24 V, channel 2
is set to GND, channel 3 is deactivated and channel 4 is set to 24 V.

The module is protected against external voltages between 0 V and the

operating voltage.

5.10.1 LED Indicators EP-2634

Figure 104: EP-2634 LEDs

LED EP-2634
Green: Communication over the system bus
Module Status
Red: Module System Fault or Diagnostic Fault
1.1 Yellow: Output 0 active
1.2 --
1.3 --
1.4 --
2.1 Yellow: Output 1 active
2.2 --
2.3 --
2.4 --
3.1 Yellow: Output 2 active
3.2 --
3.3 --
3.4 --
4.1 Yellow: Output 3 active
4.2 --
4.3 --
4.4 --

For error messages refer to Section 14: LED Indicators and Troubleshooting.
Detailed Description of I/O Modules 209
User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Figure 105: Block Diagram EP-2634

5.10.2 Specifications EP-2634

Specification Description
System data
Process, parameter and diagnostic data depend on the
Data network adapter used (refer to Section 3.1, Order and
Arrangement of Modules).
Interface RSTi-EP I/O communication bus
System bus transfer rate 48 Mbps
Outputs
Number 4
Type of load ohmic, inductive, lamp load
Response time low » high max. 100μs; high » low max. 250μs
per channel 2A
Max. output current
per module 8A
Breaking energy (inductive) 150 mJ per channel
Resistive load (min. 47Ω) 1 kHz
0.2 Hz without free-wheeling
diode
Switching frequency Inductive load (DC 13)
1 kHz with suitable free-wheeling
diode
Lamp load (12 W) 1 kHz
Actuator connection 2-wire, 3-wire, 3-wire + FE
Actuator supply max. 2 A per plug, total max. 8 A
Short-circuit-proof Yes
Constant current with thermal switch-off and automatic
Protective circuit
restart
Response time of the current limiting
< 100μs
circuit
Module diagnosis Yes
Individual channel diagnosis No
Detailed Description of I/O Modules 210
User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Reactionless Yes
Can be used with EP-19xx Yes
Supply
Supply voltage 20.4V – 28.8V
Current consumption from system current
8 mA
path ISYS
Current consumption from output current
20 mA + load
path IOUT
General data
Weight 86 g (3.03 oz)
For additional general data, refer to Section 1.71.7 General Technical Data for I/O Modules.

5.10.3 Modifiable Parameters for EP-2634

Channel Description Options Default

0-3 Substitute value OP-Mode Sinking (0) / Sourcing (1) Sourcing
0-3 Substitute value Off (0) / On (1) Off

5.10.4 Diagnostic Data EP-2634

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

0 Module error
1 Internal error
2 External error
3 Channel error 0
Error indicator 0
4 Error
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Parameter error
0
1
Module Type 0x0F
2
3
Module type 1
4 Reserved 0
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
Error byte 2 2 0-7 Reserved 0
0-2 Reserved 0
Error byte 3 3 3 Internal diagnostic FIFO full 0
4-7 Reserved 0
0-6 Channel type 0x72
Channel type 4
7 Reserved 0

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 211

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

Diagnostic bits per
5 Number of diagnostic bit per channel 0
channel
Number of channels 6 Number of similar channels per module 4
Channel error 7-10 0-31 Reserved 0
Channel 0 error 11
to to 0–7 Reserved 0
Channel 31 error 42
Time stamp 43-46 Time stamp [μs] (32-bit)

5.10.5 Process Data Outputs EP-2634

Byte Format Name Remark

OX0.0 OP-mode DO0 0: Sinking, 1: Sourcing
OX0.1 OP-mode DO1 0: Sinking, 1: Sourcing
OX0.2 OP-mode DO2 0: Sinking, 1: Sourcing
OX0.3 OP-mode DO3 0: Sinking, 1: Sourcing
OB0
OX0.4 DO0
OX0.5 DO1
OX0.6 DO2
OX0.7 DO3

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 212

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.11 Digital Output Module EP-2218

Figure 106: Digital Figure 107: Connection Diagram

Output Module EP-2218

EP-2218

The EP-2218 digital output module can control up to 8 discrete outputs,

each with a maximum of 0.5A. Discrete outputs can be connected to each
connector in a 2-wire connection. A status LED is assigned to each
channel. The outputs are supplied with power from the output current
path (IOUT).

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 213

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.11.1 LED Indicators EP-2218

Figure 108: EP-2218 LEDs

LED EP-2218
Green: Communication over the system bus
Module Status
Red: Module System Fault or Diagnostic Fault
1.1 Yellow: Output 0 active
1.2 --
1.3 Yellow: Output 1 active
1.4 --
2.1 Yellow: Output 2 active
2.2 --
2.3 Yellow: Output 3 active
2.4 --
3.1 Yellow: Output 4 active
3.2 --
3.3 Yellow: Output 5 active
3.4 --
4.1 Yellow: Output 6 active
4.2 --
4.3 Yellow: Output 7 active
4.4 --

For error messages refer to Section 14: LED Indicators and Troubleshooting.

Figure 109: Block Diagram EP-2218

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 214

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.11.2 Specifications EP-2218

Specification Description
System data
Process, parameter and diagnostic data depend on the
Data network adapter used (refer to Section 3.1, Order and
Arrangement of Modules).
Interface RSTi-EP I/O communication bus
System bus transfer rate 48 Mbps
Outputs
Number 8
Type of load ohmic, inductive, lamp load
Response time low » high max. 100μs; high » low max. 250μs
per channel 0.5 A
Max. output current
per module 4A
Breaking energy (inductive) 150 mJ per channel
Resistive load (min. 47Ω) 1 kHz
0.2 Hz without free-wheeling
diode
Switching frequency Inductive load (DC 13)
1 kHz with suitable free-wheeling
diode
Lamp load (12 W) 1 kHz
Actuator connection 2-wire
Short-circuit-proof Yes
Constant current with thermal switch-off and automatic
Protective circuit
restart
Response time of the current limiting
< 100μs
circuit
Module diagnosis Yes
Individual channel diagnosis No
Reactionless Yes
Supply
Supply voltage 20.4V – 28.8V
Current consumption from system current
8 mA
path ISYS
Current consumption from output current
35 mA + load
path IOUT
General data
Weight 86 g (3.03 oz)
For additional general data, refer to Section 1.71.7 General Technical Data for I/O Modules.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 215

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.11.3 Modifiable Parameters for EP-2218

Channel Description Options Default

0-7 Substitute value Off (0) / On (1) Off (0)

5.11.4 Diagnostic Data EP-2218

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

0 Module error
1 Internal error
2 External error
3 Channel error 0
Error indicator 0
4 Error
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Parameter error
0
1
Module Type 0x0F
2
3
Module type 1
4 Reserved 0
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
Error byte 2 2 0-7 Reserved 0
0-2 Reserved 0
Error byte 3 3 3 Internal diagnostic FIFO full 0
4-7 Reserved 0
0-6 Channel type 0x72
Channel type 4
7 Reserved 0
Diagnostic bits per
5 Number of diagnostic bit per channel 0
channel
Number of channels 6 Number of similar channels per module 8
Channel error 7-10 0-31 Reserved 0
Channel 0 error 11
to to 0–7 Reserved 0
Channel 31 error 42
Time stamp 43-46 Time stamp [μs] (32-bit)

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 216

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.11.5 Process Data Outputs EP-2218

Byte Bit Description

OX0.0 DO0
OX0.1 DO1
OX0.2 DO2
OX0.3 DO3
OB0
OX0.4 DO4
OX0.5 DO5
OX0.6 DO6
OX0.7 DO7

5.12 Digital Output Module EP-225F

Figure 110: Digital Figure 111: Connection Diagram

Output Module
EP-225F

EP-225F

The EP-225F digital output module can control up to 16 discrete outputs,

each with a maximum of 0.5 A. Four discrete outputs can be connected to
each connector. A status LED is assigned to each channel. The outputs
are supplied with power from the output current path (IOUT).

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 217

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.12.1 LED Indicators EP-225F

Figure 112: EP-225F LEDs

LED EP-225F

Green: Communication over the system bus

Module Status
Red: Module System Fault or Diagnostic Fault

1.1 Yellow: Output 0 active

1.2 Yellow: Output 1 active
1.3 Yellow: Output 2 active
1.4 Yellow: Output 3 active
2.1 Yellow: Output 4 active
2.2 Yellow: Output 5 active
2.3 Yellow: Output 6 active
2.4 Yellow: Output 7 active
3.1 Yellow: Output 8 active
3.2 Yellow: Output 9 active
3.3 Yellow: Output 10 active
3.4 Yellow: Output 11 active
4.1 Yellow: Output 12 active
4.2 Yellow: Output 13 active
4.3 Yellow: Output 14 active
4.4 Yellow: Output 15 active

For error messages refer to Section 14: LED Indicators and Troubleshooting.

Figure 113: Block Diagram EP-225F

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 218

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.12.2 Specifications: EP-225F

Specification Description
System data
Process, parameter, and diagnostic data depend on the
Data network adapter used (refer to Section, Order and
Arrangement of Modules).
Interface RSTi-EP I/O communication bus
System bus transfer rate 48 Mbps
Outputs
Number 16
Type of load ohmic, inductive, lamp load
Response time low » high max. 100μs; high » low max. 250μs
per channel 0.5 A
Max. output current
per module 8A
Breaking energy (inductive) 150 mJ per channel
Resistive load (min. 47Ω) 1 kHz
0.2 Hz without free-wheeling diode
Switching frequency Inductive load (DC 13) 1 kHz with suitable free-wheeling
diode
Lamp load (12 W) 1 kHz
Actuator connection 1-conductor
Short-circuit-proof Yes
Protective circuit Constant current with thermal switch-off and automatic restart
Response time of the current limiting
< 100μs
circuit
Module diagnosis Yes
Individual channel diagnosis No
Reactionless Yes
Supply
Supply voltage 20.4V – 28.8V
Current consumption from system
8 mA
current path ISYS
Current consumption from output
25 mA + load
current path IOUT
General data
Weight 83 g (2.93 oz)
For additional general data, refer to Section 1.71.7 General Technical Data for I/O Modules.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 219

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.12.3 Diagnostic Data EP-225F

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

0 Module error
1 Internal error
2 External error
Error 3 Channel error 0
0
indicator 4 Error
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Parameter error
0
1
Module Type 0x0F
2
Module 3
1
type 4 Reserved 0
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
Error byte 2 2 0-7 Reserved 0
0-2 Reserved 0
Error byte 3 3 3 Internal diagnostic FIFO full 0
4-7 Reserved 0
Channel 0-6 Channel type 0x72
4
type 7 Reserved 0
Diagnostic
bits per 5 Number of diagnostic bit per channel 0
channel
Number of Number of similar channels per
6 0
channels module
Channel Reserved
7-10 0-31 0
error
Channel 0
error 11
to to 0–7 Reserved 0
Channel 31 42
error
Time stamp 43-46 Time stamp [μs] (32-bit)

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 220

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.12.4 Process† Data Outputs EP-225F

Byte Bit Description

OX0.0 DO0
OX0.1 DO1
OX0.2 DO2
OX0.3 DO3
OB0
OX0.4 DO4
OX0.5 DO5
OX0.6 DO6
OX0.7 DO7
OX1.0 DO8
OX1.1 DO9
OX1.2 DO10
OX1.3 DO11
OB1
OX1.4 DO12
OX1.5 DOI13
OX1.6 DO14
OX1.7 DO15
†
Internal process data mapping with data format “Standard”.
Depending on the fieldbus specification and the data format of
the communicating fieldbus components the bytes and/or words
can be reversed during data transfer.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 221

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.13 Digital Output Module EP-2814

Figure 114: Digital Output Figure 115: Connection Diagram

Module EP 2814 EP-2814

The solid-state relay output module EP-2814 uses four semiconductor

switches to control up to 4 discrete outputs, each with a maximum of 1A
at 255Vac. The switching characteristics of the semiconductor switch have
it as being closed when the voltage crosses zero and open when the
current crosses zero. Each connector features a potential-free NO
(Normally Open) contact.

For protection against extreme disturbance level, use surge protection

terminals with varistor (refer to the connection diagram).

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 222

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.13.1 LED Indicators EP-2814

Figure 116: EP-2814 LEDs

LED EP-2814
Green: Communication over the system bus
Module Status
Red: Module System Fault or Diagnostic Fault
1.1 Yellow: Output 0 active
1.2 --
1.3 --
1.4 --
2.1 Yellow: Output 4 active
2.2 --
2.3 --
2.4 --
3.1 Yellow: Output 8 active
3.2 --
3.3 --
3.4 --
4.1 Yellow: Output 12 active
4.2 --
4.3 --
4.4 --

For error messages refer to Section 14: LED Indicators and Troubleshooting.

Figure 117: Block Diagram EP-2814

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 223

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.13.2 Specifications EP-2814

Specification Description
System data
Data Process, parameter and diagnostic data depend on the
network adapter used (refer to Section, Order and
Arrangement of Modules).
Interface RSTi-EP I/O communication bus
System bus transfer rate 48 Mbps
Outputs
Number 4
Type SSR / triac
Switching characteristic closing when the voltage crosses zero, opening when the
current crosses zero
Response time 10ms
Minimum switching current per channel 50 mA
per channel 1A
Maximum switching current
per module 4A
Holding current 25 mA
Installation external surge voltage protection circuit recommended for
overvoltage category II and overvoltage category III
Switching frequency up to 20 Hz
Actuator connection 1-conductor
Short-circuit-proof No
Defined trip behavior of the prescribed 1 A super quick-acting
external fuse
Module diagnosis Yes
Individual channel diagnosis No
Maximum switching voltage 255Vac, UL: 277 AC
Reactionless Yes
Supply
Supply voltage 20.4V – 28.8V
Current consumption from system current 11 mA
path ISYS
General data
Weight 83 g (2.93 oz)
For additional general data, refer to Section 1.71.7 General Technical Data for I/O Modules.

5.13.3 Modifiable Parameters for EP-2814

Channel Description Options Default

0-3 Substitute value Off (0) / On (1) Off (0)

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 224

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.13.4 Diagnostic Data EP-2814

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

0 Module error
1 Internal error
2 External error
3 Channel error 0
Error indicator 0
4 Error
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Parameter error
0
1
Module Type 0x0F
2
3
Module type 1
4 Reserved 0
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
Error byte 2 2 0-7 Reserved 0
0-2 Reserved 0
Error byte 3 3 3 Internal diagnostic FIFO full 0
4-7 Reserved 0
0-6 Channel type 0x72
Channel type 4
7 Reserved 0
Diagnostic bits per
5 Number of diagnostic bit per channel 0
channel
Number of channels 6 Number of similar channels per module 4
Channel error 7-10 0-31 Reserved 0
Channel 0 error 11
to to 0–7 Reserved 0
Channel 31 error 42
Time stamp 43-46 Time stamp [μs] (32-bit)

5.13.5 Process Data Outputs EP-2814

Byte Bit Description

OX0.0 DO0
OX0.1 DO1
OX0.2 DO2
OX0.3 DO3
OB0
OX0.4 reserved
OX0.5 reserved
OX0.6 reserved
OX0.7 reserved

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 225

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.14 Digital Output Module EP-2714

Figure 118: Digital Figure 119: Connection Diagram

Relay Output EP-2714
Module EP-2714

The digital relay output module EP-2714 can control up to 4 discrete

outputs, each with a maximum of 6A. Each connector features a
potential-free changeover contact. The relay coils are supplied with
power from the output current path (IOUT).

CAUTION
When using relay modules EP-2714 in explosive atmosphere:

• Condensation shall be avoided.

• If the switching voltage exceeds 63 V, a transient protection device shall be provided

that, limits the transients to a peak voltage of 500V or less.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 226

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.14.1 LED Indicators EP-2714

Figure 120: EP-2714 LEDs

LED EP-2714
Green: Communication over the system bus
Module Status
Red: Module System Fault or Diagnostic Fault
1.1 Yellow: Output 0 active
1.2 --
1.3 --
1.4 --
2.1 Yellow: Output 1 active
2.2 --
2.3 --
2.4 --
3.1 Yellow: Output 2 active
3.2 --
3.3 --
3.4 --
4.1 Yellow: Output 3 active
4.2 --
4.3 --
4.4 --

For error messages refer to Section 14: LED Indicators and Troubleshooting.

Figure 121: Derating Curve EP-2714

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 227

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Figure 122: Block Diagram EP-2714

5.14.2 Specifications EP-2714

Specification Description
System data
Data Process, parameter and diagnostic data depend on the
network adapter used (refer to Section, Order and
Arrangement of Modules).
Interface RSTi-EP I/O communication bus
System bus transfer rate 48 Mbps
Outputs
Number 4
Type CO contact
Material for power and data contacts Ni-Au, 3 μm
Response time 20ms
per channel 5 A at 60°C (140 °F) /
6 A at 55°C (131 °F)
Maximum output current
per module 20 A at 60°C (140 °F) /
24 A at 55°C (131 °F)
Switching frequency max. 5 Hz
Short-circuit-proof No
Protective circuit External fusing with 6 A prescribed
Service life with AC-15 load and 1-A switching current > 300.000 switching cycles
Module diagnosis Yes
Individual channel diagnosis No
Maximum switching voltage 255Vac, UL: 277 AC, DC corresponding to the derating
curve
Reactionless Yes
Supply
Supply voltage 20.4V – 28.8V
Current consumption from system current path ISYS 8 mA
Current consumption from output current path IOUT 20 mA
General data
Weight 83 g (2.93 oz)
Detailed Description of I/O Modules 228
User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Specification Description
For additional general data, refer to Section 1.71.7 General Technical Data for I/O Modules.

5.14.3 Modifiable Parameters for EP-2714

Channel Description Options Default

0-3 Substitute value Off (0) / On (1) Off (0)

5.14.4 Diagnostic Data EP-2714

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

0 Module error
1 Internal error
2 External error
3 Channel error 0
Error indicator 0
4 Error
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Parameter error
0
1
Module Type 0x0F
2
3
Module type 1
4 Reserved 0
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
Error byte 2 2 0-7 Reserved 0
0-2 Reserved 0
Error byte 3 3 3 Internal diagnostic FIFO full 0
4-7 Reserved 0
0-6 Channel type 0x72
Channel type 4
7 Reserved 0
Diagnostic bits per
5 Number of diagnostic bit per channel 0
channel
Number of channels 6 Number of similar channels per module 4
Channel error 7-10 0-31 Reserved 0
Channel 0 error 11
to to 0–7 Reserved 0
Channel 31 error 42
Time stamp 43-46 Time stamp [μs] (32-bit)

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 229

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.14.5 Process Data Outputs EP-2714

Byte Bit Description

OX0.0 DO0
OX0.1 DO1
OX0.2 DO2
OX0.3 DO3
OB0
OX0.4 reserved
OX0.5 reserved
OX0.6 reserved
OX0.7 reserved

5.15 Digital Output Module EP-291F

Figure 123: Digital Figure 124: Connection Diagram

Output Module EP-291F
EP-291F

The EP-291F digital output module can control up to 16 discrete outputs,

each with a maximum of 0.5 A. Four discrete outputs can be connected to
each connector. The outputs are N-Switching. A status LED is assigned to
each channel. The outputs are supplied with power from the output
current path (IOUT).

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 230

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.15.1 LED Indicators EP-291F

Figure 125: EP-291F LEDs

LED EP-291F
Module Green: Communication over the system bus
Status Red: Module System Fault or Diagnostic Fault
1.1 Yellow: Output 0 active
1.2 Yellow: Output 1 active
1.3 Yellow: Output 2 active
1.4 Yellow: Output 3 active
2.1 Yellow: Output 4 active
2.2 Yellow: Output 5 active
2.3 Yellow: Output 6 active
2.4 Yellow: Output 7 active
3.1 Yellow: Output 8 active
3.2 Yellow: Output 9 active
3.3 Yellow: Output 10 active
3.4 Yellow: Output 11 active
4.1 Yellow: Output 12 active
4.2 Yellow: Output 13 active
4.3 Yellow: Output 14 active
4.4 Yellow: Output 15 active

For error messages refer to Section 14: LED Indicators and Troubleshooting.

Figure 126: Block Diagram EP-291F

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 231

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.15.2 Specifications: EP-291F

Specification Description
System data
Process, parameter and diagnostic data depend on the
Data network adapter used (refer to Section, Order and
Arrangement of Modules).
Interface RSTi-EP I/O communication bus
System bus transfer rate 48 Mbps
Outputs
Number 16
Type of load ohmic, inductive, lamp load
Response time low » high max. 100μs; high » low max. 250μs
per channel 0.5 A
Max. output current
per module 8A
Breaking energy (inductive) 150 mJ per channel
Resistive load (min.
1 kHz
47Ω)
0.2 Hz without free-wheeling diode
Switching frequency
Inductive load (DC 13) 1 kHz with suitable free-wheeling
diode
Lamp load (12 W) 1 kHz
Actuator connection 1-conductor
Short-circuit-proof Yes
Constant current with thermal switch-off and automatic
Protective circuit
restart
Response time of the current limiting circuit < 100μs
Module diagnosis Yes
Individual channel diagnosis No
Reactionless Yes
Can be used with EP-19xx Yes
Supply
Supply voltage 20.4V – 28.8V
Current consumption from system current
8 mA
path ISYS
Current consumption from output current
30 mA + load
path IOUT
General data
Weight 89 g (3.14 oz)
For additional general data, refer to Section 1.71.7 General Technical Data for I/O Modules.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 232

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.15.3 Diagnostic Data EP-291F

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

0 Module error
1 Internal error
2 External error
3 Channel error 0
Error indicator 0
4 Error
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Parameter error
0
1
Module Type 0x0F
2
3
Module type 1
4 Reserved 0
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
Error byte 2 2 0-7 Reserved 0
0-2 Reserved 0
Error byte 3 3 3 Internal diagnostic FIFO full 0
4-7 Reserved 0
0-6 Channel type 0x72
Channel type 4
7 Reserved 0
Diagnostic bits per
5 Number of diagnostic bit per channel 0
channel
Number of channels 6 Number of similar channels per module 0
Channel error 7-10 0-31 Reserved 0
Channel 0 error 11
to to 0–7 Reserved 0
Channel 31 error 42
Time stamp 43-46 Time stamp [μs] (32-bit)

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 233

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.15.4 Process† Data Outputs EP-291F

Byte Bit Description

OX0.0 DO0
OX0.1 DO1
OX0.2 DO2
OX0.3 DO3
OB0
OX0.4 DO4
OX0.5 DO5
OX0.6 DO6
OX0.7 DO7
OX1.0 DO8
OX1.1 DO9
OX1.2 DO10
OX1.3 DO11
OB1
OX1.4 DO12
OX1.5 DOI13
OX1.6 DO14
OX1.7 DO15
†
Internal process data mapping with data format “Standard”. Depending on the fieldbus specification and
the data format of the communicating fieldbus components the bytes and/or words can be reversed during
data transfer.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 234

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.16 Digital Output Module EP-5111

Figure 127: Counter Module EP-5111 Figure 128: Connection Diagram EP-5111

With reference to the Connection Diagram (Figure 128):

1. Track A

2. Track B

3. Cycle

4. Direction 0/1 (24 V)

• One 32-bit counter (AB) invertible, 24Vdc

• Counting frequency 100 kHz max (AB 1/2/4-times sampling

or pulse and direction)

• Latch value, comparison value, setting value, input filter

(parametrizable)

• HW gate reset, digital output for comparison

• Alarm and diagnostic function with μs time stamp

• μs time stamp for counting value (for example, for speed

measurements)

The counter module EP-5111 can read one square-wave signal (1 channel)
(for example, from an incremental encoder) with a maximum input

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 235

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

frequency of 100 kHz. The 32-bit counter can count up/down within a
predetermined range of values.

The counter can be controlled using software or externally through the

latch, gate, and reset inputs. A digital output can be parameterized to be
activated immediately upon either dropping below, meeting, or
exceeding the set comparison value. An overrun time can be provided
with the parameter Pulse duration. Thus, the PLC will recognize even
signals succeeding extremely fast.

In mode Pulse and Direction, channel CH0 A is used as the input and
channel CH0 B as a direction-determining input. In incremental mode, an
incremental encoder with track A and B can be connected. A status LED is
assigned to each channel. The module electronics supply the connected
sensors with power from the input current path (IIN).

5.16.1 LED Indicators EP-5111

Figure 129: EP-5111 LEDs

LED EP-5111
Module Green: Communication over the system bus
Status Red: Module System Fault or Diagnostic Fault
1.1 Yellow: A/pulse controlled
1.2 --
1.3 --
1.4 Yellow: B/direction controlled
2.1 Yellow: output set
2.2 --
2.3 --
2.4 Yellow: reset input controlled
3.1 Yellow: latch input controlled
3.2 --
3.3 --
3.4 Yellow: gate input (HW gate) controlled

For error messages refer to Section 14: LED Indicators and Troubleshooting.
Detailed Description of I/O Modules 236
User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Figure 130: Block Diagram EP-5111

5.16.2 Specifications EP-5111

Specification Description
System data
Data Process, parameter and diagnostic data depend on the
network adapter used (refer to Section, Order and
Arrangement of Modules).
Interface RSTi-EP I/O communication bus
System bus transfer rate 48 Mbps
Galvanic isolation 500Vdc between the current paths
Inputs
Number of counter inputs 1
Incremental encoders and other input characteristics for
Type
sensor types 1 and 3 are in accordance with EN 61131-2
Input filter Filter time adjustable from 0.01 to 1ms
Low input voltage <5V
High input voltage > 11 V
Max. input current per channel 3.5 mA
Sensor supply Yes
Sensor connection 2- and 3-wire
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Module diagnosis Yes
Individual channel diagnosis Yes
Counter width 32 bits
Maximum input frequency 100 kHz
Latch, gate, reset input Yes
Mode of operation Pulse and direction /
AB mode with 1-, 2-, 4-times sampling
Status, alarm, diagnostics
Status indicator Yes
Process alarm Yes, parametrizable
Detailed Description of I/O Modules 237
User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Specification Description
System data
Diagnostic alarm Yes
Outputs
Number 1
Output current 0.5 A
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Module diagnosis Yes
Individual channel diagnosis Yes
Supply
Supply voltage 20.4V – 28.8V
Current consumption from system current 8 mA
path ISYS
Current consumption from input current 35 mA (plus output current for the digital output)
path IIN
General data
Weight 83 g (2.93 oz)
For additional general data, refer to Section 1.71.7 General Technical Data for I/O Modules.

5.16.3 Modifiable Parameters for EP-5111

Channel Description Options Default

Diagnostic alarm disabled (0) / enabled (1) disabled
0.01ms [100 kHz] (0) /
0.017ms [50 kHz] (1) /
0.033ms [30 kHz] (2) /
0 Filter time signal A 0.1ms [10 kHz] (3) / 0.01ms
0.2ms [5 kHz] (4) /
0.5ms [2 kHz] (5) /
1ms [1 kHz] (6)
0.01ms [100 kHz] (0) /
0.017ms [50 kHz] (1) /
0.033ms [30 kHz] (2) /
0 Filter time signal B 0.1ms [10 kHz] (3) / 0.01ms
0.2ms [5 kHz] (4) /
0.5ms [2 kHz] (5) /
1ms [1 kHz] (6)
0.01ms (0) /
0.017ms (1) /
0.033ms (2) /
0 Filter time latch 0.1ms (3) / 0.01ms
0.2ms (4) /
0.5ms (5) /
1ms (6)

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 238

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Channel Description Options Default

0.01ms (0) /
0.017ms (1) /
0.033ms (2) /
0 Filter time gate 0.1ms (3) / 0.01ms
0.2ms (4) /
0.5ms (5) /
1ms (6)
0.01ms (0) /
0.017ms (1) /
0.033ms (2) /
0 Filter time reset 0.1ms (3) / 0.01ms
0.2ms (4) /
0.5ms (5) /
1ms (6)
0 Process alarm HW gate open disabled (0) / enabled (1) disabled
0 Process alarm HW gate closed disabled (0) / enabled (1) disabled
0 Process alarm overflow disabled (0) / enabled (1) disabled
0 Process alarm underflow disabled (0) / enabled (1) disabled
0 Process alarm comp. value disabled (0) / enabled (1) disabled
0 Process alarm end value disabled (0) / enabled (1) disabled
0 Process alarm latch value disabled (0) / enabled (1) disabled
count endless (0) /
once - forward (1) /
once - backwards (2) /
0 Counting mode once - no main direction (3) / count endless
periodic - forward (4) /
periodic - backwards (5) /
periodic - no main direction (6)
disabled (0) / disabled
higher equal comparison value (1) /
0 Condition for DO
lower equal comparison value (2) /
equal comparison value (3)
disabled (0) / disabled
0 Counter dir. signal B inv.
enabled (1)
disabled (0) /
high level (1) /
0 Reset
rising edge 0-1 (2)/
rising edge once 0-1 (3)
Rotary transducer - single (0) / disabled
Rotary transducer - double (1) /
0 Signal mode Rotary transducer - quadruple (2) /
Pulse and Direction (3) /
disabled (4)
0 HW gate disabled (0) / enabled (1) disabled
Detailed Description of I/O Modules 239
User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Channel Description Options Default

Interrupt counting (0) /
0 Counter behavior internal gate Interrupt counting
Cancel counting (1)
0 End value -2147483648 to 2147483647 2147483647
0 Load value -2147483648 to 2147483647 0
0 Hysteresis 0 to 255 0
0 to 255 [Input value x 2 = output time;
0 Pulse duration 0
corresponds to 0 ... 510ms]

Note: The parameter setting in the network adapter for the Behavior of outputs on
fieldbus error affects the control word and thus the behavior of the EP-5111.

The Hold last value setting

The output continues working or switches as parametrized respectively.

The counter continues to count during the error. Once normal operating
conditions have been restored, the counter continues to count starting at
the previous value.

The Enable substitute value setting

The output is switched off.

The counter value is frozen. Once normal operating conditions have been
restored, the counter value is reset to the parameterized load value.

The All outputs off setting

The output is switched off. The counter behaves in the same way as for
Hold last value.

5.16.4 Diagnostic Data EP-5111

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

0 Module error
1 Internal error
2 External error
3 Channel error
Error indicator 0
4 External auxiliary supply error
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Parameter error
0
Module type 1 1 Module Type 0x08
2

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 240

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

3
4 Channel information available 1
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
Error byte 2 2 0-7 Reserved 0
0-2 Reserved 0
3 Internal diagnostic FIFO full
4 Reserved 0
Error byte 3 3
5 Reserved 0
6 Process alarm lost
7 Reserved 0
0-6 Channel type 0x76
Channel type 4
7 Reserved 0
Diagnostic bits per
5 Number of diagnostic bit per channel 8
channel
Number of channels 6 Number of similar channels per module 1
0 Error at channel 0
Channel error 7
1-7 Reserved 0
Channel error 8 8-15 Reserved 0
Channel error 9 16 - 23 Reserved 0
Channel error 10 24 - 31 Reserved 0
0 Hardware gate opened
1 Hardware gate closed
2 Overflow/underflow/end value
Channel 0 error 11
3 Comparison value reached
4 Latch value saved
5-7 Reserved 0
Channel 1 error 12
to to 0-7 Reserved 0
Channel 31 error 42
Time stamp 43-46 Time stamp [μs] (32-bit)

5.16.5 Process Data† Inputs EP-5111

Function when
Byte Format Name Bit Remark
active
IB0 ... Double Counter
current count value
IB3 word value
IB4 ... Double Count value image at the point
Latch value
IB7 word of edge 0-1 at latch input
Counter IX8. remains until reset mode is
IB8 Word Reset was active
status 0 disabled

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 241

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Function when
Byte Format Name Bit Remark
active
IX8.
DO released
1
IX8.
SW gate active
2
depending only of the
IX8.
Reset input active parameter reset but not of the
3
reset mode
IX8.
HW gate active
4
IX8.
internal gate active
5
IX8.
DO set
6
IX8.
Counter direction down
7
IX9.
Counter direction up
0
IX9. Comparison condition remains until reset of the
1 met status bits
IX9. remains until reset of the
End value reached
2 status bits
IX9. remains until reset of the
Overflow performed
3 status bits
IB9
IX9. remains until reset of the
Underflow performed
4 status bits
IX9. remains until reset of the
Zero crossing performed
5 status bits
IX9.
Latch input active
6
IX9.
reserved
7
IB10 0 ... 65,535μs rotating,
Word Time stamp updated when counter value
IB11
changes
†
Internal process data mapping with data format Standard. Depending on the fieldbus specification and
the data format of the communicating fieldbus components the bytes and/or words can be reversed during
data transfer.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 242

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.16.6 Process Data† Outputs EP-5111

Function
Byte Format Name Bit when Remark
edge 0-1
depending on parametrization for
Double Comparison triggering of process alarm or
QB0 ... QB3
word value setting the DO, as soon as the
condition is met
this value is copied into counter
Double
QB4 ... QB7 Set value value in the event of edge 0-1 at bit
word
5 of the control word
Activate
QX8.0
reset mode
QX8.1 Release DO
QX8.2 Set SW gate
QX8.3- 84 reserved
Load set
QB8 QX8.5 loads set value into counter value
value
Counter Reset status
Word QX8.6 counter status bits 9.1 - 9.5
word bits
QX8.7 reserved
Deactivate
QX9.0
reset mode
QX9.1 Block DO
Reset SW
QB9 QX9.2
gate
QX9.3- 9.7 reserved
†
Internal process data mapping with data format Standard. Depending on the fieldbus specification and the
data format of the communicating fieldbus components the bytes and/or words can be reversed during data
transfer.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 243

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.16.7 Process Alarm Data EP-5111

Byte Bit Function

X0.0 HW gate activated
X0.1 HW gate deactivated
X0.2 Overflow, underflow or end value reached
B0
X0.3 Comparison value reached
X0.4 Latch value reached
X0.5 - X0.7 reserved
X1.0 Status input channel 0 A (track A)
X1.1 Status input channel 0 B (track B)
X1.2 Status input "Latch"
B1
X1.3 Status input "Gate"
X1.4 Status input "Reset"
X1.5- X1.7 reserved
B2
16-bit time stamp 0 ... 65,535μs, rotating
B3

5.16.8 Setting Up the Counter

To start a counting process at least the signal mode needs to be

parameterized and a rising edge at the bit QX8.2 (“Set SW gate”) of the
control word is required.

You can define the counter functions by parameterizing: the counting

mode, a primary direction (counting up or down), the counting behavior,
and the hardware gate function (input gate). In addition, you can
parameterize output setting options (comparison function, hysteresis) as
well as producing a process alarm (refer to Section 5.16.10,Additional
Counter Features).

Counting Range, Count Limits

The maximum count limits are predetermined by the register size and
cannot be changed.

Maximum Counting Range

Limit Value
Lower count limit –2 147 483 648 (–231)
Upper count limit +2 147 483 647 (231 – 1)

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 244

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.16.9 Counter Functions

Counting Mode
Depending on the application you can chose the counting mode:

• Endless counting, for example, for position detection with a rotary

encoder

• 1-time counting with or without primary direction, for example, for

counting products up to a maximum limit

• Periodic counting with or without primary direction, for example,

repeated identical pick-and-place operations

For both counting modes 1-time counting and periodic counting you can
parameterize the counting range with load value and end value.

Via bit QX8.5 of the control word you can load a set value into the
counting value. You can define the set value in the second double word of
the process data outputs.

Counting Direction

No primary direction
The entire counting range is available when using a counting mode
without primary direction.

Primary Direction Up
The counting range is limited at the top by a parameterized end value.
Starting from 0, a set value or a parameterized load value, the counter
counts until the end value -1 and is reset to the load value with the next
encoder pulse.

Primary Direction Down

The counting range is limited at the bottom by a parameterized end
value. Starting from 0, a set value or a parameterized load value, the
counter counts until the end value +1 and is reset to the load value with
the next encoder input.

Gate Function: Activate / Deactivate Counter

The counter is activated and deactivated using an internal gate. If the
hardware gate (HW gate) is deactivated in the parameters, the internal
gate is identical to the software gate (SW gate).

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 245

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

With activated hardware gate, there is a logic AND connection of SW gate

and HW gate, so that the gate functions operate exclusively on the HW
gate. In this case, opening and closing of the SW gate has an interrupting
effect only.

The software gate is activated using a 0-1 edge at the bit Set SW gate in
the control word and deactivated with a 0-1 edge at the bit Reset SW gate
in the control word (refer to the table Process Data Outputs).

Counting Behavior: Cancel/Interrupt Counting

You can parameterize the counting behavior after a new gate start: Using
Interrupt counting, the counter continues from the last counting value.
Using Cancel counting, counting starts again from the load value.

Endless Counting

Figure 131: Continuous Counting

• Counting starts at the load value, the entire counting range is used.

• If the upper count limit is reached during up-counting, an additional

counting pulse in the positive direction leads to a jump to the lower
count limit. Counting continues from there.

• If the lower count limit is reached during down-counting, an additional

counting pulse in the negative direction leads to a jump to the upper
count limit. Counting continues from there.

• Upon exceeding the upper or lower counting limit, the status bit
Overflow performed, or Underflow performed is set and a process
alarm is triggered if it is parameterized. The status bits remain set until
they are reset with the bit “Reset status bits” in the control word.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 246

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

One-time Counting/ No primary Direction

Figure 132: 1-time Counting, Interrupted Counting

Figure 133: 1-time Counting, Cancelled Counting

• Counting (up and down) starts at the load value, the entire counting
range is used.

• Upon exceeding the upper or lower count limit, the counter jumps to
the other count limit respectively. The internal gate is automatically
closed, the status bit Overflow performed, or Underflow performed is
set and a process alarm will be triggered if it is parameterized.

• To restart counting, the internal gate must be reopened. Depending

on the parameters set, counting continues from the current counting
value (Interrupt counting) or it starts again from the load value (Cancel
counting).

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 247

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

One-time Counting / Primary Direction Up

Figure 134: 1-time Counting, Primary Direction Up

• Up-counting starts at the load value.

• If the parameterized end value -1 is reached during counting in the

positive direction, the counter jumps back to the load value at the next
positive count pulse. The internal gate is automatically closed, the
status bit End value reached is set and a process alarm will be triggered
if it is parameterized.

• To restart counting, the internal gate must be reopened. Counting

starts again at the load value.

• Upon reaching the lower count limit the counter jumps to the upper
count limit to continue counting from there. The status bit Underflow
performed is set and a process alarm will be triggered if it is
parameterized. All status bits remain set until they are reset with the
bit Reset status bits in the control word.

Counting Range
Limits Valid range of values
End value –2 147 483 647 (–231 + 1) to +2 147 483 647 (231 – 1)
Upper count limit +2 147 483 648 (231)

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 248

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

One-time Counting/ Primary Direction Down

Figure 135: 1-time Counting, Primary Direction Down

• Down-counting starts at the load value.

• If the parameterized end value +1 is reached during counting in the

negative direction, the counter jumps back to the load value at the next
count pulse. The internal gate is automatically closed, the status bit
End value reached is set and a process alarm will be triggered if it is
parameterized.

• To restart counting, the internal gate must be reopened. Counting

starts again at the load value.

• Upon reaching the upper count limit the counter jumps to the lower
count limit to continue counting from there. The status bit Overflow
performed is set and a process alarm will be triggered if it is
parameterized. All status bits remain set until they are reset with the
bit Reset status bits in the control word.

Counting Range
Limits Valid range of values
End value –2 147 483 648 (–231) to +2 147 483 647 (231 – 2)
Upper count limit +2 147 483 647 (231 -1)

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 249

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Periodic Counting/ No Primary Direction

Figure 136: Periodic Counting, No Primary Direction

• Counting (up or down) starts at the load value, the entire counting
range is used.

• Upon reaching a count limit, the counter jumps to the load value and
starts counting again from there. The status bit Overflow performed,
or Underflow performed is set and a process alarm will be triggered if
it is parameterized. All status bits remain set until they are reset with
the bit Reset status bits in the control word.

Periodic Counting/ Primary Counting Direction Up

Figure 137: Periodic Counting, Primary Counting Direction Up

• Up-counting starts at the load value.

• If the parameterized end value -1 is reached during counting in the

positive direction, the counter jumps back to the load value at the next
positive count pulse and continues counting from there. The status bit
End value reached is set and a process alarm will be triggered if it is
parameterized.

• Upon reaching the lower count limit the counter jumps to the upper
count limit to continue counting from there. The status bit Underflow

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 250

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

performed is set and a process alarm will be triggered if it is

parameterized. All status bits remain set until they are reset with the
bit Reset status bits in the control word.

Counting Range
Limits Valid range of values
End value –2 147 483 647 (–231 + 1) to +2 147 483 647 (231 – 1)
Lower count limit +2 147 483 648 (231)

Periodic Counting/ Primary Direction Down

Figure 138: Periodic Counting, Primary Counting Direction Down

• Down-counting starts at the load value.

• If the parameterized end value +1 is reached during counting in the

negative direction, the counter jumps back to the load value at the next
count pulse and continues counting from there. The status bit End
value reached is set and a process alarm will be triggered if it is
parameterized.

• Upon reaching the upper count limit the counter jumps to the lower
count limit to continue counting from there. The status bit Overflow
performed is set and a process alarm will be triggered if it is
parameterized. All status bits remain set until they are reset with the
bit Reset status bits in the control word.

Counting Range
Limits Valid range of values
End value –2 147 483 647 (–231) to +2 147 483 646 (231 – 2)
Upper count limit +2 147 483 648 (231 -1)

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 251

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.16.10 Additional Counter Features

You can define the additional features for the counter listed below by
parameterizing or via the process data outputs:

• Reset: resets the counting value to the load value during counting.

• Latch function: stores the current counting value in the latch register.

• Comparator: Upon meeting the comparison condition, the digital

output is activated, or a process alarm is triggered.

• Hysteresis: reduces frequent switching of the output and/ or excessive

triggering of process alarms, e.g. when the value of a sensor signal
fluctuates around the comparison value. Figure 139 illustrates how
counting behavior is affected by the additional features. These
additional features are explained in the following pages.

Figure 139: Additional Counter Functions

Reset
The load value will be load into the counting value once there is a signal
at the reset input. To use this feature, you must release the reset mode in
the control word (bit QX8.0) in addition to the parameterization.

The status bit IX8.3 indicates that there is a signal at the reset input. Once
a reset is done, the status bit IX8.0 is set. This bit will be reset by
deactivating the reset mode (control bit QX9.0).

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 252

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Latch Function
If a 0-1 edge appears at the latch input during a counting process, the
current counter value is stored in the latch register. The latch register is
accessed through the process data inputs. With every activation of the
counter the latch value is set to 0.

Comparison Function
Via the parameter Condition for DO you can deactivate the output (never
switching) or define a comparison condition for the switching of the
output:

• Counter value higher or equal comparison value

• Counter value lower or equal comparison value
• Counter value equal comparison value
To use the comparison function, you must preset the comparison value in
the first double word of the process data outputs and release the digital
output via the control word (bit QX8.1).

The bit IX9.1 Comparison condition met of the status word is activated as
soon as the comparison condition is met. The output switches and
remains set as long as the comparison condition is met accordingly to the
parameterized hysteresis and pulse duration.

When using Counter value equal comparison value, the output remains
set during the pulse duration parameterized. With pulse duration = 0, the
output remains set until the comparison condition is not met any more.
When using a counting mode with primary direction, the output will be
switched only upon reaching the comparison value from the primary
direction.

Pulse duration
Via the parameter Pulse duration, you can determine how long the digital
output should remain set. The pulse duration can be preselected
between 0 and 510ms with an inaccuracy of less than 2.048ms. With
pulse duration = 0 the output behaves exclusively according to the
comparison conditions.

If the comparison value is left during a pulse output and is reached again,
there is no post-triggering of the pulse duration.

Note: The bit Comparison condition met is activated together with the bit DO set of the
status word. In contrast to the DO set bit it remains active until it is reset with the bit
Reset status bits of the control word.
Detailed Description of I/O Modules 253
User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Hysteresis
It is possible to reduce frequent switching of the output and/ or
triggering of a process alarm, e.g. if the value of a sensor signal
fluctuates around the comparison value, by setting the hysteresis.
Thereby you define a range above and below a reference value (zero
crossing, overflow/underflow or comparison value), within which the
output will not be reset.

A limit value between 0 and 255 can be parameterized for the hysteresis.
With hysteresis = 3 for example, all values differing less than 3 from the
reference value are smoothed. Hysteresis is deactivated with the values 0
and 1.

The hysteresis is activated upon reaching the comparison condition. The

comparison result remains unchanged during active hysteresis until the
counting value reaches the predetermined hysteresis limit. After leaving
the hysteresis range, hysteresis is reactivated only upon reaching the
comparison condition again.

After changing the hysteresis value, an active hysteresis remains active.

The new hysteresis value is active during the next hysteresis event.

The behavior of the output for hysteresis = 0 (hysteresis deactivated) and

hysteresis = 3 is shown in the following diagrams (legends describe the
behavior for hysteresis = 3):

Figure 140: Operating Principle of the Hysteresis when Counter

Value ≥ Comparison Value, Pulse Duration 0

1. Comparison condition met ➝ output is set and hysteresis

activated

2. Comparison condition not met, leaving the hysteresis range ➝

output is reset
Detailed Description of I/O Modules 254
User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

3. Comparison condition met ➝ output is set and hysteresis

activated

4. Leaving the hysteresis range, the output remains set because the
comparison condition is still met

5. Comparison condition no longer met but hysteresis still active ➝

output remains set

6. Comparison condition met, hysteresis still active ➝ output

remains set

7. Leaving the hysteresis range and comparison condition met ➝

output remains set

Figure 141: Operating Principle of the Hysteresis when Counter

Value = Comparison Value, Pulse Duration 0

1. Comparison condition met ➝ output is set and hysteresis

activated

2. Comparison condition not met, leaving the hysteresis range ➝

output is reset

3. Comparison condition met ➝ output is set and hysteresis

activated

4. Leaving the hysteresis range and comparison condition not met

➝ output is reset

5. Comparison condition met ➝ output is set and hysteresis

activated

6. Comparison condition met and hysteresis active ➝ output

remains set

7. Leaving the hysteresis range and comparison condition no longer

met ➝ output is reset

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 255

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Figure 142: Operating Principle of the Hysteresis when Counter

Value = Comparison Value, Pulse Duration 2

1. Comparison condition met ➝ pulse of the parameterized

duration is output, hysteresis activated

2. Leaving the hysteresis range ➝ hysteresis deactivated

3. Comparison condition met ➝ pulse of the parameterized

duration is output, hysteresis activated

4. Leaving the hysteresis range ➝ hysteresis deactivated

5. Comparison condition met ➝ pulse of the parameterized

duration is output, hysteresis activated

6. Comparison condition met and hysteresis active ➝ no pulse

7. Comparison condition not met, leaving the hysteresis range ➝

hysteresis deactivated

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 256

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Figure 143: EP-5111 Counter Operation using Rotary Transducer

Figure 144: EP-5111 Counter Operation using Pulse/Direction (A/B)

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 257

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.17 Digital Counter Module EP-5112

Figure 145: Digital Counter Module EP- Figure 146: Connection Diagram EP-5112

5112

The digital counter module EP-5112 can read square-wave signals (for
example, from an incremental encoder) with a maximum input frequency
of 100 kHz. Depending on the operating mode, both 32-bit counters can
count up/down independent of each other in a preset range of values.
The counters can be controlled via software by setting the appropriate
control word.

In mode Pulse and Direction, channel CH0 A and CH1 A respectively is

used as the input, channel CH0 B and CH1 B respectively is used as a
direction-determining input. In incremental mode, an incremental
encoder with track A and B can be connected. A status LED is assigned to
each channel. The module electronics supply the connected sensors with
power from the input current path (IIN).

• Two 32-bit counters (AB), invertible, 24Vdc

• Counting frequency 100 kHz max (AB 1/2/4-times sampling or pulse

and direction)

• Comparison value, setting value, input filter (parametrizable)

• Alarm and diagnostic function with μs time stamp

• μs time stamp for value counting (for example, for speed

measurements)
Detailed Description of I/O Modules 258
User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.17.1 LED indicators EP-5112

Figure 147: EP-5112 LEDs

LED EP-5112
Green: Communication over the system bus
Module Status
Red: Module System Fault or Diagnostic Fault
1.1 Yellow: CH0 A pulse controlled
1.2 --
1.3 --
1.4 Yellow: CH0 B direction controlled
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
3.1 Yellow: CH1 A pulse controlled
3.2 --
3.3 --
3.4 Yellow: CH1 B direction controlled
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4

For error messages refer to Section 14: LED Indicators and Troubleshooting.

Figure 148: Block Diagram EP-5112

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 259

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.17.2 Specifications EP-5112

Specifications Description
System data
Data Process, parameter and diagnostic data depend on the
network adapter used (refer to Section, Order and
Arrangement of Modules).
Interface RSTi-EP I/O communication bus
System bus transfer rate 48 Mbps
Galvanic isolation 500Vdc between the current paths
Inputs
Number of counter inputs 2
Type Incremental encoder
Input filter Filter time adjustable from 0.01 to 1ms
Low input voltage <5V
High input voltage > 11 V
Max. input current per channel 3.5 mA
Sensor supply Yes
Sensor connection 2- and 3-wire
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Module diagnosis Yes
Individual channel diagnosis Yes
Counter width 32 bits
Maximum input frequency 100 kHz
Latch, gate, reset input Yes
Mode of operation Pulse and direction /
AB mode with 1-, 2-, 4-times sampling
Status, alarm, diagnostics
Status indicator Yes
Process alarm Yes, parametrizable
Diagnostic alarm Yes
Supply
Supply voltage 20.4V – 28.8V
Current consumption from system current 8 mA
path ISYS
Current consumption from input current path 35 mA
IIN
General data
Weight 72 g (2.54 oz)
For additional general data, refer to Section 1.71.7 General Technical Data for I/O Modules.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 260

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.17.3 Modifiable Parameters for EP-5112

Channel Description Options (†) Default

Diagnostic alarm disabled (0) / enabled (1) disabled
0.01ms [100 kHz] (0) /
0.017ms [50 kHz] (1) /
0.033ms [30 kHz] (2) /
0 ... 1 Filter time signal A 0.1ms [10 kHz] (3) / 0.01ms
0.2ms [5 kHz] (4) /
0.5ms [2 kHz] (5) /
1ms [1 kHz] (6)
0.01ms [100 kHz] (0) /
0.017ms [50 kHz] (1) /
0.033ms [30 kHz] (2) /
0 ... 1 Filter time signal B 0.1ms [10 kHz] (3) / 0.01ms
0.2ms [5 kHz] (4) /
0.5ms [2 kHz] (5) /
1ms [1 kHz] (6)
0 ... 1 Process alarm overflow disabled (0) / enabled (1) disabled
0 ... 1 Process alarm underflow disabled (0) / enabled (1) disabled
0 ... 1 Process alarm comp. value disabled (0) / enabled (1) disabled
0 ... 1 Process alarm end value disabled (0) / enabled (1) disabled
count endless (0) /
once - forward (1) /
once - backwards (2) /
0 ... 1 Counting mode once - no main direction (3) / count endless
periodic - forward (4) /
periodic - backwards (5) /
periodic - no main direction (6)
disabled (0) / disabled
higher equal comparison value (1) /
0 ... 1 Comparison function
lower equal comparison value (2) /
equal comparison value (3)
0 ... 1 Counter dir. signal B inv. disabled (0) / enabled (1) disabled
Rotary transducer - single (0) /
Rotary transducer - double (1) /
0 ... 1 Signal mode Rotary transducer - quadruple (2) / disabled
Pulse and Direction (3) /
disabled (4)
Interrupt counting (0) /
0 ... 1 Counter behavior internal gate Cancel counting
Cancel counting (1)
0 ... 1 Setting value -2147483648 to 2147483647 0
0 ... 1 End value -2147483648 to 2147483647 2147483647
0 ... 1 Load value -2147483648 to 2147483647 0
0 ... 1 Hysteresis 0 to 255 0

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 261

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Note: The parameter setting in the network adapter for the Behavior of outputs
on fieldbus error affects the control word and thus the behavior of the EP-
5112
• The Hold last value setting - The counter continues to count during
the error. Once normal operating conditions have been restored,
the counter continues to count starting at the previous value.
• The Enable substitute value setting - The counter value is frozen.
Once normal operating conditions have been restored, the
counter value is reset to the parameterized load value.
• All outputs off setting - The counter behaves in the same way as
for Hold last value

5.17.4 Diagnostic Data EP-5112

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

0 Module error
1 Internal error
2 External error
Error 3 Channel error
0
indicator 4 External auxiliary supply error
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Parameter error
0
1
Module Type 0x08
2
3
Module type 1
4 Channel information available 1
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
Error byte 2 2 0-7 Reserved 0
0-2 Reserved 0
3 Internal diagnostic FIFO full
4 Reserved 0
Error byte 3 3
5 Reserved 0
6 Process alarm lost
7 Reserved 0
0-6 Channel type 0x76
Channel type 4
7 Reserved 0
Diagnostic
bits per 5 Number of diagnostic bit per channel 8
channel

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 262

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

Number of Number of similar channels per
6 2
channels module
0 Error at channel group 0
Channel error 7 1 Error at channel group 1
2-7 Reserved 0
Channel error 8 8 – 15 Reserved 0
Channel error 9 16 – 23 Reserved 0
Channel error 10 24 – 31 Reserved 0
0-1 Reserved 0
Channel 0 2 Overflow/underflow/end value
11
error 3 Comparison value reached
4-7 Reserved 0
0-1 Reserved 0
Channel 1 2 Overflow/underflow/end value
12
error 3 Comparison value reached
4-7 Reserved 0
Channel 2
error 13
to to 0-7 Reserved 0
Channel 31 42
error
Time stamp 43-46 Time stamp [μs] (32-bit)

5.17.5 Process Data† Inputs EP-5112

Byte Format Name Bit Function when Remark

active
IB0 ... IB3 Double word Counter 0: Counter 0:
Counter current
value count value
IB4 ... IB7 Double word Counter 1: Counter 1:
Counter current
value count value
IX8.0 Reserved
IX8.1 Comparison bit
released
Counter 0:
IX8.2 SW gate active
IB8 Word Counter
IX8.3-8.4 Reserved
status
IX8.5 Internal gate active
IX8.6 Comparison bit
active

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 263

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Byte Format Name Bit Function when Remark

active
IX8.7 Counter direction
down
IX9.0 Counter direction
up
IX9.1 Comparison
condition met
IX9.2 End value reached
IX9.3 Overflow
IB9
performed
IX9.4 Underflow
performed
IX9.5 Zero crossing
performed
IX9.6-9.7 Reserved
IX10.0 Reserved
IX10.1 Comparison bit
released
IX10.2 SW gate active
IX10.3 - 10.4 Reserved
IB10
IX10.5 Internal gate active
IX10.6 Comparison bit
active
IX10.7 Counter direction
down
Counter 1:
IX11.0 Counter direction
Word Counter
up
status
IX11.1 Comparison
condition met
IX11.2 End value reached
IX11.3 Overflow
IB11
performed
IX11.4 Underflow
performed
IX11.5 Zero crossing
performed
IX11.6 - 11.7 Reserved
†
Internal process data mapping with data format Standard. Depending on the fieldbus
specification and the data format of the communicating fieldbus components the bytes
and/or words can be reversed during data transfer.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 264

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.17.6 Process Data† Outputs EP-5112

Function when
Byte Format Name Bit Remark
edge 0-1
Counter 0:
Double
QB0 ... QB3 Comparison
word
value
Counter 1:
Double
QB4 ... QB7 Comparison
word
value
QX8.0 Reserved
Release
QX8.1
comparison bit
QX8.2 Set SW gate
QX8.3-8.4 Reserved
QB8 Loads set value
Counter 0: QX8.5 Load set value into counter
Word Control value
word Counter 0: status
QX8.6 Reset status bits
bits 9.1 - 9.5
QX8.7-9.0 Reserved
Deactivate
QX9.1
comparison bit
QB9
QX9.2 Reset SW gate
QX9.3-Q9.7 Reserved
QX10.0 Reserved
Release
QX10.1
comparison bit
QX10.2 Set SW gate
QX10.3 - 10.4 Reserved
QB10
loads set value
Counter 1: QX10.5 Load set value into counter
Word Control value
word Counter 1: status
QX10.6 Reset status bits
bits 11.1 - 11.5
QX10.7 - 11.0 Reserved
Deactivate
QX11.1
QB11 comparison bit
QX11.2 Reset SW gate
QX11.3 - 11.7 Reserved
†
Internal process data mapping with data format “Standard”. Depending on the fieldbus
specification and the data format of the communicating fieldbus components the bytes
and/or words can be reversed during data transfer.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 265

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.17.7 Process Alarms for EP 5112

Byte Bit Function

X0.0 – 0.1 Reserved
X0.2 Counter 0: Overflow, underflow, or end value reached
X0.3 Counter 0: Comparison value reached
B0
X0.4 – 0.5 Reserved
X0.6 Counter 1: Overflow, underflow, or end value reached
X0.7 Counter 1: Comparison value reached.
X1.0 Status Counter 0: Input Channel 0 A (Track A)
X1.1 Status Counter 0: Input Channel 0 B (Track B)
B1 X1.2 Status Counter 1: Input Channel 0 A (Track A)
X1.3 Status Counter 1: Input Channel 0 B (Track B)
X1.4 – X1.7 Reserved
B2
16 But Time Stamp 0 … 65535µs, rotating
B3

5.17.8 Setting Up the Counter

To start a counting process at least the signal mode needs to be

parameterized and a rising edge at the bit QX8.2 or QX10.2 respectively
(Set SW gate) of the control word is required.

You can define the counter functions by parameterizing: the counting

mode, a primary direction (counting up/down), and the counting
behavior. In addition, you can parameterize options for setting a
comparison bit (conditions, hysteresis) as well as producing a process
alarm (refer to Section, Additional Counter Features).

Counting Range, Count Limits

The maximum count limits are predetermined by the register size and
cannot be changed.

Counting Range
Limits Valid range of values
Lower count limit –2 147 483 648 (–231)
Upper count limit +2 147 483 647 (231 –1)

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 266

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.17.9 Counter Functions

Counting Mode
Depending on the application you can chose the counting mode:

• Endless counting, e.g. for detecting the position with a rotary encoder
• 1-time counting with or without primary direction, e.g. for counting
products up to a maximum limit
• Periodic counting with or without primary direction, e.g. repeated
identical pick-and-place operations
For both counting modes 1-time counting and periodic counting you can
parameterize the counting range with load value and end value.

Via bit QX8.5 or QX10.5 respectively of the control word you can load a
set value into the counting value. You can define the set value in the
module parameters.

Counting Direction

No Primary Direction
The entire counting range is available when using a counting mode
without primary direction.

Primary Direction Up
The counting range is limited at the top by a parameterized end value.
Starting from 0, a set value or a parameterized load value, the counter
counts until the end value -1 and is reset to the load value with the next
encoder pulse.

Primary Direction Down

The counting range is limited at the bottom by a parameterized end
value. Starting from 0, a set value or a parameterized load value, the
counter counts until the end value +1 and is reset to the load value with
the next encoder pulse.

Gate Function Activate / Deactivate Counter

The counter is activated and deactivated using an internal gate. The
internal gate is identical to the software gate (SW gate), it is activated
using a 0-1 edge at the bit Set SW gate in the control word and
deactivated with a 0-1 edge at the bit Reset SW gate in the control word
(see table Process data outputs).

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 267

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Counting Behavior: Interrupt/ Cancel Counting

You can parameterize the counting behavior after a new gate start: Using
“Interrupt counting”, the counter continues from the last counting value.
Using “Cancel counting”, counting starts again from the load value.

Endless Counting

Figure 149: Continuous Counting

• Counting starts at the load value, the entire counting range is used.

• If the upper count limit is reached during up-counting, an additional

counting pulse in the positive direction leads to a jump to the lower
count limit. Counting continues from there.

• If the lower count limit is reached during down-counting, an additional

counting pulse in the negative direction leads to a jump to the upper
count limit. Counting continues from there.

• Upon exceeding the upper or lower counting limit, the status bit
Overflow performed, or Underflow performed is set and a process
alarm is triggered if it is parameterized. The status bits remain set until
they are reset with the bit Reset status bits in the control word.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 268

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

One-time Counting/ No Primary Direction

Figure 150: 1-time Counting, Interrupted Counting

Figure 151: 1-time Counting, Cancelled Counting

• Counting (up and down) starts at the load value, the entire counting
range is used.

• Upon exceeding the upper or lower count limit, the counter jumps to
the other count limit respectively. The internal gate is automatically
closed, the status bit Overflow performed, or Underflow performed is
set and a process alarm will be triggered if it is parameterized.

To restart counting, the internal gate must be reopened. Depending on

the parameters set, counting continues from the current counting value
(Interrupt counting) or it starts again from the load value (Cancel
counting).

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 269

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

One-time Counting/ Primary Direction Up

Figure 152: 1-time Counting, Primary Direction Up

• Up-counting starts at the load value.

• If the parameterized end value -1 is reached during counting in the

positive direction, the counter jumps back to the load value at the next
positive count pulse. The internal gate is automatically closed, the
status bit End value reached is set and a process alarm will be triggered
if it is parameterized.

• To restart counting, the internal gate must be reopened. Counting

starts again at the load value.

• Upon reaching the lower count limit the counter jumps to the upper
count limit to continue counting from there. The status bit Underflow
performed is set and a process alarm will be triggered if it is
parameterized. All status bits remain set until they are reset with the
bit Reset status bits in the control word. After a cancelled gate control,
the counting process starts with the load value

Counting Range

Limits Valid range of values

End value –2 147 483 647 (–231 + 1) to +2 147 483 647 (231 –1)
Lower count limit +2 147 483 648 (231)

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 270

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

One-time Counting/ Primary Direction Down

Figure 153: 1-time Counting, Primary Count Down

• If the parameterized end value +1 is reached during counting in the

negative direction, the counter jumps back to the load value at the next
count pulse. The internal gate is automatically closed, the status bit
End value reached is set and a process alarm will be triggered if it is
parameterized.

• To restart counting, the internal gate must be reopened. Counting

starts again at the load value.

• Upon reaching the upper count limit the counter jumps to the lower
count limit to continue counting from there. The status bit Overflow
performed is set and a process alarm will be triggered if it is
parameterized. All status bits remain set until they are reset with the
bit Reset status bits in the control word.

Counting Range
Limits Valid range of values
End value –2 147 483 648 (–231) to +2 147 483 647 (231 –
2)
Upper count limit +2 147 483 647 (231 – 1)

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 271

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Periodic Counting/ No Primary Direction

Figure 154: Periodic Counting, No Primary Direction

• Counting (up or down) starts at the load value, the entire counting
range is used.

• Upon reaching a count limit, the counter jumps back to the load value
and starts counting again from there. The status bit Overflow
performed, or Underflow performed is set and a process alarm will be
triggered if it is parameterized. All status bits remain set until they are
reset with the bit Reset status bits in the control word.

Periodic Counting/ Primary Direction Up

Figure 155: Periodic Counting, Primary Direction Up

• Up-counting starts at the load value.

• If the parameterized end value -1 is reached during counting in the

positive direction, the counter jumps back to the load value at the next
positive count pulse and continues counting from there. The status bit
"End value reached" is set and a process alarm will be triggered if it is
parameterized.
Detailed Description of I/O Modules 272
User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

• Upon reaching the lower count limit the counter jumps to the upper
count limit to continue counting from there. The status bit "Underflow
performed" is set and a process alarm will be triggered if it is
parameterized. All status bits remain set until they are reset with the
bit "Reset status bits" in the control word.

Counting Range
Limits Valid range of values
End value –2 147 483 647 (–231 + 1) to +2 147 483 647 (231 –1)
Lower count limit +2 147 483 648 (–231)

Periodic Counting/ Primary Direction Down

Figure 156: Periodic Counting, Primary Direction Down

• Down-counting starts at the load value.

• If the parameterized end value +1 is reached during counting in the

negative direction, the counter jumps back to the load value at the next
count pulse and continues counting from there. The status bit End
value reached is set and a process alarm will be triggered if it is
parameterized.

• Upon reaching the upper count limit the counter jumps to the lower
count limit to continue counting from there. The status bit Overflow
performed is set and a process alarm will be triggered if it is
parameterized. All status bits remain set until they are reset with the
bit Reset status bits in the control word.

Counting Range
Limits Valid range of values
End value –2 147 483 647 (–231) to +2 147 483 647 (231 –1)
Upper count limit +2 147 483 647 (–231 –1)

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 273

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.17.10 Additional Counter Features

You can define the additional features for the counter listed below by
parametrizing or via the process data outputs:

• Reset: resets the counting value to the load value during counting.

• Comparator: Upon meeting the comparison condition, the comparison

bit is activated, or a process alarm is triggered.

• Hysteresis: reduces frequent toggling of the comparison bit and/or

excessive triggering of a process alarm, e.g. when the value of a sensor
signal fluctuates around the comparison value. It is possible to count
beyond the lower count limit.

Figure 157: Additional Counter Functions

Comparison Function
Via the parameter Comparison function, you can deactivate the
comparison function or define a comparison condition:

— Counter value higher or equal comparison value

— Counter value lower or equal comparison value

— Counter value equal comparison value

To use the comparison function, you must preset the comparison values
for both counting channels in the respective first double word of the
process data outputs and to set the bit QX8.1 and QX10.1 respectively
(Comparison bit released) in each control word.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 274

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

As soon as the counting value meets the corresponding comparison

condition, the bits Comparison bit active and Comparison condition met
are activated. The bit Comparison bit active remains set as long as the
comparison condition is being met (respectively the parameterized
hysteresis). The bit Comparison condition met remains active until it will
be reset with the bit Reset of the status bits in the control word.

When using a counting mode with primary direction, the comparison bit
will be set only upon reaching the comparison value from the primary
direction.

Hysteresis
It is possible to reduce frequent triggering of a process alarm and
toggling of the comparison bit (e.g. if the value of a sensor signal
fluctuates around the comparison value), by setting the hysteresis. You
thereby define a range above and below a reference value (zero crossing,
overflow/underflow and comparison value), within which the status bit
will not be reset.

A limit value between 0 and 255 can be parameterized for the hysteresis.
With hysteresis = 3 for example, all values differing less than 3 from the
reference value are smoothed. Hysteresis is deactivated with the values 0
and 1. The hysteresis is activated upon reaching the comparison
condition. The comparison result remains unchanged during active
hysteresis until the counting value reaches the predetermined hysteresis
limit. After leaving the hysteresis range, hysteresis is reactivated only
upon reaching the comparison condition again.

After changing the hysteresis value, an active hysteresis remains active.

The new hysteresis value is active during the next hysteresis event.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 275

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

The behavior of the status bit for hysteresis = 0 (hysteresis deactivated)

and hysteresis = 3 is shown in the following diagrams (legends describe
the behavior for hysteresis = 3):

Figure 158: Operating principle of the Hysteresis with Counter

Value ≥ Comparison Value

1. Comparison condition met ➝ status bit is set and hysteresis

activated

2. Comparison condition not met, leaving the hysteresis range ➝

status bit is reset

3. Comparison condition met ➝ status bit is set and hysteresis

activated

4. Leaving the hysteresis range, the status bit remains set because
the comparison condition is still met

5. Comparison condition no longer met but hysteresis still active ➝

status bit remains set

6. Comparison condition met, hysteresis still active ➝ status bit

remains set

7. Leaving the hysteresis range and comparison condition met ➝

status bit remains set

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 276

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Figure 159: Operating Principle of the Hysteresis with Counter

Value = Comparison Value

1. Comparison condition met ➝ status bit is set and hysteresis

activated

2. Comparison condition not met, leaving the hysteresis range ➝

status bit is reset

3. Comparison condition met ➝ status bit is set and hysteresis

activated

4. Leaving the hysteresis range and comparison condition not met

➝ status bit is reset

5. Comparison condition met ➝ status bit is set and hysteresis

activated

6. Comparison condition met and hysteresis active ➝ status bit

remains set

7. Leaving the hysteresis range and comparison condition no longer

met ➝ status bit is reset

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 277

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Figure 160: EP-5112 Counter Operation Using Rotary Transducer

Figure 161: EP-5112 Counter Operation using Pulse/Direction (A/B)

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 278

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.18 Digital Frequency Counter Module EP-5212

Figure 162: Digital Figure 163: Connection Diagram

Counter Module
EP-5212

EP-5212

The digital counter module EP-5212 can read frequency of one square-
wave signal (1 channel) from one or two external sensors with a
maximum input frequency of 100 kHz. Frequencies to be counted are
applied to channel CH0 and/or channel CH1, the measurement will be
started via control word 1 and 2 respectively. Measuring cycles can be
defined in μs. The longer the measuring cycle the more exactly the
measurement.

A status LED is assigned to each channel. The module electronics supply

the connected sensors with power from the input voltage path (IIN).

The EP-5212 has:

• Two counter inputs 24Vdc

• Counting frequency 100 kHz max

• Digitally adjustable input filter to suppress interferences (17 filter

frequencies gradually adjustable between 3 Hz and 187 kHz)
Detailed Description of I/O Modules 279
User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.18.1 LED Indicators EP-5212

Figure 164: EP-5212 LEDs

LED EP-5212
Green: Communication over the system bus
Module Status
Red: Module System Fault or Diagnostic Fault
1.1 --
1.2 --
1.3 --
1.4 Yellow: CH0 active (1-level)
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
3.1 --
3.2 --
3.3 --
3.4 Yellow: CH1 active (1-level)
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4

For error messages refer to Section 14: LED Indicators and Troubleshooting.

Figure 165: Block Diagram EP-5212

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 280

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.18.2 Specifications EP-5212

Specifications Description
System data
Data Process, parameter and diagnostic data depend on the
network Adapter used (refer to Section, Order and
Arrangement of Modules).
Interface RSTi-EP I/O communication bus
System bus transfer rate 48 Mbps
Galvanic isolation 500Vdc between the current paths
Inputs
Number of counter inputs 2
Input filter adjustable between 3 Hz and 187 kHz (333ms and 5μs)
Low input voltage <5V
High input voltage > 11 V
Max. input current per channel 3.5 mA
Sensor supply Yes
Sensor connection 2- and 3-wire
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Module diagnosis Yes
Individual channel diagnosis No
Counter width 32 bits
Maximum input frequency 100 kHz
Mode of operation Pulse and direction /
AB mode with 1-, 2-, 4-times sampling
Supply
Supply voltage 20.4V – 28.8V
Current consumption from system current 8 mA
path ISYS, typ.
Current consumption from input current path 35 mA + sensor supply current
IIN
General data
Weight 87 g (3.07 oz)
For additional general data, refer to Section 1.71.7 General Technical Data for I/O Modules.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 281

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.18.3 Modifiable Parameters for EP-5212

Channel Description Options (Value) Default

5μs [187 kHz] (0) /
11μs [94 kHz] (1) /
21μs [47 kHz] (2) /
43μs [23 kHz] (3) /
83μs [12 kHz] (4) /
167μs [6 kHz] (5) /
333μs [3 kHz] (6) /
667μs [1.5 kHz] (7) /
0-1 Input filter 1ms [732 Hz] (8) / 5μs [187 kHz]
3ms [366 Hz] (9) /
5ms [183 Hz] (10) /
11ms [92 Hz] (11) /
22ms [46 Hz] (12) /
43ms [23 Hz] (13) /
91ms [11 Hz] (14) /
167ms [6 Hz] (15) /
333ms [3 Hz] (16)

Input Filter EP-5212

Limiting frequency Filter time, real value Filter time

187 kHz 5.35μs 5μs
94 kHz 10.64μs 11μs
47 kHz 21.28μs 21μs
23 kHz 43.47μs 43μs
12 kHz 83.33μs 83μs
6 kHz 166.67μs 167μs
3 kHz 333.33μs 333μs
1.5 kHz 666.67μs 667μs
732 Hz 1.36ms 1ms
366 Hz 2.73ms 3ms
183 Hz 5.46ms 5ms
92 Hz 10.87ms 11ms
46 Hz 21.74ms 22ms
23 Hz 43.47ms 43ms
11 Hz 90.90ms 91ms
6 Hz 166.67ms 167ms
3 Hz 333.33ms 333ms

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 282

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.18.4 Diagnostic Data EP-5212

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

0 Module error
1 Internal error
2 External error
3 Channel error 0
Error indicator 0
4 Error
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Parameter error
0
1
Module Type 0x08
2
3
Module type 1
4 Reserved 1
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
Error byte 2 2 2-7 Reserved 0
0-2 Reserved 0
Error byte 3 3 3 Internal diagnostic FIFO full 0
4-7 Reserved 0
0-6 Channel type 0x76
Channel type 4
7 Reserved 0
Diagnostic bits per
5 Number of diagnostic bit per channel 0
channel
Number of channels 6 Number of similar channels per module 2
Channel error 7-10 0-31 Reserved 0
Channel 0 error 11
to to 0-7 Reserved 0
Channel 31 error 42
Time stamp 43-46 Time stamp [μs] (32-bit)

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 283

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.18.5 Process Data† Inputs EP-5212

Function when
Byte Format Name Bit Remark
active
Channel 0: Currently
measured value of
Double period duration
IB0 ... IB3
word multiplied by 125ns
Channel 0:
results in the current
Counter
period duration in μs
value
Channel 0: Number
Double of rising edges
IB4 ... IB7
word within the current
measurement cycle
Channel 1: Currently
measured value of
Double period duration
IB8 ... IB11
word multiplied by 125ns
Channel 1:
results in the current
Counter
period duration in μs
value
Channel 1: Number
IB12 ... Double of rising edges
IB15 word within the current
measurement cycle
IB16 Channel0: IX16.0 ... 16.7 reserved
Word Counter IX17.0 Measurement active
IB17
Status IX17.1 ... 17.7 reserved
IB18 Channel 1: IX18.0 ... 18.7 reserved
Word Counter IX19.0 Measurement active
IB19
Status IX19.1 ... 19.7 reserved
†
Internal process data mapping with data format Standard. Depending on the fieldbus specification and the
data format of the communicating fieldbus components the bytes and/or words can be reversed during data
transfer.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 284

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.18.6 Process Data† Outputs EP-5212

Bit Function when Remark

Byte Format Name
edge 0-1
Channel 0: Preset
Channel 0:
Double value of the
QB0 ... QB3 Measurement
word measurement cycle
cycle period
period (23 Bit)
Channel 1: Preset
Channel 1:
Double value of the
QB4 ... QB7 Measurement
word measurement cycle
cycle period
period (23 Bit)
QB8 QX8.0 - QX8.7 reserved
Channel 0: QX9.0 Measurement start
Word
QB9 Control word QX9.1 Measurement stop
QX9.2 - 9.7 reserved
QB10 QX10.0 - X10.7 reserved
Channel 1: QX11.0 Measurement start
Word
QB11 Control word QX11.1 Measurement stop
QX11.2 - 11.7 reserved
†
Internal process data mapping with data format Standard. Depending on the fieldbus specification and the
data format of the communicating fieldbus components the bytes and/or words can be reversed during data
transfer.

5.18.7 Function Frequency Counting

Defining the Measurement Cycle Period

The length of measurement cycle period has to be defined for each
channel within the output process data. As the 23-bit value has a
resolution of 1μs, values between 1μs and 8,388,607μs can be defined.
The measurement cycle period must be long enough to detect at least
one rising edge.

Setting of Input Filter

In order to suppress any disturbances a digital input filter can be set for
each channel via the Parameter Input filter (refer to Section, Modifiable
Parameters for EP-5212).

Start Measurement
Setting of Bit 8 in the control word of each channel starts the cyclic
measurement.
Detailed Description of I/O Modules 285
User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Figure 166: Principal: Function Frequency Counting

Calculation of Results
The input process data Rising edges register the amount of rising edges
for each channel within the referring measurement cycle period.
Counting starts with the last rising edge of the previous measurement
cycle and ends with the last but one edge of the current measurement
cycle. The time between first and last counted edge is defined as
measured period. This is a 27-bit value with a resolution of 125 ns and a
precision of 1μs (valid value range between 0x00000008 and 0x7FFFFFF8).

Due to its resolution, the value must be divided by 8 within the control
program in order to get the current period duration in microseconds.
This value can be between 1μs and 16,777,215μs.

The frequency is being calculated program-wise as follows:

Rising edges in current period

Frequency F =
Current measured period

In case there is no rising edge registered within a measurement cycle the

current period duration will be set to the maximum value of
16,777,215.875μs.

If the current period duration as well as the rising edges are registered as
zero, the current measured period was too short to register a rising edge.

Modifying the Measurement Cycle Period

The measurement cycle period can be modified during a running
measurement. In this case the new value is not valid until the following

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 286

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

measurement cycle, during the current measurement cycle the old value
will be kept.

Stop Measurement
Setting of Bit 9 in the control word of each channel stops the cyclic
measurement. If the last measurement cycle has not been run through
completely, the current measured period will be set to the maximum
value of 0x7FFFFFFF, the rising edges will be set to zero.

Figure 167: Block Diagram: Frequency Counter EP-5212

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 287

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.19 Serial Communication Module EP-5261

Figure 168: Digital Figure 169: Connection Diagram

Interface Module EP-5261
EP-5261

Serial data can be exchanged between the PLC and a data terminal device
using the EP-5261 communication module. The device (such as a barcode
scanner, printer) can be connected through an interface type RS232,
RS485 or RS422.

The data transfer rate can be parameterized between 300 and 115200
bps. The process data length can be parameterized to be 8-byte or 16-
byte. A terminating resistor can be parameterized for the RS485 and
RS422 interface respectively.

The communication status is indicated by two LEDs on the respective

plug.

The module electronics supply the connected data terminal device with
power from the input current path (IIN) either with 5Vdc or 24Vdc
(parameterizable). Both supply voltage outputs are protected against
overcurrent.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 288

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Figure 170: Connection Variants for the Voltage Supply

Pin Assignment of the Sub-D Plug (RS232 only)

Name Signal Direction Cable Color RS232 Pin

Assignment of the 9-pole plug (male)
1.1 RXD Receive data In Brown 2
1.2 TXD Transmit data Out Green 3
1.3 RTS Request to send Out Blue 7
1.4 CTS Clear to send In Red 8
4.2 GND Signal ground Grey 5
Assignment of the 25-pole plug (male)
1.1 RXD Receive data In Green 3
1.2 TXD Transmit data Out Brown 2
1.3 RTS Request to send Out Yellow 4
1.4 CTS Clear to send In Grey 5
4.2 GND Signal ground Blue 7

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 289

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Connection Cables for the Serial Device

Use shielded cables, because electromagnetic interferences from the
surroundings have to be assumed. The maximum permissible cable
length depends on the cable capacitance and the baud rate.

Connecting a RS232 Device

Maximum Cable Length RS232

Cable Capacitance Maximum Cable Length
≤ 2500 pF 15 m (49 ft), shielded
55 pF/m 45 m (147 ft)

Connecting a RS485 or RS 422 Device

The serial device must be connected using a twisted pair cable (U/UTP,
Type Cat- 3 or J-2YY-2x2x0,6).

Maximum Cable Length RS422/485

Baud Rate in kbps Maximum Cable Length
≤ 19200 1,200 m (3,937 ft), shielded
38400 500 m (1,640 ft)
57600 250 m (820 ft)
115200 200 m (656 ft)
• RS485: Use one core pair for Data+/Data–. You can use any wire for the
ground signal GND COM. The remaining free wires should be
connected to ground.

• RS422: Connect the wires for transmitting signals TXD+/TXD– and

those for receiving signals RXD+/RXD– in pairs respectively. You can
use any wire for the ground signal GND COM. The remaining free wires
should be connected to ground.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 290

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.19.1 LED Indicators EP-5261

Figure 171: EP-5261 LEDs

LED EP-5261
Green: Communication over the system bus
Module Status
Red: Module System Fault or Diagnostic Fault
1.1 Yellow: RS232 parameterized
Yellow flashing: Data are being received
1.2 Yellow: RS232 parameterized
Yellow flashing: Data are being transmitted
1.3 --
1.4 --

3.1 3.1 ... 3.4 Yellow: RS422 parameterized

3.2 3.1 + 3.2 Off, 3.3 + 3.4 Yellow: RS485 parameterized
3.3 3.3 Yellow flashing: Data are being received
3.4 3.4 Yellow flashing: Data are being transmitted
4.1 Green: Supply voltage +5Vdc
4.2 --
4.3 Green: Supply voltage +24Vdc
4.4 --

For error messages refer to Section 14: LED Indicators and Troubleshooting.

Figure 172: Block Diagram EP-5261

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 291

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.19.2 Specifications EP-5261

Specifications Description
System data
Data Process, parameter, and diagnostic data depend on the
network Adapter used (refer to Section, Order and
Arrangement of Modules).
Interface RSTi-EP I/O communication bus
System bus transfer rate 48 Mbps
Serial Interface
Number 1
Type RS232, RS485, RS422, parameterizable
Transfer rate 300 ... 115200 Bps, parameterizable
Supply voltage 5Vdc or 24Vdc
Current of power supply output max. 500 mA
Standards RS232 DIN 66020, DIN 66259, EIA-RS232C, CCITT V.24/V.28
Standards RS485/RS422 120 Ω, parameterizable
Short-circuit proof Yes
Module diagnosis Yes
Individual channel diagnosis Yes
Supply
Supply voltage 20.4V – 28.8V
Current consumption from system current 8 mA
path ISYS,
Current consumption from input current path 16 mA + load
IIN
General data
Weight 92 g (3.25 oz)
For additional general data, refer to Section 1.71.7 General Technical Data for I/O Modules.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 292

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.19.3 Modifiable Parameters for EP-5261

Description Options7 Default

Operating mode Disabled (0) / Disabled
RS232 (1) /
RS485 (2) /
RS422 (3)
Data bits 8
7 Bit (0) / 8 Bit (1) 8 Bit
Baud rate 300 (0) / 9600
600 (1) /
1200 (2) /
2400 (3) /
4800 (4) /
9600 (5) /
14400 (6) /
19200 (7) /
28800 (8) /
38400 (9) /
57600 (10) /
115200 (11)
Stop bit 1 Bit (0) / 2 Bit (1) 1 Bit
Parity None (0) / None
Even (1) /
Odd (2)
Flow control None (0) / None
CTS/RTS (1) /
XON/XOFF (2)
XON character 0 ... 255 17
XOFF character 0 ... 255 19
Terminating resistor Off (0) / On (1) Off
RS485/422
Process data length 16 Byte (1) 16 Byte

5.19.4 Diagnostic Data EP-5261

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

0 Module error
1 Internal error
2 External error
Error indicator 0
3 Channel error 0
4 Error
5 Reserved 0

7
Values in brackets for EtherCAT and Modbus-TCP.
8
The option “7 Bit“ works only in combination with a parity ("even" or "odd").
Detailed Description of I/O Modules 293
User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

6 Reserved 0
7 Parameter error
0 1
1 0
Module Type 0x05
2 1
3 0
Module type 1
4 Reserved 0
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
Error byte 2 2 0-7 Reserved 0
0-2 Reserved 0
Error byte 3 3 3 Internal diagnostic FIFO full 0
4-7 Reserved 0
0 1
1 0
2 0
3 1
Channel type 4 Channel type 0x79
4 1
5 1
6 1
7 0
Diagnostic bits per channel 5 Number of diagnostic bit per channel 0
Number of channels Number of similar channels per
6 1
module
Channel error 7-10 0-31 Reserved 0
Time stamp 43-46 Time stamp [μs] (32-bit)

5.19.5 Data Transfer

The process data length can be parameterized to be 8 or 16 Bytes. Byte 0

is used for status and diagnosis, Byte 1 for the data segment length, and
the remaining 6 or 14 Bytes are user data.

Process input data: The data sent from the serial device are written into
the receive memory of the RSTi-EP module. As soon as the SPS request
results in that RX_CNT is not equal RX_CNT_ACK, the data will be sent in
segments via the network adapter to the PLC. The successfully data
transfer will be acknowledged to the module.

The receive memory can safe a maximum of 255 Bytes. A software

handshake (XON/XOFF) or a hardware handshake (RTS/CTS) can be

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 294

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

parameterized using the flow control, so that an alarm will warn against a
buffer overflow.

Process output data: The data sent from the PLC via the network
adapter are written into the transmission memory of the RSTi-EP module.
The module is continuously checking whether data are ready to be sent
or a data transfer to the device has been finished successfully. Not till
then the next data will be transferred.

Process Input Data EP-5261

Byte Format Name Bit Description Remarks

RX = 0: Receive memory is empty
Data in the RX = 1: A telegram (or telegram
IX0.0
receive memory segment) in the receive memory is
ready for transmission.
Only 10 characters are left in the
Receive memory
IX0.1 receive memory. XOFF will be set if
nearly full
parameterized.
IX0.2 Not used
IX0.3 RX_CNT The RX_CNT value is assigned to
each data segment of the process
input data while transmission. The
sequence or the RX_CNT values is:
IX0.4 RX_CNT Binary: 00, 01, 10, 11, 00, ...
Status and
IB0 Word Decimal: 0, 1, 2, 3, 0, ...
Diagnosis
A faulty data sequence indicates
missing data segments.
IX0.5 TX_CNT_ACK The TX_CNT_ACK value is a copy of
the TX_CNT value, which has been
transferred together with the last
data segment of the process output
IX0.6 TX_CNT_ACK
data. TX_CNT_ACK acknowledges
that the data has been taken over
successfully.
STAT = 1: Communication with the
device is without fault.
IX0.7 STAT
STAT = 0: Faulty communication with
the device.
Length of the
data segment /
Length of the data / diagnosis data
IB1 Word or of the RX
in this frame
subsequent
diagnosis data

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 295

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Byte Format Name Bit Description Remarks

User data of the
IB 2 ... IB 7 or transferred
Received data
IB 2 ... IB 15 telegram
segment

Process Output Data EP-5261

Byte Format Name Bit Description Remarks
Bit 0: RXBUF FLUSH
The receive memory can be scrubbed
using this bit.
IX0.0 RXBUF FLUSH STATRES = 1: A requirement with RXBUF
FLUSH = 1 will be ignored.
STATRES = 0: The receive memory will
be scrubbed with RXBUF FLUSH = 1.
Bit 1: TXBUF FLUSH
The emission memory can be scrubbed
using this bit.
IX0.1 TXBUF FLUSH STATRES = 1: A requirement with TXBUF
FLUSH = 1 will be ignored.
STATRES = 0: The emission memory will
be scrubbed with TXBUF FLUSH = 1.
Bit 2: DisableSend_TX_HWBUFFER
This bit controls the hardware emission
memory:
Status and
QB0 Word DisableSend_TX_HWBUFFER = 0: The
Diagnosis
hardware emission memory is released.
A character (Byte) will be sent as soon
IX0.2 RX_HWBUFFER
as it reaches the buffer.
DisableSend_TX_HWBUFFER = 1: The
hardware emission memory is locked.
Characters (Bytes) will only be sent,
when DisableSend_TX_HWBUFFER is set
to 0 again.
IX0.3 TX_CNT The TX_CNT value is assigned to each
data segment of the process output
data. The sequence or the TX_CNT
values is:
IX0.4 TX_CNT Binary: 00–>01–>10–>11–>00...
Decimal: 0–>1–>2–>3–>0...
A faulty data sequence indicates
missing data segments.
IX0.5 RX_CNT_ACK

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 296

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Byte Format Name Bit Description Remarks

RX_CNT_ACK must include a copy of the
RX_CNT value. The RX_CNT value has
been transferred together with the last
data segment of the process input data.
RX_CNT_ACK must be set in analogy
IX0.6 RX_CNT_ACK
with RX_CNT (in the status byte). It
indicates that the data segment has
been transferred successfully by using
RX_CNT and enables to receive new
data.
The input data status bit STAT will be
reset using this bit. When changing
from 1 to 0 (falling edge) STAT will be
reset from 0 to 1.
STAT = 0: All changes in the data fields
Communication
IX0.7 TX_BYTE_CNT, TX_CNT and RX_CNT_ACK
Status
will be ignored. The receive or emission
memory can be scrubbed using RXBUF
FLUSH or TXBUF FLUSH respectively.
STAT = 1 or changing from 0 to 1: The
buffers cannot be scrubbed.
Length of
QB1 Word the data
segment
QB 2 ... QB User data of the
7 or Transmissio transferred
QB 2 ... QB n data telegram
15 segment

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 297

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Enabling the Data Transfer

There are different ways to announce the communication module to the
control. Using the test mode copy the input data into the output data of
the module so that the received data will be sent again. Or select one of
the function blocks provided by the engineering tool.

For programming, regard the following schemes showing the sequences

for receiving and transmission

Figure 173: Figure 174: Transmission

Receiving Sequence
Sequence

The status and control word values during various states of

communication are provided in the following table.

Output byte 0 (control) off the Output

Input Byte 0 (Status) of Module Input Notes
Action module byte 1
Byte1
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (length
(length of
of TX
RX byte
Stat TX_CNT_ACK RX_CNT STATRES RX_CNT_ACK TX_CNT byte
seg.)
seg.)
After power-
up, module
Init/
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 is ready for
Startup
communicat
ion

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 298

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Output byte 0 (control) off the Output

Input Byte 0 (Status) of Module Input Notes
Action module byte 1
Byte1
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (length
(length of
of TX
RX byte
Stat TX_CNT_ACK RX_CNT STATRES RX_CNT_ACK TX_CNT byte
seg.)
seg.)
PLC is ready
Activate for
commu 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 communicat
nication ion
(response)
Module has
N
1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 received
(1 ..14)
bytes
Receive
RX
data
acknowledg
1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 N 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
e after data
taken over
Before
N changing
1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 X 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0
(1...14) TX-CNT, set
TX bytes
Send
TX
data
acknowledg
1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 X 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 N e after
module sent
data

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 299

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.20 SSI Encoder Interface Module EP-5311

Figure 175: SSI Figure 176: Connection Diagram

Encoder Interface EP-5311
Module EP-5311

The EP-5311 SSI Encoder Interface module can read differential signals
(RS422) from a SSI encoder. It can be connected as a master directly to
the encoder providing the clock. To synchronize two SSI encoders a
second SSI module running in Listening mode can be placed between the
encoder and a master module from which it receives the clock.

The data transfer rate can be between 125 kHz and 2 MHz, the data
format can be chosen between binary or Gray-Code.

Connected sensors can be delivered either with 5Vdc or 24Vdc. Both

supply outputs are protected against overcurrent and must not be used
simultaneously.

The communication status is indicated by three LEDs. The module

electronics supply the connected sensor with power from the input
current path (IIN).

Note: The SSI encoder must be connected using a shielded wire (maximum length 320m
at 125 kHz). The shielding has to be designed as described in Section, Earthing of
Shielded Cables.
Detailed Description of I/O Modules 300
User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.20.1 LED Indicators EP-5311

Figure 177: EP-5311 LEDs

LED EP-5311
Green: Communication over the system bus
Module Status
Red: Module System Fault or Diagnostic Fault
1.1 Yellow: Data In active
1.2 --
1.3 --
1.4 --
2.1 Yellow: Data In active
2.2 --
2.3 --
2.4 --
3.1 Yellow: Data In active
3.2 --
3.3 --
3.4 --
4.1 Green: Power supply sensor +5Vdc
4.2 --
4.3 Green: Power supply sensor +24Vdc
4.4 --

For error messages refer to Section 14: LED Indicators and Troubleshooting.

Figure 178: Block Diagram EP-5311

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 301

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.20.2 Specifications EP-5311

Specification Description
System data
Data Process, parameter and diagnostic data depend on the
network Adapter used (refer to Section 3.1, Order and
Arrangement of Modules).
Interface RSTi-EP I/O communication bus
System bus transfer rate 48 Mbps
Number of channels 1
Type SSI (Differential RS422)
SSI transfer rate 125 kHz ... 2 MHz
Delay time 1μs ... 64μs
Data width 8- ... 32-bit
Data format Binary /
Gray-Code
SSI mode Listening /
Master
Sensor supply 500 mA (24Vdc) /
400 mA (5Vdc)
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Module diagnosis Yes
Individual channel diagnosis No
Cable length max. 320 m (1049.9 ft) at 125 kHz; shielded
Supply
Supply voltage 20.4V – 28.8V
Current consumption from system current 8 mA
path ISYS,
Current consumption from input current path 25 mA + sensor supply current
IIN
General data
Weight 87 g (3.07 oz)
For additional general data, refer to Section 1.71.7 General Technical Data for I/O Modules.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 302

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.20.3 Modifiable Parameters for EP-5311

Channel Description Options9 Default

1μs (0) /
2μs (1) /
4μs (2) /
8μs (3) /
0 Delay time 64μs
16μs (4) /
32μs (5) /
48μs (6) /
64μs (7)
125 kHz (0) /
250 kHz (1) /
500 kHz (2) /
0 SSI transfer rate 125 kHz
1 MHz (3) /
1.5 MHz (4) /
2 MHz (5)
0 Number of indicator bits 0 ... 15 0
8 Bit (0) /
9 Bit (1) /
10 Bit (2) /
0 Number of frame data bits 25 Bit
... /
31 Bit (23) /
32-bit (24)
0 SSI mode Listening (0) / Master (1) Master
0 Bit order MSB first (0) / LSB first (1) MSB first
0 Data evaluation at edge 1 to 0 (0) / 0 to 1 (1) 1 to 0
0 Data format Binary (0) / Gray-Code (1) Gray-Code
0 SSI interface Disabled (0) / enabled (1) Disabled

9
Values in brackets for Modbus-TCP and EtherCAT.
Detailed Description of I/O Modules 303
User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.20.4 Diagnostic Data EP-5311

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

0 Module error
1 Internal error
2 External error
3 Channel error 0
Error indicator 0
4 Error
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Parameter error
0 1
1 0
Module Type 0x05
2 1
3 0
Module type 1
4 Reserved 0
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
Error byte 2 2 0-7 Reserved 0
0-2 Reserved 0
Error byte 3 3 3 Internal diagnostic FIFO full 1
4-7 Reserved 0
0 1
1 0
2 0
3 1
Channel type 4 Channel type 0x79
4 1
5 1
6 1
7 0
Diagnostic bits per
5 Number of diagnostic bit per channel 0
channel
Number of channels 6 Number of similar channels per module 1
Channel error 7-10 0-31 Reserved 0
Channel 0 error 11
to to 0–7 Reserved 0
Channel 31 error 42
Time stamp 43-46 Time stamp [μs] (32-bit)

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 304

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.20.5 Process Data Inputs EP-5311

Byte Format Description

IB0 Double word Encoder Value
IB1
IB2
IB3
IB4 Word 16 Bit Time Stamp
IB5
Internal process data mapping with data format "Standard". Depending on the fieldbus
specification and the data format of the communicating fieldbus components the bytes and/or
the words can be reversed during the data transfer. For byte/word order for each network
adapter refer to Section, Data Width of I/O Module, Dependent on the Network Adapter Used.

5.21 Digital Pulse Width Modulation Output

Module EP-5422

Figure 179: Digital Pulse Width Figure 180: Connection Diagram

Modulation Output Module EP-5422

EP-5422

The digital pulse width modulation module EP-5422 is used for the
control of small motors with current requirements of up to 0.5 A. The
period duration for each channel can be parameterized from 25μs to
approx. 175ms (input values from 1,202 to 8,388,607 based on a factor
0.02083μs).
Detailed Description of I/O Modules 305
User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Via an output double word in the process data the pulse duration is
defined from 0μs to approx. 175ms for each channel (input values from 0
to 8,388,607 based on a factor 0.02083μs). If the pulse duration is equal
or exceeds the duration of the period, the output is set permanently.

In another output word the output mode is switched, and the output is
being started and stopped. Deactivated outputs are set to GND.

For each channel the current status can be read in a status word. A status
LED is assigned to each channel. The outputs are supplied with power
from the output current path (IOUT). The module is protected against
external voltages between 0 V and the operating voltage.

5.21.1 LED Indicators EP-5422

Figure 181: EP-5422 LEDs

LED EP-5422
Green: Communication over the system bus
Module Status
Red: Module System Fault or Diagnostic Fault
1.1 Yellow: PWM output 0 – 100%, P-switching
Yellow flashing at 2 Hz: PWM output 0 is > 0 and < 100%,
PN-switching or P-switching
1.2 --
1.3 --
1.4 --
2.1 --
2.2 --
2.3 --
2.4 --
3.1 Yellow: PWM output 1 – 100%, P-switching
Yellow flashing at 2 Hz: PWM output 0 is > 0 and < 100%,
PN-switching or P-switching
3.2 --
3.3 --
3.4 --
4.1 --
4.2 --
4.3 --
4.4 --

For error messages refer to Section 14: LED Indicators and Troubleshooting.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 306

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Figure 182: Block Diagram EP-5422

5.21.2 Specifications EP-5422

Specification Description
System data
Data Process, parameter and diagnostic data depend on the
network adapter used (refer to Section 3.1, Order and
Arrangement of Modules).
Interface RSTi-EP I/O communication bus
System bus transfer rate 48 Mbps
Outputs
Number 2
Type PN output stage
Response time < 0.1μs
Period duration 25μs to 175ms (40 kHz to 6 Hz)
per channel 0.5 A
Max. output current
per module 1A
Resistive load (min. 47Ω) static, 6 Hz to 40 kHz
Switching frequency Inductive load (DC 13) static, 6 Hz to 40 kHz
Lamp load (12 W) static, 6 Hz to 40 kHz
Actuator connection 2-wire, 3-wire, 3-wire + FE
Actuator supply max. 2 A per plug, total max. 4 A
Pulse/period ratio 0–100 % PN-switching or P-switching, adjustable
Short-circuit-proof Yes
Response time of the protective circuit < 100μs
Module diagnosis Yes
Individual channel diagnosis No
Reactionless Yes
Supply
Supply voltage 20.4V – 28.8V

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 307

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Specification Description
Current consumption from system current path 8 mA
ISYS, typ.
Current consumption from output current path 40 mA
IOUT
General data
Weight 77 g (2.72 oz)
For additional general data, refer to Section 1.71.7 General Technical Data for I/O Modules.

5.21.3 Modifiable Parameters for EP-5422

Channel Description Options Default

0-1 Period duration = n*0.02083μs 1,202 ... 8,388,607 1,202

5.21.4 Diagnostic Data EP-5422

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

0 Module error
1 Internal error
2 External error
3 Channel error 0
Error indicator 0
4 Error
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Parameter error
0
1
Module Type 0x0F
2
3
Module type 1
4 Reserved 0
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
Error byte 2 2 0-7 Reserved 0
0-2 Reserved 0
Error byte 3 3 3 Internal diagnostic FIFO full
4-7 Reserved 0
0-6 Channel type 0x72
Channel type 4
7 Reserved 0
Diagnostic bits per
5 Number of diagnostic bit per channel 0
channel
Number of channels 6 Number of similar channels per module 2
Channel error 7-10 0-31 Reserved 0
Channel 0 error 11 0–7 Reserved 0

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 308

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

to to
Channel 31 error 42
Time stamp 43-46 Time stamp [μs] (32-bit)

5.21.5 Process† Data Inputs EP-5422

Byte Format Name Bit Function, if active Remarks

IX0.0 reserved
IX0.1 Status PWM output 0: disabled, 1: enabled
IB0 Channel 0: IX0.2 reserved
Word
Status word IX0.3 Output mode 0: PN-switching 1: P-switching
IX0.4 … 0.7 reserved
IB1 IX1.0 … 1.7 reserved
IX2.0 reserved
IX2.1 Status PWM output 0: disabled, 1: enabled
IB2 Channel 1: IX2.2 reserved
Word
Status word IX2.3 Output mode 0: PN-switching 1: P-switching
IX02.4 … 2.7 reserved
IB3 IX3.0 … 3.7 reserved
†
Internal process data mapping with data format Standard. Depending on the fieldbus specification and the
data format of the communicating fieldbus components the bytes and/or words can be reversed during data
transfer.

5.21.6 Process Data† Outputs EP-5422

Forma Function,
Byte Name Bit Remarks
t if set
QB0
Channel 0:
QB1 Double Input value * 0.02083μs
Pulse
QB2 Word Input range: 1 ... 8,388,607
duration
QB3
QB4
Channel 1:
QB5 Double Input value * 0.02083μs
Pulse
QB6 Word Input range: 1 ... 8,388,607
duration
QB7
QX8.0 … QX8.1 reserved
QB8 QX8.2 Output mode 0: PN-switching 1: P-switching
QX8.3 … QX8.7 reserved
Channel 0:
Setting with edge 0-1, dominates
Word Control QX9.0 starts output
stop bit
word
QB9 Setting with edge 0-1, start bit
QX9.1 stops output
must be reset
QX9.2 … QX9.7 reserved

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 309

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Forma Function,
Byte Name Bit Remarks
t if set
QX10.0 … QX10.1 reserved
QB10 QX10.2 Output mode 0: PN-switching 1: P-switching
QX10.3 … QX10.7 reserved
Channel 1:
Setting with edge 0-1, dominates
Word Control QX11.0 starts output
stop bit
word
QB11 Setting with edge 0-1, start bit
QX11.1 stops output
must be reset
QX11.2 … QX11.7 reserved
†
Internal process data mapping with data format Standard. Depending on the fieldbus specification and
the data format of the communicating fieldbus components the bytes and/or words can be reversed
during data transfer.

5.22 Digital Pulse Width Modulation Output

Module EP-5442

Figure 183: Digital Figure 184: Connection Diagram

Pulse Width EP-5442 Output Module EP 5442
Modulation
Output EP-5422

The digital pulse width modulation modules EP-5442 is used for the
control of small motors with current requirements of up to 2 A. The
period duration for each channel can be parameterized from 25μs to

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 310

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

approx. 175ms (input values from 1,202 to 8,388,607 based on a factor

0.02083μs).

Via an output double word in the process data the pulse duration is
defined from 0μs to approx. 175ms for each channel (input values from 0
to 8,388,607 based on a factor 0.02083μs).

If the pulse duration exceeds the duration of the period, the output is set
permanently. In another output word the output mode is switched, and
the output is being started and stopped. Deactivated outputs are set to
GND.

For each channel the current status can be read in a status word. A status
LED is assigned to each channel. The outputs are supplied with power
from the output current path (IOUT). The module is protected against
external voltages between 0 V and the operating voltage.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 311

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.22.1 LED Indicators EP-5442

Figure 185: EP-5442 LEDs

LED EP-5442

Green: Communication over the system bus

Module Status
Red: Module System Fault or Diagnostic Fault

1.1 Yellow: PWM output 0 – 100%, P-switching

Yellow flashing at 2 Hz: PWM output 0 is > 0 and < 100%,
PN-switching or P-switching
1.2
1.3
1.4
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
3.1 Yellow: PWM output 1 – 100%, P-switching
Yellow flashing at 2 Hz: PWM output 0 is > 0 and < 100%,
PN-switching or P-switching
3.2
3.3
3.4
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4

For error messages refer to Section 14: LED Indicators and Troubleshooting.

Figure 186: Block Diagram EP-544

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 312

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.22.2 Specifications EP-5442

Specifications Description
System data
Data Process, parameter and diagnostic data depend on the network
adapter used (refer to Section, Order and Arrangement of
Modules).
Interface RSTi-EP I/O communication bus
System bus transfer rate 48 Mbps
Outputs
Number 2
Type PN output stage
Response time < 0.1μs
Period duration 25μs to 175ms (40 kHz to 6 Hz)
per channel 2A
Max. output current
per module 4A
Resistive load (min. 6 Hz to 40 kHz
12 Ω)
Switching frequency
Inductive load (DC 13) 6 Hz to 40 kHz
Lamp load (48 W) 6 Hz to 40 kHz
Actuator connection 2-wire, 3-wire, 3-wire + FE
Actuator supply max. 2 A per plug, total max. 8 A
Pulse/period ratio 0–100 % PN-switching or P-switching, adjustable
Short-circuit-proof Yes
Response time of the protective circuit < 100μs
Module diagnosis Yes
Individual channel diagnosis No
Reactionless Yes
Supply
Supply voltage 20.4V – 28.8V
Current consumption from system 8 mA
current path ISYS, typ.
Current consumption from output 40 mA
current path IOUT
General data
Weight 82 g (2.89 oz)

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 313

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.22.3 Modifiable Parameters for EP-5442

Channel Description Options Default

0-1 Period duration = n*0.02083μs 1,202 ... 8,388,607 1,202

5.22.4 Diagnostic Data EP-5442

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

0 Module error
1 Internal error
2 External error
3 Channel error 0
Error indicator 0
4 Error
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Parameter error
0
1
Module Type 0x0F
2
3
Module type 1
4 Reserved 0
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
Error byte 2 2 0-7 Reserved 0
0-2 Reserved 0
Error byte 3 3 3 Internal diagnostic FIFO full
4-7 Reserved 0
0-6 Channel type 0x72
Channel type 4
7 Reserved 0
Diagnostic bits per
5 Number of diagnostic bit per channel 0
channel
Number of channels 6 Number of similar channels per module 2
Channel error 7-10 0-31 Reserved 0
Channel 0 error 11
to to 0–7 Reserved 0
Channel 31 error 42
Time stamp 43-46 Time stamp [μs] (32-bit)

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 314

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.22.5 Process† Data Inputs EP-5442

Byte Format Name Bit Function, if active Remarks

IX0.0 reserved
IX0.1 Status PWM output 0: disabled, 1: enabled
IB0 Channel 0: IX0.2 reserved
Word
Status word IX0.3 Output mode 0: PN-switching 1: P-switching
IX0.4 … 0.7 reserved
IB1 IX1.0 … 1.7 reserved
IX2.0 reserved
IX2.1 Status PWM output 0: disabled, 1: enabled
IB2 Channel 1: IX2.2 reserved
Word
Status word IX2.3 Output mode 0: PN-switching 1: P-switching
IX02.4 … 2.7 reserved
IB3 IX3.0 … 3.7 reserved
†
Internal process data mapping with data format Standard. Depending on the fieldbus specification and the
data format of the communicating fieldbus components the bytes and/or words can be reversed during data
transfer

5.22.6 Process Data† Outputs EP-5442

Function,
Byte Format Name Bit Remarks
if set
QB0
Channel 0:
QB1 Double Input value * 0.02083μs
Pulse
QB2 Word Input range: 1 ... 8,388,607
duration
QB3
QB4
Channel 1:
QB5 Double Input value * 0.02083μs
Pulse
QB6 Word Input range: 1 ... 8,388,607
duration
QB7
QX8.0 … QX8.1 reserved
0: PN-switching
QB8 QX8.2 Output mode
1: P-switching
QX8.3 … QX8.7 reserved
Channel 0:
Word Setting with edge 0-1,
Control word QX9.0 starts output
dominates stop bit
QB9 Setting with edge 0-1, start
QX9.1 stops output
bit must be reset
QX9.2 … QX9.7 reserved
QX10.0 … QX10.1 reserved
Channel 1: 0: PN-switching
QB10 Word QX10.2 Output mode
Control word 1: P-switching
QX10.3 … QX10.7 reserved

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 315

 User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Function,
Byte Format Name Bit Remarks
if set
Setting with edge 0-1,
QX11.0 starts output
dominates stop bit
QB11 Setting with edge 0-1, start
QX11.1 stops output
bit must be reset
QX11.2 … QX11.7 reserved
†
Internal process data mapping with data format Standard. Depending on the fieldbus specification and the
data format of the communicating fieldbus components the bytes and/or words can be reversed during data
transfer.

5.23 IO-Link Communication module EP-5324

Figure 187: IO-Link Communication module Figure 188: Connection diagram EP-5324

The EP-5324 module is an IO-Link master according to the IO-Link

specification V1.1.2. One IO-Link device can be connected to each
connector. The IO-Link devices must conform to port class A. Port class B
is also possible if additionally, potential distribution modules are used.
One digital input can be used additionally with each connector.

Process data are exchanged with the connected IO-Link device via each
IO-Link port. Additionally, acyclic data can be exchanged over here
(diagnostic data, parameter data, status information data). The
parameter data of the connected IO-Link devices can be stored in the

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 316

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

master module, where they are managed by a parameterizing server

(data-storage). Thereby it is very comfortable to change the IO-Link
communication module or a single IO-Link device (from IO-Link
specification V1.1 on).

The four communication channels can be used as digital inputs or

outputs together with standard field devices. A status LED is assigned to
each channel. The module electronics supply the connected sensors with
power from the input current path (IIN). The inputs are protected against
voltage surges and overcurrent. Voltages that exceed ±30 V may cause
the destruction of the module.

Note: The module can be used with following Network adapters- 1. EPXPBS001 2.
EPXPNS001/EPXPNS101 3. EPXETC001 4. EPXMBE001/EPXMBE101 5. EPXEIP001

5.23.1 IO-Link overview

Figure 189: IO-Link for automation technology

IO-Link is a communication protocol for automation technology. IO-Link

enables serial, bi-directional point-to-point communication between
devices on the sensor-actuator level and devices on the field level or
control level. Besides cyclic process data, IO-Link allows parameters,
diagnoses and identification data to be exchanged acyclically. IO-Link is
standardized worldwide in IEC 61131-9 under the designation “single-
drop communication interface for small sensors and actuators” (SDCI).

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 317

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

An IO-Link system consists of two components:

− IO-Link Master: represents the interface between IO-Link devices

and the superordinate communication system.

− IO-Link Device: communication-capable field device, e.g. a

sensor which is controlled by an IO-Link master.

IO-Link master and IO-Link device communicate via the switching and
communication cable C/Q. The IO-Link device is supplied with voltage by
the IO-Link master via the L+ and L- cables. Depending on the port class,
an IO-Link port has additional connections:

− Port class A: The function of the additional connections is

selected by the manufacturer. Often, this connection is occupied
with an additional digital input or output.

− Port class B: The IO-Link master provides a second supply

voltage via two further connections.

An IO-Link device is connected with an IO-Link port of the IO-Link master

with 3-cable or 5-cable technology.

Figure 190: IO-Link communication principle

The IO-Link ports can be operated in IO-Link mode for bidirectional

communication or in SIO mode as digital inputs or outputs. In IO-Link
mode, the IO-Link master automatically sets the right transmission rate
for IO-Link communication after activation. The IO-Link master then
checks the identity of the IO-Link device (device comparison). The Data
Storage function ensures correct parameterization of the IO-Link device
after replacement of IO-Link device or IO-Link master without additional
programming.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 318

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

You can parameterize IO-Link devices using a configuration application or

by means of acyclic services. To do so, you will need the device
description files from the IO-Link device-manufacturer (IODDs). You can
search for and download IODDs using the “IODDfinder” on the IO-Link
Consortium website.

Note: You will find more information on IO-Link and IODDs at http://www.io-link.com.
A plug-in connector corresponds to an IO-Link port of type A.

Connector Connection Signal Function

1 C/Q IO-Link communication
2 L- GND IN
3 L+ 24 V DC IN
4 DI Digital input (type 1)

The numbering of the channels in the RSTi-EP system differs from the
numbering of the IO-Link port as per the IO-Link specification. The
following table shows the assignment of plug-in connectors and channels
to IO-Link ports for the EP-5324 IO-Link communication module.

Plug-in
IO-Link port Channel
connector
1 1 0
2 2 1
3 3 2
4 4 3

Note: Use unshielded cable of maximum 20 m length to connect IO-Link devices.

Connecting IO-Link device for class A port

Figure 191: Connection IO-Link device for class A port (DI Connection optional)

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 319

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Note: The use of the additional digital input at the DI connection is optional. It can be use
as digital input, e.g. if the IO-Link device provides an additional switching signal.
Connecting IO-Link device for class B port

To connect an IO-Link device with class B port to your RSTi-EP station, you
also need the following potential distribution modules:

• For input Current Path

— EP-711F
— EP-710F
• For output current Path

— EP-751F
— EP-700F

Figure 192: Connecting IO-Link Device for Class B

a. Install the three modules in a RSTi-EP station.

b. Connect the IO-Link device as shown in the above figure.

CAUTION
The module can be destroyed!

The Voltage between C/Q and L- Must not exceed the voltage between L+ and L-

If the connected I/O Link devices uses the C/Q input, you have to support the I/O Link
device via L+ and L- on same plug only.

Connecting sensor to C/Q

Figure 193: Connecting sensor to C/Q

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 320

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Connecting sensor to DI

Figure 194: Connecting sensor to DI

Connect load to C/Q

Figure 195: Connecting load to C/Q

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 321

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.23.2 LED Indicators EP-5324

Figure 196: EP-5324 LEDs

LED EP-5324
Module Green: Communication over the system bus
Status Red: Module System Fault or Diagnostic Fault
1.1 Yellow: Status COM 1
1.2 Red: Error IO-Link port 1
1.3
1.4 Yellow: Status DI 1
2.1 Yellow: Status COM 2
2.2 Red: Error IO-Link port 2
2.3
2.4 Yellow: Status DI 2
3.1 Yellow: Status COM 3
3.2 Red: Error IO-Link port 3
3.3
3.4 Yellow: Status DI 3
4.1 Yellow: Status COM 4
4.2 Red: Error IO-Link port 4
4.3
4.4 Yellow: Status DI 4

Figure 197: Block Diagram EP-5324

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 322

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.23.3 Specifications EP-5324

Specifications Description
System data
Data Process, parameter, and diagnostic data depend on the network
adapter used (refer to Section Order and Arrangement of
Modules).
Interface RSTi-EP I/O communication bus
System bus transfer rate 48 Mbps
Digital Inputs
Number 4
Sensor types Type 1 and Type 3 as per IEC 61131-2
Low input voltage < 5V
High input voltage > 11V
IO-Link Interfaces
Number 4
Type IO-Link as per IEC 61131-9
Transfer rate 4.8 kBaud / 38.4 kBaud / 230.4 kBaud, depending on the
connected IO-Link device
Output current C/Q (in DO mode) 0.1 A
Input type C/Q (in DI mode)1) Type 1 and Type 3 as per IEC 61131-2
Output current L+ 0.5 A per channel, Total max. 2 A
Line Break Detection yes
Short-circuit-proof yes
Module diagnosis yes
Individual channel diagnosis yes
Supply
Supply voltage 20.4V – 28.8V
Current consumption from system 8 mA
current path ISYS, typ.
Current consumption from input 25 mA + sensor supply
current path IIN
General data
Type of connection ‘’PUSH IN’’
Weight 88 g (3.10 oz)
Height 120.0 mm / 4.72" (with release lever: 128.0 mm / 5.04")
Width 11.5 mm / 0.45’’
Depth 76.0 mm / 2.99"
Protection class (IEC 60529) IP 20
For additional general data, refer to Section 1.71.7 General Technical Data for I/O Modules.
1)
If C/Q is used as digital input, the connected device shall only be supplied via L+ and L- connection of the
respective channel.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 323

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.23.4 Modifiable Parameters for EP-5324

Channel Description Options1) Default

0…3 Operating mode disabled (0) / DO (1) / DI (2) / IO-Link (3) disabled
Port Cycle Free running (0) / Fixed cycle (1) / Message sync (2) Free
0…3
running
Port Cycle time [n x 0.1 4 … 1326 4
0…3
ms]
0…3 IO-Link device check disabled (0) / type compare (1) / identical (2) disabled
0…3 DS activation state disabled (0) / enabled (1) / Clear (2) disabled
0…3 Channel diagnostics Disabled (0) / enabled (2) disabled
Process data length 0 Byte (0) / 1 Byte (1) / 2 Byte (2) / … / 32 Byte (32) / auto
0…3
input auto (255)
Process data length 0 Byte (0) / 1 Byte (1) / 2 Byte (2) / … / 32 Byte (32) / auto
0…3
output auto (255)
1)Values in brackets for EtherCAT.

Note: For Configuration and parameterization, use the IO-Link Configurator Tool. Refer to
Section ‘’IO-Link Device Configuration’’ for more details.
Operating mode” parameter

The “Operation mode” parameter defines the function of the respective IO-
Link port (C/Q, L+ and L- connections). The parameter does not influence
the function of the additional digital input (DI connection).

Disabled (default)

The supply voltage at L+ and communication via C/Q are disabled.

DO

The C/Q connection works as a digital output. The length of the process
output data for this IO-Link port is 1 byte.

DI

The C/Q connection works as a digital input. The length of the process
input data for this IO-Link port is 1 byte.

IO-Link

The IO-Link port uses the C/Q connection for IO-Link communication. The
length of the process data is determined by the “Process data IN length”
and “Process data OUT length” parameters.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 324

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

“Port cycle” parameter

The “Port cycle” parameter defines how the cycle time of the IO-Link port is
determined.

Free running (default)

The cycle time of the IO-Link port is automatically set to match the IO-Link
device connected.

Fixed cycle

The cycle time of the IO-Link port is set to the value which is defined by the
“Port cycle time (n*0.1 ms)” parameter.

Note: The real cycle time of the IO-Link port depends on the IO-Link device connected. If
you set a cycle time which is shorter than the minimum cycle time of the IO-Link
device, the smallest possible cycle time is automatically set. The web view is not
updated.
Message sync

All IO-Link ports with this parameter setting start simultaneously with
message transmission. The IO-Link device with the longest cycle time at
these IO-Link ports determines the cycle time.

Port cycle time (n*0.1 ms)” parameter

The “Port cycle time (n*0.1 ms)” defines the cycle time of the IO-Link port.
This parameter is only relevant if the “Port cycle” parameter has been set to
“Fixed value”. According to the IO-Link specification, the cycle time is coded
with a time base (2 bits) and a multiplier (6 bits). The coding is dependent
on the cycle time

Cycle Time Time base Multipl. Calculation

0, 4 ms … 6,3 ms 0, 1 ms 4 … 63 ms Time Base x Multipl.
6, 4 ms … 31,6 ms 0, 4 ms 0 … 63 ms 6, 4 ms +Time Base x Multipl.
1, 6 ms 0 … 63 ms 32, 0 ms +Time Base x
32, 0 ms … 132, 8 ms
Multipl.

“IO-Link device check” parameter

This function allows the identification characteristics of a connected IO-Link

device to be checked. The transfer of the process data is only started once
the characteristics match the values set in the IO-Link master.

disabled (default)

The function is disabled and there is no validation.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 325

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Type compare

The Vendor ID and the Device ID are compared.

Identical

The Vendor ID, the Device ID and the serial number are compared.

“DS activation state” parameter

The “DS activation state” activates the Data Storage function. The Data
Storage function controls the parameter setting server of the IO-Link
master. The parameter setting server manages the IO-Link device
parameters, such that the IO-Link master or an IO-Link device (from IO-Link
specification version 1.1) is very easy to replace.

disabled (default)
The Data Storage function is disabled. Parameter data already saved in IO-
Link master is retained.

Enabled
The Data Storage function is enabled. Parameter data is exchanged between the IO-
Link master and IO-Link device if an inconsistency is detected. The direction of
replacement depends on the status of IO-Link master and IO-Link device. An upload
of IO-Link device to the IO-Link master takes place if a connected IO-Link device
requests an upload (upload flag set) or if there is no valid data in the IO-Link master.
An IO-Link device requests an upload for each change in the IO-Link device
parameter.
If the parameter data saved in the IO-Link master does not match the data on the
connected IO-Link device and there have been no upload requests made by the IO-
Link device, data is downloaded from the IO-Link master to the IO-Link device.

IO-Link device Action

IO-Link master status
status
No valid data Upload flag set Upload
No valid data Upload flag not set Upload
Valid data Upload flag set Upload
Valid data Upload flag not set Download

Clear
The Data Storage function is disabled. Parameter data already stored in the IO-Link
master is deleted.

Note: If the Data Storage function is enabled, do not connect any IO-Link devices with
unknown parameters to avoid saving incorrect parameters. Reset IO-Link devices to
factory setting before you connect them.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 326

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

“Channel diagnostics” parameter

The “Channel diagnostics” parameter activates channel diagnostics.

Disabled (default)

Channel diagnostics is disabled.

Enabled

Channel diagnostics is enabled.

“Process data length input” parameter

The “Process data length input” parameter defines how many bytes the
process input data of the IO-Link master are occupied by the cyclic input data
of the IO-Link device connected.

0 … 32 bytes
The cyclic input data of the IO-Link device connected occupies 0 … 32 bytes
of the IO-Link master process input data.

auto (default)

The length of the cyclic input data is automatically set to the IO-Link device
connected.

“Process data length output” parameter

The “Process data length output” parameter defines how many bytes of the
IO-Link master process output data are occupied by the cyclic data of the IO-
Link device connected.

0 … 32 bytes

The cyclic output data of the IO-Link device connected occupies 0 … 32 bytes
of the IO-Link master process output data.

auto (default)

The length of the cyclic output data is automatically set to match the IO-Link
device connected.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 327

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.23.5 Diagnostic Data EP-5324

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

0 Module error 0
1 Internal error 0
2 External error 0
3 Channel error 0
Error indicator 0
4 Error 0
5 Power supply fault 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Parameter error 0
0
1
Module Type 0x05
2
3
Module type 1
4 Reserved 1
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
Error byte 2 2 0-7 Reserved 0
0-2 Reserved 0
3 Diagnostic Alarm Lost 0
4 Communication fault 0
Error byte 3 3
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 IO-Link Event in Queue 0
0 1
1 Channel type 1
2 0
3 1
Channel type 4
4 1
5 1
6 1
7 Reserved 0
Diagnostic bits per
5 Number of diagnostic bit per channel 16
channel
Number of channels 6 Number of similar channels per module 4
Channel error 0 Error at channel 0 0
1 Error at channel 1 0
7 2 Error at channel 2 0
3 Error at channel 3 0
4…7 Reserved 0

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 328

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

8 … 10 8 … 31 Reserved 0
0 Short Circuit 0
Error channel 0 11 1 Undervoltage 0
Error channel 1 13
2 Overvoltage 0
Error channel 2 15
3 Overload 0
Error channel 3 17
4 Overtemperature 0
5 Line Break 0
6 Upper Limit Value
7 Lower Limit Value 0
0 Error 0
Error channel 0 12
1 Parameter fault 0
Error channel 1 14
2 Power supply fault 0
Error channel 2 16
Error channel 3 18 3 Fuse blown 0
4 Communication fault 0
5 Error 1 0
6 Unknown Error

7 Unknown Error 2 0

Error Channel 4 19
… … 0…7 Reserved 0
Error Channel 15 42
Time stamp 43-46 Time stamp [μs] (32-bit)

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 329

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.23.6 Process Data Inputs EP-5324

Byte Bit Description

IX0.0 DI 1
IX0.1 DI 2
IX0.2 DI 3
IX0.3 DI 4
IB0
IX0.4 C/Q 1
IX0.5 C/Q 2
IX0.6 C/Q 3
IX0.7 C/Q 4

IX1.0 Process data IN valid IO-Link-Port 1

IX1.1 Process data IN valid IO-Link-Port 2

IX1.2 Process data IN valid IO-Link-Port 3

IB1 IX1.3 Process data IN valid IO-Link-Port 4

IX1.4 Error IO-Link-Port 1
IX1.5 Error IO-Link-Port 2
IX1.6 Error IO-Link-Port 3
IX1.7 Error IO-Link-Port 4
IB2 … Process data of the IO-Link device1)
1)
The process data of the IO-Link device depend on which module has been chosen
from the device description file. The mapping of the IO-Link-devices depends on the
length of their process data and the parameter settings.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 330

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.23.7 Process Data Outputs EP-5324

Byte Bit Description

OX0.0 DO 1
OX0.1 DO 2
OX0.2 DO 3
OX0.3 DO 4
OB0
OX0.4 reserved
OX0.5 reserved
OX0.6 reserved
OX0.7 reserved
OX1.0 Process data OUT valid IO-Link-Port 1
OX1.1 Process data OUT valid IO-Link-Port 2
OX1.2 Process data OUT valid IO-Link-Port 3
OX1.3 Process data OUT valid IO-Link-Port 4
OB1
OX1.4 reserved
OX1.5 reserved
OX1.6 reserved
IX1.7 reserved
OB2 … Process data of the IO-Link device1)
1)
The process data of the IO-Link device depend on which module has been chosen
from the device description file. The mapping of the IO-Link-devices depends on the
length of their process data and the parameter settings.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 331

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Figure 198: Process Data mapping (Configuration: EP-5324-16BYTE-

INOUT)

5.23.8 Network Adapters-Dependent Process data widths

The following tables show which process data lengths are available for the individual
adapters, and the relevant fieldbus-dependent data widths.

Profibus-EPXPBS001

Process data for IO-Link Network adapters

devices dependent data widths1)
IO-Link port
Output- Input-byte Output-
Input-byte
byte byte
4 4 6 6
8 8 10 10
16 16 18 18
32 32 34 34
16 8 18 10
32 16 34 18
32 8 34 10
1)
incl. 2 Byte module process data

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 332

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Profinet -EPXPNS001/EPXPNS101

Process data for IO-Link Network adapters

devices dependent data widths1)
IO-Link port
Output-byte Input-byte Output-
Input-byte
byte
4 4 6 6
8 8 10 10
16 16 18 18
32 32 34 34
64 64 66 66
128 128 130 130
16 8 18 10
32 16 34 18
32 8 34 10
64 8 66 10
64 16 66 18
64 32 66 34
128 8 130 10
128 16 130 18
128 32 130 34
128 64 130 66
1)
incl. 2 Byte module process data

EtherCAT-EPXETC001
Process data for IO-Link devices Network adapters
IO-Link port dependent data widths1)
Output-byte Input-byte Output-
Input-byte
byte
16 16 18 18
1)
incl. 2 Byte module process data

Modbus-EPXMBE001/EPXMBE101

Process data for IO-Link devices Network adapters

IO-Link port dependent data widths1)
Input-byte Output-byte Input-byte Output-byte
0 … 62 0 … 62 2 ... 64 2 … 64
1)
incl. 2 Byte module process data

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 333

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

EtherNet/IP-EPXEIP001

Process data for IO-Link devices Network adapters

IO-Link port dependent data widths1)
Input-byte Output-byte Input-byte Output-byte
0 … 128 0 ...128 2 … 130 2 … 130
1)
incl. 2 Byte module process data

5.23.9 IO-Link Communication module EP-5324 event

codes

Event Node Description

0xC101 Overcurrent at transmitter
0xC102 Overtemperature at transmitted
0xC103 Undervoltage at VDD
0xC104 Undervoltage at VDDH
0xC105 Undervoltage at L+
0xC106 Overcurrent at L+ shunt
0xC201 Error at Data Storage EEPROM access
A new connection has been established between the
0xFF21
Master and the Device
The Device has not answered for three consequent
0xFF22
Master requests
0xFF23 DS header settings does not match with the read IDs
0xFF24 The DS buffer overflows
0xFF25 A DS parameter cannot be accessed
0xFF91 Request DS upload

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 334

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.24 Analog Input Module EP-3164

Figure 199: Figure 200: Connection Diagram

Analog Input EP-3164
Module EP-3164

left: 3-/4-wire sensor with sensor wiring

via electronics.

right: 2-wire sensor with sensor wiring

via electronics.

The EP-3164 analog input module can record up to 4 analog sensors with
±10 V, ±5 V, 0-10 V, 0-5 V, 2-10 V, 1-5V, 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA. The resolution
is 16 bits per channel. Sensors can be connected to each connector in a 2-
wire, 3-wire or 3-wire connection + FE. The measurement range is defined
using parameterization. A status LED is assigned to each channel. The
module electronics supply the connected sensors with power from the
input current path (IIN).

The inputs are protected against voltage surges and overcurrent.

Voltages that exceed ±30 V may cause the destruction of the module. As a
protection against overcurrent, the module temporarily switches to
voltage mode.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 335

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.24.1 LED Indicators EP-3164

Figure 201: EP-3164 LEDs

LED EP-3164
Green: Communication over the system bus
Module Status
Red: Module System Fault or Diagnostic Fault
1.1 Red: channel error
1.2 --
1.3 --
1.4 --
2.1 Red: channel error
2.2 --
2.3 --
2.4 --
3.1 Red: channel error
3.2 --
3.3 --
3.4 --
4.1 Red: channel error
4.2 --
4.3 --
4.4 --

For error messages refer to Section 14: LED Indicators and Troubleshooting.

Figure 202: Block Diagram EP-3164

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 336

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.24.2 Specifications EP-3164

Specifications Description
System data
Data Process, parameter and diagnostic data depend on the network
adapter used (refer to Section, Order and Arrangement of
Modules).
Interface RSTi-EP I/O communication bus
System bus transfer rate 48 Mbps
Inputs
Number 4
Input values 1. Voltage (0 ... 5 V, ±5 V, 0 ... 10 V, ±10 V, 1 ... 5 V, 2 ... 10 V)
2. Current (0 ... 20 mA, 4 ... 20 mA)
Resolution 16 bits
0.1 % max. at 25 °C (77 °F)
50 ppm/K Temperature coefficient
Accuracy max. additional inaccuracy in the voltage mode due to
max. –10 sensor power supply current
mV/A
Sensor supply max. 2 A per plug, total max. 8 A
Sensor connection 2-wire, 3-wire, 3-wire + FE
Conversion time 1ms
Internal resistance U: 100 kΩ; I: 41.2 Ω
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Short-circuit-proof Yes
Response time of the protective < 50ms
circuit
Module diagnosis Yes
Individual channel diagnosis No
Supply
Supply voltage 20.4V – 28.8V
Current consumption from system 8 mA
current path ISYS,
Current consumption from input 25 mA + sensor supply current
current path IIN
General data
Weight 89 g (3.14 oz)
For additional general data, refer to Section 1.71.7 General Technical Data for I/O Modules.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 337

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.24.3 Modifiable Parameters for EP-3164

Channel Description Options Default

disabled (0) /
50 Hz (1) /
Frequency suppression disabled
60 Hz (2) /
Average over 16 values (3)
0 to 20 mA (0) /
4 to 20 mA (1) /
0 V to 10 V (2) /
-10 to 10 V (3) /
0 ... 3 Measurement range 0 to 5 V (4) / disabled
-5 to 5 V (5) /
1 to 5 V (6) /
2 to 10 V (7) /
disabled (8)

5.24.4 Diagnostic Data EP-3164

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

0 Module error
1 Internal error
2 External error
3 Channel error 0
Error indicator 0
4 Error
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Parameter error
0
1
Module Type 0x05
2
3
Module type 1
4 Reserved 0
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
Error byte 2 2 0-7 Reserved 0
0-2 Reserved 0
3 Internal diagnostic FIFO full
4 Power supply fault
Error byte 3 3
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
Channel type 4 0-6 Channel type 0x74
Detailed Description of I/O Modules 338
User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

7 Reserved 0
Diagnostic bits per
5 Number of diagnostic bit per channel 0
channel
Number of channels 6 Number of similar channels per module 4
Channel error 7-10 0-31 Reserved 0
Channel 0 error 11
to to 0–7 Reserved 0
Channel 31 error 42
Time stamp 43-46 Time stamp [μs] (32-bit)

5.24.5 Process Data† Inputs EP-3164

Byte Format Description Remarks

IB0
Word AI0
IB1
IB2
Word AI1
IB3
IB4
Word AI2
IB5
IB6
Word AI3
IB7
†
Internal process data mapping with data format “Standard”. Depending on the fieldbus specification and
the data format of the communicating fieldbus components the bytes and/or words can be reversed during
data transfer

5.24.6 Measurement Range EP-3164

Measurement Current (I) / Decimal

Hexadecimal Range Conversion
range Voltage (U) (D)
21.67 mA 29957 0x7505 Overloading
20 mA 27648 0x6C00 D = 27648 x I / 20
0 – 20 mA
10 mA 13824 0x3600 Nominal range I = D x 20 / 27648
0 mA 0 0x0000
21.67 mA 29957 0x7505 Overloading
20 mA 27648 0x6C00
D = 27648 x (I – 4) / 16
4 – 20 mA 12 mA 13824 0x3600 Nominal range
I=( D x 16 / 27648 )+ 4
4 mA 0 0x0000
3.6 mA -691 0XFD4D Underloading
10.5V 29030 0x7166 Overloading
10 V 27648 0x6C00 D = 27648 x U/10
0 – 10 V
5V 13824 0x3600 Nominal range I = D x 10 / 27648
0V 0 0x0000
±10 V +10.5V 29030 0x7166 Overloading D = 27648 x U / 10

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 339

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Measurement Current (I) / Decimal

Hexadecimal Range Conversion
range Voltage (U) (D)
10 V 27648 0x6C00 U = D x 10 / 27648
5V 13824 0x3600
0V 0 0x0000 Nominal range
-5 V -13824 0xCA00
-10 V -27648 0x9400
-10.5V -29030 8E9A Underloading
+10.5V 29376 0x72C0 Overloading
10 V 27648 0x6C00
D = 27648 x (U – 2) / 8
2 - 10 V 6V 13824 0x3600 Nominal range
U = D x 8 / 27648 + 2
2V 0 0x0000
1.8V -691 0XFD4D Underloading
5.25V 29376 0x72C0 Overloading
5V 27648 0x6C00
D = 27648 x (U – 1) / 4
1-5V 3V 13824 0x3600 Nominal range
U = (D x 4 / 27648) + 1
1V 0 0x0000
0.9 V -691 0XFD4D Underloading
5.25 V 29030 0x7166 Overloading
5V 27648 0x6C00 D = 27648 x U/5
0–5V
2.5 V 13824 0x3600 Nominal range I = D x 5 / 27648
0V 0 0x0000
5.25 V 29376 0x72C0 Overloading
5V 27648 0x6C00
2.5 V 13824 0x3600
D = 27648 x (U – 1) / 4
±5 V 0V 0 0x0000 Nominal range
U = (D x 4 / 27648) + 1
-2.5 V -13824 0xCA00
-5 V -27648 0x9400
-5.25 V -43200 0x5740 Underloading
The following applies for all ranges:
input value > overload range = 0x7FFF
input value < underload range = 0x8000

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 340

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.25 Analog Input Module EP-3264

Figure 203: Figure 204: Connection Diagram EP-3264

Analog Input
Module EP-3264

Left: 3-/4-wire sensor with sensor wiring

via electronics

Right: 2-wire sensor with sensor wiring

via electronics.

The EP-3264 analog input module can record up to 4 analog sensors with
±10 V, ±5 V, 0-10 V, 0-5 V, 2-10 V, 1-5V, 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA. The resolution
is 16 bits per channel. Sensors can be connected to each connector in a 2-
wire, 3-wire or 3-wire connection + FE. The measurement range is defined
using parameterization. Two status LED are assigned to each channel.
The module electronics supply the connected sensors with power from
the input current path (IIN).

Each sensor output is loadable with 500 mA and protected against

overcurrent. The inputs are protected against voltage surges and
overcurrent. Voltages that exceed ±30 V may cause the destruction of the
module. As a protection against overcurrent, the module temporarily
switches to voltage mode.

The module provides individual channel diagnosis with channel related

error messages.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 341

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.25.1 LED Indicators EP-3264

Figure 205: EP-3264 LEDs

LED EP-3264
Green: Communication over the system bus
Module Status
Red: Module System Fault or Diagnostic Fault
1.1 Red: channel error

1.2 --

1.3 Red: +24 V short circuit or line break (with current < 1 mA)

1.4 --

2.1 Red: channel error

2.2 --

2.3 Red: +24 V short circuit or line break (with current < 1 mA)

2.4 --

3.1 Red: channel error

3.2 --

3.3 Red: +24 V short circuit or line break (with current < 1 mA)

3.4 --

4.1 Red: channel error

4.2 --
4.3 Red: +24 V short circuit or line break (with current < 1 mA)
4.4 --

For error messages refer to Section 14: LED Indicators and Troubleshooting.

Figure 206: Block Diagram EP-3264

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 342

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.25.2 Specifications EP-3264

Specifications Description
System data
Data Process, parameter and diagnostic data depend on the
network adapter used (refer to Section, Order and
Arrangement of Modules).
Interface RSTi-EP I/O communication bus
System bus transfer rate 48 Mbps
Inputs
Number 4
Input values 1. Voltage (0 ... 5 V, ±5 V, 0 ... 10 V, ±10 V, 1 ... 5 V, 2 ...
10V)
2. Current (0 ... 20 mA, 4 ... 20 mA)
Resolution 16 bits
0.1 % max. at 25 °C (77 °F)
50 ppm/K max. Temperature coefficient
Accuracy max. –10 mV/A additional inaccuracy in the
voltage mode due to sensor
power supply current
Sensor supply max. 0.5 A per plug
Sensor connection 2-wire, 3-wire, 3-wire + FE
Conversion time 1ms
Internal resistance U: 100 kΩ; I: 41.2 Ω
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Short-circuit-proof Yes
Response time of the protective circuit < 50ms
Module diagnosis Yes
Individual channel diagnosis No
Supply
Supply voltage 20.4V – 28.8V
Current consumption from system current path 8 mA
ISYS,
Current consumption from input current path 25 mA + sensor supply current
IIN
General data
Weight 89 g (3.14 oz)
For additional general data, refer to Section 1.71.7 General Technical Data for I/O Modules.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 343

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.25.3 Modifiable Parameters for EP-3164

Channel Description Options Default

disabled (0) /
50 Hz (1) /
Frequency suppression disabled
60 Hz (2) /
Average over 16 values (3)
0 ... 3 Channel diagnosis disabled (0) / enabled (1) disabled
0 ... 3 Diag short circuit 24V disabled (0) / enabled (1) disabled
0 ... 3 Diag line break 24V disabled (0) / enabled (1) disabled
0 to 20 mA (0) /
4 to 20 mA (1) /
0 V to 10 V (2) /
-10 to 10 V (3) /
0 ... 3 Measurement range 0 to 5 V (4) / disabled
-5 to 5 V (5) /
1 to 5 V (6) /
2 to 10 V (7) /
disabled (8)

5.25.4 Diagnostic Data EP-3264

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

0 Module error
1 Internal error
2 External error
3 Channel error
Error indicator 0
4 Error
5 Power supply fault
6 Reserved 0
7 Parameter error
0
1
Module Type 0x05
2
3
Module type 1 Channel information
4 1
available
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
Error byte 2 2 0-7 Reserved 0
0-2 Reserved 0
Error byte 3 3 3 Internal diagnostic FIFO full
4 Power supply fault
Detailed Description of I/O Modules 344
User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

5-7 Reserved 0
0-6 Channel type 0x74
Channel type 4
7 Reserved 0
Diagnostic bits per Number of diagnostic bit per
5 8
channel channel
Number of channels Number of similar channels
6 4
per module
0 Error at channel 0
1 Error at channel 1
Channel error 7 2 Error at channel 2
3 Error at channel 3
4-7 Reserved 0
Channel error 8 8-15 Reserved 0
Channel error 9 16-23 Reserved 0
Channel error 10 24-31 Reserved 0

5.25.5 Diagnostic Data EP-3264

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

0 Parameter error
1 Overload
2 Line break sensor supply
3 Fuse blown
Channel 0 error 11
4 Line break signal
5 Reserved 0
6 Lower limit exceeded
7 Upper limit exceeded
0 Parameter Error
1 Overload
2 Line break sensor supply
3 Fuse blown
Channel 1 error 12
4 Line break signal
5 Reserved 0
6 Lower limit exceeded
7 Upper limit exceeded
0 Parameter Error
1 Overload
2 Line break sensor supply
3 Fuse blown
Channel 2 error 13
4 Line break signal
5 Reserved 0
6 Lower limit exceeded
7 Upper limit exceeded

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 345

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

0 Parameter Error
1 Overload
2 Line break sensor supply
3 Fuse blown
Channel 2 error 14
4 Line break signal
5 Reserved 0
6 Lower limit exceeded
7 Upper limit exceeded
Channel 4 error
to 15 - 42 0-7 Reserved 0
Channel 31 error
Time stamp 43-46 Time stamp [μs] (32-bit)

5.25.6 Process Data† Inputs EP-3264

Byte Format Description Remarks

IB0
Word AI0
IB1
IB2
Word AI1
IB3
IB4
Word AI2
IB5
IB6
Word AI3
IB7
†
Internal process data mapping with data format “Standard”. Depending on the fieldbus
specification and the data format of the communicating fieldbus components the bytes
and/or words can be reversed during data transfer

5.25.7 Measurement Range EP-3264

Current (I)
Measurement /
Decimal (D) Hexadecimal Range Conversion
range Voltage
(U)
21.67 mA 29957 0x7505 Overloading
20 mA 27648 0x6C00 D = 27648 x I / 20
0 – 20 mA
10 mA 13824 0x3600 Nominal range I = D x 20 / 27648
0 mA 0 0x0000
21.67 mA 29957 0x7505 Overloading
D = 27648 x (I – 4) /
20 mA 27648 0x6C00
16
4 – 20 mA 12 mA 13824 0x3600 Nominal range
I=( D x 16 / 27648 )+
4 mA 0 0x0000
4
3.6 mA -691 0XFD4D Underloading
Detailed Description of I/O Modules 346
User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Current (I)
Measurement /
Decimal (D) Hexadecimal Range Conversion
range Voltage
(U)
10.5V 29030 0x7166 Overloading
10 V 27648 0x6C00 D = 27648 x U/10
0 – 10 V
5V 13824 0x3600 Nominal range I = D x 10 / 27648
0V 0 0x0000
+10.5V 29030 0x7166 Overloading
10 V 27648 0x6C00
5V 13824 0x3600
D = 27648 x U / 10
±10 V 0V 0 0x0000 Nominal range
U = D x 10 / 27648
-5 V -13824 0xCA00
-10 V -27648 0x9400
-10.5V -29030 8E9A Underloading
+10.5V 29376 0x72C0 Overloading
10 V 27648 0x6C00 D = 27648 x (U – 2) /
2 - 10 V 6V 13824 0x3600 Nominal range 8
2V 0 0x0000 U = D x 8 / 27648 + 2
1.8V -691 0XFD4D Underloading
5.25V 29376 0x72C0 Overloading
D = 27648 x (U – 1) /
5V 27648 0x6C00
4
1-5V 3V 13824 0x3600 Nominal range
U = (D x 4 / 27648) +
1V 0 0x0000
1
0.9 V -691 0XFD4D Underloading
5.25 V 29030 0x7166 Overloading
5V 27648 0x6C00 D = 27648 x U/5
0–5V
2.5 V 13824 0x3600 Nominal range I = D x 5 / 27648
0V 0 0x0000
5.25 V 29376 0x72C0 Overloading
5V 27648 0x6C00
D = 27648 x (U – 1) /
2.5 V 13824 0x3600
4
±5 V 0V 0 0x0000 Nominal range
U = (D x 4 / 27648) +
-2.5 V -13824 0xCA00
1
-5 V -27648 0x9400
-5.25 V -43200 0x5740 Underloading
The following applies for all ranges:
input value > overload range = 0x7FFF
input value < underload range = 0x8000

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 347

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.26 Analog Input Module EP-3664

Figure 207: Figure 208: Connection Diagram

Analog Input EP-3664
Module EP-3664

(Figure 209: For EP-3664, the 1= Standard, 2= Alternative option)

In the event that, you will realize the connection variant with an external
sensor supply, pay attention to the common mode range: Ucommon = -
30V … +30V.

Figure 209: Definition of Common Mode (CM) EP-3664

The EP-3664 analog input module can record up to 4 analog sensors with
±10 V, ±5 V, 0-10 V, 0-5 V, 2-10 V, 1-5 V, 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA. The
resolution is 16 bits per channel. Sensors can be connected to each
connector in a 2-wire, 3-wire or 4-wire connection. The measurement
range is defined using parameterization. Two status LED are assigned to
each channel. The module electronics supply the connected sensors with
power from the input current path (IIN).

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 348

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Each sensor output is loadable with 500 mA and protected against

overcurrent. The inputs are protected against voltage surges and
overcurrent. Voltages that exceed ±36 V against GND may cause the
destruction of the module. As a protection against overcurrent, the
module will cycle ON and OFF in high impedance mode.

The module provides individual channel diagnosis with channel related

error messages.

5.26.1 LED Indicators EP-3664

Figure 210: EP-3664 LEDs

LED EP-3664
Green: Communication over the system bus
Module Status Red: Module System Fault or Diagnostic Fault
(Collective error diagnostics)
1.1 Red: Line break or range exceeded input 0
1.2 --
1.3 Red: Line break or short circuit in sensor supply
1.4 --
2.1 Red: Line break or range exceeded input 1
2.2 --
2.3 Red: Line break or short circuit in sensor supply
2.4 --
3.1 Red: Line break or range exceeded input 2
3.2 --
3.3 Red: Line break or short circuit in sensor supply
3.4 --
4.1 Red: Line break or range exceeded input 3
4.2 --
4.3 Red: Line break or short circuit in sensor supply
4.4 --

For error messages refer to Section 14: LED Indicators and Troubleshooting.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 349

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Figure 211: Block Diagram EP-3664

5.26.2 Specifications: EP-3664

Specifications Description
System data
Data Process, parameter, and diagnostic data depend on the network adapter used (refer
to Section, Order and Arrangement of Modules).
Interface RSTi-EP I/O communication bus
System bus transfer rate 48 Mbps
Inputs
Number 4
Input values 1. Voltage (0 ... 5 V, ±5 V, 0 ... 10 V, ±10 V, 1 ... 5 V, 2 ... 10 V)
2. Current (0 ... 20 mA, 4 ... 20 mA)
Resolution 16 bits
0.1 % max. at 25 °C (77 °F)
Accuracy
50 ppm/K max. Temperature coefficient
Sensor supply max. 0.5 A per plug
Sensor connection 2-wire, 3-wire, 4-wire
Conversion time 1ms
Internal resistance U: 89 kΩ; I: 16 Ω
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Short-circuit-proof Yes
Module diagnosis Yes
Individual channel diagnosis Yes
Supply
Supply voltage 20.4V – 28.8V
Current consumption from 8 mA
system current path ISYS,
Current consumption from 31 mA + Load
input current path IIN
General data
Weight 91 g (3.21 oz)
For additional general data, refer to Section 1.71.7 General Technical Data for I/O Modules.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 350

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.26.3 Modifiable Parameters EP-3664

Channel Description Options Default

disabled (0) /
50 Hz (1) / disabled
Frequency suppression
60 Hz (2) /
Average over 16 values (3)

0 ... 3 Channel diagnosis disabled (0) / enabled (1)

disabled

0 ... 3 Diag short circiut 24V disabled (0) / enabled (1)

disabled

0 ... 3 Diag line break 24V disabled (0) / enabled (1)

disabled

0 to 20 mA (0) /
4 to 20 mA (1) /
0 V to 10 V (2) /
-10 to 10 V (3) /
0 ... 3 Measurement range 0 to 5 V (4) /
disabled
-5 to 5 V (5) /
1 to 5 V (6) /
2 to 10 V (7) /
disabled (8)

5.26.4 Diagnostic Data EP-3664

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

0 Module error
1 Internal error
2 External error
3 Channel error
Error indicator 0
4 Error
5 Power supply fault
6 Reserved 0
7 Parameter error
0
1
Module Type 0x05
2
3
Module type 1
4 Channel information available 1
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
Error byte 2 2 0-7 Reserved 0
0-2 Reserved 0
Error byte 3 3
3 Internal diagnostic FIFO full
Detailed Description of I/O Modules 351
User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

4 Power supply fault
5-7 Reserved 0
0-6 Channel type 0x74
Channel type 4
7 Reserved 0
Diagnostic bits per
5 Number of diagnostic bits per channel 8
channel
Number of channels 6 Number of similar channels per module 4
0 Error at channel 0
1 Error at channel 1
Channel error 7 2 Error at channel 2
3 Error at channel 3
4-7 Reserved 0
Channel error 8 8-15 Reserved 0
Channel error 9 16-23 Reserved 0
Channel error 10 24-31 Reserved 0
0 Parameter error
1 Overload
2 Line break sensor supply
3 Fuse blown
Channel 0 error 11
4 Line break signal
5 Reserved 0
6 Lower limit exceeded
7 Upper limit exceeded
0 Parameter Error
1 Overload
2 Line break sensor supply
3 Fuse blown
Channel 1 error 12
4 Line break signal
5 Reserved 0
6 Lower limit exceeded
7 Upper limit exceeded
0 Parameter Error
1 Overload
2 Line break sensor supply
3 Fuse blown
Channel 2 error 13
4 Line break signal
5 Reserved 0
6 Lower limit exceeded
7 Upper limit exceeded
0 Parameter Error
1 Overload
Channel 3 error 14
2 Line break sensor supply
3 Fuse blown
Detailed Description of I/O Modules 352
User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

4 Line break signal
5 Reserved 0
6 Lower limit exceeded
7 Upper limit exceeded
Channel 4 error
to 15 - 42 0-7 Reserved 0
Channel 31 error
Time stamp 43-46 Time stamp [μs] (32-bit)

5.26.5 Process Data† Inputs EP-3664

Byte Format Description Remarks

IB0
Word AI0
IB1
IB2
Word AI1
IB3
IB4
Word AI2
IB5
IB6
Word AI3
IB7
† Internal process data mapping with data format “Standard”. Depending on the fieldbus specification and
the data format of the communicating fieldbus components the bytes and/or words can be reversed during
data transfer

5.26.6 Measurement Range EP-3664

Measurement Current (I) /

Decimal (D) Hexadecimal Range Conversion
range Voltage (U)
21.67 mA 29957 0x7505 Overloading
20 mA 27648 0x6C00 D = 27648 x I / 20
0 – 20 mA
10 mA 13824 0x3600 Nominal range I = D x 20 / 27648
0 mA 0 0x0000
21.67 mA 29957 0x7505 Overloading
20 mA 27648 0x6C00
D = 27648 x (I – 4) / 16
4 – 20 mA 12 mA 13824 0x3600 Nominal range
I=(D x 16 / 27648 )+ 4
4 mA 0 0x0000
3.6 mA -691 0XFD4D Underloading
10.5V 29030 0x7166 Overloading
10 V 27648 0x6C00 D = 27648 x U/10
0 – 10 V
5V 13824 0x3600 Nominal range I = D x 10 / 27648
0V 0 0x0000
±10 V +10.5V 29030 0x7166 Overloading D = 27648 x U / 10
Detailed Description of I/O Modules 353
User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Measurement Current (I) /

Decimal (D) Hexadecimal Range Conversion
range Voltage (U)
10 V 27648 0x6C00 U = D x 10 / 27648
5V 13824 0x3600
0V 0 0x0000 Nominal range
-5 V -13824 0xCA00
-10 V -27648 0x9400
-10.5V -29030 8E9A Underloading
+10.5V 29376 0x72C0 Overloading
10 V 27648 0x6C00
D = 27648 x (U – 2) / 8
2 - 10 V 6V 13824 0x3600 Nominal range
U = D x 8 / 27648 + 2
2V 0 0x0000
1.8V -691 0XFD4D Underloading
5.25V 29376 0x72C0 Overloading
5V 27648 0x6C00
D = 27648 x (U – 1) / 4
1-5V 3V 13824 0x3600 Nominal range
U = (D x 4 / 27648) + 1
1V 0 0x0000
0.9 V -691 0XFD4D Underloading
5.25 V 29030 0x7166 Overloading
5V 27648 0x6C00 D = 27648 x U/5
0–5V
2.5 V 13824 0x3600 Nominal range I = D x 5 / 27648
0V 0 0x0000
5.25 V 29376 0x72C0 Overloading
5V 27648 0x6C00
2.5 V 13824 0x3600
D = 27648 x (U – 1) / 4
±5 V 0V 0 0x0000 Nominal range
U = (D x 4 / 27648) + 1
-2.5 V -13824 0xCA00
-5 V -27648 0x9400
-5.25 V -43200 0x5740 Underloading
The following applies for all ranges:
input value > overload range = 0x7FFF
input value < underload range = 0x8000

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 354

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.27 Analog Input Module EP-3124

Figure 212: Figure 213: Connection Diagram

Analog Input EP-3124
Module EP-3124

left: 3-/4-wire sensor with sensor wiring via

electronics.

right: 2-wire sensor with sensor wiring via

electronics.

The analog input module EP-3124 can record up to 4 analog sensors with
±10 V, ±5 V, 0-10 V, 0-5 V, 2-10 V, 1-5 V, 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA. The
resolution is 12 bits per channel. Sensors can be connected to each
connector in a 2-wire, 3-wire or 3-wire connection + FE. The measurement
range is defined using parameterization. A status LED is assigned to each
channel. The module electronics supply the connected sensors with
power from the input current path (IIN).

The inputs are protected against voltage surges and overcurrent.

Voltages that exceed ±30 V may cause the destruction of the module. As a
protection against overcurrent, the module temporarily switches to
voltage mode.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 355

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.27.1 LED Indicators EP-3124

Figure 214: EP-3124 LEDs

LED EP-3124
Green: Communication over the system bus
Module Status
Red: Module System Fault or Diagnostic Fault
1.1 Red: channel error
1.2 --
1.3 --
1.4 --
2.1 Red: channel error
2.2 --
2.3 --
2.4 --
3.1 Red: channel error
3.2 --
3.3 --
3.4 --
4.1 Red: channel error
4.2 --
4.3 --
4.4 --

For error messages refer to Section 14: LED Indicators and Troubleshooting.

Figure 215: Block Diagram EP-3124

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 356

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.27.2 Specifications EP-3124

Specifications Description
System data
Data Process, parameter and diagnostic data depend on the network
adapter used (refer to Section, Order and Arrangement of Modules).
Interface RSTi-EP I/O communication bus
System bus transfer rate 48 Mbps
Inputs
Number 4
Input values 1. Voltage (0 ... 5 V, ±5 V, 0 ... 10 V, ±10 V, 1 ... 5 V, 2 ... 10V)
2. Current (0 ... 20 mA, 4 ... 20 mA)
Resolution 12 bits
0.25 % max. at 25 °C (77 °F)
50 ppm/K Temperature coefficient
Accuracy max. additional inaccuracy in the voltage mode due to
max. –10 sensor power supply current
mV/A
Sensor supply max. 2 A per plug, total max. 8 A
Sensor connection 2-wire, 3-wire, 3-wire + FE
Conversion time 1ms
Internal resistance U: 100 kΩ; I: 41.2 Ω
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Short-circuit-proof Yes
Response time of the protective < 50ms
circuit
Module diagnosis Yes
Individual channel diagnosis No
Supply
Supply voltage 20.4V – 28.8V
Current consumption from system 8 mA
current path ISYS,
Current consumption from input 25 mA + sensor supply current
current path IIN
General data
Weight 87 g (3.07 oz)
For additional general data, refer to Section 1.71.7 General Technical Data for I/O Modules.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 357

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.27.3 Modifiable Parameters for EP-3124

Channel Description Options Default

disabled (0) /
50 Hz (1) /
Frequency suppression disabled
60 Hz (2) /
Average over 16 values (3)
0 to 20 mA (0) /
4 to 20 mA (1) /
0 V to 10 V (2) /
-10 to 10 V (3) /
0 ... 3 Measurement range 0 to 5 V (4) / disabled
-5 to 5 V (5) /
1 to 5 V (6) /
2 to 10 V (7) /
disabled (8)

5.27.4 Diagnostic Data EP-3124

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

0 Module error
1 Internal error
2 External error
Error 3 Channel error 0
0
indicator 4 Error
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Parameter error
0
1
Module Type 0x05
2
3
Module type 1
4 Reserved 0
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
Error byte 2 2 0-7 Reserved 0
0-2 Reserved 0
Internal diagnostic FIFO
3
full
Error byte 3 3 4 Power supply fault
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
Detailed Description of I/O Modules 358
User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

0-6 Channel type 0x74
Channel type 4
7 Reserved 0
Diagnostic
Number of diagnostic bits
bits per 5 0
per channel
channel
Number of Number of similar
6 4
channels channels per module
Channel error 7-10 0-31 Reserved 0
Channel 0
11
error to
to 0–7 Reserved 0
Channel 31
42
error
Time stamp 43-46 Time stamp [μs] (32-bit)

5.27.5 Process Data† Inputs EP-3124

Byte Format Description Remarks

IB0
Word AI0
IB1
IB2
Word AI1
IB3
IB4
Word AI2
IB5
IB6
Word AI3
IB7
†
Internal process data mapping with data format “Standard”. Depending on the fieldbus
specification and the data format of the communicating fieldbus components the bytes
and/or words can be reversed during data transfer.

5.27.6 Measurement Range EP-3124

Measurement Current (I) /

Decimal (D) Hexadecimal Range Conversion
range Voltage (U)
21.67 mA 29957 0x7505 Overloading
20 mA 27648 0x6C00 D = 27648 x I / 20
0 – 20 mA
10 mA 13824 0x3600 Nominal range I = D x 20 / 27648
0 mA 0 0x0000
21.67 mA 29957 0x7505 Overloading
20 mA 27648 0x6C00
D = 27648 x (I – 4) / 16
4 – 20 mA 12 mA 13824 0x3600 Nominal range
I=( D x 16 / 27648 )+ 4
4 mA 0 0x0000
3.6 mA -691 0XFD4D Underloading
0 – 10 V 10.5V 29030 0x7166 Overloading D = 27648 x U/10

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 359

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Measurement Current (I) /

Decimal (D) Hexadecimal Range Conversion
range Voltage (U)
10 V 27648 0x6C00 I = D x 10 / 27648
5V 13824 0x3600 Nominal range
0V 0 0x0000
+10.5V 29030 0x7166 Overloading
10 V 27648 0x6C00
5V 13824 0x3600
D = 27648 x U / 10
±10 V 0V 0 0x0000 Nominal range
U = D x 10 / 27648
-5 V -13824 0xCA00
-10 V -27648 0x9400
-10.5V -29030 8E9A Underloading
+10.5V 29376 0x72C0 Overloading
10 V 27648 0x6C00
D = 27648 x (U – 2) / 8
2 - 10 V 6V 13824 0x3600 Nominal range
U = D x 8 / 27648 + 2
2V 0 0x0000
1.8V -691 0XFD4D Underloading
5.25V 29376 0x72C0 Overloading
5V 27648 0x6C00
D = 27648 x (U – 1) / 4
1-5V 3V 13824 0x3600 Nominal range
U = (D x 4 / 27648) + 1
1V 0 0x0000
0.9 V -691 0XFD4D Underloading

5.27.7 Measurement Range EP-3124

Measurement Current (I) / Decimal

Hexadecimal Range Conversion
Range Voltage (U) (D)
5.25 V 29030 0x7166 Overloading
5V 27648 0x6C00 D = 27648 x U/5
0–5V
2.5 V 13824 0x3600 Nominal range I = D x 5 / 27648
0V 0 0x0000
5.25 V 29376 0x72C0 Overloading
5V 27648 0x6C00
2.5 V 13824 0x3600 D = 27648 x (U – 1) / 4
±5 V 0V 0 0x0000 Nominal range U = (D x 4 / 27648) +
-2.5 V -13824 0xCA00 1
-5 V -27648 0x9400
-5.25 V -43200 0x5740 Underloading
The following applies for all ranges:
input value > overload range = 0x7FFF
input value < underload range = 0x8000

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 360

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.28 Analog Input Module EP-3368

Figure 216: Figure 217: Connection Diagram

Analog Input EP-3368
Module EP-3368

The analog input module EP-3368 can detect up to 8 analog sensors with
0-20 mA or 4-20 mA. The resolution is 16 bits per channel. Sensors can be
connected to each connector in a 2-wire, 3-wire or 3-wire connection + FE
(IDC). The measurement range is defined using parameterization. A
status LED is assigned to each channel. The module electronics supply
the connected sensors with power from the input current path (IIN).

The inputs are protected against voltage surges and overcurrent.

Voltages that exceed ±30 V may cause the destruction of the module. The
inputs are protected against overcurrent by a self-resetting fuse.

Note: The high density plugs EP-8360 for EP-3368 needs to be ordered separately, as the
EP-3368 is not shipped with the HD plug unit.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 361

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.28.1 LED Indicators EP-3368

Figure 218: EP-3368 LEDs

LED EP-3368
Green: Communication over the system bus
Module Status
Red: Module System Fault or Diagnostic Fault
1.1 Red: channel error

2.1 Red: channel error

3.1 Red: channel error

4.1 Red: channel error

5.1 Red: channel error

6.1 Red: channel error

7.1 Red: channel error

8.1 Red: channel error

For error messages refer to Section 14: LED Indicators and Troubleshooting.

Figure 219: Block Diagram EP-3368

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 362

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.28.2 Specifications EP-3368

Specifications Description
System data
Data Process, parameter and diagnostic data depend on the
network adapter used (refer to Section, Order and
Arrangement of Modules).
Interface RSTi-EP I/O communication bus
System bus transfer rate 48 Mbps
Inputs
Number 8
Input values Current input (0 - 20 mA, 4 - 20 mA)
Resolution 16 bits
max. 0.1 % FSR at 25 °C (77 °F)
Accuracy
±50 ppm/K max. Temperature coefficient
max. 125 mA per channel; channel 0 - 3 and 4 - 7
Sensor supply
respectively are fused in combination
Sensor connection 2-wire, 3-wire, 3-wire + FE
Conversion time 1ms
Internal resistance approx. 45 Ω
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Short-circuit-proof Yes
Response time of the protective circuit < 0.1 s with short-circuit to +24 V
Reset time Temperature-dependent: < 30 s at 20°C (-4 °F)
Module diagnosis Yes
Individual channel diagnosis No
Supply
Supply voltage 20.4V – 28.8V
Current consumption from system current 8 mA
path ISYS,
Current consumption from input current path 20 mA + load
IIN
Connection data
Type of connection Insulation Displacement Connection (IDC)
Line connection cross-section Single-wired, Fine-wired 0.14 - 0.35 mm2 (26 – 22 gauge)
General data
Weight 90 g (3.17 oz)
For additional general data, refer to Section 1.71.7 General Technical Data for I/O Modules.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 363

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.28.3 Modifiable Parameters for EP-3368

Channel Description Options Default

disabled (0) /
50 Hz (1) /
Frequency suppression disabled
60 Hz (2) /
Average over 16 values (3)
0 to 20 mA (0) /
0-7 Measurement range 4 to 20 mA (1) / disabled
disabled (3)

5.28.4 Diagnostic Data EP-3368

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

0 Module error
1 Internal error
2 External error
3 Channel error 0
Error indicator 0
4 Error
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Parameter error
0
1
Module Type 0x05
2
3
Module type 1
4 Reserved 0
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
Error byte 2 2 0-7 Reserved 0
0-2 Reserved 0
Internal diagnostic FIFO
3 0
full
Error byte 3 3 4 Power supply fault 0
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
0-6 Channel type 0x74
Channel type 4
7 Reserved 0
Diagnostic bits Number of diagnostic bit
5 0
per channel per channel

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 364

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

Number of Number of similar
6 8
channels channels per module
Channel error 7-10 0-31 Reserved 0
Channel 0 error
11
to
to 0–7 Reserved 0
Channel 31
42
error
Time stamp 43-46 Time stamp [μs] (32-bit)

5.28.5 Process Data† Inputs EP-3368

Byte Format Description Remarks

IB0
Word AI0
IB1
IB2
Word AI1
IB3
IB4
Word AI2
IB5
IB6
Word AI3
IB7
IB8
Word AI4
IB9
IB10
Word AI5
IB11
IB12
Word AI6
IB13
IB14
Word AI7
IB15
†
Internal process data mapping with data format Standard. Depending on the fieldbus
specification and the data format of the communicating fieldbus components the bytes
and/or words can be reversed during data transfer.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 365

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.28.6 Measurement Range EP-3368

Measurement Current (I) / Decimal Hexadecimal Range Conversion

range Voltage (U) (D)
0 – 20 mA 21.67 mA 29957 0x7505 Overloading D = 27648 x I / 20
20 mA 27648 0x6C00 Nominal range I = D x 20 / 27648
10 mA 13824 0x3600
0 mA 0 0x0000
4 – 20 mA 21.67 mA 29957 0x7505 Overloading D = 27648 x (I – 4) / 16
20 mA 27648 0x6C00 Nominal range I=( D x 16 / 27648 )+ 4
12 mA 13824 0x3600
4 mA 0 0x0000
3.6 mA -691 0XFD4D Underloading
The following applies for all ranges:
input value > overload range = 0x7FFF
input value < underload range = 0x8000

5.29 Analog Input Module EP-3468

Figure 220:
Analog Input Figure 221: Connection Diagram
Module EP-3468 EP-3468

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 366

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

The analog input module EP-3468 can detect up to 8 analog sensors with
0 20 mA or 4-20 mA. The resolution is 16 bits per channel. Sensors can be
connected to each connector in a 2-wire, 3-wire or 3-wire connection + FE
(IDC). The measurement range is defined using parameterization. A
status LED is assigned to each channel. The module electronics supply
the connected sensors with power from the input current path (IIN).

The inputs are protected against voltage surges and overcurrent.

Voltages that exceed ±30 V may cause the destruction of the module. The
inputs are protected against overcurrent by a self-resetting fuse.

The module provides individual channel diagnosis with channel related

error messages.

Note: The high density plugs EP-8360 for EP-3468 needs to be ordered separately, as the
EP-3468 is not shipped with the HD plug unit.

5.29.1 LED Indicators EP-3468

Figure 222: EP-3468 LEDs

LED EP-3468
Green: Communication over the system bus
Module Status
Red: Module System Fault or Diagnostic Fault
1.1 Red: channel error

2.1 Red: channel error

3.1 Red: channel error

4.1 Red: channel error

5.1 Red: channel error

6.1 Red: channel error

7.1 Red: channel error

8.1 Red: channel error

For error messages refer to Section 14: LED Indicators and Troubleshooting.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 367

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Figure 223: Block Diagram EP-3468

5.29.2 Specifications EP-3468

Specification Description
System data
Data Process, parameter and diagnostic data depend on the network
adapter used (refer to Section, Order and Arrangement of
Modules).
Interface RSTi-EP I/O communication bus
System bus transfer rate 48 Mbps
Inputs
Number 8
Input values Current input (0 - 20 mA, 4 - 20 mA)
Resolution 16 bits
max. 0.1 % FSR at 25 °C (77 °F)
Accuracy
±50 ppm/K max. Temperature coefficient
max. 125 mA per channel; channel 0 - 3 and 4 - 7 respectively are
Sensor supply
fused in combination
Sensor connection 2-wire, 3-wire, 3-wire + FE
Conversion time 1ms
Internal resistance approx. 45 Ω
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Short-circuit-proof Yes
Response time of the protective circuit < 0.1 s with short-circuit to +24 V
Reset time Temperature-dependent: < 30 s at 20°C (-4 °F)
Module diagnosis Yes
Individual channel diagnosis No
Supply
Supply voltage 20.4V – 28.8V
Current consumption from system current path 8 mA
ISYS,
Current consumption from input current path IIN 20 mA + load
Connection data
Type of connection Insulation Displacement Connection (IDC)
Line connection cross-section Single-wired, Fine-wired 0.14 - 0.35 mm2 (26 – 22 gauge)
General data
Weight 90 g (3.17 oz)
For additional general data, refer to Section 1.71.7 General Technical Data for I/O Modules.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 368

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.29.3 Modifiable Parameters for EP-3468

Channel Description Options Default

disabled (0) /
50 Hz (1) /
Frequency suppression disabled
60 Hz (2) /
Average over 16 values (3)
0-7 Channel diagnostics disabled (0) / enabled (1) disabled
0-7 Diag short circuit 24 V disabled (0) / enabled (1) disabled
0 to 20 mA (0) /
0-7 Measurement range 4 to 20 mA (1) / disabled
disabled (3)

5.29.4 Process Data† Inputs EP-3468

Byte Format Description Remarks

IB0
Word AI0
IB1
IB2
Word AI1
IB3
IB4
Word AI2
IB5
IB6
Word AI3
IB7
IB8
Word AI4
IB9
IB10
Word AI5
IB11
IB12
Word AI6
IB13
IB14
Word AI7
IB15
†
Internal process data mapping with data format Standard. Depending on the
fieldbus specification and the data format of the communicating fieldbus
components the bytes and/or words can be reversed during data transfer.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 369

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.29.5 Diagnostic Data EP-3468

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

0 Module error
1 Internal error
2 External error
3 Channel error 0
Error indicator 0
4 Error
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Parameter error
0
1
Module Type 0x05
2
3
Module type 1 Channel information
4 1
available
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
Error byte 2 2 0-7 Reserved 0
0-2 Reserved 0
3 Internal diagnostic FIFO full
4 Power supply fault
Error byte 3 3
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
0-6 Channel type 0x74
Channel type 4
7 Reserved 0
Diagnostic bits Number of diagnostic bit
5 8
per channel per channel
Number of Number of similar channels
6 8
channels per module
0 Error at channel 0 0
Error at channel 1 0
Error at channel 2 0
Error at channel 3 0
Channel error 7 Error at channel 4 0
Error at channel 5 0
Error at channel 6 0
Error at channel 7 0
Reserved 0
Channel 0 error 0 0 Parameter Error 0

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 370

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

to 1 Overload 0
Channel 7 error 2 Reserved 0
3 Fuse blown 0
4 Line break 0
5 Reserved 0
6 Lower limit exceeded 0
7 Upper limit exceeded 0
Channel 8 error
to 19 -
0-7 Reserved 0
Channel 31 42
error
Time stamp 43-46 Time stamp [μs] (32-bit)

5.29.6 Measurement Range EP-3468

Measurement Current (I) /

Decimal (D) Hexadecimal Range Conversion
range Voltage (U)
21.67 mA 29957 0x7505 Overloading
20 mA 27648 0x6C00 D = 27648 x I / 20
0 – 20 mA
10 mA 13824 0x3600 Nominal range I = D x 20 / 27648
0 mA 0 0x0000
21.67 mA 29957 0x7505 Overloading
20 mA 27648 0x6C00
D = 27648 x (I – 4) / 16
4 – 20 mA 12 mA 13824 0x3600 Nominal range
I=( D x 16 / 27648 )+ 4
4 mA 0 0x0000
3.6 mA -691 0XFD4D Underloading
The following applies for all ranges:
input value > overload range = 0x7FFF
input value < underload range = 0x8000

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 371

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.30 Analog Output Module EP-4164

Figure 224: Figure 225: Connection Diagram

Analog Output EP-4164
Module EP-4164

The analog output module EP-4164 can control up to four analog

actuators with ±10V, ±5V, 0-10V, 0-5V, 2-10V, 1-5 V, 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA.
The resolution is 16 bits per channel. An output can be connected to each
connector, the internal switching is carried out automatically. The output
range is defined using parameterization. A status LED is assigned to each
channel. The outputs are supplied with power from the output current
path (IOUT).

CAUTION
The outputs as well as the sense-lines of the AO modules must not be used as power outputs.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 372

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.30.1 LED Indicators EP-4164

Figure 226: EP-4164 LEDs

LED EP-4164
Module Green: Communication over the system bus
Status Red: Module System Fault or Diagnostic Fault
1.1 Red: Channel 0 at voltage output: overload
short-circuit, at current output: shunt resistance
too high or line break detected

2.1 Red: Channel 1 at voltage output: overload

short-circuit, at current output: shunt resistance
too high or line break detected

3.1 Red: Channel 2 at voltage output: overload

short-circuit, at current output: shunt resistance
too high or line break detected

4.1 Red: Channel 3 at voltage output: overload

short-circuit, at current output: shunt resistance
too high or line break detected

For error messages refer to Section 14: LED Indicators and Troubleshooting.

Figure 227: Block Diagram EP-4164

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 373

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.30.2 Specifications EP-4164

Specifications Description
System data
Process, parameter and diagnostic data depend on the
Data network adapter used (refer to Section, Order and
Arrangement of Modules).
Interface RSTi-EP I/O communication bus
System bus transfer rate 48 Mbps
Outputs
Number 4
1. Voltage (0 – 5 V, ±5 V, 0 – 10 V, ±10 V, 1 – 5 V, 2 – 10 V)
Output levels
2. Current (0 – 20 mA, 4 – 20 mA)
Response time 1ms for 4 channels
Resolution 16 bits
Accuracy 0.1 % FSR max., 0.05 % FSR typ.
20 ppm voltage /
Temperature coefficient
31 ppm current measurement / K
Max. error between Tmin and Tmax ±220 ppm FSR
Monotony Yes
Crosstalk between the channels ±0.001 % FSR max.
Repeat accuracy < ±1 mV eff.
Output ripple max. 0.001 %
≥ 1 kΩ (at > 50°C (122 °F) max ambient temperature, total
Voltage load resistance
sensor current of 10 mA per channel but 25 mA per module)
Current load resistance ≤ 600 Ω
2-wire (current and voltage; automatic detection),
Actuator connection
4-wire (voltage)
Short-circuit-proof Yes
Module diagnosis Yes
Individual channel diagnosis No
Substitute value Yes
Supply
Supply voltage 20.4V – 28.8V
Current consumption from system current
8 mA
path ISYS,
Current consumption from output current
85 mA
path IOUT
General data
Weight 83 g (2.93 oz)
For additional general data, refer to Section 1.71.7 General Technical Data for I/O Modules.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 374

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.30.3 Modifiable Parameters for EP-4164

Channel Description Options Default

0 to 20 mA (0) /
4 to 20 mA (1) /
0 V to 10 V (2) /
-10 to 10 V (3) /
0-3 Output range 0 to 5 V (4) / disabled
-5 to 5 V (5) /
1 to 5 V (6) /
2 to 10 V (7) /
disabled (8)
0-3 Substitute value Depending on the channels data format (S5/S7 0

5.30.4 Diagnostic Data EP-4164

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

0 Module error
1 Internal error
2 External error
3 Channel error 0
Error indicator 0
4 Error
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Parameter error
0
1
Module Type 0x05
2
3
Module type 1
4 Reserved 0
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
Error byte 2 2 0-7 Reserved 0
0-2 Reserved 0
3 Internal diagnostic FIFO full
4 Power supply fault
Error byte 3 3
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
0-6 Channel type 0x73
Channel type 4
7 Reserved 0

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 375

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

Diagnostic bits per
5 Number of diagnostic bit per channel 0
channel
Number of channels 6 Number of similar channels per module 4
Channel error 7-10 0-31 Reserved 0
Channel 0 error 11
to to 0–7 Reserved 0
Channel 31 error 42
Time stamp 43-46 Time stamp [μs] (32-bit)

5.30.5 Process Data† Outputs EP-4164

Byte Format Description Remarks

QB0
Word AO0
QB1
QB2
Word AO1
QB3
QB4
Word AO2
QB5
QB6
Word AO3
QB7
†
Internal process data mapping with data format “Standard”. Depending on the fieldbus specification and
the data format of the communicating fieldbus components the bytes and/or words can be reversed during
data transfer.

5.30.6 Value Range† EP-4164

Measurement Current (I) /

Decimal (D) Hexadecimal Range Conversion
range Voltage (U)
21.67 mA 29957 0x7505 Overloading
20 mA 27648 0x6C00 D = 27648 x I / 20
0 – 20 mA
10 mA 13824 0x3600 Nominal range I = D x 20 / 27648
0 mA 0 0x0000
21.67 mA 29957 0x7505 Overloading
20 mA 27648 0x6C00
D = 27648 x (I – 4) / 16
4 – 20 mA 12 mA 13824 0x3600 Nominal range
I=( D x 16 / 27648 )+ 4
4 mA 0 0x0000
3.6 mA -691 0XFD4D Underloading
10.5V 29030 0x7166 Overloading
10 V 27648 0x6C00 D = 27648 x U/10
0 – 10 V
5V 13824 0x3600 Nominal range I = D x 10 / 27648
0V 0 0x0000
+10.5V 29030 0x7166 Overloading D = 27648 x U / 10
±10 V
10 V 27648 0x6C00 Nominal range U = D x 10 / 27648

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 376

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Measurement Current (I) /

Decimal (D) Hexadecimal Range Conversion
range Voltage (U)
5V 13824 0x3600
0V 0 0x0000
-5 V -13824 0xCA00
-10 V -27648 0x9400
-10.5V -29030 8E9A Underloading
+10.5V 29376 0x72C0 Overloading
10 V 27648 0x6C00
D = 27648 x (U – 2) / 8
2 - 10 V 6V 13824 0x3600 Nominal range
U = D x 8 / 27648 + 2
2V 0 0x0000
1.8V -691 0XFD4D Underloading
5.25V 29376 0x72C0 Overloading
5V 27648 0x6C00
D = 27648 x (U – 1) / 4
1-5V 3V 13824 0x3600 Nominal range
U = (D x 4 / 27648) + 1
1V 0 0x0000
0.9 V -691 0XFD4D Underloading
5.25 V 29030 0x7166 Overloading
5V 27648 0x6C00 D = 27648 x U/5
0–5V
2.5 V 13824 0x3600 Nominal range I = D x 5 / 27648
0V 0 0x0000
5.25 V 29376 0x72C0 Overloading
5V 27648 0x6C00
2.5 V 13824 0x3600
D = 27648 x (U – 1) / 4
±5 V 0V 0 0x0000 Nominal range
U = (D x 4 / 27648) + 1
-2.5 V -13824 0xCA00
-5 V -27648 0x9400
-5.25 V -43200 0x5740 Underloading
†
If the process value is beyond the valid value range, the corresponding channel releases 0 V and 0 mA
respectively
The following applies for all ranges:
input value > overload range = 0x7FFF
input value < underload range = 0x8000

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 377

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.31 Analog Output Module EP-4264

Figure 228: Figure 229: Connection Diagram

Analog Output EP-4264
Module EP-4264

The analog output module EP-4264 can control up to four analog

actuators with ±10 V, ±5 V, 0-10 V, 0-5 V, 2-10 V, 1-5 V, 0-20 mA or 4-20
mA. The resolution is 16 bits per channel. An output can be connected to
each connector, the internal switching is carried out automatically. The
output range is defined using parameterization. A status LED is assigned
to each channel. The outputs are supplied with power from the output
current path (IOUT).

The module provides individual channel diagnosis with channel related

error messages.

CAUTION
The outputs as well as the sense-lines of the AO modules must not be used as power outputs.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 378

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.31.1 LED Indicators EP-4264

Figure 230: EP-4264 LEDs

LED ED-4264
Green: Communication over the system bus
Module Status
Red: Module System Fault or Diagnostic Fault
1.1 Red: Channel 0 at voltage output: overload short-
circuit, at current output: shunt resistance too
high or line break detected

2.1 Red: Channel 1 at voltage output: overload short-

circuit, at current output: shunt resistance too
high or line break detected

3.1 Red: Channel 2 at voltage output: overload short-

circuit, at current output: shunt resistance too
high or line break detected

4.1 Red: Channel 3 at voltage output: overload short-

circuit, at current output: shunt resistance too
high or line break detected

For error messages refer to Section 14: LED Indicators and Troubleshooting.

Figure 231: Block Diagram EP-4264

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 379

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.31.2 Specifications EP-4264

Specifications Description
System data
Process, parameter and diagnostic data depend on the
Data network adapter used (refer to Section, Order and
Arrangement of Modules).
Interface RSTi-EP I/O communication bus
System bus transfer rate 48 Mbps
Outputs
Number 4
1. Voltage (0 – 5 V, ±5 V, 0 – 10 V, ±10 V, 1 – 5 V, 2 – 10 V)
Output levels
2. Current (0 – 20 mA, 4 – 20 mA)
Response time 1ms for 4 channels
Resolution 16 bits
Accuracy 0.1 % FSR max., 0.05 % FSR typ.
20 ppm voltage /
Temperature coefficient
31 ppm current measurement / K
Max. error between Tmin and Tmax ±220 ppm FSR
Monotony Yes
Crosstalk between the channels ±0.001 % FSR max.
Repeat accuracy < ±1 mV eff.
Output ripple max. 0.001 %
≥ 1 kΩ (at > 50°C (122 °F) max ambient temperature, total
Voltage load resistance
sensor current of 10 mA per channel but 25 mA per module)
Current load resistance ≤ 600 Ω
2-wire (current and voltage; automatic detection),
Actuator connection
4-wire (voltage)
Short-circuit-proof Yes
Module diagnosis Yes
Individual channel diagnosis Yes
Substitute value Yes
Supply
Supply voltage 20.4V – 28.8V
Current consumption from system current
8 mA
path ISYS,
Current consumption from output current
85 mA
path IOUT
General data
Weight 98 g (3.47 oz)
For additional general data, refer to Section 1.71.7 General Technical Data for I/O Modules.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 380

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.31.3 Modifiable Parameters for EP-4264

Channel Description Options Default

0 to 20 mA (0) /
4 to 20 mA (1) /
0 V to 10 V (2) /
-10 to 10 V (3) /
0-3 Output range 0 to 5 V (4) / disabled
-5 to 5 V (5) /
1 to 5 V (6) /
2 to 10 V (7) /
disabled (8)
0-3 Substitute value Depending on the channels data format (S5/S7) 0
0-3 Channel diagnosis disabled (0) / enabled (1) disabled

5.31.4 Diagnostic Data EP-4264

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

0 Module error
1 Internal error
2 External error
3 Channel error 0
Error indicator 0
4 Error
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Parameter error
0
1
Module Type 0x05
2
Module type 1
3
4 Channel information available 1
5-7 Reserved 0
Error byte 2 2 0-7 Reserved 0
0-2 Reserved 0
3 Internal diagnostic FIFO full
4 Power supply fault
Error byte 3 3
5 Reserved 0
6 Process alarm lost
7 Reserved 0
0-6 Channel type 0x73
Channel type 4
7 Reserved 0
Diagnostic bits
5 Number of diagnostic bit per channel 8
per channel

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 381

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

Number of
6 Number of similar channels per module 4
channels
0 Error at channel 0
1 Error at channel 1
7 2 Error at channel 2
Channel error
3 Error at channel 3
4-7 Reserved 0
8-10 0-31 Reserved 0
0 Parameter Error
1 Overtemperature
2 Overload
Error Channel 0 11
3 Error
4 Line break
5-7 Reserved 0
0 Parameter Error
1 Overtemperature
2 Overload
Error channel 1 12
3 Error
4 Line break
5-7 Reserved 0
0 Parameter Error
1 Overtemperature
2 Overload
Error channel 2 13
3 Error
4 Line break
5-7 Reserved 0
0 Parameter Error
1 Overtemperature
2 Overload
Error channel 3 14
3 Error
4 Line break
5-7 Reserved 0
Channel 4 error
to Channel 31 15-42 0-7 Reserved 0
error
Time stamp 43-46 Time stamp [μs] (32-bit)

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 382

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.31.5 Process Data† Outputs EP-4264

Byte Format Description Remarks

QB0
Word AO0
QB1
QB2
Word AO1
QB3
QB4
Word AO2
QB5
QB6
Word AO3
QB7
†
Internal process data mapping with data format Standard. Depending on the fieldbus specification and the
data format of the communicating fieldbus components the bytes and/or words can be reversed during
data transfer

5.31.6 Value Range† EP-4264

Measurement Current (I) /

Decimal (D) Hexadecimal Range Conversion
range Voltage (U)
21.67 mA 29957 0x7505 Overloading
20 mA 27648 0x6C00 D = 27648 x I / 20
0 – 20 mA
10 mA 13824 0x3600 Nominal range I = D x 20 / 27648
0 mA 0 0x0000
21.67 mA 29957 0x7505 Overloading
20 mA 27648 0x6C00
D = 27648 x (I – 4) / 16
4 – 20 mA 12 mA 13824 0x3600 Nominal range
I=( D x 16 / 27648 )+ 4
4 mA 0 0x0000
3.6 mA -691 0XFD4D Underloading
10.5V 29030 0x7166 Overloading
10 V 27648 0x6C00 D = 27648 x U/10
0 – 10 V
5V 13824 0x3600 Nominal range I = D x 10 / 27648
0V 0 0x0000
+10.5V 29030 0x7166 Overloading
10 V 27648 0x6C00
5V 13824 0x3600
D = 27648 x U / 10
±10 V 0V 0 0x0000 Nominal range
U = D x 10 / 27648
-5 V -13824 0xCA00
-10 V -27648 0x9400
-10.5V -29030 8E9A Underloading
+10.5V 29376 0x72C0 Overloading
10 V 27648 0x6C00 D = 27648 x (U – 2) / 8
2 - 10 V
6V 13824 0x3600 Nominal range U = D x 8 / 27648 + 2
2V 0 0x0000

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 383

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Measurement Current (I) /

Decimal (D) Hexadecimal Range Conversion
range Voltage (U)
1.8V -691 0XFD4D Underloading
5.25V 29376 0x72C0 Overloading
5V 27648 0x6C00
D = 27648 x (U – 1) / 4
1-5V 3V 13824 0x3600 Nominal range
U = (D x 4 / 27648) + 1
1V 0 0x0000
0.9 V -691 0XFD4D Underloading
5.25 V 29030 0x7166 Overloading
5V 27648 0x6C00 D = 27648 x U/5
0–5V
2.5 V 13824 0x3600 Nominal range I = D x 5 / 27648
0V 0 0x0000
5.25 V 29376 0x72C0 Overloading
5V 27648 0x6C00
2.5 V 13824 0x3600
D = 27648 x (U – 1) / 4
±5 V 0V 0 0x0000 Nominal range
U = (D x 4 / 27648) + 1
-2.5 V -13824 0xCA00
-5 V -27648 0x9400
-5.25 V -43200 0x5740 Underloading
† If the process value is beyond the valid value range, the corresponding channel releases 0 V and 0 mA
respectively
The following applies for all ranges:
value > overload range = output deactivated
value < underload range = output deactivated

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 384

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.32 Analog Input Module EP-3704

Figure 232: Figure 233: Connection Diagram

Analog Input EP-3704
Module EP 3704

The analog input module EP-3704 can detect up to 4 analog resistance

thermometers. The resolution is 16 bits per channel. A sensor can be
connected to each connector in a 2-wire, 3-wire or 4-wire connection.
Mixed operation using different sensors as well as different connection
methods is possible. Sensor type and temperature range are set using
parameterization. A status LED is assigned to each channel.

The inputs are protected against voltage surges and overcurrent.

Voltages that exceed ±30 V may cause the destruction of the module.

The module provides individual channel diagnosis with channel related

error messages.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 385

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.32.1 LED Indicators EP-3704

Figure 234: EP-3704 LEDs

LED EP-3704

Green: Communication over the system bus

Module Status
Red: Module System Fault or Diagnostic Fault
1.1 Red: channel error

2.1 Red: channel error

3.1 Red: channel error

4.1 Red: channel error

For error messages refer to Section 14: LED Indicators and Troubleshooting.

Figure 235: Block Diagram EP-3704

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 386

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.32.2 Specifications EP-3704

Specifications Description
System data
Process, parameter and diagnostic data depend on
Data the network adapter used (refer to Section, Order
and Arrangement of Modules).
Interface RSTi-EP I/O communication bus
System bus transfer rate 48 Mbps
Inputs
Number 4
Pt100, Pt200, Pt500, Pt1000, Ni100, Ni120, Ni 200,
Sensor types Ni500, Ni1000, Cu10, 40 Ω, 80 Ω, 150 Ω, 300 Ω, 500 Ω,
1 kΩ, 2 kΩ, 4 kΩ
Resolution 16 bits
max. 0.2 % FSR /
Accuracy 0.3 % FSR for Ni sensors /
0.6 % FSR for Cu10
Sensor connection 2-wire, 3-wire, 4-wire
depending on the sensor type 0.75 mA (Pt100, Ni100,
Ni120, Cu10, 40 Ω, 80 Ω, 150 Ω, 300 Ω) or 0.25 mA
Sensor current
(Pt200, Pt500, Pt1000, Ni200, Ni500, Ni1000, 500 Ω,
1 kΩ, 2 kΩ, 4 kΩ)
2.5 Ω / 40 Ω, 5 Ω / 80 Ω, 10 Ω / 150 Ω and Cu10,
Max. wire resistance / measurement range
25 Ω in all other measuring ranges
Temperature coefficient ±50 ppm/K max.
Temperature range -200 to +850°C (-328 to 1562 °F)
Conversion time 36 to 240ms, adjustable
Channel to channel: max. ±2 V
Common mode input voltage range
Channel to voltage supply: max. ±50 V
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Module diagnosis Yes
Individual channel diagnosis Yes
Supply
Supply voltage 20.4V – 28.8V
Current consumption from system current path
8 mA
ISYS,
Current consumption from input current path IIN <20 mA
General data
Weight 91 g (3.21 oz)
For additional general data, refer to Section 1.71.7 General Technical Data for I/O Modules.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 387

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.32.3 Modifiable Parameters for EP-3704

Channel Description Options Default

Degree Celsius (0) /
Temperature unit Degree Fahrenheit (1) / Degree Celsius
Kelvin (2)
PT100 -200 ... 850 Degree Celsius (0) /
PT200 -200 ... 850 Degree Celsius (1) /
PT500 -200 ... 850 Degree Celsius (2) /
PT1000 -200 ... 850 Degree Celsius (3) /
NI100 -60 ... 250 Degree Celsius (4) /
NI120 -80 ... 260 Degree Celsius (5) /
NI200 -60 ... 250 Degree Celsius (6) /
NI500 -60 ... 250 Degree Celsius (7) /
NI1000 -60 ... 250 Degree (8) /
0-3 Measurement range Cu10 -100 ... 260 Degree Celsius (9) / disabled
Resistance 40 Ω (10) /
Resistance 80 Ω (11) /
Resistance 150 Ω (12) /
Resistance 300 Ω (13) /
Resistance 500 Ω (14) /
Resistance 1 kΩ (15) /
Resistance 2 kΩ (16) /
Resistance 4 kΩ (17) /
disabled (18)
2-wire (0) /
0-3 Connection type 3-wire (1) / 2-wire
4-wire (2)
240ms (0) /
130ms (1) /
80ms (2) /
0-3 Conversion time 80ms
55ms (3) /
43ms (4) /
36ms (5)
0-3 Channel diagnostics disabled (0) / enabled (1) disabled
0-3 Limit value monitoring disabled (0) / enabled (1) disabled
0-3 High limit value -32,768 ... 32,767 0
0-3 Low limit value -32,768 ... 32,767 0

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 388

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.32.4 Diagnostic Data EP-3704

Name Bytes Bit Description Default
0 Module error
1 Internal error
2 External error
3 Channel error
Error indicator 0
4 Error
5 Power supply fault
6 Reserved 0
7 Parameter error
0
1
Module Type 0x05
2
3
Module type 1
4 Channel information available 1
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
Error byte 2 2 0-7 Reserved 0
0-2 Reserved 0
3 Internal diagnostic FIFO full
4 Power supply fault
Error byte 3 3
5 Reserved 0
6 Process alarm lost
7 Reserved 0
0-6 Channel type 0x71
Channel type 4
7 Reserved 0
Diagnostic bits per channel 5 Number of diagnostic bits per channel 8
Number of channels 6 Number of similar channels per module 4
0 Error at channel 0
1 Error at channel 1
Channel error 7 2 Error at channel 2
3 Error at channel 3
4-7 Reserved 0
Channel error 8 8-15 Reserved 0
Channel error 9 16-23 Reserved 0
Channel error 10 24-31 Reserved 0
0 Parameter Error
1 Reserved 0
2 Reserved 0
3 Reserved 0
Channel 0 error 11
4 Line break
5 Process alarm lost
6 Lower limit exceeded
7 Upper limit exceeded
0 Parameter Error
Channel 1 error 12
1 Reserved 0

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 389

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

2 Reserved 0
3 Reserved 0
4 Line break
5 Process alarm lost
6 Lower limit exceeded
7 Upper limit exceeded
0 Parameter Error
1 Reserved 0
2 Reserved 0
3 Reserved 0
Channel 2 error 13
4 Line break
5 Process alarm lost
6 Lower limit exceeded
7 Upper limit exceeded
0 Parameter Error
1 Reserved 0
2 Reserved 0
3 Reserved 0
Channel 3 error 14
4 Line break
5 Process alarm lost
6 Lower limit exceeded
7 Upper limit exceeded
Channel 4 error
to 15-42 0-7 Reserved 0
Channel 31 error
Time stamp 43-46 Time stamp [μs] (32-bit)

5.32.5 Process Data† Inputs EP-3704

Byte Format Description Remarks
IB0
Word RTD0
IB1
IB2
Word RTD1
IB3
IB4
Word RTD2
IB5
IB6
Word RTD3
IB7
†
Internal process data mapping with data format “Standard”. Depending on the fieldbus specification and the data format
of the communicating fieldbus components the bytes and/or words can be reversed during data transfer.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 390

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.32.6 Resistance Measurement Range EP-3704

Measurement
Resistance Decimal Hexadecimal Range
range
> 47.04 Ω 32,767 0x7FFF Overloading or line break
47.04 Ω 32511 0x7EFF Overloading
40 Ω
40 Ω 27648 0x6C00 Nominal range
0 0 0x0000
> 94.07 Ω 32,767 0x7FFF Overloading or line break
94.07 Ω 32511 0x7EFF Overloading
80 Ω
80 Ω 27648 0x6C00 Nominal range
0 0 0x0000
> 176.4 Ω 32,767 0x7FFF Overloading or line break
176.4 Ω 32511 0x7FFF Overloading
150 Ω
150 Ω 27648 0x6C00 Nominal range
0 0 0x0000
> 352.77 Ω 32,767 0x7FFF Overloading or line break
352.77 Ω 32511 0x7FFF Overloading
300 Ω
300 Ω 27648 0x6C00 Nominal range
0 0 0x0000
> 587.9 Ω 32,767 0x7FFF Overloading or line break
587.9 Ω 32511 0x7FFF Overloading
500 Ω
500 Ω 27648 0x6C00 Nominal range
0 0 0x0000
> 1.177 kΩ 32,767 0x7FFF Overloading or line break
1.177 kΩ 32511 0x7FFF Overloading
1 kΩ
1.0 kΩ 27648 0x6C00 Nominal range
0 0 0x0000
2.352 kΩ 32,767 0x7FFF Overloading or line break
2.352 kΩ 32511 0x7FFF Overloading
2 kΩ
2.0 kΩ 27648 0x6C00 Nominal range
0 0 0x0000
> 4.703 kΩ 32,767 0x7FFF Overloading or line break
4.703 kΩ 32511 0x7FFF Overloading
4 kΩ
4.0 kΩ 27648 0x6C00 Nominal range
0 0 0x0000

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 391

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.32.7 Temperature Measurement Ranges EP-3704

Value in °C Value in °F Value in °K

Measurement range Range
0.1° resolution 0.1°/digit 0.1°K/digit
-200 °C to
-2,000 to 8,500 -3,280 to 15620 732 to 11232
+850 °C
Pt100 -2,040 -3,352 692 Underloading
8540 15692 11272 Overloading
32,767 32,767 32,767 Line break
-200 °C to
-2,000 to 8,500 -3,280 to 15620 732 to 11232
+850 °C
Pt200 -2,040 -3,352 692 Underloading
8540 15692 11272 Overloading
32,767 32,767 32,767 Line break
-200 °C to
-2,000 to 8,500 -3,280 to 15620 732 to 11232
+850 °C
Pt500 -2,040 -3,352 692 Underloading
8540 15692 11272 Overloading
32,767 32,767 32,767 Line break
-200 °C to
-2,000 to 8,500 -3,280 to 15620 732 to 11232
+850 °C
Pt1000 -2,040 -3,352 692 Underloading
8540 15692 11272 Overloading
32,767 32,767 32,767 Line break
-60 °C to 250
-600 to +2500 -760 to 4820 2132 to 5232
°C
Ni100 -640 -832 2092 Underloading
2540 4892 5272 Overloading
32,767 32,767 32,767 Line break
-80 °C to 260
-800 to +2600 -1120 to +5000 1932 to 5332
°C
Ni120 -840 -1192 1892 Underloading
2640 5072 5372 Overloading
32,767 32,767 32,767 Line break
-60 °C to 250
-600 to +2500 -760 to 4820 2132 to 5232
°C
Ni200 -640 -832 2092 Underloading
2540 4892 5272 Overloading
32,767 32,767 32,767 Line break
-60 °C to 250
-600 to +2500 -760 to 4820 2132 to 5232
°C
Ni500
-640 -832 2092 Underloading
2540 4892 5272 Overloading

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 392

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Value in °C Value in °F Value in °K

Measurement range Range
0.1° resolution 0.1°/digit 0.1°K/digit
32,767 32,767 32,767 Line break
-60 °C to 250
-600 to +2500 -760 to 4820 2132 to 5232
°C
Ni1000 -640 -832 2092 Underloading
2540 4892 5272 Overloading
32,767 32,767 32,767 Line break
-100 °C to 260
-1,000 to +2600 -1480 to 5000 1732 to 5332
°C
Cu10 -1040 -1552 1692 Underloading
2640 5072 5372 Overloading
32,767 32,767 32,767 Line break

5.32.8 Process Alarm EP-3704

Name Number of bytes Function

Bit 0: Upper limit exceeded channel 0
Bit 1: Upper limit exceeded channel 1
High alarm 1 Bit 2: Upper limit exceeded channel 2
Bit 3: Upper limit exceeded channel 3
Bit 4 – 7: Reserved
Bit 0: Lower limit exceeded channel 0
Bit 1: Lower limit exceeded channel 1
Low alarm 1 Bit 2: Lower limit exceeded channel 2
Bit 3: Lower limit exceeded channel 3
Bit 4 – 7: Reserved
Timestamp 2 The two least significant bytes of the internal 32-bit timer

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 393

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.33 Analog Input Module EP-3804

Figure 236:
Analog Input Figure 237: Connection Diagram
Module EP-3804 EP-3804

The analog input module EP-3804 can detect up to 4 analog

thermocouple sensors or voltages between ±15 mV and ±2V. The
resolution is 16 bits per channel. Sensor type and temperature range are
set using parameterization. Mixed operation using different sensors is
possible. For each channel, an internal or external cold-junction
compensation (CJC) can be parameterized. A status LED is assigned to
each channel.

The inputs are protected against voltage surges and overcurrent.

Voltages that exceed ±30 V may cause the destruction of the module.

The module provides individual channel diagnosis with channel related

error messages.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 394

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.33.1 LED Indicators EP-3804

Figure 238: EP-3804 LEDs

LED EP-3804
Module Green: Communication over the system bus
Status Red: Module System Fault or Diagnostic Fault
1.1 Red: channel error

2.1 Red: channel error

3.1 Red: channel error

4.1 Red: channel error

For error messages refer to Section 14: LED Indicators and Troubleshooting.

Figure 239: Block Diagram EP-3804

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 395

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.33.2 Specifications EP-3804

Specifications Description
System data
Process, parameter and diagnostic data depend on the network
Data
adapter used (refer to Section, Order and Arrangement of Modules).
Interface RSTi-EP I/O communication bus
System bus transfer rate 48 Mbps
Inputs
Number 4
Sensor types J, K, T, B, N, E, R, S, L, U, C, mV
Resolution 16 bits
Conversion time ≥ 80ms: 10 μV + 0.1 % of voltage measurement range
Accuracy
(without cold-junction measurement error)
Sensor connection 2-wire
Sensor current 0.25 mA for the cold-junction compensation with a Pt1000
Cold junction compensation Internal and external (Pt1000), int. accuracy ≤ 3 K
Temperature coefficient 50 ppm/K max.
Temperature range -200 to +2,315°C (-328 to 4199 °F)
Conversion time 36 to 240ms, adjustable
Internal resistance > 1 MΩ
Reverse polarity protection Yes
Module diagnosis Yes
Individual channel diagnosis Yes
Supply
Supply voltage 20.4V – 28.8V
Current consumption from
8 mA
system current path ISYS,
Current consumption from input
20 mA
current path IIN
General data
Weight 86 g (3.03 oz)
For additional general data, refer to Section 1.71.7 General Technical Data for I/O Modules.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 396

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.33.3 Modifiable Parameters for EP-3804

Channel Description Options Default

Degree Celsius (0) /
Temperature unit Degree Fahrenheit (1) / Degree Celsius
Degree Kelvin (2)
TC Type J (0) /
TC Type K (1) /
TC Type N (2) /
TC Type R (3) /
TC Type S (4) /
TC Type T (5) /
TC Type B (6) /
TC Type C (7) /
TC Type E (8) /
TC Type L (9) /
0-3 Measurement range disabled
TC Type U (10) /
± 15.625 mV (11) /
± 31.25 mV (12) /
± 62.5 mV (13) /
± 125 mV (14) /
± 250 mV (15) /
± 500 mV (16) /
± 1,000 mV (17) /
± 2,000 mV (18) /
disabled (19)
internal (0) /
external Channel 0 (1) /
0-3 Cold junction compensation external Channel 1 (2) / internal
external Channel 2 (3) /
external Channel 3 (4)
240ms (0) /
130ms (1) /
80ms (2) /
0-3 Conversion time 80ms
55ms (3) /
43ms (4) /
36ms (5)
0-3 Channel diagnostics disabled (0) / enabled (1) disabled
0-3 Limit value monitoring disabled (0) / enabled (1) disabled
0-3 High limit value -32,768 ... 32,767 0
0-3 Low limit value -32,768 ... 32,767 0

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 397

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.33.4 Diagnostic Data EP-3804

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

0 Module error
1 Internal error
2 External error
3 Channel error
Error indicator 0
4 Error
5 Power supply fault
6 Reserved 0
7 Parameter error
0
1
Module Type 0x05
2
3
Module type 1 Channel information
4 1
available
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
Error byte 2 2 0-7 Reserved 0
0-2 Reserved 0
3 Internal diagnostic FIFO full
4 Power supply fault
Error byte 3 3
5 Reserved 0
6 Process alarm lost
7 Reserved 0
0-6 Channel type 0x71
Channel type 4
7 Reserved 0
Diagnostic bits per Number of diagnostic bit per
5 8
channel channel
Number of similar channels
Number of channels 6 4
per module
0 Error at channel 0
1 Error at channel 1
Channel error 7 2 Error at channel 2
3 Error at channel 3
4-7 Reserved 0
Channel error 8 8-15 Reserved 0
Channel error 9 16-23 Reserved 0
Channel error 10 24-31 Reserved 0
0 Parameter Error
Channel 0 error 11
1 Reserved 0

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 398

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

2 Reserved 0
3 CJC error
4 Line break
5 Process alarm lost
6 Lower limit exceeded
7 Upper limit exceeded
0 Parameter Error
1 Reserved 0
2 Reserved 0
3 CJC error
Channel 1 error 12
4 Line break
5 Process alarm lost
6 Lower limit exceeded
7 Upper limit exceeded
0 Parameter Error
1 Reserved 0
2 Reserved 0
3 CJC error
Channel 2 error 13
4 Line break
5 Process alarm lost
6 Lower limit exceeded
7 Upper limit exceeded
0 Parameter Error
1 Reserved 0
2 Reserved 0
3 CJC error
Channel 3 error 14
4 Line break
5 Process alarm lost
6 Lower limit exceeded
7 Upper limit exceeded
Channel 4 error
to 15-42 0-7 Reserved 0
Channel 31 error
Time stamp 43-46 Time stamp [μs] (32-bit)

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 399

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.33.5 Process Data† Inputs EP-3804

Byte Format Description Remarks

IB0
Word TC0
IB1
IB2
Word TC1
IB3
IB4
Word TC2
IB5
IB6
Word TC3
IB7
†
Internal process data mapping with data format Standard. Depending on the fieldbus specification and the
data format of the communicating fieldbus components the bytes and/or words can be reversed during data
transfer

5.33.6 Voltage Measurement Ranges EP-3804

Measurement Decimal signal Hexadecimal signal

Voltage
range range range
15.625 mV 32,767 0x7FFF
±15.625 mV -15.625
-32,768 0x8000
mV
31.25 mV 32,767 0x7FFF
±31.25 mV
-31.25 mV -32,768 0x8000
62.5 mV 32,767 0x7FFF
±62.5 mV
-62.5 mV -32,768 0x8000
125 mV 32,767 0x7FFF
±125 mV
-125 mV -32,768 0x8000
250 mV 32,767 0x7FFF
±250 mV
-250 mV -32,768 0x8000
500 mV 32,767 0x7FFF
±500 mV
-500 mV -32,768 0x8000
+1 V 32,767 0x7FFF
±1 V
-1 V -32,768 0x8000
+2 V 32,767 0x7FFF
±2 V
-2 V -32,768 0x8000

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 400

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.33.7 Temperature Measurement Ranges EP-3804

Measurement Value in °C Value in °F Value in °K

Range
Range 0.1° resolution 0.1°/digit 0.1°K/digit
-2,000 to 13,720 -3,280 to 25,016 732 to 16,452 -200 °C to +1,372 °C
-2,040 -3,352 692 Underloading
Type K 13,760 25,088 16,492 Overloading
Line break,
32,767 32,767 32,767
cold compensation error
-2,100 to 12,000 -3,460 to 21,920 632 to 14,732 -210 °C to +1,200 °C
-2,140 -3,532 592 Underloading
Type J 12,040 21,992 14,772 Overloading
Line break,
32,767 32,767 32,767
cold compensation error
1,220 to 32,767
500 to 8,500 (limited range) 3,232 to 20,932 +50 °C to +1,820 °C
3,276.7°F = 1,802.6°C
Type B 460 1,148 3,192 Underloading
18,240 33,152 20,972 Overloading
Line break,
32,767 32,767 32,767
cold compensation error
-2,000 to 13,000 -3,280 to 23,720 4,732 to 15,732 -200 °C to +1,300 °C
-2,040 -3,352 692 Underloading
Type N 13,040 23,792 15,772 Overloading
Line break,
32,767 32,767 32,767
cold compensation error
-2,000 to +10,000 -3,280 to 18,320 4,732 to 12,732 -200 °C to 1,000 °C
-2,040 -3,352 692 Underloading
Type E 10,040 18,392 12,772 Overloading
Line break,
32,767 32,767 32,767
cold compensation error
-500 to +17,680 -580 to +32,144 3,232 to 20,412 -50 °C to +1768 °C
-540 -652 2,192 Underloading
Type R 17,720 32,216 20,452 Overloading
Line break,
32,767 32,767 32,767
cold compensation error
-500 to +17,680 -580 to +32,144 3,232 to 20,412 -50 °C to +1768 °C
-540 -652 2,192 Underloading
Type S 17,720 32,216 20,452 Overloading
Line break,
32,767 32,767 32,767
cold compensation error
-2,000 to +4,000 -3,280 to 7,520 732 to 6,732 -200 °C to +400 °C
Type T
-2,040 -3,352 692 Underloading

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 401

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Measurement Value in °C Value in °F Value in °K

Range
Range 0.1° resolution 0.1°/digit 0.1°K/digit
4,040 7,592 6,772 Overloading
Line break,
32,767 32,767 32,767
cold compensation error
-2,000 to +9,000 -3,280 to 16,520 732 to 11,732 -200 °C to +900 °C
-2,040 -3,352 692 Underloading
Type L 9,040 16,592 11,772 Overloading
Line break,
32,767 32,767 32,767
cold compensation error
-2,000 to +6,000 -3,280 to 11,120 732 to 8,732 -200 °C to +600 °C
-2,040 -3,352 692 Underloading
Type U 6,040 11,192 8,772 Overloading
Line break,
32,767 32,767 32,767
cold compensation error
320 to 32,767
(limited range)
0 to 23,150 2,732 to 25,882 0 °C to +2,315 °C
3,276.7°F =
1,802.6°C
Type C
-40 248 2,692 Underloading
23,190 32,767 25,922 Overloading
Line break,
32,767 32,767 32,767
cold compensation error

5.33.8 Process Alarm EP-3804

Number of
Name Function
bytes
Bit 0: Upper limit exceeded channel 0
Bit 1: Upper limit exceeded channel 1
High alarm 1 Bit 2: Upper limit exceeded channel 2
Bit 3: Upper limit exceeded channel 3
Bit 4 – 7: Reserved
Bit 0: Lower limit exceeded channel 0
Bit 1: Lower limit exceeded channel 1
Low alarm 1 Bit 2: Lower limit exceeded channel 2
Bit 3: Lower limit exceeded channel 3
Bit 4 – 7: Reserved
The two least significant bytes of the internal 32-bit
Timestamp 2
timer

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 402

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.34 Power Measurement Module EP-1813

Figure 240: Power Measurement Module EP-1813

The power measurement module EP-1813 can measure and process all
relevant measurands of one or three phase current consumers (up to 500
VAC phase-to-phase voltage):

–– Current (RMS/average/peak)

–– Voltage (RMS/average)

–– Reactive, apparent and active power

–– Power consumption

–– Power factor

–– Frequency

–– Voltage upper and lower alarm

–– Current upper and lower alarm

Currents up to 5 A can be measured directly with the module. Due to the

measuring in the phase conductor the current can be measured in a star
as well as a delta connection without further external components. The
raw measured values are transferred via the connected fieldbus to a
superior PLC or a control system.

The module delivers data to the fieldbus via eight data channels (16 bit
each). The data are updated within one millisecond from the module to
Detailed Description of I/O Modules 403
User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

the adapter. The content of each data channel can be chosen from 55
registers (currents, voltage, power factor, frequency as well as power and
energy measuring). Additionally, limits can be parameterized the
exceeding of which will trigger process alarms.

Up to three neutral conductors (N) can be connected with the first connector. One phase
conductor (at LX) and one 1 A conductor (at LX‘ 1A) or one 5 A conductor (at LX‘ 5A) can
be connected to each of the other three connectors. The three current measurement
connections can be used concurrently all for the same measurement range (1 A or 5 A)
only. The mains connection must be fused with 1 A/5 A respectively.
A status LED is assigned to each channel.

CAUTION
Possible danger to life:

• Always Disconnect the Power Supply to the station before working with the module
and secure the station against being switched on again.

• The touch-safe protection of this module is only provided with the DIN rail earthed
properly.

• Make sure that the DIN rail is connected to PE by earth terminals before
commissioning the module.

CAUTION
The module can be destroyed by overload!

The measurement connections L1', L2' and L3' are internally connected to L1, L2, and L3 via
a shunt. Neutral conductors must not be connected to L1', L2' and L3'!

The module is temporary overload-capable (max. 5 seconds up to the fivefold current).

Make sure that there will be no higher current peaks (e.g. by saturating the transformer)!

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 404

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Figure 241: Connection diagram EP-1813: Delta Connection

(Example Measurement 1 A)

Figure 242: Connection diagram EP-1813: Star Connection (Example

Measurement 1 A)

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 405

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Application with current transformer

CAUTION
Possible danger to life:

In case a current transformer is used for current measuring, the phase potential
will be
on its secondary winding. This results in a hazardous voltage at the transformer.
• Take care for an appropriate protection device (e.g. covering).

• In case further measuring devices shall be placed within the current measuring circuit
the relevant standards must be regarded.

CAUTION
Hazardous Voltage on open circuit path!

• Never use a transformer in no load condition.

• Always connect the transformer with the power measurement module before you
start to operate the transformer.

• Never unlock the connector frame of the module during operation with a transformer.

The measurement range of the module (1 A / 5 A) can be extended by

using a current transformer. The transformer must deliver a current of 1
A / 5 A including internal resistance

and conductor loop. This current must be reflected into the internal
measuring resistance. This is only possible by connecting one end of the
secondary winding with the respective phase and the other end with the
respective current output 1 A / 5 A (see connection diagrams with current

transformer).

Note: If a current transformer is used, the conductors must be fused with 63 mA quick-
acting fuses (see connection examples with current transformer).

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 406

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Figure 243: Connection diagram EP-1813: Delta Connection with

Current Transformer > 5 A (Example)

Figure 244: Connection diagram EP-1813: Star Connection with

measuring current transformer > 5 A (Example)

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 407

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Figure 245: Connection diagram EP-1813: Single phase

measurement with current transformer

Note: If the module is used in an environment of overvoltage category III, transient

overvoltage must be limited to ≤ 2500V

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 408

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.34.1 LED Indicators EP-1813

Figure 246: EP-1813 LEDs

LED EP-1813
Green: Communication over the system bus
Module Status
Red: Module System Fault or Diagnostic Fault (Collective error diagnostics)
1.1 --
1.2 --
1.3 --
1.4 --
2.1 --
Yellow: Voltage >70 V at L1
2.2
Yellow flashing: Running light with 3.2 and 4.2 indicates the phase sequence
2.3 Red: (parameterized) current alarm limit1 exceeded
2.4 Red: (parameterized) voltage alarm limit2 exceeded
3.1
Yellow: Voltage >70 V at L2
3.2
Yellow flashing: Running light with 2.2 and 4.2 indicates the phase sequence
3.3 Red: (parameterized) current alarm limit1 exceeded
3.4 Red: (parameterized) voltage alarm limit2 exceeded
4.1 Red: Line break or range exceeded input 3
Yellow: Voltage >70 V at L3
4.2
Yellow flashing: Running light with 2.2 and 3.2 indicates the phase sequence
4.3 Red: (parameterized) current alarm limit1 exceeded
4.4 Red: (parameterized) voltage alarm limit2 exceeded

1) Max. nominal input current 1 A bzw. 5 A

2) Max. nominal input voltage 300 V

Figure 247: Block Diagram EP-1813

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 409

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.34.2 Specifications EP-1813

Specifications Description

System data
Data Process, parameter and diagnostic data depend on the
network adapter used.

Interface RSTi-EP system bus

System bus transfer rate 48 Mbps

Potential isolation Test voltage: max. 28.8 V within one channel, 500 V DC
field/system

Pollution severity level: 2

Overvoltage category: II

Connections

Number 3 Neutral conductors

3 Phase conductors (voltage measurement)

3 Phase conductors (current measurement 5 A)

3 Phase conductors (current measurement 1 A)

Nominal input voltage1) 0 … 300 Veff AC (L–N); one or three phase measurement

Rated voltage 250 V AC (L–N) +20%

Nominal input current max. 1 A at measuring connection L' 1 A (current

measurement in the phase conductor)

max. 5 A at measuring connection L' 5 A (current

measurement in the phase conductor)

Sampling rate 3300 Samples/s

Resolution (per channel) 16 Bit (internally 24 Bit)

Frequency range 45 ... 65 Hz

Limiting frequency of typ. 4, 5 kHz

the input filter 2)

Visualization for the first 31 harmonics; 1% accuracy

Harmonics analysis guaranteed for the first 10 harmonics (Blackman-Harris
Window)

Isolation 3, 0 kVeff (1 min)

Rated impulse voltage 4 kV

Overvoltage category CAT II (IEC 61010-1)

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 410

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Measuring procedure True RMS in conjunction with high resolution Delta Sigma
converter

Measuring accuracy3) 0, 5% for measured values relative to the upper limit of

effective range (U/I) 1% for calculated values

Temperature coefficient U: 150 ppm/K I: 150 ppm/K

Conducted disturbances EN 61000-4-6/IEC 61000-4-6 < ±10.0%

Input impedance 2,4 MΩ per channel

Measuring shunt 4 mΩ (at 5 A), 44 mΩ (at 1 A)

Supply

Supply voltage 24 V DC +20% /-15%

Current consumption
from system current 8 mA
path ISYS

Current consumption
from input current path 12 mA
IIN

General data

Weight (operational
87 g
status)

ATEX conform No

For additional general data, refer to Section 1.71.7 General Technical Data for I/O Modules.

1)
Nominal input voltage with corner-grounded systems: 0 … 200 Veff AC.
2)
Typical frequency curve for current and voltage measurement.
3)
Current and voltage values as well as the phase angle within each phase are measured and are
available with 0.5% accuracy. All other results are based on the noted measuring values and are
available with 1% accuracy.

5.34.3 Modifiable Parameters for EP-1813

Name Description / data Options1) Default

width

Current range 1 Bit 1 A (0) / 5 A (1) 1A

Harmonic select Selection of Harmonic, valid 1 ... 31 (1 ... 31) 1 = fundamental
for all Harmonic
measurements (min. 6 Bit)

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 411

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Name Description / data Options1) Default

width

Voltage alarm lower limit 1 Bit disabled (0) / enabled disabled

enable (1)
Voltage alarm lower limit Positive, absolute values only 0 ... 300 V (0 ... 27648) 0 = 0x0
(16 Bit)
Voltage alarm upper limit 1 Bit disabled (0) / enabled disabled
enable (1)
Voltage alarm upper limit Positive, absolute values only 0 ... 300 V (0 ... 27648) 300 V = 0x6C00
(16 Bit)
Current alarm lower limit 1 Bit disabled (0) / enabled disabled
enable (1)
Current alarm lower limit Positive, absolute values only 0 ... 5 A (0 ... 27648) 0 = 0x0
(16 Bit)
Current alarm upper limit 1 Bit disabled (0) / enabled disabled
enable (1)
Current alarm upper limit Positive, absolute values only 0 ... 5 A (0 ... 27648) 100% = 0x6C00
(16 Bit)
Current imbalance alarm 1 Bit disabled (0) / enabled disabled
enable (1)
Current imbalance alarm 16 Bit 0 ... 100% (0 ... 16383) 100%
limit
Frequency alarm lower limit 1 Bit disabled (0) / enabled disabled
enable (1)
Frequency alarm lower limit 16 Bit 45 ... 65 Hz (5760 ... 45 Hz
8320)
Frequency alarm upper limit 1 Bit disabled (0) / enabled disabled
enable (1)
Frequency alarm upper limit 16 Bit 45 ... 65 Hz (5760 ... 65 Hz
8320)
Power factor alarm enable 1 Bit disabled (0) / enabled disabled
(1)
Power factor alarm lower Positives values only (16 Bit) 0 ... 1 (0 ... 16383) 0
limit
Diagnostic alarm 1 Bit disabled (0) / enabled disabled
(1)
RMS voltage Ueff of the RMS voltage L1 (0) / L2
selected phase against N (1) / L3 (2)
Average RMS voltage Ūeff of RMS voltage average (3)
the selected phase
against N
RMS current Īeff of the RMS current L1 (4) / L2
selected phase (5) / L3 (6)

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 412

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Name Description / data Options1) Default

width

Average RMS current Īeff of RMS current average (7)

Channel 0 ... 7: Measuring all connected phases
value Peak current during last Peak current L1 (8) / L2
accumulation interval (9) / L3 (10)
Line frequency Line frequency (11)
Harmonic power at the Harmonic power L1 (12)
selected harmonic / L2 (13) / L3 (14)
Harmonic reactive power at Harmonic reactive
the selected harmonic power L1 (15) / L2 (16) /
L3 (17)
Harmonic apparent power at Harmonic apparent
the selected harmonic power L1 (18) / L2 (19) /
L3 (20)
Ratio between the absolute Power factor L1 (21) / L2
value of the reactive (22) / L3 (23)
power and the apparent
power of the selected
phase
Voltage at the selected Total power factor (24)
harmonic
Voltage at the selected Harmonic voltage L1
harmonic (25) / L2 (26) / L3 (27)
Current at the selected Harmonic current L1
harmonic (28) / L2 (29) / L3 (30)
Active power at the Active power L1 (31) /
fundamental of the selected L2 (32) / L3 (33)
phase
Active power total at the Active power total (34)
fundamental of the
connected phases
Active power total at the Reactive power L1 (35) /
fundamental of the L2 (36) / L3 (37)
connected phases
Reactive power total at the Reactive power total
fundamental of the (38)
connected phases
Apparent power at the Apparent power L1 (39)
fundamental / L2 (40) / L3 (41)
Apparent power total at the Apparent power total
fundamental of the (42)
connected phases

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 413

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Name Description / data Options1) Default

width

Received active energy Received act. energy

counter L1 (43) / L2 (44)
/ L3 (45)
Delivered active energy Delivered act. energy
counter L1 (46) /L2 (47)
/ L3 (48)
Works only with “Harmonic React. energy leading
select “= 1 counter L1 (49) / L2 (50)
/ L3 (51)
Works only with “Harmonic React. energy lagging
select “= 1 counter L1 (52) / L2 (53)
/ L3 (54)
Bit 0: 1 = Phase sequence L1-
L2-L3 detected
Bit 1: 1 = Phase sequence L1-
L3-L2 detected
Bit 2: 1 = Voltage at L1 Status (55)
Bit 3: 1 = Voltage at L2
Bit 4: 1 = Voltage at L3
The channel becomes disabled (56) disabled
enabled by parameterizing
a measuring value
1)
Values in brackets for Modbus-TCP (firmware version 02.03.00 and higher), EtherCAT and EtherNet/IP via
module parameter class.

Calculation of reactive power

𝑄 = √𝑆 2 − 𝑃2

Calculation of current imbalance

𝐶𝑢𝑟𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑡 𝐼𝑚𝑏𝑎𝑙𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒
max (|𝐼𝑟𝑚𝑠 𝐿1 − 𝐼𝑟𝑚𝑠 𝐴𝑣𝑒𝑟𝑎𝑔𝑒|, |𝐼𝑟𝑚𝑠 𝐿2 − 𝐼𝑟𝑚𝑠 𝐴𝑣𝑒𝑟𝑎𝑔𝑒|, |𝐼𝑟𝑚𝑠 𝐿3 − 𝐼𝑟𝑚𝑠 𝐴𝑣𝑒𝑟𝑎𝑔𝑒|)
=
𝐼𝑟𝑚𝑠 𝐴𝑣𝑒𝑟𝑎𝑔𝑒

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 414

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.34.4 Diagnostic Data EP-1813

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

0 Module error
1 Internal error
2 External error
3 Channel error
Error indicator 0
4 Error
5 Power supply fault
6 Reserved 0
7 Parameter error
0
1
Module Type 0x05
2
3
Module type 1
4 Channel information available 1
5 Reserved 0
6 Reserved 0
7 Reserved 0
Error byte 2 2 0-7 Reserved 0
0-2 Reserved 0
3 Internal diagnostic FIFO full
4 Power supply fault
Error byte 3 3
5 Reserved 0
6 Process alarm lost
7 Reserved 0
0-6 Channel type 0x75
Channel type 4
7 Reserved 0
Diagnostic bits per
5 Number of diagnostic bits per channel 8
channel
Number of channels 6 Number of similar channels per module 3
0 Error at channel 0
1 Error at channel 1
Channel error 7 2 Error at channel 2
3 Error at channel 3
4-7 Reserved 0
Channel error 8 8-15 Reserved 0
Channel error 9 16-23 Reserved 0
Channel error 10 24-31 Reserved 0
0 Voltage overrange (300V + 10%)
1 Current overrange (I + 10%) 0
Channel 0 error 11
2 Reserved 0
3 Reserved

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 415

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Name Bytes Bit Description Default

4 Reserved
5 Reserved
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
0 Voltage overrange (300V + 10%)
1 Current overrange (I + 10%) 0
2 Reserved 0
3 Reserved
Channel 1 error 12
4 Reserved
5 Reserved
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
0 Voltage overrange (300V + 10%)
1 Current overrange (I + 10%) 0
2 Reserved 0
3 Reserved
Channel 2 error 13
4 Reserved
5 Reserved
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
0 Reserved
1 Reserved 0
2 Reserved 0
3 Reserved
Error in channel 3 14
4 Reserved
5 Reserved
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
Channel 4 error
to 15-42 0-7 Reserved 0
Channel 31 error
Time stamp 43-46 Time stamp [μs] (32-bit)

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 416

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.34.5 Process Data† Inputs EP-1813

Byte Format Description Remarks

IB0
Word CH0 Channel 0
IB1
IB2
Word CH1 Channel 1
IB3
IB4
Word CH2 Channel 2
IB5
IB6
Word CH3 Channel 3
IB7
IB8
Word CH4 Channel 4
IB9
IB10
Word CH5 Channel 5
IB11
IB12
Word CH6 Channel 6
IB13
IB14
Word CH7 Channel 7
IB15
†
Internal process data mapping with data format Standard. Depending on the fieldbus specification and the
data format of the communicating fieldbus components the bytes and/or words can be reversed during data
transfer

5.34.6 Process Data† Outputs EP-1813

Byte Bit Description Value
Reset counter of received
QB0 QX0.0
active energy
Reset counter of delivered
QX0.1
active energy
Reset counter of capacitive
QX0.2
energy
Reset counter of inductive
QX0.3
reactive energy
QX0.4 Reserved
QX0.5 Reserved
QX0.6 Reserved
QX0.7 Reserved
QB1 Key for counter reset 0xAF
QB2 … QB15 Reserved
†
Internal process data mapping with data format Standard. Depending on the fieldbus specification and the data format
of the communicating fieldbus components the bytes and/or words can be reversed during data transfer

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 417

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.34.7 Process alarm† EP-1813

Name Byte Bit Function

0 Error at L1
1 Error at L2
2 Error at L3
3 Voltage lower limit underrun
Alarm 0
4 Voltage upper limit exceeded
5 Current lower limit underrun
6 Current upper limit exceeded
7 Power factor lower limit underrun
0 Current unbalance
1 Frequency lower limit underrun
Alarm 1
2 Frequency upper limit exceeded
3…7 Not used
The two lowest bytes of the internal
Time stamp 2…3
32-bit timer
†
Internal process data mapping with data format Standard. Depending on the fieldbus specification and the
data format of the communicating fieldbus components the bytes and/or words can be reversed during
data transfer

5.34.8 Conversion of the adjustable measuring values EP-

1813

Output/Limit Value Decimal Hexadecimal Range Conversion

(D)

RMS voltage L1 … L3 355.5 var 32767 0x7FFF Overloading

(U) 300.0 var 27648 0x6C00 Nominal D = 27648 x U / 300 VRMS
RMS voltage average range U = D x 300 VRMS / 27648
(U) 150.0 var 13824 0x3600
Harmonic voltage L1 … 0.0 var 0 0x0000
L3 (U)
Voltage lower/upper
limit (U)
[Current range = 1 A] 1.185 32767 0x7FFF Overloading
RMS current L1 … L2 (I) ARMS
RMS current average (I) 1 ARMS 27648 0x6C00 Nominal D = 27648 x I / 1.0 ARMS
Harmonic current (I) 0.5 ARMS 13824 0x3600 range I = D x 1.0 ARMS / 27648
Current lower/upper 0 ARMS 0 0x0000
limit (I)
[Current range = 5 A] 5.926 32767 0x7FFF Overloading
RMS current L1 … L2 (I) ARMS
Detailed Description of I/O Modules 418
User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Output/Limit Value Decimal Hexadecimal Range Conversion

(D)

RMS current average (I) 5 ARMS 27648 0x6C00 Nominal D = 27648 x I / 5.0 ARMS
Harmonic current (I) 2.5 ARMS 13824 0x3600 range I = D x 5.0 ARMS / 27648
Current lower/upper 0 ARMS 0 0x0000
limit (I)
[Current range = 1 A] 9.481 A 32767 0x7FFF Overloading
Peak current (I) 8.0 A 27648 0x6C00 Nominal D = 27648 x I / 8.0 A
Peaks occurring within 4.0 A 13824 0x3600 range I = D x 8.0 A/ 27648
the crest factor can be 0.0 A 0 0x0000
measured up to 8 A/40
A. The total RMS is
furthermore 1 A /5 A.
[Current range = 5 A] 47.406 A 32767 0x7FFF Overloading
Peak current (I) 40.0 A 27648 0x6C00 Nominal D = 27648 x I / 40.0 A
Peaks occurring within 20.0 A 13824 0x3600 range I = D x 40.0 A/ 27648
the crest factor can be 0.0 A 0 0x0000
measured up to 8 A/40
A. The total RMS is
furthermore 1 A /5 A.
Line frequency (f) 65 Hz 8320 0x2080 Nominal D = 128 x f [Hz]
Frequency alarm lower 60 Hz 7680 0x1E00 range f = D / 128
limit (f) 50 Hz 6400 0x1900
Frequency alarm upper 45 Hz 5760 0x1680
limit (f)
[Current range = 1 A] 355.5 W 32767 0x7FFF Overloading
Active power L1 … L3 300.0 W 27648 0x6C00 Nominal D = 27648 x P / 300.0 W
(P) 150.0 W 13824 0x3600 range P = D x 300.0 W/ 27648
Harmonic active power 0.0 W 0 0x0000
L1 … L3 (P)
[Current range = 5 A] 1777.7 32767 0x7FFF Overloading
Active power L1 … L3 var
(P) 1500.0 27648 0x6C00 Nominal D = 27648 x Q / 1500.0
Harmonic active power var range var
L1 … L3 (P) 750.0 var 13824 0x3600 Q = D x 1500.0 var /
0.0 var 0 0x0000 27648
[Current range = 1 A] 1066.6 W 32767 0x7FFF Overloading
Active power total (P) 900.0 W 27648 0x6C00 Nominal D = 27648 x P / 900.0 W
450.0 W 13824 0x3600 range P = D x 900.0 W / 27648
0.0 W 0 0x0000
[Current range = 5 A] 5333.2 W 32767 0x7FFF Overloading
Active power total (P) 4500.0 W 27648 0x6C00 Nominal D = 27648 x P / 4500.0 W
2250.0 W 13824 0x3600 range P = D x 4500.0 W / 27648
0.0 W 0 0x0000

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 419

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Output/Limit Value Decimal Hexadecimal Range Conversion

(D)

[Current range = 1 A] 355.5 var 32767 0x7FFF Overloading

Reactive power L1 … 300.0 var 27648 0x6C00 Nominal D = 27648 x Q / 300.0 var
L3(Q) 150.0 var 13824 0x3600 range Q = D x 300.0 var / 27648
Harmonic reactive 0.0 var 0 0x0000
power L1 … L3(Q)
[Current range = 5 A] 1777.7 32767 0x7FFF Overloading
Reactive power L1 … var
L3(Q) 1500.0 27648 0x6C00 Nominal D = 27648 x Q / 1500.0
Harmonic reactive var range var
power L1 … L3(Q) 750.0 var 13824 0x3600 Q = D x 1500.0 var /
0.0 var 0 0x0000 27648
[Current range = 1 A] 1066.6 32767 0x7FFF Overloading
Reactive power total var
(Q) 900.0 var 27648 0x6C00 Nominal D = 27648 x Q / 900.0 var
450.0 var 13824 0x3600 range Q = D x 900.0 var / 27648
0.0 var 0 0x0000
[Current range = 5 A] 5333.2 32767 0x7FFF Overloading
Reactive power total var
(Q) 4500.0 27648 0x6C00 Nominal D = 27648 x Q / 4500.0
var range var
2250.0 13824 0x3600 Q = D x 4500.0 var /
var 27648
0.0 var 0 0x0000
[Current range = 1 A] 355.5 var 32767 0x7FFF Overloading
Apparent power L1 … 300.0 var 27648 0x6C00 Nominal D = 27648 x Q / 300.0 var
L3 (S) 150.0 var 13824 0x3600 range Q = D x 300.0 var / 27648
Harmonic apparent 0.0 var 0 0x0000
power L1 … L3 (S)
[Current range = 5 A] 1777.7 32767 0x7FFF Overloading
Apparent power L1 … var
L3 (S) 1500.0 27648 0x6C00 Nominal D = 27648 x Q / 1500.0
Harmonic apparent var range var
power L1 … L3 (S) 750.0 var 13824 0x3600 Q = D x 1500.0 var /
0.0 var 0 0x0000 27648
[Current range = 1 A] 1066.6 32767 0x7FFF Overloading
Apparent power total var
(S) 900.0 var 27648 0x6C00 Nominal D = 27648 x Q / 900.0 var
450.0 var 13824 0x3600 range Q = D x 900.0 var / 27648
0.0 var 0 0x0000
[Current range = 5 A] 5333.2 VA 32767 0x7FFF Overloading D = 27648 x S / 4500.0 VA
Apparent power total 4500.0 VA 27648 0x6C00 Nominal S = D x 4500.0 VA/ 27648
(S) 2250.0 VA 13824 0x3600 range

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 420

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Output/Limit Value Decimal Hexadecimal Range Conversion

(D)

0.0 VA 0 0x0000
Power factor (PF) 1.000 16383 0x3FFF Nominal D = 16383 x PF
Unsigned absolute 0.750 12287 0x2FFF range PF = D / 16383
value; the sign can be 0.500 8191 0x1FFF
getting 0.000 0 0x0000
from the harmonic
power.
Current imbalance 1.000 16383 0x3FFF Nominal D = 16383 x PF
alarm limit (CI) 0.750 12287 0x2FFF range PF = D / 16383
0.500 8191 0x1FFF
0.000 0 0x0000
Received active energy 32766 32766 0x7FFE Overflow D = 1 x E /Wh
counter (E) Wh Nominal E = D * 1 Wh
10000 10000 0x2710 range
Wh
1000 Wh 1000 0x03E8
1 Wh 1 0x0001 Overflow D = 1 x E /Wh
Delivered active energy 32766 32766 0x7FFE Nominal E = D * 1 Wh
counter (E) Wh range
10000 10000 0x2710
Wh
1000 Wh 1000 0x03E8
1 Wh 1 0x0001
Reactive energy 32766 32766 0x7FFE Overflow D = 1 x E /Wh
leading counter (E) Wh E = D * 1 Wh
10000 10000 0x2710 Nominal
Wh range
1000 Wh 1000 0x03E8
1 Wh 1 0x0001
Reactive energy 32766 32766 0x7FFE Overflow D = 1 x E /Wh
lagging counter (E) Wh Nominal E = D * 1 Wh
10000 10000 0x2710 range
Wh
1000 Wh 1000 0x03E8
1 Wh 1 0x0001

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 421

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.34.9 Raw parameter data for acyclic services (not

relevant with MODBUS application)

Byte Bit Description Default

0 0 Current imbalance alarm limit 0x0

1 Voltage alarm lower limit enable
2 Voltage alarm upper limit enable
3 Reserved
4 Current alarm lower limit enable
5 Current alarm upper limit enable
6 Frequency alarm lower limit enable
7 Frequency alarm upper limit enable
1 0 Reserved 0x0
1 Current range 1/5 A enabled
2 Reserved
3 Reserved
4 Reserved
5 Power factor alarm lower limit
6 Reserved
7 Diagnostic alarm enabled
2 0…7 Harmonic select 0x1
3 0…7 Power factor lower limit High Byte 0x0
4 0…7 Power factor lower limit Low Byte 0x0
5 0…7 Current imbalance alarm limit High Byte 0x3F
6 0…7 Current imbalance alarm limit Low Byte 0xFF
7 0…7 Voltage alarm lower limit High Byte 0x0
8 0…7 Voltage alarm lower limit Low Byte 0x0
9 0…7 Voltage alarm upper limit High Byte 0x6c
10 0…7 Voltage alarm upper limit Low Byte 0x0
11 0…7 Current alarm lower limit High Byte 0x0
12 0…7 Current alarm lower limit Low Byte 0x0
13 0…7 Current alarm upper limit High Byte 0x6c
14 0…7 Current alarm upper limit Low Byte 0x0
15 0…7 Frequency alarm lower limit High Byte 0x16
16 0…7 Frequency alarm lower limit Low Byte 0x80
17 0…7 Frequency alarm upper limit High Byte 0x20
18 0…7 Frequency alarm upper limit Low Byte 0x80
19 0…7 Measured value Channel 0 0xFF
20 0…7 Measured value Channel 1 0xFF
21 0…7 Measured value Channel 2 0xFF
22 0…7 Measured value Channel 3 0xFF
23 0…7 Measured value Channel 4 0xFF

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 422

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Byte Bit Description Default

24 0…7 Measured value Channel 5 0xFF

25 0…7 Measured value Channel 6 0xFF
26 0…7 Measured value Channel 7 0xFF

Fieldbus specific notes for parameterizing

Profinet: The parameter block can be written on Index 125 of the module using a Write Record access (SFB53).
A 4-byte header must be prepended to the parameter data: 0x1F, 0x00, 0x04, 0x18.

Profibus: The parameter block can be written on Index 125 of the module using a Write Record access
(SFB53). No header is required.

EtherNet/IP: The parameter block can be written on class 0x65, instance = slot number, attribute 0x73 using
a writing accesses. No header is required. The parameter block can also be transferred as part of the
configuration assembly.

Typical frequency curve for current and voltage measurements

Figure 248: Typical frequency curve for current and voltage

measurement

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 423

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.35 Power-feed Module for Input Current Path

EP-7631

Figure 249: Power- Figure 250: Connection Diagram

feed Module for EP-7631
Input Current
Path EP-7631

Power-feed modules are used to refresh the current paths and isolate the
power supply. The main power supply of the RSTi-EP station is always fed
in via the network adapter. A power-feed module EP-7631 must be
connected if the current demand of the series of input modules is too
large.

The maximum feed-in current in the input current path via the 4-pole
connector is 10 A. Details required to calculate current demand and
power supply are presented in Section, Current Demand and Power
Supply. Power-feed modules are passive modules without fieldbus
communication, therefore they are not considered during configuration.

Note: A maximum of three passive modules (power-feed module, potential distribution

module, empty slot module) may be installed in succession, however the next
module to be installed must be an active module.

CAUTION
In the case of a maximum power supply of >8 A and a maximum temperature of > +55°C
(131 °F), all four contacts must be connected with 1.5 mm² wiring.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 424

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.35.1 LED Indicators EP-7631

Figure 251: EP-7631 LEDs

LED EP-7631

Module Status Green: Voltage applied and is > 18Vdc

3.1 Green: Supply voltage for input current path > 18Vdc
3.2 Red: Supply voltage for input current path < 18Vdc
3.3 --
3.4 Red: Internal fuse defective, replace module

For error messages refer to Section 14: LED Indicators and Troubleshooting.

Figure 252: Block Diagram EP-7631

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 425

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.35.2 Specifications EP-7631

Specifications Description
Supply
Supply voltage 20.4V – 28.8V
Maximum feed current for input modules 10 A
Current consumption from input current path
10 mA
IIN
General data
Weight 76 g (6.21 oz)
For additional general data, refer to Section 1.71.7 General Technical Data for I/O
Modules.

5.36 Power-feed Module for Output Current

Path EP-7641

Figure 253: Power- Figure 254: Connection Diagram

feed Module for EP-7641
Output Current
Path EP-7641

Power-feed modules are used to refresh the current paths and isolate the
power supply. The main power supply of the RSTi-EP station is always fed
in via the network adapter. A power-feed module EP-7641 must be

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 426

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

connected if the current demand of the series of output modules is too

large.
The maximum feed-in current in the output current path via the 4-pole
connector is 10 A. Details required to calculate current demand and
power supply are presented in Section, Current Demand and Power
Supply.
Power-feed modules are passive modules without fieldbus
communication, therefore they are not considered during configuration.

Note: A maximum of three passive modules (power-feed module, potential distribution

module, empty slot module) may be installed in succession, however the next
module to be installed must be an active module.

CAUTION
In the case of a maximum power supply of >8 A and a maximum temperature of > +55°C (131
°F), all four contacts must be connected with 1.5 mm² wiring.

5.36.1 LED Indicators EP-7641

Figure 255: EP-7641 LEDs

LED EP-7641
Module Status Green: Voltage applied and is > 18Vdc

4.1 Green: Supply voltage for input current path > 18Vdc
4.2 Red: Supply voltage for input current path < 18Vdc
4.3 --
4.4 Red: Internal fuse defective, replace module

For error messages refer to Section 14: LED Indicators and Troubleshooting.
Detailed Description of I/O Modules 427
User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Figure 256: Block Diagram EP-7641

5.36.2 Specifications EP-7641

Specifications Description
Supply
Supply voltage 20.4V – 28.8V
Maximum feed current for input modules 10 A
Current consumption from output current 10 mA
path IOUT
General data
Weight 76 g (2.68 oz)
General data: refer to Section, General Technical Data for the Fieldbus Network
Adapter

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 428

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.37 Safe Feed-in Modules EP-1901, EP-1902, and

EP-1922

Figure 257: Safe Figure 258: Safe Figure 259: Safe

Feed-in Module EP- Feed-in Module Feed-in Module
1901 EP-1902 EP-1922

Emerson provides three variants of RSTi-EP safe feed modules EP 1901:

one safe input, EP 1902: two safe inputs and EP 1922: two safe inputs,
with delayed disconnection, which are intended for connecting safety-
related equipment. The RSTi-EP safe feed-input modules are controlled
using contact-based safety transducers and/or safety transducers with
OSSD (Output Signal Switching Device) inputs. The safety function
consists of the safe disconnection of 24 V outputs, the safe state of which
is 24 V switched off (current path for outputs and the OSSD output is
switched off).

All input sensors are independently supplied via separate voltage paths
and report the current machine status to the control unit.

Each RSTi-EP safe feed-input module safely switches off all following
modules that are supplied by the output current path (until the next EP-

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 429

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

7641 power module) and thus creates a safety segment. To switch the 24
V OSSD voltage back on, either an automatic or a manual start can be
selected.

• Automatic start: the safe output current path is switched on

immediately after resetting the safety circuit(s).

• Manual start: the output current path is only switched on again if the
start button has been held down for a preset length of time.

With the delay module (EP-1922), switching off can be delayed by a

defined time so that, for example, a machine can be shut down in a
controlled manner. The delay time can be set in four steps between 0 and
60 seconds (corresponds to stop category 1 as per EN 60204.

Note: All product-specific information and notes on the use of EP-19xx modules
can be found in the Modules for Functional Safety Manual (GFK-2956).

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 430

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.38 Potential Distribution Module for Input

Current Path EP-711F

Figure 260: Power-feed Figure 261: Connection Diagram

Module for Output Current EP-711F
Path EP-711

The potential distribution module EP-711F provides 16 connections for

+24 V from the input current path. Potential distribution modules are
passive modules without fieldbus communication, therefore they are not
considered during configuration.

Note: A maximum of three passive modules (power-feed module, potential distribution

module, and empty slot module) may be installed in succession, however the next
module to be installed must be an active module.

Figure 262: Block Diagram EP-711F

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 431

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.38.1 Specifications EP-711F

Specifications Description
Supply
Supply voltage 20.4V – 28.8V
General data
Weight 84 g (2.96 oz)
For additional general data, refer to Section 1.71.7 General Technical Data for I/O
Modules.

5.39 Potential Distribution Module for Output

Current Path EP-751F

Figure 263: Figure 264: Connection

Potential Diagram EP-751F
Distribution
Module for
Output Current
Path EP-751F

The potential distribution module EP-751F provides 16 connections for

+24 V from the output current path. Potential distribution modules are

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 432

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

passive modules without fieldbus communication, therefore they are not

considered during configuration.

Note: A maximum of three passive modules (power-feed module, potential distribution

module, and empty slot module) may be installed in succession, however the next
module to be installed must be an active module.

Figure 265: Block Diagram EP-751F

5.39.1 Specifications EP-751F

Specifications Description
Supply
Supply voltage 20.4V – 28.8V
General data
Weight 84 g (2.96 oz)
For additional general data, refer to Section 1.71.7 General Technical Data for I/O
Modules.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 433

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.40 Potential Distribution Module for

Functional Earth EP-700F

Figure 266: Figure 267: Connection Diagram

Potential EP-700F
Distribution
Module for
Output Current
Path EP-700F

The potential distribution module EP-700F provides 16 connections for

the functional earth. Potential distribution modules are passive modules
without fieldbus communication, therefore they are not considered
during configuration.

Note: A maximum of three passive modules (power-feed module, potential distribution module, and
empty slot module) may be installed in succession, however the next module to be installed must
be an active module.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 434

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Figure 268: Block Diagram EP-700F

5.40.1 Specifications EP-700F

Specifications Description
Supply
Supply voltage 20.4V – 28.8V
General data
Weight 84 g (2.96 oz)
For additional general data, refer to Section 1.71.7 General Technical Data for I/O
Modules.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 435

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.41 0-V Potential Distribution Module for Input

Current Path EP-710F

Figure 269: 0V Potential Figure 270: Connection

Distribution Module for the Diagram EP-710F
Input Current path EP-710F

The potential distribution module EP-710F provides 16 connections for

ground from the input current path. Potential distribution modules are
passive modules without fieldbus communication, therefore they are not
considered during configuration.

Note: A maximum of three passive modules (power-feed module, potential distribution

module, and empty slot module) may be installed in succession, however the next
module to be installed must be an active module.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 436

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Figure 271: Block Diagram EP-710F

5.41.1 Specifications EP-710F

Specifications Description
Supply
Supply voltage 0 V (from input current path)
General data
Weight 84 g (2.96 oz)
For additional general data, refer to Section 1.71.7 General Technical Data for I/O
Modules.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 437

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.42 0-V Potential Distribution Module for

Output Current Path EP-750F

Figure 272: 0V Figure 273: Connection Diagram

Potential EP-750F
Distribution
Module for the
Output Current
Path EP-750F

The potential distribution module EP-750F provides 16 connections for

ground from the output current path. Potential distribution modules are
passive modules without fieldbus communication, therefore they are not
considered during configuration.

Note: A maximum of three passive modules (power-feed module, potential distribution module, and
empty slot module) may be installed in succession, however the next module to be installed must
be an active module.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 438

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Figure 274: Block Diagram EP-750F

5.42.1 Specifications EP-750F

Specifications Description
Supply
Supply voltage 0 V (from output current path)
General data
Weight 84 g (2.96 oz)
For additional general data, refer to Section 1.71.7 General Technical Data for I/O
Modules.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 439

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.43 Empty Slot Module EP-8310

Figure 275: Empty Slot Module EP-8310

Empty slot modules can be integrated as reserve modules in a station.

They bridge all contacts in the basic module 1:1 and otherwise have no
function. Empty slot modules are passive modules without fieldbus
communication, therefore they are not considered during configuration.

Note: A maximum of three passive modules (power-feed module, potential distribution

module, and empty slot module) may be installed in succession, however the next
module to be installed must be an active module.

5.43.1 Specifications EP-8310

General data
Weight 70 g (2.47 oz)
For additional general data, refer to Section 1.71.7 General Technical Data for I/O
Modules.

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 440

User Manual Section 5
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5.44 Termination Kit EP-8301

Figure 276: Termination Kit EP-8301

Each RSTI-EP fieldbus network adapter is delivered together with a

termination kit EP-8301. This comprises two end brackets and an end
plate. The end plate protects the contacts on the last module at the end
of the RSTI-EP station. The station is fixed to the DIN rail on both sides via
the end brackets.

5.44.1 Specifications EP-8301

General data
Weight 51 g (1.8 oz)

Detailed Description of I/O Modules 441

User Manual Section 6
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Section 6: Diagnostic Details for RSTi-

EP CPE200 Series Controllers
6.1 CPE200 Series Process Alarm and
Diagnostic Data Configuration and
Operation
PAC Machine Edition provides an option to enable the input scanning of
Diagnostic Data (47 bytes; 376 bits) and/or Process Alarm data (4 bytes;
32 bits) for all CPE200 Series controllers. All current EP modules support
Diagnostic Data. Some modules only support basic module level error
info while other modules support channel based diagnostics to report
channel status such as Short Circuit, Overvoltage, etc. A few modules
also support Process Alarm data. PME only provides the option to map
Process Alarm data to input scan if a module supports it.

Note: While Diagnostic Data and Process Alarm appear in the input scan, its
update and acknowledgement is asynchronous to the module’s
standard IO scan process data. For example, a Short Circuit or
Overvoltage condition might set or clear on a different input scan than
might be reflected in process data IO.

6.1.1 Configuring Automatic Update Operation

By default, the PME configuration for all modules will have the memory
mappings data “Length” set to 0 for “Diagnostic Data” and “Process
Alarm.” This means that input scanning of these areas is disabled. To
enable support, change the “Length” field to a non-zero value (376 bits
for Diagnostic Data; or 32-bits for Process Alarm).

Once enabled and input scanning occurs, the default operation of the
PLC will be to automatically update the Diagnostic or Process Alarm data
with the most recent data. With each input scan, the data can
change. Program logic can be coded to read appropriate bits and
possibly take action to handle a desired condition.

Installation 442
User Manual Section 6
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

In general, Diagnostic Data will always have some default non-zero

information reported in the 47 bytes of data. Process Alarm input scan
data will be all 0 until the first Process Alarm event occurs.

6.1.2 Controlled Process Alarm and Diagnostic Data

Acknowledgment

CPE200 Series controllers also have a mechanism to control the update

rate of diagnostic and process alarm data with an acknowledgment
mechanism. This mechanism might be desired if there is a need to
process all diagnostic or process alarms. For example, if two process
alarm conditions occur on the same sweep for the same module, then
automatic mode only allows the most recent process alarm data to appear
in the input scan. However, with the acknowledge mechanism, logic can
control the process alarm data update and allow both alarms to be seen
and handled. Implementation of this mechanism requires the user to
enable of some optional memory areas in configuration and also
implement logic control of bits in the module’s IO scan.

The following bits are present in the Module Status and Control Output
words.

Module Status
OK (bit 1 – mask 0x0001)
DIAG_STATUS (bit 2 – mask 0x0002)
ALARM_STATUS (bit 3 – mask 0x0004)
Control Output
DIAG_ACK (bit 2 – mask 0x0002)
ALARM_ACK (bit 3 – mask 0x0004)
DIAG_ACK_ENABLE (bit 4 – mask 0x0008)
ALARM_ACK_ENABLE (bit 5 – mask 0x0010)

Implementation of the acknowledge mechanism can be done

independently for each module and for either diagnostic or process
alarms within a module. For example, acknowledgement might be
enabled for process alarms for a module in slot 2 and for diagnostic data
for a module in slot 4, but remain an automatic update for all other
diagnostic data or process alarms.

Installation 443
User Manual Section 6
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Enabling the Acknowledge Mechanism

To enable the acknowledge mechanism, first set the appropriate enable bit in the
module’s Control Output. Set DIAG_ACK_ENABLE to 1 for Diagnostic Data
acknowledgement and set ALARM_ACK_ENABLE for Process Alarm
acknowledgement. Enabling Diagnostic Data acknowledgment activates the
operation of the diagnostic control bit pair DIAG_STATUS (Module Status input)
and DIAG_ACK (Control Output). Enabling Process Alarm acknowledgment,
activates the operation of the alarm bit pair ALARM_STATUS (Module Status input)
and ALARM_ACK (Control Output).

Once enabled, the corresponding STATUS bit (Module Status input) and ACK bit
(Control Output) are used to handle data updates. These bit pairs are toggled to
indicate new data or acknowledgement of previous data. When the module
provides new data, it will toggle the state of the STATUS bit in Module Status. To
acknowledge the new data and request future updates, the logic program should
respond by toggling the ACK bit in Control Output (0->1 or 1->0). Thus, when the
STATUS and ACK bits are not equal (STATUS=0, ACK=1; or STATUS=1, ACK=0), this
indicates new data is available that has not been acknowledged. When the
STATUS and ACK bits are equal (both 0 or both 1), this indicates any previous data
has been acknowledged and the module is free to report new data when
available.

For following table lists the interpretation of the acknowledgement bit pair states
(STATUS and ACK). The system will cycle through these bit states when multiple
data updates occur.

STATUS bit ACK bit Unacknowledged Acknowledged /

/ New Data Ready For Next
Data
0 0 X
1 0 X
1 1 X
0 1 X

Installation 444
User Manual Section 6
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

6.2 CPE200 Series Expansion Bus Status bits

Expansion Bus Status bits can be optionally enabled for input scanning in EPXCPE
configuration “Settings” tab by setting the status Length to 16. There are 16 bits
of status, but not all bits are defined.

The following table describes the supported bits. Undefined bits are reserved
and will be 0.

Bit Name Description

1 Scan OK Always 1 if input scan functional

Sets to 1 if at least one backplane module currently has

Diagnostic Data unacknowledged Diagnostic Data reported. Value 0 if
2
Available none available, all previously acknowledged, or
acknowledgment disabled

Sets to 1 if at least one backplane module currently has

Process Alarm unacknowledged Process Alarm reported. Value 0 if
3
Available none available, all previously acknowledged, or
acknowledgment disabled

Sets to 1 of communication error detected on backplane

4 Bus Error bus. Bit automatically clears after several seconds when
errors stop

All Modules
5 Set to 1 if all configured modules are scanning IO
Scanning

Installation 445
User Manual Section 6
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

6.3 CPE200 Series Local Backplane Operations

6.3.1 CPE200 Series Backplane Module Hot-Swap Not

Supported

The hot-swap of local backplane RSTi-EP I/O modules is not fully supported with
CPE200 Series CPUs. It is electrically safe to remove and replace powered
modules; neither the CPE200 Series backplane nor RSTi-EP I/O modules will be
physically damaged when hot-swapped. I/O values, however, may momentarily
drop to zero (0) for all modules in a backplane, regardless of configured
operation (i.e. default to zero, hold last state, or substitute value), when any
module is hot-removed or hot-inserted into the local backplane. Once a
backplane is configured, hot-swapping modules may also result in new or
replaced modules being non-operational (can not configure or scan IO). A power
cycle of the CPE200 Series CPU is required to recover a module that fails to
communicate after a hot-swap operation.

6.3.2 CPE200 Series "System Bus Error" Fault Log

A "System Bus Error" fault will be logged in the PLC fault table when a backplane
bus error is detected. This fault indicates a bus communication failure
detected. Most likely a bus error will be brief and the bus will automatically
recover. Bus errors are most likely caused by hot-swap of modules on the
backplane or loose connections between modules on the backplane. To prevent
a flood of fault logs during bus error conditions, the System Bus Error fault is
limited in how frequently it will be relogged.

Installation 446
User Manual Section 6
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

6.3.3 CPE200 Series Local RSTi-EP I/O Module Addressing

CPE200 Series CPUs support the connection of RSTI-EP I/O modules

directly to the CPU via the local I/O backplane connector on the right-side
of the CPU unit. Depending upon the model, up to 64 active local I/O
modules may be connected.

PME’s Hardware Configuration supports direct configuration for all local

I/O modules on the CPE200 Series local backplane. Most RSTi-EP I/O
modules are active modules, but a select few are not. Passive I/O
modules do not occupy a logical slot in the I/O configuration, even
though they are physically present. The modules listed below do not
occupy a logical slot in the I/O configuration:

• EP-700F 16CH, Functional Earth Distribution Module

• EP-710F 16CH, 0 VDC Distribution from Input Current Path Module
• EP-711F 16CH, +24 VDC Distribution from Input Current Path Module
• EP-750F 16CH, 0 VDC Distribution from Output Current Path Module
• EP-751F 16CH, +24 VDC Distribution from Output Current Path
Module
• EP-7631 24VDC 10A Power-feed to Input Current Path Module
• EP-7641 24VDC 10A Power-feed to Output Current Path Module
• EP-8310 Slot Filler Module
For convenience, PME indicates both the logical slot configuration and
physical slot configuration for all RSTi-EP I/O modules configured in the
local backplane of CPE200 Series CPUs. The logical slot, if occupied,
appears to the left of the module model number. If the RSTi-EP I/O
module does not occupy a logical slot in the configuration, then “-------”
will be displayed in the logical slot field. The physical location, encoded
<RACK>.<SLOT> appears to the right of the module model number. All
modules, whether active or passive, have a physical slot number. Figure
277 below provides an example of a CPE240 CPU configuration with
modules that do and do not occupy logical slots in the local backplane I/O
configuration.

Installation 447
User Manual Section 6
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Figure 277: Navigator

Please note that RSTi-EP I/O configured in remote I/O drops, such as with a
PROFINET Network Adapter EPXPNS001 or EPXPNS101, only indicate logical
configuration slots and modules that do not communicate on the bus do not
appear in their I/O configurations.

Installation 448
User Manual Section 6
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

6.4 CPE200 Series Backplane Power

Calculation using PME’s Hardware
Configuration
Note: Modules like EPXPNS101 must use a utility tool called ”RSTi-EP Power Supply Tool” to calculate
power.

Controllers like the EPXCPE200 have PME support that will provide some automated power
calculations and warnings about the local backplane I/O in the Controller Hardware
Configuration.

For CPE200 Series controllers, PME will provide some automatic calculations of
backplane power usage and will indicate warnings for module locations that
exceed the power available. For the power calculations to be accurate, a user
must provide accurate supplied current values and also set accurate current
consumption values for modules that have variable power loads (e.g. output
loads, sensor loads, etc.).

The CPE200 Series controller has two power terminals. The upper terminal
powers both the CPE200 Series controller and the input current path for the
backplane. The lower terminal powers the output current path for the backplane.
Each terminal can power a maximum of 10 A. Within the PME Hardware
Configuration for an CPE200 Series module, the configuration Power tab
provides configurable variables to set supplied power values if the externally
supplied power is less than the 10 A maximum.

Figure 278: CPE200 Series Power Parameters.

Note: Supplied current values are configurable.

Installation 449
User Manual Section 6
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Many EP modules added to the backplane configuration have configurable power

consumption values. A typical module has a fixed/unconfigurable current
consumption but may also consume additional current due to output loads or
sensors. These additional power loads must be manually set to accurate values
to get accurate power warnings. Typically, PME defaults sensor loads to 0 and
output loads to max values when a new module is added to configuration.

6.4.1 Examples of EP modules with configurable power

loads:

Figure 279: EP-225F Output Power Configuration

Figure 280: EP-1318 Input Sensor Power Configuration

PME indicates a power warning by setting a red flag next to each slot that
exceeds the available power. Since there are separate power paths for input and
output power, it is possible to exceed power on one path and not the other.
Therefore, successive modules will not necessarily indicate a warning if modules
are different type (input or output). Selecting a module in the PME Navigator
window will provide additional details about power in the Inspector window.

Installation 450
User Manual Section 6
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Figure 281: Example of Power Warning in PME

There are several steps that can be taken to resolve power warnings.

1. Review the current slot and previous slots Power configuration to make sure
the configured power consumption is accurate. If configured power can be
reduced then this may resolve warnings.

2. Review supplied power for prior slot that is providing the power for the current
path. Power could be supplied by CPE200 Series or a Power Feed module.
Make sure the supplied value is accurate. If possible, use an external supply
that can provide the maximum power (10,000 mA).

3. Add a Power Feed module prior to the slot with the power deficit. Note:
Power Feed modules can be for either the input current path or the output
current path (but not both).

Installation 451
User Manual Section 6
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

6.4.2 Example of Adding Power Feed Module to Resolve

Power Warning

Figure 282: EP-7641 Output Power Feed module added to resolve

power warning

Similar to the CPE200 Series Power configuration, each power feed module has a
Power configuration tab. The configurable supplied value may be reduced if the
external power supply attached to the power feed module provides less current
than the default max value of 10,000 mA.

Figure 283: EP-7641 Power Configuration

Installation 452
User Manual Section 7
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Section 7: RSTi-EP Station Installation

WARNING
Explosion risk - During assembly work, sparks can form and surfaces may
become excessively hot.

• Before assembly, make sure that there is not a potentially explosive atmosphere.

• For applications in potentially explosive atmospheres, observe the installation and

construction requirements of EN 60079- 15 and/or country-specific regulations

DANGER
Dangerous contact voltage:

• Carry out assembly and wiring work on the RSTi-EP station only when the power supply
is disconnected.

• Make sure that the place of installation (switch cabinet etc.) has been disconnected
from the power supply.

7.1 Preparations for Assembly

The RSTi-EP station is designed for installation in switch cabinets, terminals
or switch boxes in decentralized systems. The field-bus network adapter
and I/O modules conform to protection class IP20.

7.1.1 Environmental Conditions

Make sure that the permitted environmental conditions for installation

and operation are observed (refer to the General Technical Data in Section,
General Technical Data for the Fieldbus Network Adapter and to Section,
General Technical Data for I/O Modules.

7.1.2 DIN Rail

The RSTi-EP system products are intended for installation on a DIN rail in
accordance with EN 60715 [35 × 7.5mm (1.4” x 0.3”)], steel strip in
accordance with Annex A of EN 60715, or tinplated steel strip. The DIN rail
must be mounted prior to the installation of the RSTi-EP station.

Installation 453
User Manual Section 7
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

The DIN rail must be attached to the surface at least every 20 cm (7.9 in) to
protect it from vibration and impact.

If the DIN rail is installed on earthed mounting plates, it does not have to
be separately earthed.

Installation 454
User Manual Section 7
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

7.1.3 Stripping Lengths

The required stripping length for every RSTi-EP product is specified in mm

(in). These lengths, such as 6 mm (0.24 in) ± 0.5 mm (0.02 in), ≥ 10 mm (0.39
in) ±1 mm (0.04 in), must be observed. This also applies to the use of wire-
end ferrules. The external dimensions of the crimped wire-end ferrules
must conform with IEC-60947-1. For detailed information refer to Section
7.4, Wiring.

7.1.4 Unpacking and Delivery

All of the elements that make up the RSTi-EP station are packaged
individually for delivery.

• Check the delivery for completeness and transport damage.

• Report any transport damage immediately to the respective transport

company.

CAUTION
• The product can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge.

• The components in the RSTi-EP series can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge.

• Ensure that personnel and work equipment are adequately grounded.

• Unpack all parts and sort the modules into the installation sequence as per the
instructions.

• Dispose of all packaging in accordance with the local disposal guidelines. The
cardboard packaging from the modules and fieldbus network adapters can be
sent for paper recycling.

7.1.5 Use in a Potentially Explosive Atmosphere

If the RSTi-EP station is used in a potentially explosive atmosphere rated

as Zone 2, the housing must meet the requirements of explosion
protection type Ex n or Ex e and protection class IP54. Sensors and
actuators that are in Zone 2 or in a safe zone can be connected. All cable
glands on the housing must be approved for Example.

Installation 455
User Manual Section 7
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Figure 284: Use in Potentially Explosive Atmosphere

7.1.6 Installation Orientation

The RSTi-EP station is usually installed on a horizontally positioned DIN

rail.

Figure 285: Installation Position of the RSTi-EP Station on the DIN

Rail (Horizontal Installation)

Installation on vertically positioned DIN rails is also possible. In this event,

however, the heat dissipation is reduced such that the derating values
change (refer to Section, Current Demand and Power Supply).

In the case of vertical mounting, the field-bus network adapter must

always be arranged as the first module at the bottom and secured with a
reinforced end bracket for vertical mounting.

Installation 456
User Manual Section 7
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

7.1.7 Clearances

Note: Depending on how the station shielding is implemented, the

specified distances may have to be larger than those given below.
Ensure compliance with the minimum permissible cable bending
radius.
In order to carry out the installation and further maintenance work and to
ensure enough ventilation, the RSTi-EP station must be installed while
observing the following Clearances. Earth terminals already installed can
be ignored when calculating the distance.

Figure 286: Clearances with Horizontal Installation

Installation 457
User Manual Section 7
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Figure 287: Clearances with Vertical Installation

Figure 288: Minimum Distance to Switch Cabinet Door (with/without Swivel

Marker)

7.1.8 Calculation of Space Requirements

The space requirements for a RSTi-EP station with n modules (horizontal

installation) is calculated as follows:

Height: 120 mm (4.72”)

+ 2 x 40 mm (1.57”) distances at top and bottom
= 200 mm (7.87”)

Installation 458
User Manual Section 7
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Width: 8 mm (1.57”) end bracket

+ 52 mm (2.05”) bus network adapter
+ n x 11.5 mm (0.45”) n modules
+ 11.5 mm (0.45”) end plate and end bracket
+ 2 x 20 mm (0.79”) distances to the sides
= 111.5 mm (4.39”) + n x 11.5 mm (0.45”)
For vertical installation interchange height and width.
When calculating the width for vertical installation, 4.5 mm (0.18”) must be
added for the end bracket.

7.1.9 Installation Sequence

A RSTi-EP station may only be installed in this sequence (starting from the
left/bottom):

• End bracket

• Bus network adapter

• Up to 64 active modules

• End plate and end bracket

If the station has already been configured, proceed to the corresponding

installation drawing. If you are configuring the station yourself, observe
the following instructions:

• Observe the maximum current carrying capacity (refer to Section, Current

Demand and Power Supply).

• Furthermore, the modules may be arranged in any sequence. In order to

configure the station as clearly as possible, it is recommended to arrange the
modules according to their function.

7.1.10 Arrangement of SIL Modules

An EP-19xx module can be positioned anywhere in the RSTi-EP station. All

of the following output modules up to the next EP-7641 module are safely
disconnected (safety segment). Multiple EP-19xx modules / safety
segments can be set up in a single station.

Note: When using RSTi-EP EP-19xx modules, also refer to the Modules for
Functional Safety Manual (GFK-2956).

Installation 459
User Manual Section 7
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

7.1.11 Preparation and the Required Tool

The DIN rail must already be installed. To mechanically install the RSTi-EP
station, you will need a 3-mm screwdriver.

• Lay out the modules in the intended sequence.

• Check whether the DIN rail feet can be moved on both end brackets. If
necessary, loosen the mounting screw until the DIN rail feet can be moved
freely.

• If not done yet, fit an earth terminal to the DIN rail.

7.2 Assembling the RSTi-EP Station

WARNING
Explosion risk - During assembly work, sparks can form, and surfaces may
become excessively hot.

• Before assembly, make sure that there is not a potentially explosive

atmosphere.

• For applications in potentially explosive atmospheres, observe the installation

and construction requirements of EN 60079- 15 and/or country-specific
regulations

DANGER
Dangerous contact voltage:

• Carry out assembly and wiring work on the RSTi-EP station only when the power
supply is disconnected.

• Make sure that the place of installation (switch cabinet etc.) has been
disconnected from the power supply.

Installation 460
User Manual Section 7
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

CAUTION
The product can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge.

• The components in the RSTi-EP series can be destroyed by electrostatic

discharge.

• Ensure that personnel and work equipment are adequately grounded.

Note: For failure-free operation, the end brackets delivered with the network
adapter must be installed to achieve a permanent set of the RSTi-EP
station.
On the left side of the installation site, place an end bracket on the DIN rail
with the exterior of the bracket facing left and screw it down tightly (using a
3-mm (0.1”) screwdriver).

Installation 461
User Manual Section 7
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Figure 289: Attaching the End Bracket

Note: When installing the RSTi-EP products, make sure that you listen for the
double click:
When snapping onto the DIN rail
When pushing together with the neighboring module.
The modules are in the correct position and the connection is made only
when both snapping noises are heard.

CAUTION
• Improper installation may prevent grounding.

• The grounding of the modules and network adapters is only ensured if the FE spring at
the bottom is in contact with the DIN rail.

• During installation, make sure that both release levers on the bus network adapter and
all release levers on the modules are closed before snapping onto the DIN rail.

Installation 462
User Manual Section 7
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Figure 290: Release Lever Closed

5. Place the field bus network adapter (module side to the right) on the DIN rail
so that it audibly clicks into place.

Figure 291: Attaching the Bus Network Adapter to the DIN Rail

Installation 463
User Manual Section 7
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

6. Slide the bus network adapter to the left until it completely connects with the
end bracket. At the same time, press the bus network adapter as close as
possible to the DIN rail so that the network adapter is not tilted.

Figure 292: Sliding the Bus Network Adapter into Position

7. Place the first module on the DIN rail and press it down firmly. It must audibly
click into place.

8. Slide the module to the left until it audibly clicks into place on the bus network
adapter. At the same time, press the module as close as possible to the DIN
rail so that the module is not tilted.

Installation 464
User Manual Section 7
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Figure 293: Sliding the Module into Position

9. Attach all the other modules as described above.

10. Connect the second end bracket to the end plate as specified by the alignment
pins.

11. Place both parts on the DIN rail on the right-hand side of the station so that
the end bracket faces outwards.

12. Slide the end bracket and end plate to the left until it completely connects with
the last module.

Figure 294: Sliding the End Plate with End Bracket into Position

13. Screw down the end bracket tightly (using a 3-mm screwdriver).

14. Make sure that all release levers are in the locking position as standard. If this
is not the case, click the open release lever into place.

Installation 465
User Manual Section 7
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

7.3 Attaching the Marker

7.3.1 Attaching the Swivel Marker

A swivel marker, available as an accessory (EP-8100), is best suited for

making detailed markings on the connector frame.

15. Snap the swivel marker into place on top of the module connector frame.

Figure 295: Attaching the Swivel Marker

16. Insert the labelled marker into the swivel marker from below.

7.4 Wiring

WARNING
Explosion risk - During assembly work, sparks can form, and surfaces may
become excessively hot.

• Before assembly, make sure that there is not a potentially explosive atmosphere.

• For applications in potentially explosive atmospheres, observe the installation and

construction requirements of EN 60079- 15 and/or country-specific regulations

DANGER
Dangerous contact voltage:

Installation 466
User Manual Section 7
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

• Carry out assembly and wiring work on the RSTi-EP station only when the power
supply is disconnected.

• Make sure that the place of installation (switch cabinet etc.) has been disconnected
from the power supply.

WARNING
Safety functions of EP-19xx modules can be impaired. When EP-19xx
modules are installed in the RSTi-EP station, observe the following points:

• Use wire-end ferrules in combination with flexible/multi-conductor cables.

• Ensure that for safety inputs in the configuration without test pulses the cabling
prevents external short circuits (refer to DIN EN ISO 13849-2 Table D.4).

7.4.1 Wiring of Modules with Standard Connectors

Wires with a cross section between 0.14 mm² and 1.5 mm² (AWG 26 – 16)
can be connected.

The external dimensions of the crimped wire-end ferrules must conform

with IEC-60947-1.

RSTi-EP modules (except HD modules) and bus network adapters are

equipped with the spring-style connector system. Single-strand and fine-
strand lines with wire-end ferrules can be inserted without the need for a
tool.

• Each cable must be the optimal length, so the bending radii observe the
manufacturer's specifications.

• Strip the insulation from the lines to a length of approx. 10 mm ± 1 mm (0.4 in

± 0.04 in), even if you are using wire-end ferrules. If you use wire-end ferrules
with plastic collars, strip the wires to 12 mm ± 1 mm (0.5 in ± 0.04 in).

• Connect all lines according to wiring diagram.

For the usage and handling of the spring-style system, refer to Section,
Removing/Replacing Cables.

7.4.2 Wiring of Modules with HD Connectors EP-8360

When using HD-connectors EP-8360 qualified wires with a cross section

between 0.14 mm² and 0.35 mm² (AWG 22 – 26) and an outer wire diameter
between 1.0 und 1.6 mm (0.04 to 0.06 in) can be connected by insulation
displacement connectors (IDC). A list of SAI cables approved for the use
Installation 467
User Manual Section 7
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

with HD-connectors (Document-No. GFK-2971) is available to download

from the https://www.emerson.com/Industrial-Automation-
Controls/support.

Required tools:

• Multi-stripax 6-16 (9202210000)

• Pressing tool PWZ-UR20-HD (1525820000)

Note: When using HD-connectors EP-8360 two HD connectors must always be

applied into one slot of the connector frame.

Installation 468
User Manual Section 7
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Figure 296: Application of HD Connectors

• Each cable must be the optimal length, so the bending radii observe the
manufacturer’s specifications.

• Strip the insulation from the cable to a length of approx. 20 mm (0.8 in) using
the multi-stripax 6-16.

• Insert all wires according to wiring diagram as far as they will go into the
clamping unit of the connector. Note the marking (pin 1 to 4) on the transparent
presorted.

• Apply the pressing tool and check whether all wires are inserted as far as they
will go.

• Press the HD connector using the pressing tool.

• Insert the wired connector into the module’s connector frame.

Installation 469
User Manual Section 7
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

7.5 Insulation Test

Insulation tests on the RSTi-EP station must be done according to
regulations, in any case, they are necessary before each commissioning.

CAUTION
The product can be destroyed by a test voltage which is too high.

Note during insulation test:

• Within one channel the test voltage between 24 V and GND must not exceed
28.8 V†

• A maximum test voltage of 500 V can be applied to all other connection points.

• Up to 4,000 V can be applied to the modules EP-2814 and

• EP-2714:

− between the four channels

− between one channel and the system voltage.

†
Emerson recommends short-circuiting 24 V and GND on all power
supply connectors (fieldbus network adapter, power-feed modules, and
EP-19xx).

Installation 470
User Manual Section 7
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Section 8: RSTi-EP CPE200 Series

Controllers Installation
8.1 DIN Rail Installation
1. Begin by releasing the three closed levers located on the top of the CPE200
controller. Pull the levers toward the face of the controller to the open
position.

Figure 297: Release Levers

Installation 471
User Manual Section 7
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

2. Attach the controller to the DIN rail. The controller should rest on the rail, but
be able to move freely side-to-side.

Figure 298: Mount to DIN Rail

Installation 472
User Manual Section 7
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

1. Slide the controller along the DIN rail into place. The controller should be in the left-
most position and rest against a stop block (if applicable).

Figure 299: Slide Controller to the Left

Installation 473
User Manual Section 7
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

2. Repeat the steps for each of the IO modules. Connect the first IO module into connectors on
the right side of the controller. Each subsequent IO module will connect to the previous
module.

Figure 300: Slide and Connect Each I/O Module

Installation 474
User Manual Section 7
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

3. After all the I/O modules have been connected, mount the protective endplate into the last
I/O module to protect the exposed connectors.

Figure 301: Slide the End Plate into the Last Module

Installation 475
User Manual Section 7
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

8.2 Thermal Requirements

Figure 14: Minimum Distance Requirements

Installation 476
User Manual Section 7
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

8.3 Controller Start-up

8.3.1 Required Components

• EPXCPE200 controller

• Power for this equipment this equipment shall be provided by one or two
independent power supplies that provide an SELV source with a minimum
32 V dc listed fuse with 10A max rating for each independent power rail.
The 4-pole pluggable terminal block for the power input and
output terminal block header located on the front is installed on the
connection frame that is shipped with the package. This mating connector
accepts wire sizes 26 to 16 AWG (0.361 mm to 1.29mm). Strip the
insulation from the lines to a length of approx. 0.4 in ± 0.04 in (10 mm ± 1
mm), (even if you are using wire-end ferrules. If you use wire-end ferrules
with plastic collars, strip the wires to 0.5 in ± 0.04 in (12 mm ± 1 mm). To
insert fine stranded wires without wire-end ferrules, the pusher must be
pressed in with a screwdriver and released to latch the wire

• The temperature rating for copper wire: 80 °C. Wiring should be stripped
before connecting to the mating connector and cannot exceed 30 m in
length

• A DIN rail, typically mounted in an enclosure

• A computer running PAC Machine Edition (PME) configuration and

programming software. PME Version 10.00.0.9413.

• Ethernet cable for connecting the programming computer running PME

to the EPXCPE controller.

Installation 477
User Manual Section 7
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

8.3.2 Basic Installation Steps

For start-up and configuration of the EPXCPE, complete the following steps:

1. Mount the EPXCPE to a DIN-rail as outlined in section DIN Rail Installation.

2. Connect the EPXCPE to the power supply.

3. Plug the Ethernet cable from the programmer computer (the computer that
runs PAC Machine Edition) into Port 3. (For the EPXCPE205, connect the
Ethernet cable to Ports 1 or 2.)

4. Plug the Ethernet cable for the PROFINET network into Port 1 or Port 2.

5. Apply power to the EPXCPE.

8.3.3 LED Behavior During Startup

After connecting to the power supply, apply power to the EPXCPE. The controllers
will require several seconds to power up.

Power-up LED Sequence:

1. The CPU’s REM IO LED will blink GREEN when the power is applied before
turning it off.

2. The RUN LED will turn solid GREEN before turning it off.

3. The OK LED will turn solid GREEN and remain on.

Figure 302: LED Illumination Sequence

8.3.4 Installation in Hazardous Areas

Refer to Installation and Maintenance Requirements (GFK-3110) that shipped with

the device..
Installation 478
User Manual Section 8
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Section 9: Earthing and Shielding

The terms earths and shields are classified according to their relation to
human safety or system safety. An earth is installed primarily to protect
human life, and for this reason it is referred to as the protective earth (PE)
conductor. A shield, on the other hand, serves to ensure the trouble-free
operation of an electrotechnical system as well as electromagnetic
compatibility.

The main differences between the two terms are therefore the electrical
design and installation. A shield is not designed to transfer power, even
though leakage currents can flow on it – something which must be
avoided. In contrast, a PE conductor must be capable, at least in the short
term, of discharging high residual currents (IEC 60947-7-2). The
corresponding short-term current resistance of the PE connection must
be 120 A/mm² (77419.2 A/in2) of the connected cross-section. To make
sure a shielding concept is able to work properly, the shield impedance
must be 10 times larger than the impedance of the earth potential.

The following figure shows how these two topics relate to each other in
application. As shown in the figure below, the cable's shielding is
connected to the earth potential so that the shield's current can be
discharged. Depending on the sensitivity of the system, an attempt is
made to create separate potential areas for this. However, it is still typical
to mix the areas, i.e. the shielding has a common equipotential bonding
(earth). This figure shows how the number of shields and PE conductors
that need to be connected can increase quite rapidly (in this case only
one component is used). The shielding and earthing systems must be
planned carefully to provide adequate safeguards for personnel and
equipment. The following sections describe the complexity and special
characteristics in more detail.

Earthing and shielding 479

User Manual Section 8
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Figure 303: Connection Diagram of a Frequency Converter

9.1 Earthing of Shielded Cables

Electrical and electronic systems must be designed such that they are
largely safeguarded against electrical interference, thus enabling them to
operate securely even in the case of transient interference voltages.

Electrical interference can be introduced into electric circuits in a variety

of ways. The most frequent causes are due to inductive interference. In
addition, galvanic and capacitive coupling as well as electrical fields and
other processes are causes for interference voltages. Here, high-
frequency voltage fluctuations – known as transients – are the cause of
interference with a high level of effectiveness.

Earthing and shielding 480

User Manual Section 8
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

9.1.1 Shielded Cables Increase Interference Resistance

The sources of interference voltages can rarely be eliminated, and even

then, not always completely. Thus, it is necessary to take measures to
combat their effect. In general, the more effectively interference voltages
can be kept away from circuit elements or can be discharged, the less
electrical circuits are affected. This can be accomplished in a variety of
ways with varying levels of effectiveness. A very effective measure, for
safeguarding against inductive effects, that is, ensuring electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC), is the shielding of electrically functional components
to earth potential. In doing so, for instance, components are installed in
metallic, earthed housings and the connecting lines are equipped with
shielding.

In general, it can be said that interference from cables can be combated

by routing cables as far away as possible from each other, keeping the
common return as short as possible and using twisted-pair wire. Far
better protection, however, is provided by completely shielding of all
cables. This is the most effective measure that can be taken against the
coupling of interference signals.

The best type of shielding consists of a braided mesh sleeve that uses
individual wires made of non-magnetic materials (copper, aluminum).
The braided mesh should be sufficiently large and be as thick as possible.
For cables that are equipped with foil shields, it is necessary to be aware
of the low mechanical strength and the low current-carrying capacity of
the shielding.

9.1.2 Proper Use of Shielded Cables

The shielding of cables will only result in the desired effect if this is
implemented properly. Incorrect earthing or the use of improper
components that perform their task inadequately reduces or even
eliminates the effect. Placing the shielding at any spot on the earth
potential will not suffice, as this earth connection may have no effect on
high frequencies. In addition, ground loops must also be taken into
consideration. Furthermore, the shielding should be earthed over a large
surface area. Beyond that, the quality of the shield conductor and
earthing accessories is also important.

In practice, the shield is still often twisted and connected to a terminal

point. There is very high attenuation (voltage drop) on these connections,
Earthing and shielding 481
User Manual Section 8
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

especially for high-frequency interference. Therefore, this type of

shielding should not be used, even for short cable lengths. The shielding
of the cable is practically negated and can, at best, be helpful for low
frequency interference. We recommend that there is a large amount of
surface contact with the braided shield of the cable.

There are generally four distinct types of coupling:

• Galvanic coupling
• Capacitive coupling
• Inductive coupling
• Radiation coupling
These types of interference usually occur mixed together, but they can be
categorized as follows:

• Electromagnetic fields
• Ripple voltage (50 Hz)
• Lightning
• Interference pulses (current, voltage)
• Transient surge voltages
• Radio interference
• ESD (electrostatic discharge)
• Burst
• Mains feedback

Note: Another area of concern as regards shield contact is the flow within the conductor. Temperature
changes caused by the current lead to changes in the conductor cross-section. A rigid contact can
therefore only be partially effective. A self-adjusting contact is what is really required.

Figure 304: Use of a Clamping Bracket

9.1.3 Effective Shielding

Earthing and shielding 482
User Manual Section 8
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

It is important that the shielding is not positioned on the earth of the

connected component, but on the protective earth. In the case of
components that are installed in a metal housing, the shielding must be
positioned to this housing. If no earthed housing is available, the
shielding is positioned on a separate earth.

When installing ground connections on shielding, it is generally also

important that no earth loops are created. The smaller the earth loop, the
less the danger of the induction of interference voltages. It is therefore
most suitable to have a purely neutral-point installation.

The following sketches show the possible shielding connections to

protective earth.

A one-sided connection of the shielding protects against capacitive

coupling of interference voltages.

Figure 305: Shield Grounding at One End Only

If you use a two-sided shielding connection, make sure that

compensating current (different earth potentials) does not flow through
the cable shield.

Figure 306: Shield Grounding at Both Ends

If you wish to avoid the disadvantages associated with creating an earth

loop with two-sided shields, it is recommended you connect one side of
the shield through a high impedance.

Figure 307: Shield Grounding at Both Ends with High-Impedance at

One End

Earthing and shielding 483

User Manual Section 8
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

For longer lengths of shielded cables, such as if a sensor must be added

to a control panel, a potential difference between both end points must
not be ignored.

However, such shield conductors are relatively expensive and require

more time in working with them. Another possibility would be to place an
additional voltage equalizing cable between the measurement location
and the control panel. The shield can then be hooked up on both sides.

A high-impedance earth connection is also another option. In the control

panel, the shield is then connected to the earth potential, and the shield
has a high-impedance connection to earth at the measurement location
via a gas discharge tube. This solves the problem of a potential transfer
and 50-Hz humming.

For non-isolated measurement locations, two gas discharge tubes must

be installed. One connects the shield to earth, and the other connects it
to the non-isolated measurement location. This method prevents a
galvanic coupling between the measurement circuit and the earthed
measurement location.

Figure 308: Shielding using Gas Discharge Tubes

Earthing and shielding 484

User Manual Section 8
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

9.2 Potential Ratios

9.2.1 Basic Aspects

Concerning the potential ratios of a RSTi-EP system, the following aspects

must be kept in mind:

• The power supply of the network adapter and I/O modules as well as
field power is provided via the power supply at the power-feed
module (PF)

• A potential-free design is made possible using an isolated power

supply at the system power supply and the field power supply

The block diagram shows the typical design of a RSTi-EP system. The
power supply concept here makes sure that, starting with a certain
capacity utilization, power refresh is implemented using power-feed
modules.

Figure 309: RSTi-EP Power Supply Concept

9.2.2 Potential-Free Design

In a potential-free design, the reference potentials of control and load

circuits are galvanically isolated from each other. A potential-free design
is necessary for the following:

• Use of the power-feed module (EP-19xx), i.e. in all AC load circuits

• DC load circuits that cannot be coupled

Potential-free installation depends on the type of earthing.

Earthing and shielding 485

User Manual Section 8
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

9.2.3 Non-Isolated Design

In a non-isolated design, the reference potentials of control and load

circuits are galvanically connected to each other.

Figure 310: RSTi-EP Earthing Concept

The spring contacts underneath the module and the network adapter
snap into the DIN rail to make a connection.

9.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

RSTi-EP products completely meet EMC requirements. EMC planning,
however, is necessary prior to installation.

Aspects to consider include all potential interference sources such as

galvanic, inductive and capacitive couplings, as well as radiation
couplings.

9.3.1 Ensuring EMC

To ensure EMC, the following basic principles must be observed during

installation of the RSTi-EP modules:

• Proper, extensive earthing of inactive metal parts

• Correct shielding of cables and equipment

• Proper layout of wires – cabling

Earthing and shielding 486

User Manual Section 8
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

• Creation of a uniform reference potential and earthing of all electrical

equipment

• Special EMC measures for special applications (e.g. frequency

converters, servo drives)

• Contactors and relay coils must be equipped with the corresponding

interference suppressors

9.3.2 Earthing of Inactive Metal Parts

The earthing of all inactive metal parts reduces the influence of coupled
interference. For this purpose, all inactive metal parts (such as switch
cabinets, cabinet doors, support beams, mounting plates, DIN rails, etc.)
must be connected to each other over a large surface area with low
impedance, whereby a uniform reference potential is ensured for all
control unit elements.

Required measures:

• Removal of the insulating layer around screw connections. Protection

of connection points against corrosion

• Connection of moving earthed components (cabinet doors, separated

mounting plates, etc.) through short earthing straps with large
surfaces

• Where possible, avoid use of aluminum parts, because aluminum

oxidizes easily and is therefore unsuited for earthing

9.3.3 PE Connection

The connection from earth to the PE (protective earth) connection must

be done centrally.

WARNING
In the event of a fault, the earth must never take on a dangerous contact voltage, which is
why it must be connected to a PE conductor.

9.3.4 Unearthed Operation

In the event of unearthed operation, the corresponding safety

regulations must be observed.

Earthing and shielding 487

User Manual Section 8
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

9.3.5 DIN Rails

Notes concerning the use of DIN rails:

• Large-surface, low-impedance attachment on the mounting plate and

corresponding contact with the carrier system using screws or rivets

• Proper earthing

• Use corrosion-proof DIN rails

• Remove the insulating layer on painted, anodized or insulated metal

components in the area around the connection point

• Protect the connection point against corrosion (e.g. using grease;

Attention: only use grease suitable for the purpose)

Earthing and shielding 488

User Manual Section 8
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

9.3.6 Cabinet Design According to EMC Guidelines

good contact with a large part of the

Figure 311: Cabinet Design
clamping bracket.
Features for EMC Compliance
3. Mounting plate

The support beam for holding

control components must be
connected to a large part of the
cabinet housing.

4. Busbar

The busbar must be connected via

the rail holding fixture. The cable
shields are fixed to the busbar.

19. Protective earth conductor rail

The protective earth conductor rail

must likewise be attached to a large
part of the mounting plate, and it
must be connected to the protective
earth conductor system via an
external cable with a cross-section of
at least 10 mm2, in order to

1. Earthing strips discharge interference current.

Earthing strips must be used for 5. Protective earth terminal strip

connecting inactive metal parts if it is The protective earth terminal strip
not possible to connect two large must be connected to the protective
pieces of metal. Use short earthing earth conductor rail in a neutral-
strips with large surfaces. point configuration.

2. Clamping bracket for signal 6. Cable to protective conductor

cables system (earthing point)
If shielded signal cables are used, The cable must be connected to a
the shield must be attached to the large part of the protective
clamping bracket (KLBÜ series) on conductor system.
the busbar over a large surface. The
Refer to EMC Directive 2004/108/EC
braided shield must cover and make

Earthing and shielding 489

User Manual Section 8
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

9.4 Shielding of Cables

To prevent the coupling of interference voltages and the decoupling of
interference fields in cables, only shielded cables made from well-
conducting material (copper or aluminum) with braided shielding and a
coverage of at least 80 % should be used in the design of a cable shield.

Only when a cable shield is connected to the local reference potential on

both sides is it possible to achieve optimal shielding against electric and
magnetic fields. Exceptions are possible, for example, with high-
impedance, symmetrical or analogue signal cables. If a shield is attached
on only one side, this merely achieves an isolation against electric fields.

CAUTION
Requirements for effective shielding design:

• The shield connection to the shield bus should be low impedance

• The shield must be connected directly at its entrance into the system
• Keep cable ends as short as possible
• Do not use cable shields for equipotential bonding

When connecting a data cable using a sub-D connector, the connection

must be made through the connector's shield collar and never through
pin 1.

The data cable's shield must be attached to the shield bus with the
insulation stripped away. The shield is to be connected and attached with
clamping brackets or similar metal fixing devices. The shield bus must be
connected to the reference potential surface through a low impedance
[e.g. fastening point with a separation of 10 to 20 cm (3.94” x 7.87”)]. The
brackets must surround and contact a large part of the shield.

Isolation of the cable shield should be avoided. Instead, it should be

routed into the system (for example, the switch cabinet) up to the
interface connection.

Note: When shielding field-bus cables, the installation guidelines for the respective field
buses must be observed. (Refer the websites of the field bus organizations.)

Earthing and shielding 490

User Manual Section 8
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

CAUTION
• If it is only possible to have a one-sided shield connection for reasons specific to the
circuit or equipment, the second side of the cable shield can be routed to the local
reference potential via a capacitor (with short connections). To prevent disruptive
discharges when interference pulses occur, a varistor or a resistor can also be wired in
parallel to the capacitor.

• As an alternative, a doubled version (galvanically isolated) can be used, whereby the

inner shield is connected on one side and the outside shield is connected on both
sides.

9.4.1 Equipotential Bonding

If system components are positioned separately from each other,

potential differences may arise, provided that:

• Power is provided from different sources

• The earthing is implemented at different system parts, despite the

cable shields being connected at both sides

A voltage equalizing cable must be used for equipotential bonding.

WARNING
The shield must not be used for equipotential bonding.

The following features are essential for a voltage equalizing cable:

• In the case of cable shields on both ends, the impedance of the

equalizing cable must be considerably smaller than that of the shield
connection (maximum 10 % of its impedance)

• When the length of the equalizing cable is less than 200 m (656.2 ft),
its cross-section must be at least 16 mm2 (0.025 in2). If the cable is
greater than 200 m (656.2 ft) in length, a cross-section of at least 25
mm2 (0.039 in2) is necessary.

• Large-surface connection with the PE conductor or the earthing and

corrosion protection are requirements for long-term safe operation

• They must be made of copper or galvanized steel

• In order to keep the enclosed area as small as possible, the

equalizing cable and signal cable must be routed as close to each
other as possible

Earthing and shielding 491

User Manual Section 8
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

9.4.2 Inductance Wiring

For inductive loads, it is recommended that protective circuits be placed

directly on the load. The earth (PE/FE) must be connected in a neutral-
point configuration according to regulations for switch cabinets.

CAUTION
When disassembled, RSTi-EP modules and network adapters are at risk of electrostatic
discharge (ESD). Therefore, avoid touching bus connections with bare hands, as this can lead
to damage due to electrostatic discharges

Figure 312: Equipotential Bonding

Earthing and shielding 492

User Manual Section 9
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Section 10: Commissioning

WARNING
• Explosion risk - Prior to starting work, make sure that there is not a potentially
explosive atmosphere.

• During commissioning, the system may be manipulated to such an extent that can
result in risks to life and material damage.

• Ensure that system components cannot start up unintentionally.

CAUTION
Conduct an insulation test before each commissioning (refer to the section, General
Contact Information).

The procedures applied during commissioning depend on which control

unit is being used on site. The descriptions in this Section use
commissioning with a PROFINET network adapter and the PAC Machine
Edition as an example.

10.1 Requirements
Before you start the commissioning work, the following requirements
must be fulfilled.

• The control unit must be in operation.

• The RSTi-EP station must be completely assembled and wired up.

• The control unit and RSTi-EP station must be connected via fieldbus,
and a PC/laptop must also be connected.

• The power supply must be turned on.

If these requirements are fulfilled, the following LEDs light up:

• On the bus network adapter

— The PWR LED lights up green.

— For the port to which the control unit is connected, the LINK
LED lights up green and the ACT LED lights up yellow.

• On the modules, the Status LED lights up green.

Commissioning 493
User Manual Section 9
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

10.2 Configuring EPXPNS001/EPXPNS101

To add an EPXPNS001/EPXPNS101 to a LAN

From the Navigator right-click on the EPXPNS001/EPXPNS101 module

and select Add I/O Device. The PROFINET Device Catalog displays.

Figure 313

From the PROFINET Device Catalog, expand the

EPXPNS001/EPXPNS101 line and select the module type:

Figure 314

Select the EPXPNS001/EPXPNS101 type and click OK. The

EPXPNS001/EPXPNS101 displays in the Navigator window:

Figure 315

Commissioning 494
User Manual Section 9
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

The device name, IP address of the EPXPNS001/EPXPNS101 can be

changed by right-clicking on the scanner and selecting properties.

Figure 316

Note: When firmware is updated, the IP address is not retained when configured using
the master module. But when configured in web server and the same IP is used in
the master, it is retained during PROFINET Network Adaptor firmware update.

10.2.1 Configuring EPXPNS001/EPXPNS101 Parameters

After adding a EPXPNS001/EPXPNS101 to the LAN, its parameters can be

configured by either double-clicking on the scanner in the Navigator, or
right-clicking and selecting Configure from the menu.

PROFINET Scanner Parameters (Redundancy Tab) for

(EPXPNS101 only)
This Tab is available only for EPXPNS101 and not for the EPXPNS001
module. If the EPXPNS101 must be used for PROFINET System
Redundancy with HSB system (Type S2), then the “Redundancy Mode”
parameter needs to be set as “HSB CPU Redundancy”.

Figure 317: Parameter Selection

Commissioning 495
User Manual Section 9
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

PROFINET Scanner Parameters IO-device Access Point

Figure 318: Scanner Parameters Access Point

Inputs Default: Choose whether the RX3i CPU will set inputs from any
modules in the EPXPNS001 module’s remote node to Off or Hold Last
State in the following cases:

• The EPXPNS001/ EPXPNS101 is not operational or is removed.

• The EPXPNS001/ EPXPNS101 cannot reach the scanner due to cable

or network configuration issues.

• The EPXPNS001/ EPXPNS101 is not able to scan the VersaMax module

in its remote node.

I/O Scan Set: Specifies the I/O scan set to be assigned to the EPXPNS001/
EPXPNS101. Scan sets are defined in the CPU’s Scan Sets tab. The valid
range is 1 through 32; the default value is 1.

PROFINET Scanner Parameters (Media Redundancy

Tab)
By default, the EPXPNS001/ EPXPNS101 is not set up for Media
Redundancy. If the system will use Media Redundancy, open the Media
Redundancy Tab and select Client.

Figure 319: Scanner Parameters Media Redundancy Tab

Commissioning 496
User Manual Section 9
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

PROFINET Scanner Parameters (General Parameters

Tab)
The EPXPNS001/ EPXPNS101 has below module parameters:

Figure 320: Scanner Parameters General Parameters Tab

Process Alarm, Diagnostic Alarm:

User can select the process alarm, diagnostic alarm to be enabled or
disabled. By default, they are disabled.

Type of Diagnostic:
The Type of diagnostic can be selected either “Extended Channel
diagnostic” or “Vendor Specific diagnostic”.

Figure 321: Diagnostic Types

Behavior of Outputs on Field Bus Error:

The behavior of the outputs can be set to all outputs to go off, set to
substitute value or Hold last state.

Figure 322: Hold last state

Module Behavior on Hot Swap:

When the user performs hot swap, user can either continue data
exchange or can behavior like field bus error.

Figure 323: Module Behavior on Hot Swap

Commissioning 497
User Manual Section 9
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Data Format:
Use can select either Motorola or Intel data format. By default, it is
Motorola.

Figure 324: Data Format

Lock Force Mode:

User can enable the force of outputs while the slave is communicating
with the master or can lock the force mode so that the outputs cannot be
forced.

Figure 325: Lock Force Mode

These parameters below are added from revisions: EPXPNS001-ABAE and

EPXPNS101-AAAA.

Option Handling:
User can either enable or disable the Option handling. By default, it is
“disabled”.

Group Module Diagnostic Alarm:

User can either enable or disable the Group Module Diagnostic Alarm. By
default, it is “disabled”.

Figure 326: Group Module Diagnostic Alarm

Reduce Return of Submodule Alarm:

User can either enable or disable the Reduce Return of Submodule Alarm.
By default, it is “disabled”.

Figure 327: Reduce Return of Submodule Alarm

Commissioning 498
User Manual Section 9
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

PROFINET Scanner Parameters (GSDML Tab)

The GSDML tab 0f the EPXPNS001/ EPXPNS101 module displays the
information from its GSDML file. See an example below:

Figure 328: Scanner Parameters GSDML Tab

Figure 329: Scanner Parameters GSDML Tab Continued

This information cannot be edited.

Commissioning 499
User Manual Section 9
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Double-clicking on Interface 1 icon of the EPXPNS001/EPXPNS101 module

in the Navigator displays additional GSDML parameters. See an example
below:

Figure 330: GSDML Details

Double-clicking on the EPXPNS001/EPXPNS101 module’s Port 1 and Port 2

icons in the Navigator also displays Settings and additional GSDML
parameters for the scanner. See an example below:

Figure 331: GSDML Details Continued

Commissioning 500
User Manual Section 9
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

10.2.2 Adding EPXPNS001/ EPXPNS101 Modules to a

Remote Node

To add a module to the remote node, right click on the

EPXPNS001/EPXPNS101 icon in the Navigator and select Change Module
List. In the right pane of the Change Module List window, expand the list
of module types.

Figure 332: Change Module List

Commissioning 501
User Manual Section 9
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Select modules from the list and drag them to their slot locations in the
remote node.

Figure 333: Selecting Modules

(If you need to delete a module on the left, select it and press the
keyboard Delete key). When the modules on the left are correct, click OK
to add them to the configuration.

10.2.3 Configuring EPXPNS001/EPXPNS101 Module

Parameters

After adding RSTi-EP modules to the remote node, their parameters must
be configured. For all EPXPNS001/EPXPNS101 modules, this includes
configuring a set of basic parameters (such as: reference address, length,
general parameters).

Commissioning 502
User Manual Section 9
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

10.3 Configuring EPXPBS001

The number and types of slave devices that can exchange data with the
master are constrained by memory resources within the master module.
The amount of memory available for the PROFIBUS configuration is
affected by the number and types of slave modules in the network
configuration. The total slave configuration data size is limited to
approximately 9KB.

10.3.1 Adding Slaves and Modules

• To add slaves and modules

1. Start Emersion PAC Machine Edition.

2. In the Navigator window, right-click the EPXPBS001 and select

Add Slave. The Slave Catalog dialog box displays. This dialog box
lists the slave devices that are available to configure in the
PROFIBUS network.

Figure 334: Slave Catalog

3. Select a slave device and click OK. The Slave Properties dialog
box displays.

Note: If the slave module is not in the list but you have a GSD file for it, click Have Disk.

Commissioning 503
User Manual Section 9
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Figure 335: Slave ID Properties

Selection Description
Name The name assigned to the slave. You can edit the name or use the
default name. The name appears in the title bar of the dialog box (in
the figure above, the default name is Station 1.
Station The address of the slave on a PROFIBUS DP network. The slave is
defaulted to the next highest available address.
Description An optional description for the slave device. The Inspector displays a
maximum of 254 characters. However, more than 254 characters can
be entered in the dialog box.
Vendor The manufacturer of the slave device, from the GSD file. This is a
read-only field
Device ID The ID of the PROFIBUS device. This is a read-only field.
Model The model of the slave device. This is a read-only field.
Hardware Rev. The hardware revision of the device, from the GSD file. This is a read-
only field.
Class The class of the slave device. This is a read-only field.
Software Rev. The software revision of the device, from the GSD file. This is a read-
only field.
4. Enter Name, Description and Station if desired.

5. To add modules to the slave, select the Modules tab and click
Add. The Select New Module dialog box displays.

Note: To add the slave to the configuration, you must configure at least one module.

Commissioning 504
User Manual Section 9
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Figure 336: Select New Module

Note: The Select New Module list of modules is determined by the .GSD for the slave type.
Each type of slave may have a different list of modules.
6. Select a module and click OK. The module is added to the
Modules list in the Slave Properties dialog box. Add additional
modules as required for your system. The following figure shows
the Modules tab after several modules have been added.

Figure 337: Slave ID Properties

To change the order (position) of a module, select it and click Properties.

The Module Properties dialog box displays. Enter the numerical value of
the new position the module is to have. The position numbering starts at
0.

The other information in this dialog box is generated by the GSD file
associated with the Slave module.

Note: The Data field corresponds to the module’s configuration identifier as defined in the
PROFIBUS specification.

Commissioning 505
User Manual Section 9
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Figure 338: Properties Example

7. When finished adding modules, click OK. The modules display

under the Slave node in the Hardware Configuration.

Note: To add, remove, or change the order of modules associated with an existing slave,
right-click the Slave node in the Hardware Configuration and select Configure. The
Properties dialog box for the selected slave opens.

10.3.2 Configuring Module Data Areas

• To configure module data areas: Right-click the Module node in the

Hardware Configuration, and select Configure. The Parameter
Editor window for the module displays.

The values for read-only parameters are supplied from the GSD text file
that defines the PROFIBUS module's characteristics. Most devices have
one data area with inputs, outputs or both. Some devices have multiple
data areas that are shown as additional rows.

Commissioning 506
User Manual Section 9
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Data Area Parameters

Parameter Description
Area This value is an index beginning at 1. Read-only.
Type Specifies whether the data is input or output as well as type, digital or analog.
Value can be Digital In, Analog In, Digital Out, or Analog Out.
Ref Specifies the memory area that is used to map the data area. Regardless of
Address the reference type used, input areas are considered as consumed and cannot
overlap, while output areas are considered as produced and may overlap.
Allowable Ranges: %AI, %AQ, %I, %Q, %G, %R, %W, %T, %M.
If the number of bytes is odd, analog memories are not allowed and
selections are limited to: %I, %Q, %G, %M
Length Specifies the length of the reference. Includes the entire data area by default.
If set to 0, the data area is not mapped.
For discrete memories, the allowable range is [0, 8, 16, …, X]
For analog memories, the allowable range is [0, 1, 2, …, X]
Swap The swap bytes field is used to manipulate the byte order. Because PROFIBUS
Bytes devices often do not follow the standard, the ability to change byte ordering
is provided. The analog areas travel in MSB and should be swapped if LSB is
required.
• If Type is Digital and the module has an odd number of bytes, Swap
Bytes is set to False (no swapping) and read-only.
• If Type is Digital and the module has an even number of bytes,
default is set to False. Setting Swap Bytes to True causes the LSB and
MSB to be swapped before the data is mapped into PLC memory.
• If Type is Analog, default is set to False. Setting Swap Bytes to True
causes the LSB and MSB to be swapped before the data is mapped
into PLC memory.
• For EP-5111, EP-5112, EP-5212, EP-5442 and EP-5422 modules, user
should set Swap Bytes to true. In the application, if the user wants to
access the DWORD for these modules, use SWAP_DWORD function
block.

10.3.3

Commissioning 507
User Manual Section 9
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

10.3.4 Configuring DP-V1 Settings for a Slave

Whether a slave device supports DP-V1 functions or not is indicated in the

GSD file provided by the vendor of that device. For devices that do
provide DP-V1 functions, support is disabled by default.

• To enable DP-V1:

1. From the Project Navigator, right-click the Slave and select

Properties.

Figure 339: Inspector

2. In the Properties window, click the ellipsis (…) in the DPV1 Settings
field. The PROFIBUS DPV1 Setup dialog box displays.

Figure 340: Profibus DPV1 Setup

Commissioning 508
User Manual Section 9
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

PROFIBUS DPV1 Setup Parameters

The default values in this dialog box are populated by the GSD file
associated with the device.

Parameter Description
Enable DPV1 Check this box to enable DPV1 settings for the selected PROFIBUS
Support device. The device's GSD file determines which settings are editable
and which are read-only.
Clear this check box to disable DPV1 settings. The values of all
parameters are retained until the DPV1 settings are enabled again
for the selected device.
Maximum Channel The maximum length in bytes of the DPV1 telegrams. The slave
Data Length adapts its buffer size for the respective data count.
Valid range: 4 through n bytes, where n is the value specified in the
GS? file.
Maximum Alarm The maximum length in bytes of the DPV1-Alarm telegrams.
PDU Length Valid range: 4 through n, where n is calculated by the following
formulas
m = Max_Diag_Data_Len - 6
n = Max(Min(m,64),4)
Max_Diag_Data_Len is a value specified in the GS? file. If m is greater
than 64, n is set to 64. If m is less than 4, then n is set to 4.
Otherwise, n is set to m.
If n is set to 4, the only valid Maximum Alarm PDU Length is 4.
Default: The value n calculated by the above formulas.
Diagnostic Update The maximum number of extra diagnosis cycles that the master
Delay waits to obtain from a slave the release for a DATA_EXCHANGE. If the
Diagnostic Update Delay is set to 0, the master waits for one
diagnosis cycle before reporting an error. If the Diagnostic Update
Delay is set to 15, the master waits for 16 diagnosis cycles before
reporting an error. The master waits for one diagnosis cycle more
than the value of the Diagnostic Update Delay.
Some newer slave devices require more time for the consistency
testing for the processing of the SET_PRM parameterizing telegrams.
Therefore, a simple diagnosis cycle may be insufficient until the
participant can inform the Master of the release for the
DATA_EXCHANGE.
Valid range: 0 through 15.
Maximum Active The maximum number of possible active alarms.
Alarms Choices:
• 1 alarm of each type
• 2, 4, 8, 12, 16, 24 or 32 alarms in total

Commissioning 509
User Manual Section 9
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Slave Functions

Function Description
Extra Alarm Service The service access point (SAP) through which the master quits
Access Point alarms.
Choices:
• Master Alarm acknowledge SAP51: Master quits alarms via
SAP51.
• Master Alarm acknowledge SAP50: Master quits alarms via
SAP50.
Configuration Data The DPV1 data types.
Convention Choices:
• Configuration Data of EN 50170
• Configuration Data of DPV1

Enabled Alarms

Alarm Description
Pull Plug Alarm Modifiable or read-only, depending on the GSD file. When this box is
checked, a slot signals the withdrawal of a module or the insertion of
a module.
Process Alarm Modifiable or read-only, depending on the GSD file. When this check
box is checked, a process alarm signals the occurrence of an event in
the connected process. For example, the event may be "upper limit
value exceeded."
Diagnostic Alarm Modifiable or read-only, depending on the GSD file. When this check
box is checked, a diagnostic alarm signals an event within a slot. For
example, events may be over temperature or short circuit.
Manufacture Alarm Modifiable or read-only, depending on the GSD file. When this box is
checked, manufacturer-specific alarms are enabled.
Status Alarm Modifiable or read-only, depending on the GSD file. When this check
box is checked, a status alarm signals a change in the state (such as
run, stop, or ready) of a module.
Update Alarm Modifiable or read-only, depending on the GSD file. When this check
box is checked, an update alarm signals the change of a parameter in
a slot, for example, by a local operation or remote access.

Commissioning 510
User Manual Section 9
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

10.4 Configuring EPXETC001

• To configure EPXETC001 using CoDeSys

1. Open CoDeSys software, right-click CoDeSys and select Add

Device.

Figure 341: Device List

2. From the Add Device dialog box, click to select Append device,
then double-click EtherCAT Master.

Figure 342: Add Device EtherCAT Master

Commissioning 511
User Manual Section 9
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

3. From the CoDeSys software Tree View, select EtherCAT_Master and

from the Tools menu, select Install device.

Figure 343: Install Device

4. From the Install Device Description dialog box, select the

EMERSON_EPXETC001_TwinCAT.xml file and click Open.

Figure 344: Opening File

Commissioning 512
User Manual Section 9
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

5. From the Add Device dialog box, click to select Append device,
select the EPXETC001 device, and click Add Device.

Figure 345: Selecting Device to Add

6. From the Add Device dialog box, select the I/O devices from the
list and click Add device.

Figure 346: Adding Device

Commissioning 513
User Manual Section 9
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

To change the module parameters

1. From the CodeSys software Tree View, select the Network

Adapter and the Startup parameters tab.

2. Right-click the Name column, select Add from the drop-down

menu, select the parameter details to add, and click OK.

Figure 347: Startup Parameters under Network Adapter

10.5 Configuring EPXMBE001/EPXMBE101

The Modbus/TCP Network Adapter, EPXMBE001/EPXMBE101,
Modbus/TCP register mapping is automatically determined by the I/O
modules included in the physical configuration. Network Adapter and I/O
Module parameters are configured using the Network Adapter Web
Server interface. Refer to Section Modbus®TCP Network Adapter
EPXMBE001/EPXMBE101 for more information on the automatic
Modbus/TCP register mapping. Refer to Section 11: Web Server, for more
information on editing the Web Server interface of the Network Adapter
and I/O Module parameters.

Commissioning 514
User Manual Section 9
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

10.6 Configuring EPXEIP001

The RSTi-EP EtherNet/IP network adapter EPXEIP001 is configured as
Generic Ethernet Module under EtherNet/IP Scanner using the EDS
(Electronic data sheet) file. Network Adapter and I/O Module parameters
are configured using the Network Adapter Web Server interface. IP
address of the network adapter and connection parameters should be
configured. Refer to section, Process data EPXEIP001 for more details.

Adapter is configured under EtherNet/IP Scanner as Generic Ethernet

module using the input assembly 101 and output assembly 102. The
input and output data size for this assembly are 2 bytes.

For adding the RSTi-EP Input and/or Output modules to the Network
adapter, calculation of total data size for input and output is required.

For Example- To add RSTi-EP Digital Input module EP-125F (Process

Input Data size-2 Bytes) and RSTi-EP Digital Output module EP-225F
(Process output Data size-2 Bytes), so the total input data size will be 4
bytes ( 2 bytes (for adapter) + 2 bytes (EP-125F)) and total output data size
will be 4 bytes (2 bytes (for adapter) + 2 bytes (EP-225F)). So total input
data size will be 4 bytes and total output data size will be 4 bytes for input
assembly 101 and Output assembly 102 respectively.

To add more input and output modules, only the input and output size
have to be incremented depending upon the data size of the module.
Refer to section, data width of RSTi-EP IO modules under the EPXEIP001
EtherNet/IP adapter. Download the configuration and Read/Write the
Cyclic data (in defined Registers).

In order to Read/Write the Acyclic data (device data, Diagnostics data,

parameter data) , use the Programing block (if engineering Tool
supports). To configure programming block, typically you need to provide
below parameters depending upon the data read/write.

a) Message Type
b) Service Type
c) Class
d) Instance
e) Attribute
f) Source Element
g) Source Length
h) Destination Element
i) Communication Path

Commissioning 515
User Manual Section 9
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

10.7 Configuring EP-5324

Updating the Firmware

Refer to section, ‘’Updating Firmware’’ & Update the firmware of the

Network Adapter and that of the EP-5324 modules to the latest version.

Integrating & Parameterizing IO-Link port with PAC Machine Edition

The IO-Link ports are parameterized using the IO-Link master parameters. An
overview of all parameters is presented in section “Modifiable Parameters of EP-
5324”.

1. Profinet EPXPNS001/EPXPNS101

1. To configure EPXPNS001/EPXPNS101 with latest GSDML file refer

to Section, “Configuring EPXPNS001/EPXPNS101”

2. Double-click the EP-5324 module in the module list.

3. The EP-5324 window opens.

4. Select the General Parameters tab

The list of all parameters is displayed.

Figure 348: Editing module parameters

5. Click the parameter that you would like to change and

6. Set the “Operating mode” parameter of the IO-Link port to the

value “IO-Link”.

7. Set each of the parameters “Process data length input “and

“Process data length output” to the value “auto”.

Commissioning 516
User Manual Section 9
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

8. Use this method to edit all of the parameters that you want to
change.

9. Click OK to save the settings.

10. All settings only take effect once they have been

11. loaded into the component.

2. Profibus EPXPBS001

1. To configure EPXPBS001 with latest GSD file refer to Section,

“Configuring EPXPBS001”

2. Double-click the EPXPBS001 module in the module list. The

EPXPBS001 window opens.

3. Double-click the EP-5324 module in the module list.

4. Click on the Properties

5. Select the General Parameters tab

The list of all parameters is displayed.

Figure 349: Editing module parameters

6. Click the parameter that you would like to change.

7. Set the “Operating mode” parameter of the IO-Link port to the

value “IO-Link”.

8. Set each of the parameters “Process data length input” and

“Process data length output” to the value “auto”.

9. Use this method to edit all of the parameters that you want to
change.

10. Click OK to save the settings. All settings only take effect once
they have been loaded into the component.

Commissioning 517
User Manual Section 9
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

3. Modbus EPXMBE001/EPXMBE101

1. To configure the Modbus network adapter, Refer to Section,

“Configuring EPXMBS001/EPXMBE101”

2. Use the RSTi-EP web server to parameterize IO-Link ports.

3. Start the RSTi-EP web server with default IP address

192.168.1.202.

4. Open the component view of the IO-Link module by clicking on

the IO-Link module in the station overview.

5. Under parameters, click the channel whose parameters you

want to change.

The parameters are displayed.

Figure 350: IO-Link master Parameterization

6. Set the “Operating mode” parameter of the IO-Link port to the

value “IO-Link”.

7. Set the “Process data length input” parameter of the IO-Link

port to the value “auto (default)”.

8. Set the “Process data length output” parameter of the IO-Link

port to the value “auto (default)”.

9. Change the other parameters as required.

10. Each change is labelled with a green symbol until it has been
applied. All changes are only saved when you click Apply
changes.
Commissioning 518
User Manual Section 9
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

11. All changes are reset when you click Restore.

12. Click Apply changes.

13. The changes are then transferred to the adapter and the green
labels are removed. Alternatively, you can parameterize IO-Link
ports using acyclic write accesses

Integrating IO-Link master with EtherCAT using TwinCAT

1. To configure the EtherCAT network adapter Refer to Section,

“Configuring EtherCAT”

2. Open an existing project.

3. Establish an online connection to the EtherCAT master.

4. Right-click I/O.

5. Select Scan... and follow the configuration wizard.

6. All the EtherCAT slaves available on the network are added.

Parameterizing IO-Link port with TwinCAT

The IO-Link ports are parameterized via the parameters of the IO-Link master.
An overview of all parameters can be found in section, ‘’’Modifiable
Parameters of EP-5324’.
1. In the Editor window of the adapter, switch to Startup.

2. The current parameter setting is displayed. You can edit the

parameter setting.

3. Double-click the parameter you want to edit.

The Edit dialogue box will be opened.

4. Change the value in the Data text field.

5. Click OK.

6. Use this method to edit all of the parameters that you would
like to change. All settings only take effect once they have been
loaded into the component.

EtherNet/IP EPXEIP001

To configure the EtherNet/IP network adapter Refer to Section, “Configuring

EPXEIP001”

Commissioning 519
User Manual Section 9
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Parameterizing the IO-Link port with Ethernet/IP

First set the process data length of the IO-Link master to the required value.
Setting the process data length requires that the adapter is restarted. In doing
so, the parameter settings that were not saved in the adapter via the “Save
module parameters”
function is reset to the factory settings. The IO-Link ports are parameterized
via the parameters of the IO-Link master. An overview of all parameters can
be
found in section, ‘’Modifiable Parameters of EP-5324’’. Use the RSTi-EP web
server to parameterize IO-Link ports.
1. Start the RSTi-EP web server.

2. Open the component view of the IO-Link module by clicking on

the IO-Link module in the station overview.

3. Under parameters, click the channel whose parameters you

want to change. The parameters are displayed.

Figure 351: IO-Link master Parameterization

4. Set the “Operating mode” parameter of the IO-Link port to the

value “IO-Link”.

5. Set the “Process data length input” parameter of the IO-Link

port to the value “auto (default)”.

6. Set the “Process data length output” parameter of the IO-Link

port to the value “auto (default)”.

7. Change the other parameters as required.

Commissioning 520
User Manual Section 9
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

8. Each change is labelled with a green symbol until it has been

applied. All changes are only saved when you click Apply
changes.

9. All changes are reset when you click Restore.

10. Click Apply changes.

11. The changes are then transferred to the adapter and the
green labels are removed. Alternatively, you can parameterize
IO-Link ports using acyclic write accesses

10.8 Configuring CPE200 Series

10.8.1 Add the CPE200 Series

To add a new CPE200 Series controller, right-click on the Project Title and select:

1. Add Target > Controller > PACSystems RSTi-EP.

Figure 352: Adding a CPE200 Series Controller

2. Expand the Target node and expand Hardware Configuration to

reveal the CPE200 Series controller. (The default is EPXCPE240.)

Commissioning 521
User Manual Section 9
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

10.8.2 Replace the EPXCPE200

To change the controller:

1. Right-click on the controller name and click Replace Module… to

reveal the product catalog.

Figure 353: Replace Module

2. Select the new CPU and click OK.

Figure 354: Add New CPU

10.8.3 Delete the EPXCPE200

To delete the controller:

1. Right-click on the controller icon and select Delete Module.

Commissioning 522
User Manual Section 9
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

10.8.4 Configure the Parameters for EPXCPE200

To configure the controller’s parameters:

1. Right-click on the controller icon and select Configure.

Figure 355: Configure

Each of the configurable (and non-configurable) parameters can be viewed and

updated from this screen. The settings tab will provide most of the primary setup
functionality, while the other tabs will give the user greater control over the
communication and performance of the controller.

Figure 356: CPE200 Series Parameters

Commissioning 523
User Manual Section 9
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Note: The bottom of the Settings tab also has an Expansion Bus area with five configurable
options, including Outputs Default State, Diagnostic Alarm Logging, Expansion Bus
Status, Length, I/O Scan Set.
For detailed descriptions of each parameter and a list of accepted values,
click on the parameter name. Details will be displayed in the Companion
tab (Figure 357).

Figure 357: Companion tab

Commissioning 524
User Manual Section 10
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Section 11: Web Server

With the web server, the RSTi-EP station is displayed on a connected PC.
This allows you to carry out the following tasks prior to the complete
commissioning of a system:

• Simulate the operation of the RSTi-EP station

• Query the status of each network adapter and module

• Display the parameters of network adapters and modules, and change

them for testing purposes

• Access diagnostic information

• Operate the station in Force mode for testing purposes

With default settings each network adapter type offers web server access
only via USB port. For that multiple IP addresses can be parametrized.
Please note that this is a virtual DHCP server. To avoid network disruption
no other network device with the same subnet ID should be connected to
the PC.

Using network adapters for Ethernet-based fieldbus systems –

recognizable by the RJ45 socket – web server access can be realized
alternatively via Ethernet. This function must be enabled in the web
server in the network adapters parameter setup. Any changes of the IP
settings on either USB port or Ethernet port will not be effective until
restarting the network adapter.

WARNING
• Explosion Risk - Prior to starting work, make sure that there is not a potentially explosive
atmosphere.

• In Force mode, the system may be manipulated to such an extent that can result in life-
threatening personal injury and damage to materials.

• Only use Force mode if you are very familiar with the connected system and know at all
times the consequences that your actions will have.

CAUTION
Prior to connecting a PC, make sure that the RSTi-EP station has been grounded properly

Web Server 525

User Manual Section 10
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

11.1 Requirements
The RSTi-EP station must be completely assembled and supplied with
voltage.

11.1.1 Operating System

The RSTi-EP web server is designed for operation with the Windows ® XP,
Windows 7 and Windows Vista operating systems.

11.1.2 Browser

The RSTi-EP web server can be used with the following browsers:

• Microsoft® Internet Explorer® 9, 10, 11

• Mozilla® Firefox 4.0 or higher

• Opera10.61 or higher

• Google® Chrome 9.0 or higher

11.1.3 Device Drivers

Download the driver files usb8023.inf and rndis.inf from

https://www.emerson.com/Industrial-Automation-Controls/support

Installing the USB Driver

Note: The USB port acts as a virtual DHCP Server. Please do not assign any IP addresses to
other devices within the same subnet of the USB port (default 192.168.1.0),
otherwise network failure might occur.
To install the USB driver

1. Start up your PC.

2. Connect the PC to the network adapter using a USB cable (Type

USB-A to USB Micro-B). The USB socket at the network adapter
can be found behind the service flap.

Note: The USB cable can be a maximum of 2m in length. Extension cables must not be
used.
3. You receive the message that Windows cannot install the driver.

4. To install the driver manually, open the Device Manager. Under

Other devices the interface RSTi-EP NA displays.

Web Server 526

User Manual Section 10
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Figure 358: Device Manager

5. Right-click on the interface and select Update driver software.

You will be asked if you would like to search for the driver
software.

6. Select Search for driver software on this computer.

Figure 359: Update Driver Software Search

7. Click Browse and select the folder in which you have stored both
.inf files and click Next.

Note: There could be a security inquiry because the driver software does not have a
signature. Nonetheless, continue with the installation.
8. Follow the rest of the steps in the installation routine until the
successful installation is confirmed. The driver displays in the
Device Manager under Network adapters.
Web Server 527
User Manual Section 10
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Figure 360: Network Adapters

9. Close the Device Manager.

11.2 Starting the Web Server

Note: Simultaneous access via both interfaces to the webserver is not possible. Make sure
that there is no USB connection before you start the access via Ethernet.
To start the web server

1. Open an internet browser.

2. In the address line, enter the IP address of the network adapter

(default: 192.168.1.202).

11.2.1 Activating the Ethernet Socket

To activate the Ethernet socket

1. In the station view, click on the Network Adapter and then

Parameters.

3. Scroll down the list of parameters until you see the entry Web
server via Ethernet.

4. Change the setting to enabled.

Figure 361: Ethernet Parameters

Web Server 528

User Manual Section 10
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

2. Enter the required IP address and Subnet mask.

3. Click Apply Changes to confirm.

4. Close the network adapter window and restart the network

adapter. You can review the IP address in Windows Control
Panel, in the Network and Sharing Center.

5. Under Unidentified network, click on LAN connection. The LAN

Connection Status window displays.

Figure 362: LAN Connection Status

6. Click Details. The Network Connection Details window opens.

Figure 363: Network Connection Details

Web Server 529

User Manual Section 10
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

The IP address of the virtual LAN port (the USB connection) displays
under IPv4 DHCP server. The standard IP address is 192.168.1.202. The
web server is started.

11.3 Setting up Registration Data and Password

Protection
If you do not set up a user, all web server functions are always accessible
to every user . As soon as you set up a user with password protection,
users without a user ID will only have read-only rights. Write access is
blocked for them, which means that they cannot do the following:

• Change parameters

• Operate the station in Force mode

• Load firmware updates

To set up registration data and password protection

1. When you start up the web server for the first time, you are
prompted to enter the registration data. The Change login data
window opens automatically. You can access this window later via
the Network Adapter status dialog box (refer to Section,

Web Server 530

User Manual Section 10
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

2. Displaying and Editing the Network Adapter Status):

Figure 364: Change Login Data

3. Enter the User name and Password.

4. To change the login data, enter the new user name and the new
password twice, click on change login.

5. To deactivate password protection, do not enter any new data,

but instead, click on No login information.

6. If you have changed the login data, you must log back in again
afterwards.

Note: A forgotten password can be overwritten if the network adapter gets restarted with
no modules connected.
The status data can be displayed at all time, regardless of the state of the field bus
connection. Setup changes can only be stored while the field bus is not active.

After registration, the connected station is displayed with all its

active modules.

Figure 365: Display of the Connected Station following Registration

Web Server 531

User Manual Section 10
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Note: The web server only registers modules that can communicate on the system bus.
Empty slot modules and other passive modules (for example, AUX modules) are not
registered by the web server and therefor are not displayed in the screen view.
Because of this, the numbering of the modules in the web server view may deviate
from the count in the actual station.

Web Server 532

User Manual Section 10
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

11.4 Navigation and Operating Instructions

11.4.1 Setting the Language

When the program is started, the web server attempts to start with the
language set in your web browser. If this language is not supported by
the web server, the program starts with the English setting.

New language versions are continually being developed and can be later
installed by the user with separate language files.

To change the language: Click Language and select the desired setting.

Figure 366: Changing Language

11.4.2 Zooming the View In/Out

To zoom the view in/out: Click on the magnifying glass symbol to zoom
in or out on the station's display.

Figure 367: Zoom Buttons

Web Server 533

User Manual Section 10
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

11.4.3 Quick View (Tooltip) of Detailed Values

To display detailed channel values: Move the cursor slowly over the
station without clicking. The detailed values of the channel on top of
which the cursor is presently situated display.

Figure 368: Tool-Tip Display of Module Details

Web Server 534

User Manual Section 10
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

11.5 Displaying and Editing the Network

Adapter Status
Note: These functions are only accessible when Force mode is not activated.
The status data can be displayed at all times, regardless of the state of
the field bus connection. Setup changes can only be stored while the field
bus is not active.

To display and edit the network adapter status: Click on the network
adapter. The Network Adapter Status dialog box displays.

Figure 369: Network Adapter Status Dialog

From here you can:

• Reset the network adapter to factory default settings

• Change the registration data and set up password protection to limit

access to the web server

• Reset any changes that have been made

• Access the network adapter parameters

• Access the network adapter's datasheet (link to product designation)

Web Server 535

User Manual Section 10
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

11.5.1 Resetting the Web Server

You can undo all the changes that have been made since the last time
that the web server was started.

Note: After a reset, the network adapter is restarted. All data not protected against power
failure is reset.
To reset the web server

1. Click on the network adapter.

2. From the Network Adapter Status dialog box, click Reset.

Figure 370: Reset Dialog Box

11.5.2 Resetting the Network Adapter to Factory Settings

This function allows you to set up the web server in its original state as at
delivery. This also includes registration data and password protection.

To reset the network adapter to factory settings

1. Click on the network adapter.

2. From the Network Adapter Status dialog box, click Factory

settings.

Figure 371: Restore Factory Settings

3. Click Yes to confirm that you would like to reset the network
adapter to the factory settings.

Web Server 536

User Manual Section 10
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

11.5.3 Accessing Network Adapter Parameters

To access network adapter parameters: Navigate to the Network

Adapter Status dialog box and click Parameters. All the parameters are
then listed in a new window.

Figure 372: Network Adapter Parameters

For parameters that can be edited, enter the changes in the entry fields
or select alternative settings from a dropdown menu.

Web Server 537

User Manual Section 10
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

11.6 Displaying Module Data and Editing

Parameters
Note: These functions are only accessible when Force mode is not activated.
Parameters can only be written when the field bus is not active.
To display module data and edit parameters

1. Click on a module to view its properties. A window with all status

values displays.

Figure 373: Module Data and Parameters

2. To open the datasheet for the module, click on the link next to
Name.

3. To change individual parameters, click Parameters.

Figure 374: Changing Individual Parameters

Web Server 538

User Manual Section 10
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

For parameters that can be edited, alternative settings are offered in a

dropdown menu:

1. Select the parameter you would like to change.

2. Select the desired setting from the dropdown menu.

3. Click Apply Changes to save all changes and close the window.

4. Click Close to close the Module Status window.

11.7 Displaying Node Information

You can use this menu to display all of the Process data and Diagnostic
data.

Figure 375: Displaying Node Information

11.7.1 Displaying Process Data

To display process data

1. From the menu bar, click Node Info and then Process Data. The
overview displays all modules and channels along with their
current values; these values are continuously updated.

Figure 376: Process Data

2. Click Close to leave this view.

Web Server 539
User Manual Section 10
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

11.7.2 Displaying Diagnostic Data

To display diagnostic data

1. From the menu bar, click Node Info and then Diagnostic data. In
the overview, all of the modules that have diagnostic messages.

Figure 377

2. Click Diagnostic message to view the message.

3. Click Close to leave this view.

11.7.3 Web Server in Force Mode

WARNING
• In Force mode, the system may be manipulated to such an extent that can result in
life-threatening personal injury and damage to materials.

• Only use Force mode if you are very familiar with the connected system and know at
all times the consequences that your actions will have.

Note: If the force mode is activated during an established field bus connection a diagnose
alarm is generated. Depending on parametrized alarm behavior the PLC can
continue to transmit process data and the RSTi-EP station will process them for all
unforced channels. However, forced channels will ignore any process data and
behave according to forced values.
Safety related modules (EP-19xx) cannot be forced.
The force mode allows you to carry out functional tests or preconfigure
the station prior to commissioning, even if sensors have not yet been
connected.

To do so, you must change the operating mode of the web server.

Web Server 540

User Manual Section 10
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

To enable force mode: From the menu bar, click on Force and enable.

Figure 378: Enabling Force Mode

The web server is now in force mode.

Note: When force mode is activated, the screen display changes.

If the USB connection is interrupted, force mode is stopped immediately.

Figure 379: Force Mode Enabled

To force a module: Click on the respective channel.

To accept an individual change: Click Apply changes.

To accept all changes: Click OK.

Web Server 541

User Manual Section 10
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

11.7.4 Open the Detail View of the Station in Force Mode

For a better survey we recommend changing to the detail view. In this

view modules can be fade out and in, which is helpful, especially when
working with larger stations.

To open the detail view in force mode: From the menu bar, click Force
and Node.

Figure 380: Enabling Detail View in Force Mode

All active modules are displayed in the overview. The switchable channels
are provided with a changeover switch.

Web Server 542

User Manual Section 10
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

11.7.5 Filtering the Module View

To view only the modules that you would like to force: Click the Filter
bar.

Figure 381: Filtering Module View

Displayed modules are highlighted in color in the filter bar, while hidden
modules are displayed in white.

Figure 382: Module View Force Mode

To display or hide modules: From the filter bar, click on the module you
would like to display or hide.

11.7.6 Resetting Filters

• To display all modules again: Click Display all.

• To hide all modules: Click Hide all.

Web Server 543

User Manual Section 10
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

11.7.7 Manually Switching Outputs (Forcing)

To switch a channel: Click on the corresponding module in the Node

display.

Figure 383: Manually Switching a Channel

To accept an individual change: Click on Apply changes.

To accept all changes: Click OK.

Web Server 544

User Manual Section 10
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

11.7.8 Modules with Registers

Modules with registers (for example, counter modules and PWM

modules) can be forced individually.

To force individual modules with registers

1. Click on the channel that needs to be forced, enter the required

value, and click Apply Changes.

Figure 384: Manually Forcing Individual Modules with Registers

11.7.9 Ending/Deactivating Forced Operations

• To cancel a forced operation: Click Restore. All of the changes you

made will not have any effect.

• To deactivate Force mode: Click Disable.

Web Server 545

User Manual Section 10
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

11.8 Updating Firmware

Before you can update the firmware, you must download the latest
firmware file for each network adapter and each module from
https://www.emerson.com/Industrial-Automation-Controls/support to
your local PC.

Firmware files for the network adapter have the extension .bsc. For
PROFINET network adapters, for instance, the file might be named
EPXPNS001_.......xyz.bsc.

Firmware files for IO modules have the extension .bsm. For Analog input
modules, for instance, the file might be named EP-3_.......xyz.bsm.

The language files will be in the format NA-….xyz.lng.

Note:
• You can determine for each module separately whether an update shall proceed.

• A firmware update cannot be undone. The old firmware in the network

adapter/module is overwritten.

• Make sure that the power supply is not interrupted while the firmware files are
being loaded

To update firmware

1. Navigate to the web server and click Firmware. The Firmware

window displays.

Figure 385: Firmware Window

2. Click Select firmware, to select a firmware file for the required

module.

3. Select the firmware file from the storage location on your

computer and click Open.
Web Server 546
User Manual Section 10
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Figure 386: Selecting Firmware File

4. Click Update now to carry out a firmware update for individual

modules in the RSTi-EP station.

5. You can also update multiple modules by clicking For Multi

update Click here. Use the relevant firmware file for this
purpose. Once the firmware file has been loaded, the Options
area displays which modules can be updated with this file.

Figure 387: Firmware Multi-Update

6. Click to check or uncheck the boxes so that only those modules that
are to be updated are selected.

7. Once you have called up all the required firmware files and you
have selected the required modules, click Update now.

8. Once the firmware is updated, a Firmware update message box

recommending a restart of the network adapter displays.

Web Server 547

User Manual Section 10
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Figure 388: Firmware Update Restarting Network Adapter

9. Click Reset and restart the network adapter (power reset) to

complete the firmware update

CAUTION
• Ensure that Power supply to the Network adapter is not interrupted during Firmware
upgradation.

• If Power interruption occurs during firmware upgrade, follow the Recovery

Mechanism for RSTi-EP Network adapter.

11.8.1 Recovery Mechanism for RSTi-EP Network adapter:

1. Connect the Network adapter via micro-USB connection to a PC.

2. The Network adapter should identify as a “Mass Storage Device”.

3. Copy the Firmware image (*.bsc) in the root directory of the “Mass
Storage Device”.

4. The Network Adapter will automatically detect a fitting FW file and

start the flashing process (indicated by a blinking).

5. When the LED stops blinking perform a power cycle.

Web Server 548

User Manual Section 10
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

11.9 Web Server About Help

To access web server help: Click About.

Figure 389: About

The program version of the web server is displayed in the help dialog
box.

To open the manual for the RSTi-EP station: Click on the link.

11.9.1 Exporting Log Data, Saving a Service File

In the event of problems and service cases, it may be helpful to save the
current log data for the RSTi-EP station. This data can provide the service
technician with valuable information about the malfunction.

To save a service file

1. Click on Save service file.

2. Select a storage location on your PC for the service file

(logdata.wmi) and click Save.

3. Click Close to close the window

Web Server 549

User Manual Section 11
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Section 12: Replacing Components

12.1 Removing/Replacing the Plug-in Unit

WARNING
Explosion Risk - Prior to starting work, ensure that there is not a potentially explosive
atmosphere.

All work on the RSTi-EP station must be carried out with the power supply disconnected.
Ensure that the place of installation (switch cabinet and such) has been disconnected from
the power supply.

CAUTION
The components in the RSTi-EP series can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge. Ensure
that personnel and work equipment are adequately earthed!

To remove/replace the plug-in unit

1. Unlock the connector frame.

Figure 390: Unlocking the Connector Frame

2. Swivel the plug-in unit with the cabling towards the front by 90°.

Replacing Components 550

User Manual Section 11
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Note: The plug-in unit can only be removed in this 90° position
3. Remove the plug-in unit by pulling it out in a straight, downward
motion.

Figure 391: Removing the Plug-in Unit

12.2 Replacing the Electronic Unit

WARNING
Explosion Risk - Prior to starting work, ensure that there is not a potentially explosive
atmosphere.

CAUTION
• Pulling or inserting of an electronic unit might bring the inputs and outputs of all
other modules temporarily into an undefined condition

• If the machine/system might be put into a dangerous state as a result of the removal
of an electronic unit, a replacement can only be made once the machine/system is
disconnected from the power.

• Only one electronic unit may be removed from the station at any one time. If multiple
electronic units have to be replaced, this must be done consecutively.

• The components in the RSTi-EP series can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge.

Ensure that personnel and work equipment are adequately grounded.

Replacing Components 551

User Manual Section 11
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Note: Once an electronic unit is removed from a power-feed module, the inputs and
outputs of the subsequent modules are no longer supplied with power. For EP-
19xx modules, this is equivalent to triggering the connected safety equipment .
An electronic unit can be replaced while the system is powered up (no
load) and in operation without having to disassemble the module. The
station remains functional, and there is no need to disconnect and
restart it. When replacing the electronic unit, the wiring remains intact.

Operation and Behavior of I/O Module During Hot-

swap
Behavior of Module behavior on hot
Module behavior on hot swap:
Outputs on Field swap:
Behavior like field bus error
Bus Error Continue data exchange
The I/O modules continue All of the outputs will be OFF until the
All outputs off data exchange on hot swap module is replaced as per the
of the module. original configuration.
All of the outputs will be replaced by
The I/O modules continue the substitute value as per the
Enable substitute
data exchange on hot swap configuration until the module is
value
of the module. replaced as per the original
configuration.
All the outputs will be retained prior
The I/O modules continue
to hot removal of the module until
Hold last value data exchange on hot swap
the module is replaced as per the
of the module.
original configuration.

CAUTION
• During hot insertion or removal of IO modules, a transient Loss of Power up-to 500ms
may occur on the network adapter and IO modules, during which all the outputs may
drop to zero. This system behavior should be verified against the application
requirements before hot insertion or removal of the IO module is done.

• Data shift occurs when a module is pulled out from a node where similar modules are
sequentially configured. For example, when there are 6 RTD modules EP-3704
configured sequentially in the node, on hot-removing the module from the slot 4
would case the data from the module 5 and 6 to be reflected on variables configured
for slot 4 and 5 with ‘Loss of Module’ reported for slot 6

Replacing Components 552

User Manual Section 11
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

To replace the electronic unit

1. Unlock the connector frame and open it as far as possible (at least
to an angle of 90°).

Figure 392: Unlock the Connector Frame

Figure 393: Open to at least 90°

2. Lift the electronic unit removal lever and swivel it forwards by 90°.

Replacing Components 553

User Manual Section 11
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Figure 394: Lift the Electronic Unit Removal Lever

Figure 395: Swivel the Electronic Unit Removal Lever Forward

3. Using the removal lever, pull the electronic unit forwards and out.
Replacing Components 554
User Manual Section 11
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Figure 396: Use the Removal Lever to Pull the Electronic Unit
Forward

4. If the existing electronic unit was coded, insert the new coding pins
into the coding seats located in the base module.

5. Hold the new electronic unit by the top and the bottom, and
carefully slide it into the base module.

Note: The electronic units are functionally coded so that they can only be inserted into the appropriate
base module. If it is not possible to insert a new electronic unit into the base module, check if the
combination is correct and if there is a possible mix-up.

Figure 397: Slide the Electronic Unit into Position

6. Fold the connector frame back so that it closes and clicks into place.

Replacing Components 555

User Manual Section 11
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

7. In case of replacement during operation: Pay attention to the

collective error LED (SF) on the field-bus network adapter. Only
when this doesn't light up any more, the new electronic unit has
been recognized and the next electronic unit is able to be pulled
out.

12.3 Replacing an I/O Module

WARNING
• Explosion Risk - Prior to starting work, ensure that there is not a potentially
explosive atmosphere.

• Dangerous contact voltage - Prior to removing modules, the RSTi-EP station must be
completely de-energized (supply of the field bus network adapter and all external
feed-in). Ensure that the place of installation (switch cabinet and so forth) has been
disconnected from the power supply.

CAUTION
The components in the RSTi-EP series can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge. Ensure
that personnel and work equipment are adequately earthed!

To remove an individual module from the station, all modules to the

right of it and the termination kit must be moved by approximately 5 cm
(2 in).

Replacing Components 556

User Manual Section 11
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

To replace an I/O module

1. Unfasten the mounting screw on the right-hand end bracket.

2. Slide the end bracket and end plate approximately 5 cm (2 in) to

the right or remove both parts from the DIN rail.

3. Open the release lever on the module furthest to the right.

Figure 398: Release the Lever on Rightmost Module

4. Slide the module on the DIN rail approximately 5 cm (2 in) to the

right, push it onto the DIN rail and click the release lever into place.

5. Repeat the previous step for all other modules which are located
to the right of the module being replaced: release, slide to the
right, and click in once again.

6. Remove the plug-in unit of the module to be replaced as described

in Section12.1, Removing/Replacing the Plug-in Unit.

7. Open the release lever for the module to be removed.

Figure 399: Open the Release Lever for the Module to be Removed

Replacing Components 557

User Manual Section 11
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

8. Slide the module to the right and remove it from the DIN rail.

9. Position the new module with its closed release lever on the DIN
rail so that it clicks audibly into place.

10. Slide the module to the left until it audibly clicks into place against
the neighboring module.

11. Return the modules that were slid away back into their original
position: slide the modules to the left so that they audibly click
into place on the new module.

Note: After all the modules have been moved, make sure that they have all been clicked
securely into place on the DIN rail.
12. Reassemble the end plate and end bracket.

13. Place the plug-in unit in a 90° position from below into the
guideway of the base module on the new module.

Note: The plug-in unit can only be inserted in this 90° position.

Figure 400: Swivel the Plug-in Unit Upwards

14. Swivel the plug-in unit upwards until the connector frame clicks
into place.

Replacing Components 558

User Manual Section 11
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

12.4 Removing/Replacing Connectors

WARNING
Explosion Risk - Prior to starting work, ensure that there is not a potentially explosive
atmosphere.

CAUTION
• In the event of the machine/system being put into a dangerous state as a result of
the removal of a connector, a replacement can only be made once the
machine/system is disconnected from the power.

• Risk of contact fire - Remove connectors only while they are load current free.

• The components in the RSTi-EP series can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge.

Ensure that personnel and work equipment are adequately earthed!

To remove/replace connectors

1. Open the connector frame and flip the plug-in unit open far
enough that you can reach the connector.

Figure 401: Access the Connector

Replacing Components 559

User Manual Section 11
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

2. Press both sides of the connector together so that it can be slid

off the frame.

Figure 402: Remove the Connector

3. Remove the connector by pulling it off.

4. Insert the new connector in the frame so that it audibly clicks

into place.

5. Swivel the plug-in unit upwards until the connector frame clicks
into place

Replacing Components 560

User Manual Section 11
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

12.5 Removing/Replacing Cables

WARNING
Explosion Risk - Prior to starting work, ensure that there is not a potentially explosive
atmosphere.

DANGER
Dangerous contact voltage - Prior to removing modules, the RSTi-EP station must be
completely de-energized (supply of the field bus network adapter and all external feed-in).
Ensure that the place of installation (switch cabinet and so forth) has been disconnected
from the power supply.

CAUTION
• In the event of the machine/system being put into a dangerous state as a result of
the removal of cables, a replacement can only be made once the machine/system is
disconnected from the power.

• The components in the RSTi-EP series can be destroyed by electrostatic discharge.

Ensure that personnel and work equipment are adequately grounded.

• The components in the RSTi-EP series can be destroyed by overcurrent. Potentials

may only be disconnected either simultaneously or in the correct order. At the
fieldbus network adapter as well as at power-feed modules, always disconnect the
24 V supply (red pusher) first, before you disconnect the GND potential (blue
pusher).

Replacing Components 561

User Manual Section 11
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

To Remove / Replace Cable

1. Using a 3-mm (1/8th in) screwdriver, push in the pusher adjacent

to the cable to be removed and pull the wire out.

Figure 403: Depress Release Mechanism with Screwdriver

2. Release the pusher.

3. Insert the new wire into the opening. To do so, you do not need
to push in the pusher.

Replacing Components 562

User Manual Section 12
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Section 13: Disassembly and Disposal

13.1 Disassembling the RSTi-EP Station

WARNING
Explosion Risk - Prior to starting work, ensure that there is not a potentially explosive
atmosphere.

CAUTION
Dangerous contact voltage - Carry out all disassembly work on the RSTi-EP station only
when the power supply is disconnected. Ensure that the place of installation (switch
cabinet and such) has been disconnected from the power supply.

To disassemble the RSTi-EP station

1. Remove all cables and lines.

2. Remove the end bracket marker (if present).

3. Unfasten the mounting screw on the right-hand end bracket.

4. Slide the end bracket with the end plate to the right and remove
both from the DIN rail.

You can now disassemble the modules and the field-bus network
adapter either individually or in groups of three to four modules.

5. Press all the release levers of a module group towards the

mounting plate so that they click into place.

6. Slide the module group to the right and remove it from the DIN
rail.

7. Repeat the above procedure for all remaining modules/ module

groups.

8. To disassemble the field-bus network adapter, open both release

levers and remove it from the DIN rail.

9. Unfasten the mounting screw on the left-hand end bracket and

remove it.

10. Observe the instructions for proper disposal.

Disassembly and Disposal 563

User Manual Section 12
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

13.2 Disposing of the RSTi-EP Station

Note: Products in the RSTi-EP series are subject to WEEE (EU Directive 2002/96 EC), which
regulates the collection and recycling of electrical and electronic equipment.
Ensure that disassembled products are properly disposed of.
When all RSTi-EP products reach the end of their life cycle, you can
return them to Emerson, and we will arrange for their proper disposal.
This also applies to countries outside the European Union.

To dispose of the RSTi-EP station: Pack the products properly and send
them to your responsible distributor.

You can find the address of your respective country representative in the
annex and at https://www.emerson.com/Industrial-Automation-
Controls/support.

Disassembly and Disposal 564

User Manual Section 13
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Section 14: LED Indicators and

Troubleshooting
Note: In the event of a malfunction occurring on a RSTi-EP station, carry out the following
recommended measures. If the malfunction cannot be fixed, send the affected
product to Emerson(refer to the section, General Contact Information). Emerson
does not assume any liability If the base or electronic module has been tampered
with.

14.1 Fieldbus Network Adapters

14.1.1 EPXPBS001

Indicator LED Status Recommended action

Green: Supply voltage applied
Have the network adapter repaired or
Off, and the status LED of the
replaced
module is green: Defective
Power LED PWR The internal fuse was triggered due to an
network adapter
overload
Off, and the module status LED is
Check the supply voltage
off: Improper supply voltage
Red: Configuration error, or error Check that the GSD file is up-to-date
in the network adapter, or error Check if the configured station setup
in a module, or there is a new matches the actual setup
System Fault SF
diagnostic message Read the diagnostic message with the web
Red flashing: Station in Force server or an engineering tool and determine
mode which further actions to take
Red: No connection to the Check the fieldbus cable and the PLC
fieldbus configuration
Red flashing: Configuration
Check the fieldbus parameters and the PLC
error, no connection to the
Bus Fault BF configuration
control unit, or error in the
Check that the GSD file is up-to-date
parameter set or slave address
Check if the configured station setup
error or firmware update is
matches the actual setup
running

LED Indicators and Troubleshooting 565

User Manual Section 13
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Indicator LED Status Recommended action

Check that the modules have been snapped
Maintenance Yellow: Error on the system bus into place properly
MT
Required or the fieldbus Check fieldbus wiring
Check the fieldbus connection parameters
Green: Supply voltage for input
3.1
current path > 18Vdc
Input supply
Red: Supply voltage for input
voltage 3.2 Check the supply voltage
current path < 18Vdc
3.4 Red: Internal fuse defective Replace the network adapter
Green: Supply voltage for output
4.1
current path > 18Vdc
Output supply
Red: Supply voltage for output
voltage 4.2 Check the supply voltage
current path < 18Vdc
4.4 Red: Internal fuse defective Replace the network adapter

14.1.2 EPXPNS001/EPXPNS101

Indicator LED Status Recommended action

Green: Supply voltage
Have the network adapter repaired or
Off, and the status LED of the
replaced
module is green: Defective
Power LED PWR The internal fuse was triggered due to an
network adapter
overload
Off, and the module status LED is
Check the supply voltage
off: Improper supply voltage
Red: Configuration error, or error Check that the GSDML file is up-to-date
in the network adapter, or error in Check if the configured station setup matches
a module, or there is a new the actual setup
System Fault SF
diagnostic message Read the diagnostic message with the web
Red flashing: Station in Force server or an engineering tool and determine
mode which further actions to take
Red: No connection to the Check the fieldbus cable and the PLC
fieldbus configuration
Check the fieldbus parameters and the PLC
Bus Fault BF Red flashing: Configuration error, configuration
no connection to the control unit, Check that the GSD file is up-to-date
or error in the parameter set Check if the configured station setup matches
the actual setup
Maintenance Check that the modules have been snapped
MT Yellow: Error on the system bus
Required into place properly
Green: Connection established
Connection Link 1 between port 1 of the network
adapter and another field device
LED Indicators and Troubleshooting 566
User Manual Section 13
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Indicator LED Status Recommended action

Check the connection to the next participant
Off: No connection
and the fieldbus cable
Yellow flashing: Data being
Active ACT 1
exchanged on port 1
Green: Connection established
between port 2 of the network
Connection Link 2 adapter and another field device
Check the connection to the next participant
Off: No connection
and the fieldbus cable
Yellow flashing: Data being
Active ACT 2
exchanged on port 2
Green: Supply voltage for input
3.1
current path > 18Vdc
Input supply
Red: Supply voltage for input
voltage 3.2 Check the supply voltage
current path < 18Vdc
3.4 Red: Internal fuse defective Replace the network adapter
Green: Supply voltage for output
4.1
Output current path > 18Vdc
supply Red: Supply voltage for output
4.2 Check the supply voltage
voltage current path < 18Vdc
4.4 Red: Internal fuse defective Replace the network adapter

14.1.3 EPXETC001

Indicator LED Status Recommended action

Green: Supply voltage
Have the network adapter repaired or
Off, and the status LED of the
replaced
module is green: Defective
Power LED PWR The internal fuse was triggered due to an
network adapter
overload
Off, and the module status LED
Check the supply voltage
is off: Improper supply voltage
Red: Configuration error, or Check that the ESI configuration file is up-
error in the network adapter, to-date
or error in a module, or there is Check if the configured station setup
System Fault SF a new diagnostic message matches the actual setup
Read the diagnostic message with the
Red flashing: Station in Force
web server or an engineering tool and
mode
determine which further actions to take

LED Indicators and Troubleshooting 567

User Manual Section 13
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Indicator LED Status Recommended action

Red: No connection to the Check the fieldbus cable and the PLC
fieldbus configuration
Check the fieldbus parameters and the
Red flashing: Configuration
Bus Fault BF PLC configuration
error, no connection to the
Check that the ESI file is up-to-date
control unit, or error in the
Check if the configured station setup
parameter set
matches the actual setup
Maintenance Yellow: Error on the system Check that the modules have been
MT
Required bus snapped into place properly
Off: No connection Check the fieldbus cable
Green: Connection established
between port 1 of the network
Connection/Active L/A IN adapter and another field
device
Green flashing: Data being
exchanged on port 1
Off: No connection Check the fieldbus cable
Green: Connection established
between port 2 of the network
Connection/Active L/A OUT adapter and another field
device
Green flashing: Data being
exchanged on port 2
Off: Network adapter in INIT
state
Green flashing: Network
adapter in PRE-OPERATIONAL
Network Adapter state
RUN
State Green lights up briefly:
Network adapter in SAFE
OPERATIONAL state
Green: Network adapter in
OPERATIONAL state
Red: Critical error in the
network adapter
Check that the ESI file is up-to-date. Check
Red lights up briefly: Error in
if the configured station setup matches
the network adapter
the actual setup
application
Internal Fault ERROR Check that the network adapter firmware
Red lights up briefly twice:
is up-to-date. Compare the master cycle
Output of the sync manager
time with the time set up on watchdog
watchdog out-of-date
timer
Red flashing: Configuration
error
LED Indicators and Troubleshooting 568
User Manual Section 13
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Indicator LED Status Recommended action

Green: Supply voltage for input
3.1
current path > 18Vdc
Input Supply
Red: Supply voltage for input
Voltage 3.2 Check the supply voltage
current path < 18Vdc
3.4 Red: Internal fuse defective Replace the network adapter
Green: Supply voltage for
4.1
output current path > 18Vdc
Output Supply
Red: Supply voltage for output
Voltage 4.2 Check the supply voltage
current path < 18Vdc
4.4 Red: Internal fuse defective Replace the network adapter

14.1.4 EPXMBE001/EPXMBE101

Indicator LED Status Recommended action

Green: Supply voltage
Have the network adapter repaired or
Off, and the status LED of the
replaced
module is green: Defective network
Power LED PWR The internal fuse was triggered due to
adapter
an overload
Off, and the module status LED is
Check the supply voltage
off: Improper supply voltage
Red: Configuration error, or error Check if the configured station setup
in the network adapter, or error in matches the actual setup
a module, or there is a new Read the diagnostic message with the
System Fault SF
diagnostic message web server or an engineering tool and
Red flashing: Station in Force determine which further actions to
mode take
Check the fieldbus cable and the PLC
Red: No connection to the fieldbus
configuration
Check if the configured station setup
Bus Fault BF Red flashing: Configuration error,
matches the actual setup
no connection to the control unit,
Check the master configuration and
or error in the parameter set
try again to establish connection
Check that the modules have been
snapped into place properly
Maintenance Yellow: Error on the system bus or
MT Check the fieldbus cabling
Required the fieldbus
Check the fieldbus connection
parameters

LED Indicators and Troubleshooting 569

User Manual Section 13
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Indicator LED Status Recommended action

Green: Connection established
between port 1 of the network
adapter and another field device
Connection/Active L/A X1 Green flashing: Data being
exchanged on port 1
Check the connection to the next
Off: No connection
participant and the fieldbus cable
Green: Connection established
between port 2 of the network
adapter and another field device
Connection/Active L/A X2 Green flashing: Data being
exchanged on port 2
Check the connection to the next
Off: No connection
participant and the fieldbus cable
Green: Supply voltage for input
3.1
current path > 18Vdc
Input Supply
Red: Supply voltage for input
Voltage 3.2 Check the supply voltage
current path < 18Vdc
3.4 Red: Internal fuse defective Replace the network adapter
Green: Supply voltage for output
4.1
current path > 18Vdc
Output Supply
Red: Supply voltage for output
Voltage 4.2 Check the supply voltage
current path < 18Vdc
4.4 Red: Internal fuse defective Replace the network adapter

14.1.5 EPXEIP001

Indicator LED Status Recommended action

Green: Supply voltage
Have the network adapter repaired or
Off, and the status LED of the
replaced
module is green: Defective network
Power LED PWR The internal fuse was triggered due to
adapter
an overload
Off, and the module status LED is
Check the supply voltage
off: Improper supply voltage
Red: Configuration error, or error Check if the configured station setup
in the network adapter, or error in matches the actual setup
a module, or there is a new Read the diagnostic message with the
System Fault SF
diagnostic message web server or an engineering tool and
Red flashing: Station in Force determine which further actions to
mode take

LED Indicators and Troubleshooting 570

User Manual Section 13
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Indicator LED Status Recommended action

Check the fieldbus cable and the PLC
Red: No connection to the fieldbus
configuration
Check if the configured station setup
Bus Fault BF Red flashing: Configuration error,
matches the actual setup
no connection to the control unit,
Check the master configuration and
or error in the parameter set
try again to establish connection
Check that the modules have been
snapped into place properly
Maintenance Yellow: Error on the system bus or
MT Check the fieldbus cabling
Required the fieldbus
Check the fieldbus connection
parameters
Green: Connection established
between port 1 of the network
adapter and another field device
Connection/Active L/A X1 Green flashing: Data being
exchanged on port 1
Check the connection to the next
Off: No connection
participant and the fieldbus cable
Green: Connection established
between port 2 of the network
adapter and another field device
Connection/Active L/A X2 Green flashing: Data being
exchanged on port 2
Check the connection to the next
Off: No connection
participant and the fieldbus cable
Check if the configured station setup
Red: More than one module does not matches the actual setup
fit the start-up configuration (or no
Check the master configuration and
fieldbus connection)
try again to establish connection
Check if the configured station setup
Red flashing: One module does not fit
the start-up configuration or there is a matches the actual setup
Module Status MS diagnostic report on at least one Check the master configuration and
module
try again to establish connection
Green: Ready for operation
Green flashing: Network Adapter not Check the adapter configuration and
configured try again to establish connection
Red/Green flashing: LED Self-test
during Start
Off: At least one EtherNet/IP
connection is established
Network Status NS
Yellow: Address conflict or no IP Assign address via web server or
address configured DHCP/BootP

LED Indicators and Troubleshooting 571

User Manual Section 13
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Indicator LED Status Recommended action

Yellow flashing (1 Hz): valid IP address Check the network cable
but no Ether-Net/IP connection
established Check the PLC configuration

Yellow flashing (4 Hz): Connection Check the network cable

timeout on and exclusive owner Check the PLC configuration
Green: Supply voltage for input
3.1
current path > 18Vdc
Input Supply
Red: Supply voltage for input
Voltage 3.2 Check the supply voltage
current path < 18Vdc
3.4 Red: Internal fuse defective Replace the network adapter
Green: Supply voltage for output
4.1
current path > 18Vdc
Output Supply
Red: Supply voltage for output
Voltage 4.2 Check the supply voltage
current path < 18Vdc
4.4 Red: Internal fuse defective Replace the network adapter

LED Indicators and Troubleshooting 572

User Manual Section 13
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

14.2 I/O Modules

Module LED Status Recommended action
Digital Input Modules
EP-1214 Status LED Red: — Check that the module
EP-1218 — Error in supply voltage has been snapped into
EP-1318 at input current path place properly
EP-125F Communication error Check the supply
— —
EP-12F4 on the system bus voltage
EP-1804
— There is a new
EP-153F
diagnostic message

Digital Output Modules

EP-2214 Status LED Red: — Check that the module
EP-2614 — Error in supply voltage has been snapped into
EP-2634 at output current path place properly
EP-2218 — Communication error — Check the supply
EP-225F on the system bus voltage
EP-291F
— Eliminate the

— There is a new overload/short-circuit

diagnostic message

— At least one output

overloaded

Digital Relay Output Modules

EP-2714 Status LED Red: — Check that the module
EP-2814 — Error in supply voltage has been snapped into
at output current path place properly

— Communication error — Check the supply

on the system bus voltage

— There is a new
diagnostic message

Digital Counter SSI and Serial Communication Modules

EP-5111 Status LED Red: — Check that the module
EP-5112 — Error in supply voltage has been snapped into
EP-5212 at input current path place properly
EP-5261 — Communication error — Check the supply
EP-5311 on the system bus voltage

— There is a new
diagnostic message

LED Indicators and Troubleshooting 573

User Manual Section 13
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Module LED Status Recommended action

Pulse-width Modulation Modules
EP-5422 Status LED Red: — Check that the module
EP-5442 — Error in supply voltage has been snapped into
at output current path place properly

— Communication error — Check the supply

on the system bus voltage

— There is a new — Eliminate the

diagnostic message overload/short-circuit

— At least one output

overloaded

IO-Link Communication Module

EP-5324 Statue LED Red:

— Error in supply voltage — Check that the module
at input current path has been snapped into
— Communication error place properly
on the system bus — Check the supply
— Configuration error voltage

— There is a new — Check the

diagnostic message Configuration

Channel LED Yellow:

1.1 ... 4.1 — Status COM1 ... COM 4

1.2 ... 4.2 Red: — Check the supply

— Error IO-Link port 1 ... voltage
Error IO-Link port 4 — Check the Configuarion

1.4 ... 4.4 Yellow:

— Status DI 0

Analog Input Modules

EP-3124 Status LED Red: — Check that the module
EP-3164 — Error in supply voltage has been snapped into
EP-3264 at input current path place properly
EP-3664 — Communication error — Check the supply
on the system bus voltage

— There is a new — Check channel error

diagnostic message Check firmware, update
—
— Channel error firmware as necessary

— Firmware error

LED Indicators and Troubleshooting 574

User Manual Section 13
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Module LED Status Recommended action

Status LED off and all other LEDs red: — Check the bus network
Error in the bus network adapter adapter supply voltage
power supply
Channel LED Red: — Check the input signal
1.1-4.1 — Input signal outside — Check the bus network
permissible range adapter supply voltage
System bus cannot be accessed (for
example, caused by interruption of
the bus network adapter power
supply)
EP-3368 Status LED Red: — Check that the module
EP-3468 Error in supply voltage at output has been snapped into
current path place properly
Communication error on the system — Check the supply
bus voltage
There is a new diagnostic message
— Eliminate the
At least one output overloaded
overload/short-circuit

Channel LED Red: — Check channel error

1.1-8.1 — Channel error
EP-3804 Status LED Red: — Check that the module
EP-3704 — Error in supply voltage has been snapped into
at input current path place properly

— Communication error — Check the supply

on the system bus voltage

— There is a new — Check channel error

diagnostic message — Check firmware, update
— Channel error firmware as necessary

— Firmware error

Status LED off and all other LEDs red: — Check the bus network
Error in the bus network adapter adapter supply voltage
power supply
Channel LED Red: — Check the input signal,
1.1-4.1 — Input signal outside the cabling and, if
permissible range necessary, the sensor

— Line break for external cold-

junction compensation.
— Cold-junction
compensation error (EP- — Check the bus network

3804 only) adapter supply voltage

LED Indicators and Troubleshooting 575

User Manual Section 13
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Module LED Status Recommended action

— System bus cannot be
accessed (for example,
caused by interruption
of the bus network
adapter power supply)

Status LED Red: — Check that the module

— Error in supply voltage has been snapped into
at input current path place properly

— Communication error — Check the supply

on the system bus voltage

— There is a new
diagnostic message

Channel LED Yellow

2.2 — Voltage >70 V at L1

2.3 — Nominal input current (1 — Check the feed-in

A / 5 A) or current

parameterised limit — Check the

exceeded parameterised limit

— Check whether the

EP-1813 connections (1 A and 5

A) have been mixed up

— Install a shunt

2.4 Red: — Check the Voltage

— Nominal input voltage — Chek the parameterised
(300 V) or limit
parameterised limit
exceeded

Channel LED Yellow

3.2 Voltage >70 V at L2
3.3 Red: — Check the feed-in
Nominal input current (1 A/5 A) or current
parameterised limit exceeded — Check the
parameterised limit

— Check whether the

connections (1 A and 5
A) have been mixed up

Install a shunt

3.4 Red: — Check the Voltage

LED Indicators and Troubleshooting 576

User Manual Section 13
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Module LED Status Recommended action

Nominal input voltage (300 V) or — Chek the parameterised
parameterised limit exceeded limit

Channel LED Yellow

4.2 Voltage >70 V at L3
4.3 Red: — Check the feed-in
Nominal input current (1 A/5 A) or current
parameterised limit exceeded — Check the
parameterised limit

— Check whether the

connections (1 A and 5
A) have been mixed up

Install a shunt

4.4 Red: — Check the Voltage

Nominal input voltage (300 V) or — Chek the parameterised
parameterised limit exceeded limit

Analog output modules

EP-4164 Status LED Red: — Check that the module
EP-4264 — Error in supply voltage has been snapped into

— Communication error place properly

— Channel error
— Check the supply
voltage

— Check the channel error

Status LED off and all other LEDs red: — – Check the bus
Error in the bus network adapter network adapter supply
power supply voltage

Channel LED Red: — Check the connected

1.1-4.1 — Overload in voltage load, check the cabling,
mode — Check the bus network
— Broken line in current adapter supply voltage
mode

— System bus cannot be

accessed (for example,
caused by interruption
of the bus network
adapter power supply)

LED Indicators and Troubleshooting 577

User Manual Section 13
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Module LED Status Recommended action

Power modules
EP-7631 Status LED Red: — Check that the module
– Channel error or communication has been snapped into
error on the system bus, or there is an place properly
error in the supply voltage — Check the channel
error, check the supply
voltage

3.2 Red: — Check supply voltage of

Supply voltage of the feed in plug feed in plug
< 18Vdc
3.4 Red: — Replace module
Damage of internal fuse
EP-7641 Status LED Red: — Check that the module
Channel error or communication error has been snapped into
on the system bus, or there is an error place properly
in the supply voltage — Check the channel
error, check the supply
voltage

3.2 Red: — Check supply voltage of

Supply voltage of the feed in plug feed in plug
< 18Vdc
3.4 Red: — Replace module
Damage of internal fuse
Potential distribution modules
EP-711F Status LED Red: — Check that the module
EP-710F Error in supply voltage of the input has been snapped into
path place properly

— Check the supply

voltage

EP-751F Status LED Red: — Check that the module

EP-750F Error in supply voltage of the input has been snapped into
path place properly

— Check the supply

voltage

EP-700F Status LED Off: — Check that the module

No supply voltage has been snapped into
place properly

LED Indicators and Troubleshooting 578

User Manual Section 13
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Module LED Status Recommended action

Safety modules
EP-1901 Status LED Red: — Check that the module
— Module has not been has been snapped into
snapped properly place properly

— Error in the supply — Check the supply

voltage voltage

— Channel error — check +24 V input

current path

— Check voltage on plug

4.3; in case of cascading
0 V might be properly,
therefore this is not an
error

— Check channel error

— Overload at the OSSD — Remove cross

output level connection at OSSD

— External feed-in — Measure voltage at

recognized from field OSSD pin (4.3) vs. GND
side (4.4).

— If a voltage is present,
check the wiring.

— Attention: safety
hazard! Shut down the
system and prevent it
from switching on
again.

— Internal error detected — Module might have

switched off caused by
overtemperature; check
the temperature inside
the switch cabinet

— Perform a cold start

within 24 hours

— If the error has not

been fixed, send the
module to Emerson for
a technical
examination.

— Interruption in one of — Check safety circuit for

the two safety loops of a interruptions if an

LED Indicators and Troubleshooting 579

User Manual Section 13
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Module LED Status Recommended action

safety circuit for at least interruption of the
3 seconds. safety channel is not
part of the application.

— Cross connection — Check safety circuit for

between the safety cross connections.
loops for at least 3
seconds.

1.1 Off: Safety circuit 1 interrupted — Check safety circuit 1

Yellow: Safety circuit 1 OK
4.2 Off: OSSD not active —
Yellow: OSSD active, 24Vdc at output
4.3 Green: Feed-in voltage in valid range —

EP-1902 Status LED — Red: — Check that the module

EP-1922 — Module has not been has been snapped into

snapped properly place properly

— Error in the supply — Check the supply

voltage voltage

— Channel error — check +24 V input

current path

— Check voltage on plug

4.3; in case of cascading
0 V might be properly,
therefore this is not an
error

— Check channel error

— Overload at the OSSD — – Remove cross

output level connection at OSSD

— External feed-in — Measure voltage at

recognized from field OSSD pin (4.3) vs. GND
side (4.4).

— If a voltage is present,
check the wiring.

— Attention: safety
hazard! Shut down the
system and prevent it
from switching on
again.

— Internal error detected — Module might have

switched off caused by
overtemperature; check
LED Indicators and Troubleshooting 580
User Manual Section 13
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Module LED Status Recommended action

the temperature inside
the switch cabinet

— Perform a cold start

within 24 hours

— If the error has not

been fixed, send the
module to Emersonfor
a technical
examination.

— Interruption in one of — Check safety circuit for

the two safety loops of a interruptions if an
safety circuit for at least interruption of the
3 seconds. safety channel is not
part of the application.

— Cross connection — Check safety circuit for

between the safety cross connections.
loops for at least 3
seconds.

1.1 Off: Safety circuit 1 interrupted — Check safety circuit 1

Yellow: Safety circuit 1 OK
1.2 Off: Safety circuit 2 interrupted — Check safety circuit 2
Yellow: Safety circuit 2 OK
4.1 Off: SS1 not active
(DELAY only) Yellow: SS1 active, 24Vdc at output
4.2 Off: OSSD not active
Yellow: OSSD active, 24Vdc at output
4.3 Green: Feed-in voltage in valid range

LED Indicators and Troubleshooting 581

User Manual Section 14
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Section 15: IO-Link Device Configuration

15.1 RSTi-EP IO-Link configurator
You can use the RSTi-EP IO-Link configurator to configure the IO-Link
devices (sensors & actuators). You can carry out the following functions
for test purposes, during commissioning or service work:

• Create & export IO-Link device configurations.

• Parameterize IO-Link devices through Network adapter using online
mode.
• Read out identification data, process data and diagnoses of IO-Link
devices.
IO-Link configurator tool is connected with RSTi-EP Network adapter via
micro-USB connection as shown below-

Figure 404: IO-Link Configurator tool connection with Network adapter

Note: To use the online parameterization feature of the IO-Link Configurator Tool, the ‘HTTP
Settings’ parameter in the Network adapter webserver should be configured to “HTTP &
HTTPS Concurrent operation” or “HTTP only”. After configuration and parametrizing the IO-
Link device, you can disconnect the tool with Network adapter. You should change the ‘HTTP
settings’ to “HTTPS only” once the configuration and parametrization is done. Refer to Secure
Deployment Guide for detailed information.

IO-Link Device Configuration 582

User Manual Section 14
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

15.2 Installing RSTi-EP IO-Link configurator

Download the RSTi-EP IO-Link configurator from Emerson website.

Navigate the download folder

Double click EMERSON-IOLink-Device-Configurator-Setup_x.x.x.exe

Follow the installation wizard.

Once successfully installed, you can start the IO-Link Configurator. The
starting page is displayed.

Note: The license conditions are displayed when the program is started for the first time.
Read and confirm the license conditions.

15.3 Operating the RSTi-EP IO-Link configurator

15.3.1 Displaying the starting page

The starting page is displayed below each time you start the Emerson
RSTi-EP IO-Link Configurator.

Figure 405: Starting page

Note: The IO-Link Configurator tool does not support the Offline feature. In offline
feature, you can generate the .Json file based on the configuration but you cannot
import the configuration into the IO-Link communication Module-EP-5324.

IO-Link Device Configuration 583

User Manual Section 14
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

On the starting page you can connect to the Network adapter using the
USB Address, User Name & Password of the Network adapter, create a new
project or open an existing project.

In the menu bar, click the house icon.

Figure 406: Calling up the starting page

IO-Link Device Configuration 584

User Manual Section 14
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

15.3.2 IO-Link port overview

Figure 407: IO-Link port overview (online mode)

1. Displaying the starting page

2. Selecting IO-Link communication module in the device tree
3. Opening the IODD finder in the standard browser
4. Displaying diagnoses
5. Displaying IO-Link device parameters
6. Deleting IODD from IO-Link port
7. Adding IODD to IO-Link port
8. Changing the language
9. Separating the connection to the network adapter
10. Displaying the process data
11. Detecting the connected IO-Link device
12. Deactivating the IO-Link port
13. Displaying the context menu

IO-Link Device Configuration 585

User Manual Section 14
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

15.3.3 IO-Link device detailed view

Figure 408: IO-Link device detailed view

1. Displaying the starting page

2. Switching to section

3. Displaying details (mouse-over)

4. Editing the parameters

5. Changing the language

6. Connecting to the network adapter/separate the

connection to the network adapter

7. Reading all the parameters in the section (only in online

mode)

8. Writing all the changed parameters in the section (only in

online mode)

9. Reading individual parameters (only in online mode)

10. Reading current parameter value (only in online mode)

11. Writing individual parameters (only in online mode)

12. Displaying the context menu

IO-Link Device Configuration 586

User Manual Section 14
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

15.3.4 Displaying the context menu

What functions are displayed in the context menu depends on the

current program context. The functions relate to the current displayed
view in the program. Click ☰ to display the context menu.

Figure 409: Displaying the context menu

15.3.5 Creating a new project

A project incorporates the configuration of an IO-Link communication module.

1. Navigate to the IO-Link port overview.
2. Open the context menu.
3. Click Create new.
4. If you wish to discard the existing project, click OK.
A new project is created.

15.3.6 Saving a project

A project incorporates the configuration of an IO-Link communication module.

1. Open the context menu.
2. Click Save as.
3. Select a storage location and a file name and click Save.
The project is saved with the file ending “.emr ”.

After you have saved a project for the first time, you can save the
changes by clicking on Save.

15.3.7 Opening a project

1. Navigate to the IO-Link port overview.

2. Open the context menu.
3. Click Open.
4. Select the required project (.emr) and click Open.
5. If you wish to discard the existing project, click OK.
The project is opened.

IO-Link Device Configuration 587

User Manual Section 14
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

15.3.8 Changing the language

You can change the language of the user interface.

1. In the menu bar, click Language.
2. Select the required language.
The language is changed immediately.

Note: Some of the texts from the IODDs of the IO-Link device manufacturer, such as
parameter names, may not have been transferred.

15.3.9 Opening the IODDfinder in the standard browser

Your computer must be connected to the Internet. To add an IO-Link

device to a configuration, you will need the relevant IODD from the
manufacturer. You can search for and download IODDs using the
IODDfinder.

1. Navigate to the IO-Link port overview.

2. Click the link to the IODDfinder.
3. The IODDfinder is opened in your standard browser.
4. Search for the required IODDs and load the files onto your computer.

Figure 410: Link to the IODDfinder

IO-Link Device Configuration 588

User Manual Section 14
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

15.4 Editing IO-Link device configurations

15.4.1 Assigning the IO-Link device to an IO-Link port

1. Navigate to the IO-Link port overview.

2. For the empty IO-Link port, click Select IODD, in order to add the IODD.
3. Select the IODD of the IO-Link device (.zip, .xml).
4. Click Open.
Some IODDs describe several device types. In this case, a dialogue window is
displayed containing the available device types.

Figure 411: Adding an IODD

5. Select the required device type from the list.

6. Click OK.

15.4.2 Changing the device type

Some IODDs describe several device types. You can change the device type.

Figure 412: Changing the device type

1. Navigate to the IO-Link port overview.

2. For the IO-Link port for which you want to change the device type, click
Change type (double arrow icon).
A dialogue window is displayed containing the available device
types.
3. Select the required device type from the list.
4. Click OK.

IO-Link Device Configuration 589

User Manual Section 14
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

15.4.3 Removing the IO-Link device assignment

Figure 413: Deleting the IO-Link device

1. Navigate to the IO-Link port overview.

2. For the IO-Link port for which you want to remove the assignment, click
Remove (bin icon).
The assignment of the IO-Link device to this IO-Link port is removed.

15.4.4 Editing the IO-Link device parameters

Figure 414: Parameterizing the IO-Link device

1. Navigate to the IO-Link port overview.

2. For the IO-Link device whose data you want to edit, click Edit (cog icon).
3. The detailed view of the IO-Link device is opened.

Note: The parameters of an IO-Link device are defined by its manufacturer.

Observe the manufacturer ‘s documentation.

IO-Link Device Configuration 590

User Manual Section 14
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

15.4.5 Determining the process data length

You can determine the process data length that is required for the IO-
Link device configuration.

Figure 415: Determining the process data length

1. Navigate to the IO-Link port overview.

2. Read the process data length of the current configuration.
− PD IN: Length of the input data in bytes
− PD OUT: Length of the output data in bytes

15.4.6 Finding & rectifying parameter errors

Faulty parameterized IO-Link devices are indicated by a red frame around the IO-
Link port concerned.

Figure 416: Faulty parameterized IO-Link device

1. Open the detailed view of the IO-Link device.

Figure 417: Jumping to faulty parameter value

2. Click Scroll to error in order to jump to the next faulty parameter entry.
The faulty entry is indicated by a red frame. A note regarding error diagnosis is
displayed.
IO-Link Device Configuration 591
User Manual Section 14
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Figure 418: Faulty parameter entry

3. Correct the faulty entry.

4. Repeat the procedure until all errors have been rectified.

15.5 Editing IO-Link device configurations

online

CAUTION
Manipulation of the control unit

During commissioning, the system may be manipulated to such an extent that this can
result in risks to life and material damage.

• Make sure that system components cannot start up unintentionally!

15.5.1 Connecting to the Network adapter

The RSTi-EP system must be completely assembled and supplied with voltage. The
computer must be connected to the RSTi-EP system via USB or Ethernet.

Note: If you access a network adapter via RSTi-EP IO-Link configurator and RSTi-EP web
server simultaneously, this may result in access conflicts.
1. Click Connect on the starting page. Alternatively, click Connect in the
menu bar.
2. Enter the IP address of the network adapter.
3. Click OK.
4. You may be requested to enter your user name and password.
You need the same user name and the same password that you use when logging
in for the RSTi-EP web server of this network adapter.
5. Enter the user name and password.
The online mode of the IO-Link Configurator is started. The network adapter with
connected EP-5324 modules is displayed in the device tree.
6. Click in the device tree on the IO-Link communication module whose
configuration you want to edit.
7. The IO-Link port overview of the IO-Link communication module is
displayed.

IO-Link Device Configuration 592

User Manual Section 14
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

15.5.2 Activating an IO-Link port

You must be connected to the network adapter.

Figure 419: Activating an IO-Link port

1. In the device tree, switch to the required IO-Link communication module.

2. For the IO-Link port that you want to activate, click Activate (play icon).
The “Operating mode” parameter of the IO-Link port concerned is set to the value
“IO-Link”. The supply voltage of the IO-Link port is switched on. The connected IO-
Link device sends and receives process data.

15.5.3 Deactivating an IO-Link Port

You must be connected to the network adapter.

Figure 420: Deactivating an IO-Link Port

1. In the device tree, switch to the required IO-Link communication module.

2. For the IO-Link port that you want to deactivate, click Deactivate (stop
icon).
The “Operating mode” parameter of the IO-Link port concerned is set to the value
“Deactivated”. The supply voltage of the IO-Link port is switched off.

IO-Link Device Configuration 593

User Manual Section 14
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

15.5.4 Identifying a connected IO-Link device

The IO-Link port to which the IO-Link device is connected must be

activated.

Figure 421: Identifying an IO-Link device

The configurator can determine the identification data of a connected IO-Link

device. You can use the identification data to find the corresponding IODD or to
check whether you have assigned the correct IO-Link device to the IO-Link port.
1. In the device tree, switch to the required IO-Link communication module.
2. For the IO-Link port to which the IO-Link device is connected, click
Identify (magnifying class icon).
The Configurator calls up the identification data of the IO-Link device and
illustrates it in the IO-Link port overview.
If you have already assigned an IO-Link device to this IO-Link port, the
Configurator compares the identification data of the IODD with the identification
data of the connected IO-Link device. Matches are highlighted in green.
Deviations are highlighted in red.

15.5.5 Downloading IODDs for a connected IO-Link device

The connected IO-Link device must be identified by the IO-Link

Configurator. Your computer must be connected to the Internet.

Figure 422: Downloading IODDs

1. In the device tree, switch to the required IO-Link communication module.

2. For the empty IO-Link port, click Download IODD to which you want to
add the IO-Link device.
The IODDfinder is opened in your standard browser.
3. Search for the required IODDs and load the files onto your computer.

IO-Link Device Configuration 594

User Manual Section 14
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

15.5.6 Reading out IO-Link device parameters

The IO-Link device must be assigned to the IO-Link port. The connected
IO-Link device must be identified by the IO-Link Configurator. The IODD
must match the connected

IO-Link device. Depending on the number of parameters to be read and

the capacity utilization of the adapter, it may take a while until all data is
read.

1. In the device tree, switch to the required IO-Link communication module.

2. For the IO-Link device whose data you want to edit, click Edit (cog icon).
The detailed view of the IO-Link device is opened.

Figure 423: Updating the parameters

If you want to update an individual parameter:

• Click the update icon next to the entry.

If you want to update all parameters in a section:

• Click the update icon next to the section heading.

If you want to update all parameters of an IO-Link device:

1. Open the context menu.

2. Click Read all parameters.

IO-Link Device Configuration 595

User Manual Section 14
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

15.5.7 Writing IO-Link device parameters

An IO-Link device must be assigned to the IO-Link port. The connected

IO-Link device must be identified by the IO-Link Configurator. The IODD
must match the connected IO-Link device. Depending on the number of
parameters to be written and the capacity utilization of the adapter, it
may take a while until all data is written.

1. In the device tree, switch to the required IO-Link communication module.

2. For the IO-Link device whose data you want to edit, click Edit (cog icon).
The detailed view of the IO-Link device is opened.

Figure 424: Writing Parameters

If you want to write an individual parameter:

1. Edit the parameter.
2. Click the apply icon next to the entry.
If you want to update all edited parameters in a section:
1. Edit the parameters in this section.
2. Click the apply icon next to the section heading.
If you want to write all edited parameters of an IO-Link device:
1. Edit the parameters of the IO-Link device.
2. Open the context menu in the detailed view of this IO-Link device.
3. Click Apply configuration.
If you want to write all edited parameters of all IO-Link device to one IO-Link
communication module:
1. Edit the parameters of the IO-Link devices.
2. Navigate to the IO-Link port overview of the IO-Link communication
module.
3. Open the context menu in the IO-Link port overview of the IO-Link
communication module.
4. Click Apply configuration.

IO-Link Device Configuration 596

User Manual Section 14
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

15.5.8 Displaying process data

You must be connected to the Network adapter.

1. In the device tree, switch to the required IO-Link communication module.
2. In the IO-Link port overview, click Show process data.
A dialogue box opens. In the Mapping Information section, the process data
mapping for the individual IO-Link ports is displayed in process data tables.
In the IN section, the entire process input data telegram including current values
is mapped in bytes. In the OUT section, the entire process output data telegram
including current values is mapped in bytes. The values are illustrated in
hexadecimal format.
3. Click Ⅱ to pause the process data update.
4. Click ▶ to continue the process data update.
5. Click Close to close the dialogue box.

15.5.9 Displaying diagnosis

You must be connected to the network adapter.

1. In the device tree, switch to the required IO-Link communication module.
2. In the IO-Link port overview, click Diagnoses.
A dialogue box opens. The available diagnoses are displayed
in a table.
3. Click the bin icon to delete a diagnosis.
4. Click the bin icon in the header to delete all diagnoses

IO-Link Device Configuration 597

User Manual Section 15
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Section 16: Accessories and Replacement

Parts
16.1 Accessories
Order No. Designation Purpose
EP-8100 Swivel marker Pivoting holder for module markers
EP-8101 Paper labels for Can be printed with laser printers
swivel markers
EP-8301 Termination kit Set with two end brackets and one end plate
EP-8360 HD-Plug Plug for HD-modules (8 pieces per package)
EP-8400 Plug Kit Generic This part is a plug-in-unit which consist of a Connector Frame and
Connectors. [standard Emerson blue color]. This can be used as
replacement part or can be used to facilitate custom wire harness creation
before arriving at the installation site. This is an orderable part# which
comes as a pack of 30 units per box. This Plug Kit is a generic accessory for
all RSTi-EP IO modules.
EP-8150 Swap-in- This marker can be used with plotters or permanent marker to help
Module Marker customers identify slice number, function, etc. Securely clips onto module at
top and/or bottom.

16.2 Replacement Parts

Figure 425: Identification of Replacement Parts

Accessories and Replacement Parts 598

User Manual Section 15
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

16.2.1 Replacement Parts for Network Adapters

Network Adapter/ Order No.

EPXPBS001
EPXPNS001
EPXPNS101
EPXMBE001
EPXMBE101
EPXETC001
EPXEIP001

16.2.2 Replacement Parts for Modules

Module/Order No. Base Module Module/Order No. Base Module

EP-1214 EP-8300 EP-3164 EP-8300
EP-1218 EP-8300 EP-3264 EP-8300
EP-1318 EP-8300 EP-3664 EP-8300
EP-125F EP-8300 EP-3124 EP-8300
EP-12F4 EP-8300 EP-3368 EP-8300
EP-153F EP-8300 EP-3468 EP-8300
EP-1804 EP-8300 EP-4164 EP-8300
EP-2214 EP-8300 EP-4264 EP-8300
EP-2614 EP-8300 EP-3704 EP-8300
EP-2634 EP-8300 EP-3804 EP-8300
EP-2218 EP-8300 EP-1813 EP-8300
EP-225F EP-8300 EP-7631 EP-8631
EP-2814 EP-8300 EP-7641 EP-8641
EP-2714 EP-8300 EP-1901 EP-8300
EP-291F EP-8300 EP-1902 EP-8300
EP-5111 EP-8300 EP-1922 EP-8300
EP-5112 EP-8300 EP-711F EP-8300
EP-5212 EP-8300 EP-751F EP-8300
EP-5261 EP-8300 EP-700F EP-8300
EP-5311 EP-8300 EP-710F EP-8300
EP-5422 EP-8300 EP-750F EP-8300
EP-5422 EP-8300 EP-8310 EP-8300
EP-5324 EP-8300

Note: For PACSystemsTM EPXCPE205/210/215/220/240 and EPSCPE100/CPE115 Standalone Controller details,

refer GFK-2222 & Quick start guide Manual.

Accessories and Replacement Parts 599

User Manual Appendix A
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Appendix A: Decimal & Hexadecimal

Conversion Table

Decimal & Hexadecimal Conversion Table 600

User Manual Appendix B
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Appendix B: Marine Certification Table

These product revisions are updated to be usable in Marine application and have
Marine certification from specified agencies.

B.1 CPE200 Series CPUs

Catalog Description DNV-GL LR ABS BV
PACSystems RSTi-EP Backplane
EPXCPE205 Controller, 2xRJ45 1Gbps Ethernet, 1xRS- √ √ √ √
232 Serial, 0.5MB User Memory
PACSystems RSTi-EP Backplane
EPXCPE210 Controller, 3xRJ45 1Gbps Ethernet, 1xRS- √ √ √ √
232 Serial, 1.0MB User Memory
PACSystems RSTi-EP Backplane
EPXCPE215 Controller, 3xRJ45 1Gbps Ethernet, 1xRS- √ √ √ √
232 Serial, 1.5MB User Memory
PACSystems RSTi-EP Backplane
EPXCPE220 Controller, 3xRJ45 1Gbps Ethernet, 1xRS- √ √ √ √
232 Serial, 2.0MB User Memory
PACSystems RSTi-EP Backplane
EPXCPE240 Controller, 3xRJ45 1Gbps Ethernet, 1xRS- √ √ √ √
232 Serial, 4.0MB User Memory

B.2 Network Adaptors

Catalog Description DNV-GL LR
PROFINET IRT NETWORK ADAPTER,
EPXPNS001-ABAD √ √
2 CU PORTS
PROFINET IRT NETWORK ADAPTER,
EPXPNS101-AAAA √ √
2 CU PORTS -System Redundancy support
EPXETC001-ABAD EtherCAT Network Adapter, 2 CU PORTS √ √
MODBUS TCP NETWORK ADAPTER,
EPXMBE101-ABAD √ √
2 CU PORTS [DUAL LAN]

Marine Certification Table 601

User Manual Appendix B
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

B.3 Digital Input Modules

Catalog Description DNV-GL LR
EP-1218-C IN 8 PTS, POS LOGIC, 24 Vdc, 2-Wire √ √
EP-125F-C IN 16 PTS, POS LOGIC, 24 Vdc, 1-Wire √ √
EP-1318-C IN 8 PTS, POS LOGIC, 24 Vdc, 3-Wire √ √
EP-1214-C IN 4 PTS, POS LOGIC, 24 Vdc √ √
EP-12F4-B IN 4 PTS, POS LOGIC, 24 Vdc, Time Stamp √ √
EP-1804-B IN 4 PTS, 110-230Vac, Isolated √ √

B.4 Digital Output Modules

Catalog Description DNV-GL LR
EP-2214-C OUT 4 PTS, POS LOGIC, 0.5A, 24 Vdc √ √
EP-2614-C OUT 4 PTS, POS LOGIC, 2A,24 Vdc √ √
EP-2634-B OUT, 4 PTS, POS/NEG LOGIC, 2 A, 24 Vdc √ √
EP-2814-B OUT, 4 PTS, POS LOGIC, 1A, 230Vac √ √
EP-2218-C OUT, 8 PTS, POS LOGIC, 0.5 A, 24 Vdc √ √
EP-225F-C OUT, 16 PTS, POS LOGIC, 0.5 A, 24 Vdc √ √
EP-2714-B RLY OUT, 4 PTS, 6A, 24 - 220 Vdc/Vac √ √

B.5 Analog Input Modules

Catalog Description DNV-GL LR
EP-3124-BC ANALOG IN, 4 CH, VOLT/CURR, 12 BITS √ √
EP-3164-BC ANALOG IN, 4 CH, VOLT/CURR, 16 BITS √ √
EP-3264-BC ANALOG IN, 4 CH, VOLT/CURR, 16 BITS, DIAG √ √
ANALOG IN, 4 CH, VOLT/CURR, 16 BITS, DIAG,
EP-3664-AA √ √
Differential
EP-3704-CC ANALOG IN, 4 CH, RTD 16 BITS, DIAG √ √
EP-3804-CC ANALOG IN, 4 CH, TC 16 BITS, DIAG √ √

B.6 Analog Output Modules

Catalog Description DNV-GL LR
EP-4164-CB ANALOG IN, 4 CH, VOLT/CURR, 12 BITS √ √
EP-4264-CB ANALOG IN, 4 CH, VOLT/CURR, 16 BITS √ √

Marine Certification Table 602

User Manual Appendix B
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

B.7 Digital Counter & Interface Modules

Catalog Description DNV-GL LR
EP-5111-B HSC 1 CH, AB 100 KHZ, DO, 0.5 A, 24 Vdc √ √
EP-5112-B HSC 2 CH, AB 100 KHZ √ √
EP-5212-B FREQ MEASUREMENT, 2 CH, 100 KHZ √ √
EP-5311-B SSI Comm 1 CH √ √

B.8 Potential Distribution Modules for I/O &

Functional Earth
Catalog Description DNV-GL LR
EP-700F-B POWER MOD, 16 CH, FUNC EARTH √ √
EP-710F-B POWER MOD, 16 CH, GND 24 Vdc, IN PATH √ √
EP-711F-B POWER MOD, 16 CH, 24 Vdc DIST, IN PATH √ √
EP-750F-B POWER MOD, 16 CH, GND 24 Vdc, OUT PATH √ √
EP-751F-B POWER MOD, 16 CH, 24 Vdc DIST, OUT PATH √ √
EP-7631-B POWER MOD, 1 CH, 10A, 24 Vdc, IN PATH √ √
EP-7641-B POWER MOD, 1 CH, 10A, 24 Vdc, OUT PATH √ √
EP-8310-B EMPTY SLOT FILLER √ √

Marine Certification Table 603

User Manual Appendix C
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Appendix C: Serial Number Tracking Table

The table below provides a mechanism to derive date code and other information
through the serial number marked on the product.

Example: AO7H21PC7300202

Date: 17 July 2014

Product Family: RSTi-EP

Serial Number Tracking Table 604
User Manual Appendix D
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

Appendix D: Product Certifications and

Installation Guidelines for
Conformance
This appendix describes the compliance markings that appear on PACSystems RSTi-EP
products and the corresponding standards to which the products have been certified. This
appendix also provides installation requirements for conformance to standards and
additional safety guidelines for installing in the European Union.

RSTi-EP Agency Approvals

Agency Standard
Description Comments
or Marking
Certification by Underwriter's Laboratories to
N.A. Safety for Industrial Control
UL508 standard and equivalent CSA C22.2 No 142 -
Equipment
M1987standard
Certification by Underwriter's Laboratories to ISA
N.A. Safety for Hazardous Areas
12.12.01 standard and equivalent CSA C22.2 No
Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D
213-M1987 standard
Self-Declaration in accordance with European
Low Voltage Directive Directives; Refer to Declaration of Conformity
European Safety for Industrial Control found at the Emerson support link located at the
Equipment end of this document for a complete list of
approved products
Certification by Competent Body in accordance
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive with European Directives; Refer to Declaration of
European EMC for Industrial Control Conformity found at the Emerson support link
Equipment located at the end of this document for a complete
list of approved products
Certification in accordance with European
Explosive Atmospheres Directive Directives and Independent 3rd Party Assessment
European Safety for Hazardous Areas Certificate; Refer to Declaration of Conformity
Equipment Group II, Category 3, Gas found at the Emerson support link located at the
Groups A, B, C end of this document for complete list of approved
products

Note: The agency approvals listed above and on the Declaration of Conformities are believed to be
accurate; however, agency approvals for a product should be verified by the marking on the
unit itself.

Product Certifications and Installation Guidelines for Conformance 605

User Manual Appendix D
GFK-2958M Nov 2022

D.1 UL Class 1 Division 2 Hazardous Areas

Requirements
The following statements are required to display for Class I Division 2 Hazardous Locations:

1. EQUIPMENT LABELED WITH REFERENCE TO CLASS I, GROUPS A, B, C, and D, DIV. 2

HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS IS SUITABLE FOR USE IN CLASS I, DIVISION 2, GROUPS A, B, C, D
OR NON–HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS ONLY.

2. WARNING – EXPLOSION HAZARD – SUBSTITUTION OF COMPONENTS MAY IMPAIR

SUITABILITY FOR CLASS I, DIVISION 2.

3. WARNING – EXPLOSION HAZARD – DO NOT DISCONNECT EQUIPMENT UNLESS POWER

HAS BEEN SWITCHED OFF OR THE AREA IS KNOWN TO BE NON–HAZARDOUS.

4. EQUIPMENT SHALL BE INSTALLED INTO AN ENCLOSURE THAT IS ONLY ACCESSIBLE WITH

THE USE OF A TOOL

D.2 ATEX Zone 2 Hazardous Areas Requirements

To maintain compliance with the ATEX Directive, an RSTi-EP system located in a Zone 2 area
(Category 3) must be installed within a protective enclosure meeting the following criteria:

• IP54 or greater
• Mechanical strength to withstand an impact energy of 3.5 Joules
• Only accessible with the use of a tool

D.3 DNVGL Type Approval Requirements

DNVGL Type approval covers only hardware listed on certificate. For system
applications classed by DNVGL where additional hardware is used, system
documentation is to be submitted by system design manufacturer.

For additional information on the DNVGL certificate, please contact us at the Support
link located at the end of this document.

Product Certifications and Installation Guidelines for Conformance 606

General Contact Information
Home link: http://www.emerson.com/industrial-automation-controls

Knowledge Base: https://www.emerson.com/industrial-automation-controls/support

Technical Support
Americas
Phone: 1-888-565-4155
1-434-214-8532 (If toll-free option is unavailable)

Customer Care (Quotes/Orders/Returns): customercare.mas@emerson.com

Technical Support: support.mas@emerson.com

Europe
Phone: +800-4444-8001
+420-225-379-328 (If tollfree option is unavailable)
+39-0362-228-5555 (from Italy - if toll-free 800 option is unavailable or dialing from a mobile
telephone)
Customer Care (Quotes/Orders/Returns): customercare.emea.mas@emerson.com
Technical Support: support.mas.emea@emerson.com

Asia
Phone: +86-400-842-8599
+65-6955-9413 (All other Countries)

Customer Care (Quotes/Orders/Returns): customercare.cn.mas@emerson.com

Technical Support: support.mas.apac@emerson.com

Any escalation request should be sent to: mas.sfdcescalation@emerson.com

Note: If the product is purchased through an Authorized Channel Partner, please contact the seller directly for
any support.
Emerson reserves the right to modify or improve the designs or specifications of the products mentioned in this manual at
any time without notice. Emerson does not assume responsibility for the selection, use or maintenance of any product.
Responsibility for proper selection, use and maintenance of any Emerson product remains solely with the purchaser.

© 2022 Emerson. All rights reserved.

Emerson Terms and Conditions of Sale are available upon request. The Emerson logo is a trademark and service mark of
Emerson Electric Co. All other marks are the property of their respective owners.